Kyocera Mita Km 2530 Km3530 Km 4030 Service Manual

SERVICEMANUAL

Published in Sept ’022DF70760

KM-2530/3530/4030Contains: AD-63

F-2305J-1402MD-15

RA-1ST-14

Fax System (C)Fax System (F)For 4030 ONLY

CAUTION

DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITHTHE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OFUSED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ATTENTION

IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉESCONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety oftheir customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnelare advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautionsdescribed here before engaging in maintenance activities.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger andto prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect

compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliancewith warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION:Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols

The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific pointof attention is shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections toone outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always checkthat it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire orelectric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may causeexplosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by theproper authorities. .............................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as coolas possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this maycause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer isaccidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attentionimmediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtainmedical attention. ..............................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’sinstruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. Ifit is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light maydamage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may causeelectric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they aresafely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can causeabnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other relatedbrochures. .........................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safetymechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other relatedbrochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or otherserious accident. ...............................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of apart, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removingthem; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with acable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................

• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that wereremoved, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgottenconnector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to theinstruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main

switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly tofire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outletimmediately. ......................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other thanthe specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................

1-1-1

2DF

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names and their functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1-3

(1) Copier ............................................................................................................................................. 1-1-3(2) Operation panel .............................................................................................................................. 1-1-4

1-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-51-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-6

(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor and eject motor drive trains) .............................................................. 1-1-6(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train) ................................................................................ 1-1-7

1-2 Handling Precautions1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-11-2-2 Toner .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-11-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-1

1-3 Installation1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1

(1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-11-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................... 1-3-91-3-3 Copier management ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-10

(1) Using the copier management mode ............................................................................................ 1-3-10(2) Setting department management items ........................................................................................ 1-3-11(3) Copy default ................................................................................................................................. 1-3-11(4) Machine default ............................................................................................................................ 1-3-13(5) Report ........................................................................................................................................... 1-3-14(6) Language ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3-14

1-3-4 Installing the key counter (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-151-3-5 Installing the drawer heater (option) ................................................................................................... 1-3-171-3-6 Installing the paper feed desk (option) ............................................................................................... 1-3-181-3-7 Installing the large paper deck (option) .............................................................................................. 1-3-211-3-8 Installing the saddle finisher/switchback unit (option) ........................................................................ 1-3-251-3-9 Installing the sheet-through document holder (option) ....................................................................... 1-3-34

1-3-10 Installing the Facsimile System (option) ............................................................................................. 1-3-351-3-11 Installing the Printing System (option) ................................................................................................ 1-3-431-3-12 Installing the Scanning System (option) ............................................................................................. 1-3-451-3-13 Installing the duplex unit (option) ....................................................................................................... 1-3-481-3-14 Installing the built-in finisher (option) .................................................................................................. 1-3-501-3-15 Installing the job separator (option) .................................................................................................... 1-3-551-3-16 Installing the Network Facsimile System (option) .............................................................................. 1-3-59

1-4 Maintenance Mode1-4-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-1

(1) Executing a maintenance item ....................................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Maintenance mode item list ............................................................................................................ 1-4-2(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ............................................................................................ 1-4-5

1-5 Troubleshooting1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1

(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-3(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-16

1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-27(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-27(2) Self-diagnostic codes ................................................................................................................... 1-5-28

1-1-2

2DF

1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-42(1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-43(2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-44(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-45(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-45(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-45(6) A black line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-46(7) A black line appears laterally. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-46(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................................................................... 1-5-46(9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................................. 1-5-47

(10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................................................................... 1-5-47(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-47(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-48(13) Paper creases. ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-48(14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-48(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................ 1-5-49(16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-49(17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-49(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................................... 1-5-50(19) Image is not square. ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-50

1-5-4 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-51(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. ............................................. 1-5-51(2) The drive motor does not operate (C2000). ................................................................................. 1-5-51(3) The paper feed motor does not operate (C2500). ........................................................................ 1-5-51(4) The eject motor does not operate. ................................................................................................ 1-5-51(5) The upper lift motor does not operate (C1010). ........................................................................... 1-5-52(6) The lower lift motor does not operate (C1020). ............................................................................ 1-5-52(7) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-52(8) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-52(9) Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-52

(10) Cooling fan motor 3 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-52(11) Cooling fan motor 4 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-52(12) Cooling fan motor 5 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-53(13) Cooling fan motor 6 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-53(14) Cooling fan motor 7 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-53(15) Cooling fan motor 8 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-53(16) Cooling fan motor 9 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-53(17) The upper paper feed clutch does not operate. ............................................................................ 1-5-53(18) The lower paper feed clutch does not operate. ............................................................................ 1-5-53(19) Feed clutch 1 does not operate. ................................................................................................... 1-5-53(20) Feed clutch 2 does not operate. ................................................................................................... 1-5-54(21) Feed clutch 3 does not operate. ................................................................................................... 1-5-54(22) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................... 1-5-54(23) The bypass feed clutch does not operate. .................................................................................... 1-5-54(24) The registration clutch does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-54(25) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-54(26) The toner feed solenoid does not operate. ................................................................................... 1-5-54(27) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ 1-5-55(28) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................................................................... 1-5-55(29) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................................................................... 1-5-55(30) The fixing heater does not turn on (C6000). ................................................................................. 1-5-55(31) The fixing heater does not turn off. ............................................................................................... 1-5-55(32) Main charging is not performed. ................................................................................................... 1-5-55(33) Transfer charging is not performed. ............................................................................................. 1-5-55(34) No developing bias is output. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-56(35) The original size is not detected. .................................................................................................. 1-5-56(36) The original size is not detected correctly. ................................................................................... 1-5-56(37) The touch panel keys do not work. ............................................................................................... 1-5-56

1-1-3

2DF

(38) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shownwhen paper is present in the upper drawer. ................................................................................. 1-5-56

(39) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shownwhen paper is present in the lower drawer. .................................................................................. 1-5-56

(40) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shownwhen paper is present on the bypass tray. ................................................................................... 1-5-56

(41) The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed correctly. ................................................ 1-5-56(42) The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed correctly. ................................................. 1-5-57(43) The printing width of the paper on the bypass tray is not detected correctly. ............................... 1-5-57(44) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated

when the main switch is turned on. .............................................................................................. 1-5-57(45) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed

when the front cover and conveying cover are closed. ................................................................ 1-5-58(46) Others. .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5-58

1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-59(1) No primary paper feed. ................................................................................................................. 1-5-59(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................ 1-5-59(3) Skewed paper feed. ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-59(4) The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-59(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................. 1-5-59(6) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-59(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................................................................... 1-5-60(8) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-5-60

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1

(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1(2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2

1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys .................................... 1-6-3(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass separation, bypass papaer feed and

bypass forwarding pulleys .............................................................................................................. 1-6-5(3) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-10

(3-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-10(3-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing..................................... 1-6-11(3-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing........................................................................... 1-6-12(3-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-13(3-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-14

1-6-3 Optical section .................................................................................................................................... 1-6-15(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................................................................... 1-6-15(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................... 1-6-16

(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ............................................................................................... 1-6-16(2-2) Refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................................. 1-6-17

(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .............................................................................. 1-6-20(4) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference) .............................................................. 1-6-22(5) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) .................................................................................. 1-6-23(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference) ................................................................................ 1-6-25(7) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ....................................................................... 1-6-26(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................ 1-6-27(9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ................................... 1-6-28

(10) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-29(11) Adjusting the scanner center line ................................................................................................. 1-6-30(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................ 1-6-31

1-6-4 Drum section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-32(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ............................................................................................ 1-6-32(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit ............................................................................... 1-6-32(3) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies ..................................................... 1-6-33

1-1-4

2DF

1-6-5 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 1-6-34(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit .................................................................................. 1-6-34

1-6-6 Transfer section ................................................................................................................................. 1-6-35(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly ..................................................................... 1-6-35

1-6-7 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-36(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ........................................................................................... 1-6-36(2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ............................................................... 1-6-36(3) Detaching and refitting the press roller ......................................................................................... 1-6-37(4) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S ......................................................................... 1-6-38(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................................................................... 1-6-39(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor .......................................................................... 1-6-40

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................ 1-7-11-7-2 Replacing the backup ROM ................................................................................................................. 1-7-21-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resisters (VR) ............................................................................................... 1-7-3

2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-12-1-2 Main charging section .......................................................................................................................... 2-1-52-1-3 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-7

(1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-8(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-9

2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-12(1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-13(2) Computing the absolute humidity ................................................................................................. 2-1-14(3) Single component developing system ....................................................................................... 2-1-14-1

2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections ....................................................................................................... 2-1-152-1-6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections ............................................................................................... 2-1-172-1-7 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-182-1-8 Eject and switchback sections ........................................................................................................... 2-1-20

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................................................................... 2-2-1

(1) PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors ..................................................................................................................... 2-2-2(3) Motors ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-4(4) Other electrical components ........................................................................................................... 2-2-5

2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-12-3-2 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-42-3-3 Operation unit PCB ............................................................................................................................ 2-3-132-3-4 Scanner drive PCB ............................................................................................................................. 2-3-182-3-5 CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-20

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Timing chart No. 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3Timing chart No. 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4Timing chart No. 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-5Timing chart No. 6 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-6Timing chart No. 7 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-7Timing chart No. 8 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8Timing chart No. 9 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-9Timing chart No. 10 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-4-10Timing chart No. 11 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-4-11Chart of image adjustment procedures ........................................................................................................ 2-4-12

1-1-5

2DF

Maintenance parts list ................................................................................................................................... 2-4-15Periodic maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................ 2-4-16Optional devices supplied parts list .............................................................................................................. 2-4-18General wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-4-20

2DF

1-1-1

1-1-1 Specifications

Type ............................................... DesktopCopying system.............................. Indirect electrostatic systemOriginals ......................................... Sheets and books

Maximum size: A3/11" × 17"Original feed system ...................... FixedCopy paper ..................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)

Bypass table: Plain paper (60 – 160 g/m2)Special paper: Transparencies, tracing paper, colored paper, letterhead andenvelopes (when using the printer function only)Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.

Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"Minimum: A6R/51/2" × 81/2" (When the bypass table is used)

Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% incrementsAuto copy mode: fixed ratiosMetric1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.22/1:1.15/1:0.86/1:0.81/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25Inch1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25

Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode:25 cpm copierA3/11" × 17": 15 copies/min.B4/81/2" × 14": 18 copies/min.A4/11" × 81/2": 25 copies/min.A4R/81/2" × 11": 20 copies/min.35 cpm copierA3/11" × 17": 19 copies/min.B4/81/2" × 14": 23 copies/min.A4/11" × 81/2": 35 copies/min.A4R/81/2" × 11": 25 copies/min.40 cpm copierA3/11" × 17": 19 copies/min.B4/81/2" × 14": 23 copies/min.A4/11" × 81/2": 40 copies/min.A4R/81/2" × 11": 25 copies/min.

First copy time ................................ From 3.9 s (A4/11" × 81/2")Warm-up time ................................. 60 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65% RH)

In preheat/energy saver mode: 30 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65% RH)[priorty to power save]In preheat/energy saver mode: 10 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65% RH)[priorty to recovery]

Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feedCapacity:Drawers: 500 sheetsManual feedCapacity:Bypass: 200 sheets

Continuous copying........................ 1 - 250 sheetsPhotoconductor .............................. a-Si (drum diameter 40 mm)Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging (500 µA)Exposure light source..................... Semiconductor laserExposure scanning system ............ Polygon mirrorDeveloping system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)

Developer: 1-component, magnetism tonerDeveloping bias: +1.72 kV ACDeveloping shift bias: 160 VToner replenishing: automatic from a toner container

Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller (100 µA)Separation system ......................... Separation electrode (60 or 10 µA depending on the paper)

2DF

1-1-2

Fixing system ................................. Heat rollerHeat source: halogen heaters (120 V specifications:main 600 W, sub 400W/ 220-240V specifications:main 630 W, sub 420 W)Control temperature: 165°C/329°F (at normal ambient temperature)Abnormally high temperature protection device: 170°C/338°F thermostatFixing pressure: 107.8 N

Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lampCleaning system............................. Cleaning bladeScanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensorBit map memory ............................. 9 MB (standard)Image storage memory .................. 23 MB (standard)Resolution ...................................... 600 × 600 dpiLight source.................................... Inert gas lampDimensions .................................... 585 (W) × 646 (D) × 745 (H) mm

23" (W) × 252/5" (D) × 291/3" (H)Weight ............................................ Approx. 79 kg/165 lbsFloor requirements ......................... 1356 (W) × 646 (D) mm

533/8" (W) × 252/5" (D)Functions........................................ Self-diagnostics, preheat, automatic copy density control, original size detection, auto

paper size selection function, auto magnification selection mode, zoom copy mode,standard copy mode, size zoom mode, photo mode, margin mode, page separationcopy mode, border erase mode, layout copy, sort mode, copy management function,language selection function

Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 11 A....................................................... 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A (Average)

Power consumption........................ 1320 W (120V)1368W (220 – 240V)

Options ........................................... STDF*, SRDF, paper feed desk, large paper deck, duplex unit, job separator, finisher,booklet stitcher, built-in finisher, key counter, fax board, printer board, network printerboard, network scanner board*Optional for 25 cpm copier only.

2DF

1-1-3

1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

(1) Copier

Figure 1-1-1

1 Original cover2 Operation panel3 Conveying cover handle4 Conveying cover5 Bypass tray6 Insert guides7 Toner container8 Toner container release lever9 Toner disposal tank0 Cleaning shaft! Front cover

@ Main switch# Copy store section$ Platen% Original size scales^ Upper drawer& Lower drawer* Side cover( Length adjustment plate) Width adjustament lever⁄ Handles for transport

2DF

1-1-4

(2) Operation panel

Figure 1-1-2

1 Start key (Indicator)2 Stop/clear key3 Reset key4 Energy Saver (preheat) key5 Interrupt key (Indicator)6 Management key7 * (Default) key8 Numeric key9 Touch panel

0 Auto selection key (Indicator)! Facsimile priority output key (Indicator)@ Printer priority output key (Indicator)# Brightness adjustment control dial$ Copier key (Indicator)% Printer key (Indicator)^ Scanner key (Indicator)& Fax key (Indicator)

Start

Stop Clear

Reset

InterruptManagement Energy Saver

Copier

Printer

Scanner

Fax

PrinterPriority Output

FacsimilePriority Output Auto Selection

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

4567#$%

^ & 8 1 2 39

0!@

2DF

1-1-5

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Light path

Paper path

Figure 1-1-4 Machine cross section

1 Paper feed section2 Main charging section3 Optical section4 Developing section5 Transfer and separation section6 Cleaning and charge erasing section section7 Fixing section8 Eject and switchback section

2DF

1-1-6

1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor and eject motor drive trains)

Figure 1-1-4

As viewed from machine rear

1 Drive motor gear2 Drum gear Z76H/Z30H3 Drum gear Z70H4 Gear Z76H/Z35H5 Gear Z50H6 Gear Z36S/Z31H7 Gear Z37H/28H8 Gear Z34H

9 Registration clutch gear0 Gear Z63H/Z45S! Gear Z37S@ Gear Z24S# Joint gear Z32S$ Eject motor gear% Gear Z47S/Z28S^ Eject gear Z30S

2DF

1-1-7

(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train)

Figure 1-1-5

As viewed from machine rear

1 Paper feed motor gear2 Gear Z76H/Z35S3 Feed gear Z254 Feed gear Z255 Feed gear Z256 Feed gear Z257 Gear Z41S/Z24S/P308 Upper paper feed clutch gear9 Paper feed drive belt0 Gear Z41S/Z24S

! Lower paper feed clutch gear@ Gear Z41S/P15# Bypass drive belt$ Gear Z60S/P20% Gear Z41S/P18^ Gear Z40S/Z32S& Container drive belt* Gear Z24S/P40( Gear Z40S/Z25S) Container gear

2DF

1-2-1

1-2-1 DrumNote the following when handling or storing the drum.• When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F and at a relative humidity not higher than

85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

1-2-2 TonerStore the toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.

1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 35°C/50 - 95°F 2. Humidity: 15 - 85%RH 3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 11 A

220 - 240 V AC, 4.5 A (Average) 4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3% 5. Installation location

• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or otherstrong light when removing paper jams.

• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed ontothe machine.

• Avoid dust and vibration.• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as

mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.• Select a room with good ventilation.

6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 300 mm/1113/16"Machine right: 300 mm/1113/16" Machine left: 300 mm/1113/16"

Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions

a: 745 mm/295/16"b: 585 mm/23"c: 646 mm/253/8"d: 1510 mm/597/16"e: 1032 mm/405/8"f: 961 mm/3713/16"a d

b

e c

f

1-3-1

2DF

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Unpack.

Remove the tapes and pad.

Install the optional paper feed desk or large paper deck.

Attach the function seat.

Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.

Install the toner container.

Connect the power cord.

Load paper.

Make test copies.

Print out the user setting list.

Output an own-status report(maintenance item U000).

Exit maintenance mode.

Start

Install other optional devices.

Install the toner disposal tank.

Carry out initial developer setting(maintenance item U130).

Install the original cover or the DF.

Completion of the machine installation.

1-3-2

2DF

Moving the machineWhen moving the machine, pull out the four handles for transport on the right and left sides and hold them.* For the left front handle for transport, open the door and push it into the machine before pulling out the handle.

Handle for transport

Handle for transport

Handle for transport Handle for

transport

Figure 1-3-1

1-3-3

2DF

Figure 1-3-2 Unpacking

Unpack.

1 Copier2 Power cord3 Upper left pad4 Upper right pad5 Outer case6 Inner frame7 Lower right pad8 Lower left pad9 Skid

0 Bottom pad! Machine cover@ Bar code labels# Belt$ Eject spacer% Spacer*^ Plastic bag& Operation guide

*220-230 V specifications only.

1-3-4

2DF

1. Remove the tapes holding the front cover,bypass tray, drawers and original detectionswitch.

2. Remove the pad at the eject section.

3. Remove the three tapes holding the pins for lightsource units 1 and 2.

4. Remove the tape holding the conveying cover. 5. Remove the two tapes holding the power cord.*

*120 V specifications only.

Remove the tapes and pad.

Figure 1-3-3

Figure 1-3-4

Pad

Tape

Tape

Tapes

Tape

Tapes

Tape

Tape

Tape

1-3-5

2DF

6. Pull upper and lower drawers out and remove thetape holding each of the drawer lift.

1. Install the optional paper feed desk or large paperdeck as necessary (see page 1-3-18 to 1-3-24).

1. Remove the two pins for light source unit 1 andthe pin for light source unit 2.

Figure 1-3-5

Figure 1-3-6

Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.

Tape

Light source unit 2 pin

Light source unit 1 pins

Install the optional paper feed desk or large paper deck.

Install the original cover or the DF.

Install other optional devices.

1. Install the original cover or DF (see page 1-3-34 when installing the DF).

1. Install the optional devices (job separator, duplex unit, finisher, fax board, and/or printer board etc.) as necessary(see pages 1-3-35 to 1-3-56).

1-3-6

2DF

1. Open the front cover. 2. Tap the top of the toner container five to six

times.

3. Shake the toner container approximately 10times in the horizontal direction to stir toner.

4. Gently push the toner container into the copieralong the rails.

*Push the container all the way into the copier untilit locks in place.

Figure 1-3-7

Figure 1-3-8

Figure 1-3-9

Install the toner container.

Toner container

Toner container

Toner container

1-3-7

2DF

1. Install the toner disposal tank in the copier. 2. Close the front cover.

1. Connect the power cord to the connector on thecopier.**200-240 V specifications only.

2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet.

Figure 1-3-10

Connect the power cord.

Carry out initial developer setting (maintenance item U130).

Load paper.

Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).


1. Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode by entering “10871087” using the numeric keys. 2. Enter “130” using the numeric keys and press the start key. 3. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item.

The drive stops within approximately 5 minutes. 4. Press the stop/clear key.

1. Load paper in the drawer.

1. Enter “000” using the numeric keys and press the start key. 2. Select “MAINTENANCE” and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items. 3. Press the stop/clear key.

1. Enter "001" using the numeric keys and press the start key.The machine exits the maintenance mode.

1. Press the * key to enter default setting and press the [Print form] key. The counter report will be output.

Print out the user setting list.

Toner disposal tank

Install the toner disposal tank.

1-3-8

2DF

1. Place an original and make test copies.

1. Remove the PET film from the operation panel. 2. Fit the relevant function sheet.

If the DF has been installed, select a functionsheet among No. 1 to 4 based on installation ofthe fax board and the printer board.If the DF has not been installed, select a functionsheet among No. 5 to 8 based on installation ofthe fax board and the printer board.

3. Refit the PET film to its original position.

Make test copies.

Attach the function seat.

Figure 1-3-11

PET film

PET filmFunction seat

Completion of the machine installation.

1-3-9

2DF

1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:

Maintenance item No.

Contents Factory setting

U253U254U255U256

U258

U260U342U343U344

Switching between double and single countsTurning auto start function on/offSetting auto clear timeTurning auto preheat/energy saver function on/offSwitching copy operation at toner empty detectionChanging the copy count timingSetting the ejection restrictionSwitching between duplex/simplex copy modeSetting preheat/energy saver mode

Double countON90sON

SINGLE MODE, 70

After ejectionONOFFENERGY STAR

2DF

1-3-10

Press the [Management] key.

Press the [Copy default] key.

Press the [Machine default] key.

Press the [Print form] key.

Press the [Language] key.

Enter the management code.

Press the * (Default setting) key.

Execute department manage-ment items (page 1-3-11).

Press the [Close] key.




Make copy default settings (page 1-3-11).


Make machine default settings (page 1-3-13).

Output the setting list (page 1-3-14).

Set the language (page 1-3-14).

Start

End

1-3-3 Copier management

In addition to a maintenance function for service, the copier is equipped with a management function which can be operatedby users (mainly by the copier administrator). In this copier management mode, settings such as default settings can bechanged.

(1) Using the copier management mode

2DF

1-3-11

(2) Setting department management items

Registering a new department code

Sets a department code and the limit of thenumber of copies for that department.

1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key.2. Press the [Register] key and press the [#

keys].3. Enter a department code (8-digit) using the

numeric keys and press the [# keys].4. Enter the number of copies limit using the

numeric keys. Setting range is 1000 pieces ofunits to 1000-999000 pieces. Entering “0”enables unlimited copying.

5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [Close] key.7. Press the [On] key.8. Press the [Close] key.

Deleting a department code

1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key.2. Select the department code to be deleted and

press the [Delete] key.3. Select “Yes” or “No”.4. Press the [Close] key.5. Press the [On] key.6. Press the [Close] key.

Altering the copy limit

1. Press the [# of copy correct] key.2. Select the department code to be altered and

press the [Correction] key.3. Enter the number of copies limit using the

numeric keys. Setting range is 1000 pieces ofunits to 1000-999000 pieces. Entering “0”enables unlimited copying.

4. Press the [Close] key.5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [On] key.7. Press the [Close] key.

Clearing copy counts

1. Press the [Counter clear] key.2. Select “Yes” or “No”.3. Press the [Close] key.

Viewing copy counts

1. Press the [Counter by ID-code] key.2. View copy counts using the cursor up/down

keys.3. Press the [Close] key.4. Press the [Close] key.

Print management list

1. Press the [Print the list] key.If A4/11" × 81/2" paper is present, the list isautomatically printed out. Otherwise, selectthe paper source and press the start key.

(3) Copy default

Exposure mode

Selects the exposure mode at power-on.1. Select “Exposure mode” and press the

[Change #] key.2. Select “Manual” or “Auto”.

Exposure steps

Sets the number of exposure steps for themanual exposure mode.

1. Select “Exposure steps” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Select “1 step” or “0.5 step”.

Original type

Selects the copy quantity mode at power-on.1. Select “Original type” and press the [Change

#] key.2. Select “Text+Photo”, “Photo” or “Text”.

Eco print

Selects the toner economy mode to beautomatically on or off at power-on.

1. Select “ECO print” and press the [Change #]key.

2. Select “On” or “Off”.

Paper selection

Sets whether the same sized paper as theoriginal to be copied is automatically selected.

1. Select “Paper selection” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Select “APS” or “Default cassette”.

Default drawer

Sets the drawer to be selected in cases such asafter the reset key is pressed.

1. Selct “Default cassette” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Select priority drawer.

Default magnification

Selects whether auto magnification selection or100% magnification is to be given priority whenthe sizes of the original and copy paper aredifferent.

1. Select “Default magnification” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Select “Manual” or “AMS”.

Auto exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposuremode.

1. Select “Auto exposure adjustment” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjustdefault setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3

2DF

1-3-12

Manual exposure adjustment (Mixed)

Adjusts the exposure to be used when text andphoto original is selected for the image mode.

1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Mixed)” and pressthe [Change #] key.


Manual exposure adjustment (Text)

Adjusts the exposure to be used when textoriginal is selected for the image mode.

1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Text)” and press the[Change #] key.


Manual exposure adjustment (Photo)

Adjusts the exposure to be used when photooriginal is selected for the image mode.

1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Photo)” and press the[Change #] key.


Margin width

Sets the default setting of the margin width for themargin copying.

1. Select “Default margin width” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Press the +/- keys to adjust default marginwidth.Setting range: 0 to 3/4" (inch specifications)0 to 18 mm (metric specifications)

Border erase width

Sets the default setting of the border erase widthfor the border erase mode.

1. Select “Default erase width” and press the[Change #] key.

2. Press the +/- keys to adjust default erasewidth.Setting range: 0 to 3/4" (inch specifications)0 to 18 mm (metric specifications)

Copy limit

Sets the number of copies limit for multiplecopying.

1. Select “Preset limit” and press the [Change #]key.

2. Press the +/- keys to set copy preset in onejob.Setting range: 1 to 999 copies

Display register key

Sets whether or not to display the Register key inthe copy operation screen.

1. Select “Display register key” and press the[Change #] key.


Customize the base screen (main function)

Changes the layout of the main functions of thebase screen.

1. Select “Customize (Main function)” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Change the layout to press [Move ahead] or[Move to behind].

Customize the copy operating screen (add function)

Changes the layout of the functions except themain functions of the copy operating screens.

1. Select “Customize (Add function)” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Change the layout to press [ ← ].

2DF

1-3-13

(4) Machine default

Auto drawer switching

Sets whether the auto drawer switching functionis available.

1. Select “Auto cassette switching” and pressthe [Change #] key.


Special paper

Sets the drawer for such special paper as coloredpaper or recycled paper.

1. Select “Special paper” and press the [Change#] key.

2. Select “1st paper” or “2nd paper”.

APS for special paper

Sets whether to use the paper source with thespecial paper for auto paper selection and autodrawer switching.

1. Selct “APS for special paper” and press the[Change #] key.


Paper size (upper drawer)

Sets the paper size for upper drawer.1. Select “Paper size (1st cassette)” and press

the [Change #] key.2. Select the paper size.

Paper size (lower drawer)

Sets the paper size for lower drawer.1. Select “Paper size (2nd cassette)” and press

the [Change #] key.2. Select the paper size.

Paper type (upper drawer)

Sets the paper type (standard or special) forupper drawer.

1. Select “Paper type (1st cassette)” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Select the paper type.

Paper type (lower drawer)

Sets the paper type (standard or special) forlower drawer.

1. Select “Paper type (2nd cassette)” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Select the paper type.

Check bypass sizing

Sets whether or not to display the paper size keyof the basic screen when copying with the bypasstray.1.Select “Check bypass express” and press the

[Change #] key.2. Selct “On” or “Off”.

Auto shutoff time

Sets the auto shutoff time.1. Select “Auto shut-off time” and press the

[Change #] key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto shutoff

time.Setting range: 15 to 240 minutes

Auto preheat time

Sets the auto preheat time.1. Select “Auto preheat time” and press the

[Change #] key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto preheat

time.Setting range: 1 to 45 minutesNote: Set the auto preheat time to be shorterthan the auto shutoff time.

Copy eject location setting

Selects whether to eject copies to copier, finisheror job separator.

1. Select “Select Copy output mode” and pressthe [Change #] key.

2. Select the eject location.

Key sound

Sets if a beep sounds when a key on the keypress panel is pressed.

1. Select “Key sound ON/OFF” and press the[Change #] key.


Silent mode

Selects whether or not to enter silent mode aftercopying.

1. Select “Silent Mode” and press the [Change#] key.


Management code change

Changes the management code.1. Select “Management code change” and press

the [Change #] key.2. Enter the 4-digit management code using the

numeric keys and press the enter key.

Auto shutoff

Sets whether the auto shutoff function isavailable.

1. Select “Auto shut-off” and press the [Change#] key.


2DF

1-3-14

(5) Report

Outputs the setting reports.1. Press the [Print form] key.2. Select the report.

Copy report/Option report/Counter report/Machine report

(6) Language

Switches the language to be displayed on thepress panel.

1. Press the [Language] key.2. Select the display language.

2DF

1-3-15

1-3-4 Installing the key counter (option)

Key counter installation requires the following parts:Key counter set (P/N 2A369703)Contents of the set:• Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010)• Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)• Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060022)• Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)• Key counter socket assembly (P/N 41529210)• Four (4) M4 × 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)• Two (2) M4 × 10 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304100)• One (1) M4 × 20 bronze TP-A screw (P/N B4304200)• One (1) M4 × 6 chrome TP-A screw (P/N B4104060)• One (1) M3 × 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080)• One (1) M4 × 30 bronze binding screw (P/N B1304300)• Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)• One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)

Procedure1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the

key counter retainer using the two screwsand nut.

2. Fit the key counter mount to the key countercover using the two screws, and attach thekey counter retainer to the mount using thetwo screws.

3. Remove the three screws holding the middleright cover and then the cover.

4. Cut out the aperture plate on the middle rightcover using nippers.

5. Pass the connect inside the copier throughthe aperture and refit the middle right cover.

Figure 1-3-12

Figure 1-3-13

Key counter retainer (66060030)

Key counter mount (66060040)

Key counter cover (2A360010)

M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)

M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)

M3 nut (C2303000)

M3 × 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)

Key counter socket assembly (41529210)

ApertureMiddle right cover

Connector

2DF

1-3-16

6. Pass the connector of the key counterthrough the aperture in the key counterretainer, and insert into the connector of thecopier.

7. Seat the projection of the key counter coverretainer in the aperture in the middle rightcover.

8. Fit the key counter cover with the key countersocket assembly inserted to the key countercover retainer on the copier using the screw.

9. Insert the key counter into the key countersocket assembly.

10. Turn the main switch on and enter themaintenance mode.

11. Run maintenance item U204 and select“KEY-COUNTER.”

12. Exit the maintenance mode.13. Check that the message requesting the key

counter to be inserted is displayed on thetouch panel when the key counter is pulledout.

14. Check that the counter counts up as copiesare made.

Figure 1-3-14

Projection

Connector

Connector

Key conuter cover

Key counter cover retainer (66060022)

M4 × 30 screws(B1304300)

2DF

1-3-17

1-3-5 Installing the drawer heater (option)

Drawer heater installation requires the following parts:• Drawer heater (P/N 34860030): for 120 V specifications• Drawer heater (P/N 33960020): for 220 - 240 V specifications• Band (P/N M2107120)

Procedure1. Pull the upper and lower drawers out.2. Fit the drawer heater to the bottom of the

machine and bind the wire of the drawerheater with the band.

3. Put the wire of the drawer heater out of themachine through the aperture of the rearframe.

4. Remove the four screws and the twoconnectors and then remove the powersource unit from the rear side of the machine.

5. Remove the two screws and pull out the wireof the drawer heater that has been put out ofthe rear frame while raising the power sourcePCB unit.

6. Insert the connector of the drawer heater intothe connector of the machine.

7. Refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-3-15

Figure 1-3-16

Figure 1-3-17

Drawer heaterAperture

Band

Power source unit

Connectors

Wire of the drawer heater

Connector

Power source PCB unit

2DF

1-3-18

1-3-6 Installing the paper feed desk (option)

Preparation1. Remove the lower drawer from the copier.

Figure 1-3-18

Figure 1-3-19

Figure 1-3-20

2. Place the copier on top of the paper feeddesk with the positioning pins at the front leftand right of the paper feed desk aligned withthe holes in the base of the copier.

3. Secure the copier to the paper feed deskusing the two pins.

4. Refit the lower drawer to the copier.

Lower drawer

Pins

Holes

Paper feed desk

Paper feed desk

Pin Pin

2DF

1-3-19

5. Remove the screw and then the cover fromthe rear of the paper feed desk.

6. Remove the screw from the copier.

7. Insert the 12-P connector of the paperfeed desk into the connector on the copier.

8. Route the harness through the clamp on theretainer.

9. Fit the retainer using the screw removed instep 6 and the two CVM4 × 06 cross-headchromate binding screws.

10. Refit the cover.

Figure 1-3-21

Figure 1-3-22

Figure 1-3-23

Screw

CoverScrew

12-P connector

Screw

Harness

Clamp

Retainer

CVM4 × 06 cross-headchromate binding screws

2DF

1-3-20

11. Turn the four leveling bolts until they reachthe floor and adjust them to level themachine.

12. Fit the two stays to the left of the paper feeddesk (one toward the front and the other therear) using the two M4 × 10 chrome TPscrews such that they make contact with thefloor.Note: Do not fit the stays if the finisher is tobe installed.

13. Connect the copier power plug to the walloutlet and turn the copier main switch on.

14. Load paper into the drawer and make a testcopy to check the operation.

Figure 1-3-24

Figure 1-3-25

Stays

M4 × 10 chromeTP screws

Leveling bolts

2DF

1-3-21

1-3-7 Installing the large paper deck (option)

Preparation1. Remove the lower drawer from the copier.

2. Place the copier on top of the large paperdeck with the positioning pins at the front leftand right of the large paper deck aligned withthe holes in the base of the copier.

3. Secure the copier to the large paper deckusing the two pins.

4. Refit the lower drawer to the copier.

Figure 1-3-26

Figure 1-3-27

Figure 1-3-28

Lower drawer

Large paper desk

Pin Pin

HoleHole

Large paper desk

PinPin

2DF

1-3-22

Figure 1-3-29

Figure 1-3-30

Screw

Screw

Cover

12-pin connector

Retainer

Screw

CVM4 × 06 cross-headchromate binding screw

CVM4 × 06 cross-headchromate binding screw

Figure 1-3-31

5. Remove the screw and then the cover fromthe rear of the large paper deck.

6. Remove the screw from the rear of the copier.

7. Insert the 12-pin connector of the large paperdeck into the connector on the copier.

8. Fit the retainer using the screw removed instep 6 and the two CVM4 × 06 cross-headchromate binding screws.

9. Refit the cover using the screw (see step 5).

2DF

1-3-23

Figure 1-3-32

Figure 1-3-33

Figure 1-3-34

Leveling bolts

StayM4 × 16 chromeTP screws

Leteral size adjuster

Sliders

Sliders

Leteral size adjuster

Screw

Screw

10. Turn the four leveling bolts until they reachthe floor and adjust them to level themachine.

11. Fit the stay to the lower left of the large paperdeck toward the rear using the two M4 × 16chrome TP screws such that it makes contactwith the floor.Note: Do not fit the stay if the finisher is to beinstalled.

Setting the paper size1. Open the large paper deck.2. Move the sliders at the machine front and

rear inward (two at each point).3. Remove the screw from each of the front and

rear lateral size adjusters.

2DF

1-3-24

Figure 1-3-35

Figure 1-3-36

A4LTB5

A4LTB5

Size indicator

Size indicator

Upper tabs

Upper tab

Upper tab

Lower tabs

Lower tabs

Upper slotsUpper slots

Upper slotsUpper slotsLower slots

Lower slots

B5

A4

Longitudinal size adjuster

Longitudinal size adjuster

ScrewScrewScrew

A4 pins Pin hole

Pin hole

B5 pins

4. Insert the upper tabs and lower tabs of thefront and rear lateral size adjusters into theupper slots and lower slots respectively suchthat the size indicators point to the size ofpaper to be used. Secure the lateral sizeadjusters using the screw for each.

5. Move the front and rear sliders (two at eachpoint) outward until they make contact withthe lateral size adjusters.

Steps 6 to 9 are for metric specifications only. 6. Remove the screw from each of the left and

right longitudinal size adjusters.7. Align the pin holes in the left and right

longitudinal size adjusters with the A4 pins orB5 pins according to the size of paper to beused. Secure the adjusters using the screwfor each.


9. Run maintenance item 208 and set the papersize for the large paper deck (B5/A4).

10. Load paper into the drawer and make a testcopy to check the operation.

2DF

1-3-25

1-3-8 Installing the saddle finisher/switchback unit (option)

Preparation1. Open the conveying cover of the copier.2. Remove the two screws securing the

feedshift guide assembly and then theassembly.

3. Fit the curl eliminator to the conveying coversuch that the projections on the cover fit intothe two ends of the curl eliminator.

4. Secure the curl eliminator using the twoscrews removed in step 2.

5. Close the conveying cover.6. Fit the latch catch to the conveying cover

using two M4 × 10 binding screws.

Conveyingcover

Feedshift guide assembly

Screws

Projection

Projection

Curl eliminator

ScrewScrew

Latch catch

M4 × 10 binding screws

Conveying cover

Figure 1-3-37

Figure 1-3-38

Figure 1-3-39

2DF

1-3-26

Figure 1-3-40

Figure 1-3-41

Figure 1-3-42

7. Remove the two screws securing the shieldcover and then the cover.

8. Detach the 10-pin connector (four wires) fromCN4 on the main PCB and connect it to J2 onthe IPC PCB.

9. Connect J1 on the IPC PCB to CN15 on themain PCB.

10. Insert the three board supports of the IPCPCB into the main PCB to secure them.

11. Refit the shield cover.

Shield cover

Screws

J2

CN4

CN15

Main PCB

10-pin connector

IPC PCB10-pin connector

CN15

J1

Board supports

Main PCB

Board supportIPC PCB

IPC PCB

2DF

1-3-27

Figure 1-3-44

Figure 1-3-45

12. Align the rail retainer with the groove of theguide rail and attach the rail retainer to theguide rail. Make sure that the plate spring ofthe rail retainer fits into the groove and theedge of the guide rail fits between the pulleyson the reverse side of the rail retainer.

When the switchback unit is not to be installed13. Orient the guide rail such that its pulley is

positioned toward the copier, and then fit acaster rail to each side of the rail retainer.

When the switchback unit is to be installed14. Attach a spacer to each end of the rail

retainer using two M4 × 6 binding screws foreach.

15. Orient the guide rail such that its pulley ispositioned toward the copier, and then fit thecaster rails to the spacer.

16. Secure the rail retainer to the copier usingtwo M4 × 10 binding screws such that thefront and rear gaps between the floor and railretainer are approximately 10 mm.

Rail retainer

Plate spring

Guide rail

Guide rail

Caster rail

Caster rail

Rail retainer

Rail retainer


Rail retainerSpacer

Spacer

Pulley

Caster railGuide rail

Caster rail


10 mm 10 mm

Rail retainer

Rail retainer


Figure 1-3-43

2DF

1-3-28

Figure 1-3-48

17. Slightly lift the bottom of the finisher andinsert the rail fixing plate into the finisher, andthen join them by inserting two M4 × 6binding screws loosely.

18. Insert the guide rail into the rail fixing plateand secure it using an M4 × 6 binding screwat the position where the screw hole in it andthat in the rail fixing plate meet.Note: When installing the switchback unit,use screw hole a in the guide rail; when notinstalling the switchback unit, use screwhole b in the guide rail.

19. Adjust the position of the rail fixing plate sothat the gap between the plate and the floor isapproximately 8.0 mm, and then tighten thetwo loosely fitted M4 × 6 binding screws.

Finisher

Rail fixing plate

M4 × 6binding screws

Rail fixing plate

M4 × 6 binding screw

Rail fixing plate

Guide rail

Screw hole a

Screw hole b

8.0 mm



Rail fixing plate

Figure 1-3-46

Figure 1-3-47

2DF

1-3-29

Figure 1-3-51

Figure 1-3-49

Figure 1-3-50

20. Fit the eject tray to the finisher by hooking thetwo claws and secure it using two M4 × 6binding screws.

21. Open the front panel and insert the staplerunit into the finisher.

22. Close the front panel.

Installing the switchback unit1. Remove the two support rubbers on the right

of the finisher and loosely fit the two M3 × 8binding screws in their places.

2. Remove the two screws.

Eject tray


ClawClaw

Stapler unit

Front panel

Finisher

Support rubber

M3 × 8binding screws

Screw

Screw Support rubber

2DF

1-3-30

Figure 1-3-52

Figure 1-3-53

Figure 1-3-54

3. Release the hook of the switchback unit bylifting the release lever.

4. Fit the switchback unit to the finisher byhanging the hook of the switchback unit onthe loosely fitted M3 × 8 binding screws.

5. Tighten the loosely fitted M3 × 8 bindingscrews.

6. Secure the switchback unit using two M4 × 12TP screws.

7. Close the switchback unit.

8. Remove the two screws from the cover of thefinisher.

Release lever

Hook

Switchback unit

Finisher

Switchback unit

M4 × 12 TP screw


M4 × 12 TP screw

Hook

Finisher

Screws

2DF

1-3-31

Figure 1-3-57

Figure 1-3-55

Figure 1-3-56

9. Insert the rib of the front cover into the groovein the top cover of the switchback unit, andthen fit the front cover to the finisher.

10. Secure the front cover by fitting an M4 × 12TP screw and M4 × 16 TP screw into theholes where screws were inserted(see step 8).

11. Fit the two support rubbers removed in step 1to the switchback unit.

12. If the finisher and the copier do not engagesecurely, perform the following finisher heightadjustment.

Adjusting the height of the finisher1. Remove the two covers from the lower left

part of the finisher by removing one screweach.

2. Remove the four caps from above the fourcasters of the finisher.

Rib

Groove

Finisher

M4 × 12 TP screw

M4 × 16 TP screwFront cover

Support rubbers

Screws

Cover

Cover

Caster

Cap

Cap

2DF

1-3-32

Figure 1-3-58

Figure 1-3-59

3. Loosen the two screws on each of the fourcasters.

4. Adjust the height of the rear right caster byturning its adjustment bolt using a cross-headed screwdriver so that the axis of the pinof the latch catch is aligned with the middle ofthe three markings on the right of the slot ofthe finisher or switchback unit when thefinisher is joined to the copier (viewed fromthe machine front).Note: Turning the adjustment bolts clockwiselowers the finisher, while turning themcounterclockwise lifts the finisher.

5. Adjust the height of the front right caster inthe same manner as in step 4 so that the axisof the pin of the latch catch is aligned with themarking above the slot and the center of thetwo hooks on the finisher align with the centerof the holes on the latch catch when thefinisher is joined to the copier (viewed fromabove).

Pin

Screws

Caster

Adjustment bolt

Slot

Pin

Pin

Pin

SlotHolesHooks

2DF

1-3-33

Figure 1-3-60

Figure 1-3-61

6. Adjust the height of the left two casters in thesame manner as in step 4 so that the top andbottom gaps (A) between the finisher and thecopier are the same when the finisher isdetached from the copier.

7. Retighten the two screws on each of the fourcasters.

8. Refit the two covers and four caps.

Connecting the signal cable1. Connect the signal cable of the finisher to the

copier. If the switchback unit has beeninstalled, connect the signal cable of theswitchback unit, as well.

2. Insert the copier power plug to the wall outletand turn the main switch on.

3. Make test copeies and check that the finisherand the switchback unit operate correctly.

A

A

Signal cable of the finisher

Signal cable of the switchback unit

2DF

1-3-34

1-3-9 Installing the sheet-through document holder (option)

Preparation1. Insert the DF into the copier.

Figure 1-3-63

Figure 1-3-62

2. Connect the connector of the DF to thecopier.

3. Insert the copier power plug to the wall outletand turn the main switch on.

4. Run maintenance item U211 to set “SADF”(25 cpm copier only).

5. Place the original on the DF and make a testcopy. Check the operation and the copyimage.

6. If the copy image is different from the original,run the following adjustment.•Maintenance item U70 (sub-scan line

adjustment)(see page 1-4-15)•Maintenance item U71 (leading edge timing

adjustment)(see page 1-4-16)•Maintenance item U72 (center line

adjustment)(see page 1-4-17)

DF

Connector

DF

2DF

1-3-35

Figure 1-3-66

Rear cover

Screws

1-3-10 Installing the Facsimile System (option)

Procedure1. Fit the battery pack into the NCU retainer as

shown in the illustration.2. Fit the speaker onto the two catches on the

NCU retainer, and fasten it into place withone M3 × 06 chrome binding screw.

3. Fasten the NCU board to the NCU retainerwith four M3 × 06 chrome binding screws.

4. Connect the NCU cable to connector CN1 onthe NCU board.

Figure 1-3-64

Figure 1-3-65

5. Adhere the lower-sheet to the auxiliary powersource retainer.

6. Fasten the auxiliary power source PCB,together with the upper-sheet, to the auxiliarypower source retainer, using three M3 × 06chrome binding screws.

7. Pass the FAX-PCB-Power cable through thecutout in the upper-sheet, and connect it toconnector CN1 on the auxiliary power sourcePCB.

Connector CN1

M3 × 06 chromebinding screws

NCU board

Battery pack

NCU retainer

M3 × 06 chrome binding screw

Speaker

NCU cable

Catches

Connector CN1

M3 × 06 chrome binding screws

Upper-sheetFAX-PCB-Power cable

Auxiliary power source PCB

M3 × 06 chromebinding screw

Lower-sheet

Auxiliary power source retainer

8. Remove 13 screws and take off the rearcover.

2DF

1-3-36

Figure 1-3-67

Figure 1-3-68

Screws

Printer system

Screws

Shield cover

• If the printing system is installed9. Remove the 2 screws holding the printer

system in place, and pull the printing systemout of the shield cover.

10. Remove 13 screws and take off the shieldcover.

11. Move the film out of the way to the left, andfasten the fax board into place using six M3 ×06 chrome binding screws.

Figure 1-3-69

Film

M3 × 06 chrome binding screwsFax board

2DF

1-3-37

12. Fasten the NCU unit into place from thebottom with two M3 × 06 chrome bindingscrews.

13. Connect the three connectors from the NCUboard to the corresponding connectors on thefax board, as follows:• Speaker 2-pin connector → CN7• NCU board connector → CN3• Battery connector → CN6

14. Remove the film that fixes the three positiveconnectors of the power source PCB from theoptional interface mounting plate.Important: Dispose of the film that has beenremoved.

Figure 1-3-70

Figure 1-3-70-1

NCU unit

Speaker 2-pin connecto

NCU board


CN7 CN6

CN3

Battery connector

NCU board connector

Film

Optional interface mounting plate

2DF

1-3-38

Figure 1-3-72

Catch


Mount hole

16. Fit the catch on the auxiliary power unit intothe mount hole in the copier, and fasten theauxiliary power unit into place with one M3 ×06 chrome binding screw.

15. Connect the three positive connectors on thepower board to the corresponding connectorson the auxiliary power source PCB, asfollows.• White positive connector → TB1 (white)• Green positive connector → TB2 (green)• White positive connector → TB3

Figure 1-3-71

TB3

TB1

TB2


Green positive connector

White positive connectorWhite positive

connector

1-3-37-1

2DF

1-3-39

This page is intentionally left blank.

2DF

1-3-40

Figure 1-3-73

Figure 1-3-74

17. Through the opening of controller-box abovethe speaker, connect the FAX-PCB-Powercable on the auxiliary power source PCB toconnector CN8 on the fax board.

18. Connect the 2-pin connector to the 2-pinconnector with green cable.

19. Unlock CN1 on the fax board by pulling itsconnector housing.

20. Hold the fax cable with its conductive sidefacing up, insert it into connector CN1, thenpush the housing back in to lock theconnector.

21. Hold the other end of the fax cable with itsconductive side facing down, and connect itto connector CN44 on the main PCB. (Pullthe CN44 housing out to release theconnector lock, then insert the cable, andthen push the housing back in.)Important: Be sure to push the fax cable allthe way in, and be sure that the connection isstraight. A poor connection may result in avariety of problems.

2-pin connector with green cable

Connector CN8

2-pin connector

Fax board

FAX-PCB-Power cable


Connector CN44

Connector CN1Fax board

Fax cable

CN1

CN44

Figure 1-3-75

Memory slot

Memory module DIMM (8MB)Important: The Memory module DIMM (8MB)

must be installed onto the fax board. Please besure that you do not install it onto the main PCB.22. Insert the Memory module DIMM (8MB) at an

angle into the memory slot on the fax board.23. Push the free end of the module down toward

the board.

1-3-38

2DF

1-3-41

Figure 1-3-76

Figure 1-3-77

24. Fasten the shield cover into place with 13screws.

25. Remove 1 screw and take off the modularcover.

Shield cover

Screws

Screw

Modular cover

Figure 1-3-78

Screw

Holes

Modular cover

26. Hang the modular cover onto the holes on theshield cover, and fasten it into place with 1screw.

1-3-39

2DF

1-3-42

Figure 1-3-79

Figure 1-3-80

• If the printing system was installed27. Reinstall the printing system into the shield

cover, fastening it into place with 2 screws.

Screws

Printing system

Rear cover

Screws

28. Reattach the rear cover with 13 screws.

29. Adhere the certification labels to the rearcover at the locations indicated in theillustration (only 120 V Spac.).

Figure 1-3-81

Certification labels

1-3-40

2DF

1-3-43

Figure 1-3-84

Modular connector cable

L terminal

L

30. Take the power label from the fax-kit labelsheet, and adhere it to the copier directlyunder the main switch.

31. Take the alphabet labels from the fax-kit labelsheet, and adhere them above thecorresponding numeric keys on the operationpanel.

• In Asia, use the “PQRS TUV WXYZ” label,and do not use the “PRS TUV WXZ” and“OPER” labels.

Figure 1-3-82

Figure 1-3-83

Power label

Main switch

1

4

7

5 6

98

0

2 3

ABC DEF

MNOJKL

PQRS TUV

OPER

WXYZ

Reset

Stop/Clear

S

Start

Management Interrupt Energy SeverAlphabet labels

32. Connect the L terminal to the phone circuitusing a modular connector cable.Important: On 120 V systems, use theincluded modular connector cable to makethe connection.

1-3-41

2DF

1-3-44

Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system1. Insert the copier power plug to the wall outlet

and turn the main switch on.2. Run maintenance item U601.3. Enter a destination code using the numeric

keys (refer to the destination code list) andthen press the start key.

* Enter a destination code with three digits.

4. Enter the OEM code (000) and then press thestart key.

5. Confirm that the display is changed as shownin the illustration.

* At the position of @, the version number ofthe software is displayed.

6. Press the cursor key to change the display tomaintenance item U602.

7. Press the start key and confirm that thedisplay is changed as shown in theillustration.

* At the position of @, the version number ofthe software is displayed.

8. After completing the installation, run acommunications test to confirm that the faxsystem is working correctly.

JapanAustraliaHong KongIndonesiaIsraelMalaysiaNew ZealandPeruPhilippinesMiddle EastSingapore

Code

000009080084088108126136137152156

South AfricaThailandU.S.A.South AmericaSaudi ArabiaCTR21 (European nations)

ItalyGermanySpainU.K.

Netherlands

159169181242243253

Code CodeDestination DestinationDestination

SwedenFranceAustriaSwitzerlandBelgiumDenmarkFinlandPortugalIrelandNorway

Taiwan

253

254

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED XXX 000

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED V@.@@

SELECT THE MAINTENANCE NUMBER.

Initial keep data U601

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED XXX 000

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED V@.@@


Initial ship data U602

Figure 1-3-85

Figure 1-3-86

1-3-42

2DF

1-3-43

1-3-11 Installing the Printing System (option)

Procedure1. Remove 2 screws and take off the cover.

Figure 1-3-88

Figure 1-3-89

2. Push the printing system all the way in alongthe rails, and fasten it with 2 screws.

Install the (optional) network printer board.3. Remove 2 screws and take off the cover.4. Push the network printer board all the way in

along the rails, and fasten it with 2 screws.

Figure 1-3-87

Screws

Cover

Screws

Printing system

Cover

Screws

Netwarkprinterboard

Screws

2DF

1-3-44

Figure 1-3-92

Figure 1-3-90

Figure 1-3-91

Install the (optional) hard disk.5. Remove 2 screws and take off the cover.6. Push the hard disk all the way in along the

rails, and fasten it with 2 screws.

Installing the Optional Bar-Code Reader7. Fasten the serial connector in place with 2

screws.8. Tie the excess cord with the two bands, so

that the free cord length comes to about 1meter.

9. Peel off the backing from one of the clamps,adhere the clamp to the copier at the positionshown in the illustration, and pass the wirethough the clamp.

• If a wing tray is installed, attach the otherclamp to the wing tray and pass the wirethrough both clamps.

Installing the Optional Memory DIMM10. Remove the printing system, and insert the

optional memory DIMM firmly into either ofthe memory slots. Push the DIMM firmly intothe slot so that the two hooks (one hook ateach end of the slot) snap closed.

• The board provides two DIMM slots, and canaccept up to two optional DIMMs. If installinga single DIMM, you can use either slot.

Cover

Screws

Hard desk

Screws

Wing tray

Serial connector

Screws

Cramps

Clamp

Bands

Memoryslots

Hooks

Hooks

Option mermoryDIMM

2DF

1-3-45

1-3-12 Installing the Scanning System (option)

Procedure1. Remove 13 screws and take off the rear

cover.

Figure 1-3-95



Rear cover

Screws

Screws

Printer system

Figure 1-3-93

Figure 1-3-94

Shield cover

Screws


2DF

1-3-46

4. Insert the RTC board at an angle into theRTC board slot on the main PCB.

5. Push the free end of the RTC board downtoward the fax board.

6. Remove 2 screws, and take off the cover.

7. Firmly push connector CN1 on the scannerboard all the way into connector CN50 on themain PCB.

8. Fasten the scanner board with 2 screws.

Figure 1-3-98

Figure 1-3-96

Figure 1-3-97

RTC board slot

RTC board

Main PCB

Cover

Screws

Connector CN1

Connector CN50

Screws

Scanner board

2DF

1-3-47

Figure 1-3-101

Figure 1-3-99

Figure 1-3-100




Shield cover

Screws

Screws

Printing system

Rear cover

Screws

11. Reattach the rear cover with 13 screws.

2DF

1-3-48

1-3-13 Installing the duplex unit (option)

Preparation1. Open the conveying cover.2. Remove the screw from the front and rear

struts respectively to remove the struts andremove the conveying cover in the horizontaldirection.

Figure 1-3-102

Figure 1-3-104

Conveying cover

Conveying cover

Screws

Struts

3. Insert the nut plates into the paper conveyingbases.

4. Raise the release lever of the conveying unit,open the conveying unit a little, and hang thehook sections in the front and rear of theduplex unit on the shaft of the conveying unit.

5. Secure the duplex unit using the four M3 × 10bronze binding screws.

Paper conveying base

Paperconveying base

Nut plates

Duplex unitM3 × 10bronze binding screws Hook

Shaft

Conveying unit

Release leverM3 × 10bronze binding screws

Figure 1-3-103

2DF

1-3-49

6. Insert the 8-pin connector of the duplex unitinto the groove of the housing and pull out theharness.

7. Connect the 8-pin connector of the duplexunit to the connector of the copier andarrange wiring so that the harness is placeddown.

Duplex unit

Connector

Groove

Hamess8-pin connector

Conveyingcover

Conveyingcover

Screws

Struts

Figure 1-3-105

Figure 1-3-106

8. Insert the removed conveying cover in thehorizontal direction and reattach the front andrear struts using the screw respectively.

9. Close the conveying cover.


11. Run maintenance item U034 to adjust thecenter line for duplex copying (see page 1-6-12).

2DF

1-3-50

1-3-14 Installing the built-in finisher (option)

PreparationNote:When placing the transfer unit on the floor

or the like, be sure to place it upside down.If not, the stapler mounting plate may bedeformed, resulting in a malfunction.

Figure 1-3-107

Upper left cover

Screw

Pin

2. Open the conveying cover and the frontcover.

3. Loosen the two screws on the left side andthe screw on the front side, open the hook onthe right side, and remove the left front cover.

Left front cover

Screws

Screw

Hook

Figure 1-3-108

Figure 1-3-106-1

1. Remove the screw and the pin to remove theupper left cover.

Transfer unit

2DF

1-3-51

Ejection cover

Screws

Figure 1-3-109

4. Close the conveying cover and the frontcover.

5. Remove the two screws and then remove theejection cover with the mounting plate.

6. Remove the two screws and then remove theinner ejection cover.

Figure 1-3-110

Screws

Inner ejectioncover

7. Remove the screw located at the front of thestatic charge eliminator of the copier, fit theflat spring ejection from the lower side, andsecure it with the removed screw.

Screw

Flat spring ejection

Figure 1-3-110-1

2DF

1-3-52

8. Remove the blue screw from the transfer unitand then remove the mounting plate.

9. Remove the securing tape from the 13-pinconnector, pass the wire under the staplermotor, and connect the wire with the 13-pinconnector.

10. Insert the transfer unit into the copier from thefront side and slide it to the left.Secure the unit using two +TP-A bronzescrews M3 × 05 and the pin that has beenfitted to the transfer unit.

11. Insert the metal hook of the transfer unit intothe oblong hole of the frame of the copier andsecure it using a +TP-A bronze screw M3 ×05.* Insert the projection of the frame into the

hole of the metal hook to position the hook.* Arrange the cable to position it under the

metal fittings.

Figure 1-3-110-2

Figure 1-3-111

Figure 1-3-112

Transfer unit

+TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05

+TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05 Pin

Hook

+TP-A bronzescrew M3 × 05

Metal fittingsOblong hole

Projection

Hole

Cable

Transfer unit

13-pin connector

Mounting plate

Blue screw

Securing tape

2DF

1-3-53

12. Remove a screw, turn the metal fittingsupward, and fit the screw again to the lowerhole.

Metal fittings

Screw

Screw

Connector (white)

Intermediate tray

Connector (gray)

Recessed porton

Intermediate tray

PinRecessed portion

Transfer unit

Figure 1-3-113

Figure 1-3-115

13. Insert the intermediate tray and connect theconnector (white) of the intermediate tray tothe transfer unit. Connect the connectors(gray) to the connectors of the copier asshown in the illustration.Connect the gray connector with more pins tothe upper connector and the gray connectorwith less pins to the lower connector.

14. Attach the intermediate tray to the copier asshown in the illustration so that the right andleft pins of the intermediate tray arepositioned to the recessed portions of thecopier and the transfer unit.

Figure 1-3-114

2DF

1-3-54

Figure 1-3-116

Figure 1-3-117

Figure 1-3-118

15. Attach the large ejection cover using the twoscrews that have secured the upper left cover.

16. Open the front cover and the conveyingcover.

17. Attach the staple cover.* Tighten the two screws on the left side to

secure the cover with the copier, secure thefront side using the screw that has beenremoved in step 3, and secure the right sideusing a +TP-A chrome screw M3 × 05.

18. Close the conveying cover and the frontcover. Attach the front ejection cover and therear ejection cover using a +TP-A chromescrew M3 × 05 each.

Staple cover

+TP-A chrome screw M3 × 05

Large ejectioncover


Rear ejection cover


Front ejection cover

2DF

1-3-55

19. Attach the copy tray.

20. Open the staple cover and insert the staplecartridge into the stapler.

21. Close the staple cover.22. Insert the power plug of the copier into an

outlet and turn the main switch on.23. Select the staple mode and make a stapled

copy to check that stapling is performedproperly.

Copy tray

Staple cartridge

Staple cover

Figure 1-3-119

Figure 1-3-120

2DF

1-3-56

1-3-15 Installing the job separator (option)

Preparation1. Insert the LED PCB into the job separator

and connect the 2-pin connector of the LEDPCB into the 2-pin connector of the jobseparator.

* Arrange the wire into the two grooves of thejob separator.

Figure 1-3-121

Figure 1-3-122

5. Remove the two screws and remove theejection cover with the mounting plate.

Screws

Screw

Hook

Left frontcover

Ejection cover

Screws

2. Open the conveying cover and the frontcover.

3. Loosen the two left screws on the left side,remove the screw on the front side, open thehook on the right side, and remove the leftfront cover.

4. Close the conveying cover and the frontcover.

Figure 1-3-120-1

Job separator

2-pin connector 2-pin connector

LED PCB

Grooves

2DF

1-3-57

Figure 1-3-123

Inner ejectioncover

Screws

6. Remove the two screws and then remove theinner ejection cover.

7. Insert the job separator into the copier fromthe front side and slide it to the left. Securethe front side using a +TP-A bronze screw M3× 05 and the rear side using a pin.* Check to see if the branch pressure lever on

the rear side of the job separator haslowered.

Figure 1-3-124

Job separator+TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05

Pin

2DF

1-3-58

8. Connect the connector of the job separator tothe lower connector of the copier.

9. Attach the job separator tray to the rail of thejob separator by sliding it from the front side.* Insert the fitting section on the right side of

the job separator tray into the recessedportion of the copier.

* Put the hook on the right side onto the pin.10. Open the left transfer cover and the front

cover. Fit the left front cover JS to the locationto which the upper front cover that has beenremoved in step 3 was fitted.

Figure 1-3-125

Connector

Connector of the copier

left front cover JS

Hook

Recessed portion

Fitting section

Pin

Job separatortray

Rail

11. Insert the power plug of the copier into anoutlet and turn the main switch on.

12. Set the “copy ejection location” of themachine default settings to job separator.

13. Make a test copy to check that a copy isejected to the job separator tray.

Figure 1-3-126

2DF

1-3-59

1-3-16 Installing the Network Facsimile System (option)

Procedure1. Remove 13 screws and take off the rear

cover.




Figure 1-3-128

Rear cover

Screws

Screws

Printer system

Screws

Shield cover

Figure 1-3-127

Figure 1-3-129

2DF

1-3-60

4. Move the film out of the way to the left, andfasten the fax board into place using four M3× 06 chrome binding screws.

Film

M3 × 06 chrome binding screwsFax board

5. Connect the NCU cable to connector CN1 onthe NCU board assembly.

CN1

NCU cable

NCU board assembly

6. Fasten the NCU board assembly into placefrom the bottom with two M3 × 06 chromebinding screws.

7. Connect the three connectors from the NCUboard assembly to the correspondingconnectors on the fax board, as follows:• Speaker 2-pin connector → YC7• NCU board connector → YC3• Battery connector → YC6

YC7 YC6YC3

Speaker 2-pin connector Battery connector

NCU board connector

NCU board assembly


Figure 1-3-130

Figure 1-3-131

Figure 1-3-132

2DF

1-3-61

8. Remove the film that fixes the three positiveconnectors of the power source PCB from theoptional interface mounting plate.Important: Dispose of the film that has beenremoved.

Film

Optional interface mounting plate

Figure 1-3-133

9. Connect the FAX-PCB-Power cable toconnector CN1 on the auxiliary power sourcePCB assembly.

CN1

FAX-PCB-Power cable

CN1

Auxiliary power source PCB assembly

Figure 1-3-134

10. Connect the three positive connectors on thepower board to the corresponding connectorson the auxiliary power source PCB assembly,as follows.• White positive connector → TB1 (white)• Green positive connector → TB2 (green)• Small white positive connector → TB3

TB3

TB1

TB2

White positive connector


Small white positive connector

Green positive connector

Figure 1-3-135

2DF

1-3-62

11. Fit the catch on the auxiliary power unit intothe mount hole in the copier, and fasten theauxiliary power unit into place with one M3 ×06 chrome binding screw.

Catch


Mount hole

Figure 1-3-136

12. Through the opening of controller-box abovethe speaker, connect the FAX-PCB-Powercable on the auxiliary power source PCBassembly to connector YC8 on the fax board.

13. Connect the 2-pin connector to the 2-pinconnector with green cable.

FAX-PCB-Power cable


YC8

Opening

2-pin connector with green cable

2-pin connector

Fax board

Figure 1-3-137

14. Unlock YC1 on the fax board by pulling itsconnector housing.

15. Hold the fax cable with its conductive sidefacing up, insert it into connector YC1, thenpush the housing back in to lock theconnector.

16. Hold the other end of the fax cable with itsconductive side facing down, and connect itto connector CN44 on the main PCB. (Pullthe CN44 housing out to release theconnector lock, then insert the cable, andthen push the housing back in.)Important: Be sure to push the fax cable allthe way in, and be sure that the connection isstraight. A poor connection may result in avariety of problems.

Figure 1-3-138

CN44

YC1Fax board

Fax cable

YC1

CN44

2DF

1-3-63

18. Remove 1 screw and take off the modularcover.

Figure 1-3-139

19. Hang the modular cover onto the holes on thecontroller-box cover, and fasten it into placewith 1 screw.

Screw

Modular cover

Screw

Holes

Modular cover

Figure 1-3-140


Figure 1-3-141

Shield cover

Screws

2DF

1-3-64



Screws

Printing system

Figure 1-3-142

21. Reattach the rear cover with 13 screws. Rear cover

Screws

Figure 1-3-143

22. Adhere the certification labels to the rearcover at the locations indicated in theillustration (only 120 V Spac.).

Certification labels

Figure 1-3-144

2DF

1-3-65

23. Take the power label from the fax-kit labelsheet, and adhere it to the copier directlyunder the main switch.

24. Take the alphabet labels from the fax-lit labelsheet, and adhere them above thecorresponding numeric keys on the operationpanel.

• In Asia, use the “PQRS TUV WXYZ” label,and do not use the “PRS TUV WXZ” and“OPER” labels.

25. Connect the L terminal to the phone circuitusing a modular connector cable.Important: On 120 V systems, use theincluded modular connector cable to makethe connection.

26. After installation is complete, the fax boardmust be initialized (see the P.1-3-42).

Figure 1-3-145

Power label

Main switch

1

4

7

5 6

98

0

2 3

ABC DEF

MNOJKL

PQRS TUV

OPER

WXYZ

Reset

Stop/Clear

S

Start


Figure 1-3-146

Modular connector cable

L terminal

L

Figure 1-3-147

2DF

1-4-1

1-4-1 Maintenance mode

The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys.

Enter “001” using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys

and press the start key.

Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys

or numeric keys.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop/clear key.

Press the start key.

Start

End

Maintenance mode is entered.

The maintenance item is selected.

Maintenance mode is exited.

Repeat the same maintenance item?

Run another maintenance item?

No

No

Yes

Yes

2DF

1-4-2

General

Initialization

Drive, paperfeed, paperconveying andcooling system

U000 Outputting an own-status report —

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode —

U003 Setting the service telephone number ***************U004 Setting the machine number 000000

U005 Copying without paper —

U019 Displaying the ROM version —

U020 Initializing all data —

U021 Initializing counters and mode settings —

U022 Initializing data for optical system —

U030 Checking motor operation —

U031 Checking switches for paper conveying —

U032 Checking clutch operation —

U033 Checking solenoid operation —

U034 Adjusting the print start timing• Adjusting the leading edge registration 0.5/0/-0.1• Adjusting the center line 7.2/0

U035 Setting folio size• Length/Width 330• Width 210

U038 Checking the copier cover switch —

U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper• Regist data 0/0/0• Feed data 110/20/0/0/0/0

U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed• Drive motor 7• Eject motor 9• Polygon motor 0

U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties 11

U061 Turning the exposure lamp on —

U063 Adjusting the shading position 0

U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction 0/-2

U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the 7/0contact glass

U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass -18/0

U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF 0

U070 Adjusting the DF magnification -3

U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing• DF leading edge registration/DF trailing edge registration 8/0

U072 Adjusting the DF center line 15

U073 Checking scanner operation —

U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity 1

U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off On

U088 Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode) Off

U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern —

U091 Checking shading —

U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically —

U093 Setting the exposure density gradient• Text and photo/text/photo/text in fax/photo in fax mode 0/0/0/2/3

U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor —

* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

SectionItem

Maintenance item contentsInitial

No. setting*

(2) Maintenance mode item list

Optical

2DF

1-4-3

SectionItem


No. setting*U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage 184

U101 Setting high voltages• Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation 0• Developing bias AC component duty at image formation 0• Developing shift bias potential at image formation 0• Transfer control voltage 120

U109 Drum type display —

U110 Checking/clearing the drum count —

U112 Setting toner refresh operation• Time of toner refreshment/Developing bias on time 120/700

U113 Operating the drum refreshment —

U130 Initial setting for the developer —

U144 Setting toner loading operation MODE2

U150 Checking sensors and switches for toner —

U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time —

U158 Checking/clearing the developing count —

U161 Setting the fixing control temperature• Control temperature during copying 165• Primary stabilization fixing temperature 110• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 110• OFF time of fixing heater M 12

U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly —

U163 Resetting the fixing problem data —

U165 Checking/clearing fixing counts —

U196 Turning the fixing heater on —

U199 Checking the fixing temperature —

U200 Turning all LEDs on —

U201 Initializing the touch panel —

U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system —

U203 Operating DF separately —

U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter —

U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender —

U207 Checking the operation panel keys —

U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck A4

U211 Setting DF type —

U217 Setting 81/2" × 13" paper —

U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher —

U237 Setting finisher stack quantity —

U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch —

U244 Checking the DF switches —

U245 Checking messages —

U246 Setting the finisher• Amount of slack in the paper 0• Booklet stapling position adjustment 0• Side registration cursor stop position 0

U247 Checking the operation of large paper deck and paper feed desk —

U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices —

U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 500000 (35/40 cpm)400000 (25 cpm)

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count —

U252 Setting the destination Japan


High voltage

Developing

Fixing andcleaning

Operationpanel andsupportequipmen

Mode setting

SectionItem


No. setting*

2DF

1-4-4

U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count

U254 Turning auto start function on/off On

U255 Setting auto clear time 90

U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off On

U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Single mode,70

U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection

U264 Setting the display order of the date Inchspecifications:

MONTH-DATE-YEARMetric

specifications:DATE-MONTH-YEAR

U265 Setting OEM purchaser code —

U274 Setting the laser scanner unit type 0

U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy On/On

U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation —

U331 Switching the finisher eject section OFF

U332 Setting the size conversion factor —

U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function —

U342 Setting the ejection restriction On

U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off

U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode ENERGY STAR

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication —

U346 Setting the sleep mode operation MODE0

U402 Adjusting margins of image printing —

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass —

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF —

U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 0

U500 Setting the limit on data size for e-mail transmission LITTLE

U501 Setting image area ON

U504 Initializing the scanner NIC —

U505 Setting Data Base Assistant On

U540 Adjusting the auxiliary scanning magnification 0

U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations —

U902 Checking/clearing finisher punch count 20000

U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts —

U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts —

U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices —

U906 Resetting partial operation control —

U908 Changing the total counter value —

U910 Clearing the black ratio data —

U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes —

U937 Model name setting **30

U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list —

U968 Shading plate switching setting —

U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light —

U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count —

U992 Checking or clearing the printer/fax count —

U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern —


Mode setting

Imageprocessing

Others

1-4-5

2DF

U000 Outputting an own-status report

DescriptionOutputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.

PurposeTo check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items toreenter the settings after initialization or replacement.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be output. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Output list

MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modesJAM List of the paper jam occurrencesSERVICE CALL List of the service call occurrences

3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

DescriptionExits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.

PurposeTo exit the maintenance mode.

MethodPress the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.

(3) Contents of maintenance mode items

MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.


2DF

1-4-6

U003 Setting the service telephone number

DescriptionSets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.

PurposeTo set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.

MethodPress the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.

Setting1. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys.

• To enter symbols such as hyphens and parentheses, select as required from the symbols displayed onthe touch panel as shown below. To move the cursor, press LEFT or RIGHT in the bottom row.

*(-

LEFT

#)

(Space)RIGHT

2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U004 Setting the machine number

DescriptionDisplays and changes the machine number.

PurposeTo check or set the machine number.

MethodPress the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.

Setting1. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric key.

Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.2. Press the start key. The machine number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is

displayed.


2DF

1-4-7


U005 Copying without paper

DescriptionSimulates the copy operation without paper feed.

PurposeTo check the overall operation of the machine.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Operation

PPC Only the copier operates.PPC + DF Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).

3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be

made.• Paper feed locations• Magnifications• Simplex or duplex copy mode• Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex

copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting.• Copy density• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key

5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paperpresent, the paper feed pulley does not operate.

6. Press the start key. The operation starts.Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, thescreen for selecting an item is displayed.

7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.


U019 Displaying the ROM versionDescriptionDisplays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.

PurposeTo check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number.

MethodPress the start key. The last eight digits of the part number indicating the ROM version are displayed.

Display Description

MAIN Main ROM ICMMI Operation ROM ICLANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM ICLANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM ICMAIN BOOT Boot of main ROM ICMMI BOOT Boot of operation ROM ICNETWORK SCANNER Network scanner ROM IC

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


2DF

1-4-8

U020 Initializing all data

DescriptionInitializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.

PurposeUsed when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for Japan

specifications are set.When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the mainswitch is turned on and the display language to the initial setting of English.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.

U021 Initializing counters and mode settings

DescriptionInitializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM accordingto the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.

PurposeUsed to return the machine settings to the factory settings.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is

initialized based on the destination setting.


U022 Initializing data for optical system

DescriptionInitializes only the data set for the optical section.

PurposeTo be executed after replacing the scanner unit.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press SCANNER on the touch panel.3. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.4. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067, U088 to 099, U403, U990 and U991) is

initialized.


2DF

1-4-9


U030 Checking motor operation

DescriptionDrives each motor.

PurposeTo check the operation of each motor.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.

Display Operation

FEED Paper feed motor operatesMAIN Drive motor operatesEJECT(FW) Eject motor rotates forwardEJECT(REV) Eject motor rotates in reverse

3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U031 Checking switches for paper conveying

DescriptionDisplays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.

PurposeTo check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.

Method1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.

When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.

Display Switches

F1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1)F2 Feed switch 2 (FSW2)F3 Feed switch 3 (FSW3)BYP Bypass feed switch (BYPFSW)RES Registration switch (RSW)EJE Eject switch (ESW)BRA Feedshift switch (FSSW)DUP Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*JOB Job separator eject switch (JBESW)*

*Optional.



2DF

1-4-10

U032 Checking clutch operation

DescriptionTurns each clutch on.

PurposeTo check the operation of each clutch.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the clutch to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the clutch turns on for 1 s.

Display Clutches

PF1 Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)PF2 Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)PFBYP Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)FEED1 Feed clutch 1 (FCL1)FEED2 Feed clutch 2 (FCL2)FEED3 Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)BYPF Bypass feed clutch (BYPFCL)RES Registration clutch (RCL)DUPF Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)*

*Optinal.


U033 Checking solenoid operation

DescriptionTurns each solenoid on.

PurposeTo check the operation of each solenoid.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the solenoid turns on for

1 s.

Display Solenoids

TONER SOL Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL)BRANCH1 SOL Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)BRANCH2 SOL Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)*MAIN SW SOL Main switch turns on

*Optional.Select MAIN SW SOL to check the operation of the main switch in auto shut off.


U034 Adjusting the print start timing

AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-10 and 12.

2DF

1-4-11


U035 Setting folio size

DescriptionChanges the image area for copying onto folio size paper.

PurposeTo prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting theactual size of the folio paper used.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Setting1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Setting Setting range Initial setting

LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210

3. Press the start key. The value is set.


U038 Checking the copier cover switch

DescriptionDisplays the on-off status of each cover switch.

PurposeTo check if the switches of covers operate correctly.

Method1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.2. Open and close each cover to check the status of each switch.

When the cover is closed, the switch shall be displayed in reverse. When the cover is open, the switch shallbe displayed normally.

Display Switches

INTER LOCK SW Safty switch 1 and 2 (SSW1 and 2)FRONT COVER Front cover switch (FRCSW)LEFT1 COVER Conveying cover switch (CCSW)LEFT2 COVER Side cover switch (SCSW)


U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

AdjustmentSee page 1-6-14.


2DF

1-4-12

U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

DescriptionPerforms fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.

PurposeUsed to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.



Display Description Setting range Initial setting

MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 7EJECT MOTOR Eject motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 9POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment -20 to +20 0

MAIN MOTOR /EJECT MOTORIncreasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makesthe image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.POLYGON MOTORIncreasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliaryscanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction andlonger in the auxiliary scanning direction.EJECT MOTORNormally no change is necessary but this can be used as countermeasures against wrinkles (waving) ofpaper.


Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.Correct values for an A3/11" × 17" output are:A = 300 ± 1.5 mmB = 260 ± 1.0 mm

Figure 1-4-1

Adjustment1. Output an A3/11" × 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are

different from the correct sizes:A: Drive motor speed adjustmentB: Polygon motor speed adjustment


2DF

1-4-13


U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties

DescriptionAdjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.

PurposeUsed when the entire image appears too dark or light.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.

Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Descrition Setting range Initial setting

Image scannnig density 0 to +24 11

Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.


CautionThe following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:• Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)• Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode

U061 Turning the exposure lamp on

DescriptionTurns the exposure lamp on.

PurposeTo check the exposure lamp.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.



2DF

1-4-14

U063 Adjusting the shading position

DescriptionChanges the shading position.

PurposeUsed when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This isdue to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changedso that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step

Shading position –5 to +5 0 0.17 mm

Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves theposition toward the machine left.



CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification

AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-27 and 28.

U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass


U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass


U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF

DescriptionAdjusts the position for scanning originals from the DF.

PurposeUsed when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DFis used.




Scanning position –2 to +3 0 0.254 mm

Increasing the setting moves the image backward, and decreasing it moves the image forward.2. Press the start key. The value is set.


2DF

1-4-15


U070 Adjusting the DF magnification

DescriptionAdjusts the DF original scanning speed.

PurposeTo be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optionalDF is used.

CautionBefore making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

U053 U065 U070




Original conveying motor speed –25 to +25 –3 0.1%

Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it makes the image shorter.2. Press the start key. The value is set.




2DF

1-4-16

U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing

DescriptionAdjusts the DF original scanning timing.

PurposeTo be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copyimage when the optional DF is used.


U034 U066 U071



Display Description Setting range Initial settingChange invalue per step

LEAD EDGE ADJ DF leading edge registration –20 to +20 8 0.17 mmTRAIL EDGE ADJ DF trailing edge registration –10 to +10 0 0.17 mm

Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image forward.3. Press the start key. The value is set.


Adjustment1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DF.2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows.

For copy example 1, increase the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.For copy example 2, decrease the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.

Original Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-4-2


2DF

1-4-17


U072 Adjusting the DF center line

DescriptionAdjusts the scanning start position for the DF original.

PurposeTo be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when theoptional DF is used.


U034 U067 U072




DF center line –39 to +39 15 0.17 mm

Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it moves the image to the left.2. Press the start key. The value is set.


Adjustment1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DF.2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows.

For copy example 1, increase the setting.For copy example 2, decrease the setting.


Copy example 2

Reference

Figure 1-4-3



2DF

1-4-18

U073 Checking scanner operation

DescriptionSimulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.

PurposeTo check scanner operation.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be changed. The selected item is displayed in reverse.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Operating conditions Setting range

ZOOM Magnification 100 to 400%SIZE Original size See below.LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)

Original sizes for each setting in SIZE

Setting Paper size Setting Paper size

8 A4 42 A5R9 B5 47 Folio24 11" × 81/2" 52 11" × 17"36 A3 53 11" × 15"39 B4 55 81/2" × 14"40 A4R 56 81/2" × 11"41 B5R 58 51/2" × 81/2"

4. Press the strat key. The setting is set.5. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.7. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity

DescriptionAdjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the optional DF.

PurposeUsed if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass andwhen scanning an original from the DF.



Description Setting range Initial setting

DF input light luminosity 0 to 8 1

Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.2. Press the start key. The value is set.



2DF

1-4-19


U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off

DescriptionTurns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF original scanning position is adjustedautomatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the referencedata for identifying dust.

ReferenceIn the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparingthe scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DF originalscanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.

PurposeUsed to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slitglass when the DF is used.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set and press the start key.

Display Description

ON/OFF Setting the mode on/offDATA Setting the reference data for identifying dust

Setting the mode on/off1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

ON DF scanning position adjust mode onOFF DF scanning position adjust mode off

Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Setting the reference data for identifying dustAvailable only when the mode is turned on.1.Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


Minimum density to be regarded as dust 10 to 95 35

ExampleThe figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data ofthe level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scandata taken when there is no original).

2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.



2DF

1-4-20

U088 Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode)

DescriptionTurns moiré reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off.

PurposeUsed to prevent regular density unevenness (moiré) on halftone image areas of the copy image in text modeand text and photo mode. Such moiré is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is madein text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.


Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

ON Moiré reduction modeOFF Normal copy mode

Initial setting: OFFIf moiré on the copy image is significant, change the setting to ON. Note that when the moiré reductionmode is turned on, the resolution may be slightly reduced.

2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern

DescriptionSelects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the copier.

PurposeWhen performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that ofthe scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output.

Display Description Adjusting range

GRAYSCALE Gray scale –MONO-LEVEL Mono level 0 to 255256-LEVEL 256 level –1dot-LINE 1 dot level –

3. Press the interrupt key to set the pattern output mode.4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.


2DF

1-4-21


U091 Checking shading

DescriptionPerforms scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the originalscanning values at nine points of the contact glass.

PurposeTo check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decidethe causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shadingor CCD) or other problems.Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

SHD BEFORE Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.SHD AFTER Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.

3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightlydifferent from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there shouldbe no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rearindicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) iscaused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).If a black line appears, the cause may assumed to be based on the results of the scanning operation beforeshading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation aftershading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possibleto use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning atthe limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.

20 mm from the machine left



Machine center100 mm from the machine center toward machine front

100 mm from the machine center toward machine rear

Figure 1-4-4

4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for entering a maintenance item isdisplayed.


2DF

1-4-22

U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically

DescriptionMakes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)• Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.

PurposeUsed to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.

Method1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A068020) on the contact glass.2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is

displayed.

Display Description

SCAN CENTER Scanner center lineSCAN TIMING Scanner leading edge registrationSUB SCAN Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction

If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed andoperation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedurefrom the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenanceitems.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.

2DF

1-4-23


U093 Setting the exposure density gradient

DescriptionChanges the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,text and photo, photo, text in fax mode, photo in fax mode).

PurposeTo set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used tomake copy image darker or lighter.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the image mode to be adjusted and press the start key. The screen for the selected item is

displayed.

Display Description

MIXED Density in text and photo modeTEXT Density in text modePHOTO Density in photo modeFAX TEXT Density in the text in fax modeFAX PHOTO Density in the photo in fax mode

Setting1. Select the item to be adjusted. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

DARKER Change in density when manual density is set darkLIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light

2. Adjust the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Setting range Initial setting

MIXED DARKER/MIXED LIGHTER 0 to 3/0 to 3 0/0TEXT DARKER/TEXT LIGHTER 0 to 3/0 to 3 0/0PHOTO DARKER/PHOTO LIGHTER 0 to 3/0 to 3 0/0FAX TEXT DARKER/FAX TEXT LIGHTER 0 to 4/0 to 9 2/2FAX PHOTO DARKER/FAX PHOTO LIGHTER 0 to 6/0 to 6 3/3

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.

Image density

Density adjustment

Dark

Light

Light Center Dark

Setting: 0Setting: 3

Set to DARKER

Set to LIGHTER

Figure 1-4-5 Exposure density gradient





2DF

1-4-24

U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor

DescriptionChecks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.

PurposeTo adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensormalfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select an item and press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.

Display Description

DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission dataB/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value

Setting original size judgment time

Method to display the data for the sensor1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed.

: 123 123 123

: 123 123 123

: 255 255 255

Rear of machine

Center of machine

Front of machine

Figure 1-4-6


Setting1. Select an item to be set.


LEVEL Detection sensor threshold value 0 to 255 170WAIT TIME Original size judgment time* 0 to 100 50ORIG. AREA Original size detection position display (mm) 0 to 350 –SIZE Detected original size display 0 to 63 –

* Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment

Method to set the detection threshold value1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.

* A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity, and a smaller value decreases it.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Method to set the original size judgment time1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.

* A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

2DF

1-4-25


U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage

DescriptionPerforms main charging.

PurposeTo check main charging.

StartPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Display Description

MC ON Turning the main charger onON TIME(SEC) Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off

Method1. Select the item to be operated.2. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U101 Setting high voltages

DescriptionChanges the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage andtransfer control voltage.

PurposeTo check the developing bias and the transfer voltage or to take measures against drop of image density orbackground fog.




DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency -255 to 255 0at image formation

DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty -100 to 100 0at image formation

DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential -1 to 1 0at image formation

TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 255 120

Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltagelower.





2DF

1-4-26

U109 Drum type display

DescriptionDisplays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit.

PurposeTo check the drum surface potential.

MethodPress the start key.* Drum surface potential (V) is displayed.


U110 Checking/clearing the drum count

DescriptionDisplays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the main charger potential output.

PurposeTo check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.

MethodPress the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.

Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.

U112 Setting toner refresh operation

DescriptionSets the drum refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying.

PurposeTo change the drum refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying ifimage flow level is low.




ON TIME(SEC) Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 (sec) 120BIAS TIME(MSEC) Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 (msec) 700



2DF

1-4-27


U113 Performing drum refresh operation

DescriptionExecutes drum refresh operation.

PurposeTo operate when image flow occurs.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. Drum refresh operation starts. (approximately 3 minutes)3. To stop the operation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

U130 Initial setting for the developer

DescriptionReplenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed.

PurposeTo operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The time that elapses until initialization is complete and whether or not toner remains in

the developing unit (0: No, 1: Yes) are displayed.

SupplementThe following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:• Clearing the developing drive time (U157)• Clearing the developing count (U158)• Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection

CompletionPress the stop/clear key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

U144 Setting toner loading operation

DescriptionSets toner loading operation after completion of copying.

PurposeTo set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessaryfrom the initial setting.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item. The selected item is displayed im reverse.

Display Description

MODE0 Toner not loadedMODE1 Toner not loadedMODE2 Toner loaded

Initial setting: MODE23. Press the start key. The value is set.



2DF

1-4-28

U150 Checking sensors and switches for toner

DescriptionDisplays the on-off status of each sensor or switch related to toner.

PurposeTo check if the sensors and switches operate correctly.

Method1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.

When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.

Display Switches

DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor (TNS)CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch (TCDSW)CONTAINER SENSOR Toner container sensor (TCS)DISPOSAL TANK SET Toner disposal tank detection switch (TDDSW)DISPOSAL TANK SENSOR Overflow sensor (OFS)


U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time

DescriptionDisplays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a referencewhen correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.

PurposeTo check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit.

MethodPress the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.

Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Setting1. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.

2DF

1-4-29


U158 Checking/clearing the developing count

DescriptionDisplays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.

PurposeTo check the developing count after replacing the developing unit.

MethodPress the start key. The developing count is displayed.


Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.

U161 Setting the fixing control temperature

DescriptionChanges the fixing control temperature.

PurposeNormally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve afixing problem on thick paper.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set. The screen for executing each item is displayed.

Display Description

CONTROL TEMP Sets the fixing control temperature.CORRECT TEMP Sets the fixing correct temperature.

Setting the fixing control temperature1. Select the item to be set. The selecting item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


CONT TEMP Control temperature during copying 100 to 200 (°C) 1651ST TEMP Primary stabilization fixing temperature 80 to 200 (°C) 1102ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 100 to 200 (°C) 165MH OFF TIME(S) OFF time of fixing heater M 5 to 20 12

The respective temperatures are to be set such that 2ND TEMP >= 1ST TEMP.If fixing offset occurs due to excessive fixing temperature, you can increase the preset value of MH OFFTIME(S) to increase the OFF time of fixing heater M to solve this problem.



2DF

1-4-30

U161 Setting the fixing correct temperature1. Select the item to be set. The selecting item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


COPY UP TEMP(L) Fixing correct temperature -30 to +30 (°C) 5for large size copying

COPY UP TEMP(M) Fixing correct temperature -30 to +30 (°C) 2for middle size copying

COPY UP TEMP(S) Fixing correct temperature -30 to +30 (°C) 0for small size copying

L/L UP TEMP Fixing temperature increase amount 0 to +20 (°C) 5at low temperature and low humidity

H/H DOWN TEMP Fixing temperature decrease amount 0 to +20 (°C) 5at high temperature and high humidity

DUP DOWN TEMP Fixing temperature decrease amount 0 to +20 (°C) 5for duplex copying


Interrrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.


U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly

DescriptionStops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.

PurposeTo forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless

of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key.The screenfor selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U163 Resetting the fixing problem data

DescriptionResets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.

PurposeTo prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press CANCEL on the touch panel.3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.


2DF

1-4-31


U165 Checking/clearing fixing counts

DescriptionDisplays or clears fixing counts.

PurposeTo check fixing counts after replacing the fixing unit.

MethodPress the start key. The fixing counts are displayed.


Setting1. Enter a four-digit value using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U196 Turning the fixing heater on

DescriptionTurns the fixing heater M or S on.

PurposeTo check fixing heaters turning on.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the heater to be turned on. The selected heater turns on for 3 s and then turns off.

Display Description

MAIN Fixing heater M (FH-M)SUB Fixing heater S (FH-S)

CompletionPress the stop/clear key when fixing motors M and S are off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No.is displayed.

U199 Checking the fixing temperature

DescriptionDisplays the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity.

PurposeTo check the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity.

MethodPress the start key. The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (°C) and theabsolute humidity is displayed in percentage (%).

Display Description

FIX TEMP Fixing temperature (°C)SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature (°C)HUMIDITY Absolute humidity (%)



2DF

1-4-32

U200 Turning all LEDs on

DescriptionTurns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.

PurposeTo check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.

MethodPress the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance itemNo. is displayed.

U201 Initializing the touch panel

DescriptionAutomatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.

PurposeTo automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed, and the + key displayed at the upper left of the

touch panel flashes.2. Press on the center of the + key. The + key on lower right flashes.3. Press the center of the flashing +. Initialization of the touch panel is complete, and the screen for selecting

a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without initializing, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance mode No. is displayed.

U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system

DescriptionInitializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no settingis necessary.

2DF

1-4-33


U203 Operating DF separately

DescriptionSimulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DF.

PurposeTo check the DF.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.3. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.4. Select the magnification using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Operation Setting range Initial setting

ADF With paper, single-sided original 50 to 200 (%) 100RADF With paper, double-sided original 50 to 200 (%) 100ADF (NON-P) Without paper, single-sided original 50 to 200 (%) 100

(continuous operation)RADF (NON-P) Without paper, double-sided original 50 to 200 (%) 100

(continuous operation)

5. Press the start key. The operation starts for the selected magnification.6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.

U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter

DescriptionSets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.

PurposeTo run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed

Setting1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected counter is

displayed in reverse.

Display Description

KEY-CARD The key card is installedKEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed

2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.



2DF

1-4-34

U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender

DescriptionSets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, suchas mode and unit price.This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no settingis necessary.

U207 Checking the operation panel keys

DescriptionChecks operation of the operation panel keys.

PurposeTo check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. "COUNT1" is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.

3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom,the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressedand if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in thatline will light.

4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.


U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck

DescriptionSets the size of paper used in the optional large paper deck. Note that the setting cannot be changed on inch-specification machines since the paper size for the large paper deck is fixed.

PurposeTo change the setting when the size of paper used in the large paper deck is changed.


Setting1. Select the paper size (A4 or B5). The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Initial setting: A42. Press the start key. The setting is set.


U211 Setting DF type

DescrioptionSets the optional DF type (STDF or SRDF). (For 25 cpm copier only)

PurposeTo set DF type when installing.


Setting1. Select DF type. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

SADF Single-sided (STDF)SRADF Double-sided (SRDF)

2. Press the start key. The type is set.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No. is displayed.

2DF

1-4-35


U217 Setting 81/2" ××××× 13" paper

DescriptionTurn on the setting when using 81/2" × 13" paper.

PurposeTo change the setting as needed.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for selscting an item is displayed.


Display Description

ON 81/2" × 13" paper is used.OFF 81/2" × 13" paper is not used.

2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher

DescriptionIf the machine is equipped with an optional built-in finisher, this mode sets whether A5/51/2 × 81/2 size paper isoutput to the machine internal tray or not.

PurposeIf the machine is equipped with an optional built-in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in thebuilt-in ejection section when two-sided copying onto A5/51/2 × 81/2 size paper is performed, this mode is usedto change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine internal tray.



Display Description

ON Does not eject to the machine internal tray.OFF Eject to the machine internal tray.

Initial setting: OFF2. Press the start key. The setting is set.



2DF

1-4-36

U237 Setting finisher stack quantity

DescriptionSets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the intermediate tray in the optional finisher.

PurposeTo change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main trayMIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the intermediate tray for sort

copying or staple copying

Setting the number of sheets of stack on the main tray1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Setting Description

0 3000-sheet finisher: 3000 sheets, built-in finisher: 500 sheets1 3000-sheet finisher: 1500 sheets, built-in finisher: 250 sheets

Initial setting: 02. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting the number of sheets of stack on the intermediate tray for sort copying or staple copying1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Setting Description

0 For sort copying: 30 sheets, for staple copying: 50 sheets1 For sort copying: 30 sheets, for staple copying: 30 sheets

Initial setting: 02. Press the start key. The setting is set.


1-4-35-1

1-4-37

2DF



2DF

1-4-36

U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch

DescriptionTurns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the optional DF on.

PurposeTo check the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch .

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.

Display Motors, solenoids and clutch Operation In operation

F MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operationC MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) On for 0.5 sFD CL Original feed clutch (OFCL) On for 0.5 sEJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) On for 0.5 sRJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 sFD SL Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) On and offRP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On and off

3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U244 Checking the DF switches

DescriptionDisplays the status of the respective switches in the optional DF.

PurposeTo check if respective switches in the optional DF operate correctly.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.

Display Type of switches

SW On/off switchesVR Volume switch

Method for the on/off switches1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.

If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.

Display Switches

SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW)REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)TMG SW DF timing switch (DFTSW)SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)


2DF

1-4-37


U244 Method for the volume switch1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.

The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.

Numerical value

A5R

B5R

Folio/A4R

B4/B5

CF (11" × 15")

A3/A4

Original width to be detected

51/2" × 81/2"

81/2" × 14"/81/2" × 11"

11" × 17"/11" × 15"/11" × 81/2"

000

49.664

50.176

61.440

61.952

103.936

104.448

139.264

139.776

146.432

146.994

197.120

197.632

197.720

223.232

256

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

····

For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are adjustedfor A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.




2DF

1-4-38

U245 Checking messages

DescriptionDisplays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.

PurposeTo check the messages to be displayed.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the item to be displayed.3. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time.

When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the messagecorresponding the specified number is displayed.


U246 Setting the finisher

DescriptionAdjusts various items if the machine is equipped with an optional finisher.3000-sheet finisher: Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode.Booklet stitcher: Adjusts the booklet stapling position for each paper size.Built-in finisher: Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position in the staple sort mode.

PurposeAdjusts the amount of slack in the paper while in the punch section if, in punch mode, paper jams or is Z-foldedfrequently due to too much slack in the paper, or, the position of punch holes varies due to too little slack in thepaper.Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.To adjust when registration is not proper or staple position is shifted in the staple sort mode.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set and press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.

Display Description

3000 FINISHER Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch modeSADDLE FINISHER Adjustment of the booklet stapling positionINNER FINISHER Side registration cursor stop position

Setting the amount of slack in the paper1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


Amount of slack in the paper -15 to +15 0

If the position of punch holes varies, increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger.If paper jams or is Z-folded frequently, decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller.


Setting the booklet stapling position1. Select the size to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Description Setting range Initial settingChange in valueper step

A4R/LTR Adjustment of booklet stapling –125 to +125 0 0.25 mmposition for A4R/LTR size

B4R Adjustment of booklet stapling –125 to +125 0 0.25 mmposition for B4R size

A3R/LDR Adjustment of booklet stapling –125 to +125 0 0.25 mmposition for A3R/LDR size

2DF

1-4-39


U246

Left stapling Right stapling Adjustment method

Proper

Decrease the preset value.

Increase the preset value.

Upper side is longer. Lower side is longer.

Lower side is longer. Upper side is longer.


Setting the side registration cursor stop position1. Select the desired cursor position. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0




2DF

1-4-40

U247 Checking the operation of large paper deck and paper feed desk

DescriptionTurns on motors and clutches of optional large paper deck or paper feed desk.

PurposeTo check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the device to be checked.

Display Paper feed device

3000 DECK Large paer deck500 × 2 DECK Paper feed desk

Method1. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and operation starts.

Large paper deck

Display Motors and clutches Operation

LCF MOT Conveying motor (CM) On for 5 sB CL Conveying clutch (CCL) On for 1 sPCL1 Paper feed clutch 1(PFCL1) On for 1 sPCL2 Paper feed clutch 2(PFCL2) On for 1 s

Paper feed desk

Display Motors and clutches Operation

DESK MOT Desk Drive motor (DDM) On for 5 sFEED CL Desk feed clutch (DFCL) On for 1 sUPP CL Desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) On for 1 sLOW CL Desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) On for 1 s



1-4-39-1

1-4-41

2DF



2DF

1-4-40

U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices

DescriptionEjects paper to an optional mailbox or job separator, or to the ejection slot at the machine left.

PurposeTo check paper conveying operation to optional paper eject devices or the ejection slot at the machine left.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the paper eject location.

Display Paper eject device

MAIL BOX MailboxJOB SEPARATOR Job separatorLEFT BIN OUTPUT Ejection slot at the machine left (finisher not installed)

3. When selecting the mailbox, specify the mail tray number (1 to 7) to which paper is to be ejected by usingthe cursor up/down keys. If 0 is selected, paper is ejected to the mail trays in ascending order from mail tray1 to mail tray 7 repeatedly.



U250 Setting the maintenance cycle

DescriptionDisplays and changes the maintenance cycle.

PurposeTo check and change the maintenance cycle.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:

Setting1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.


Maintenance cycle 0 to 600000 500000 (35/40 cpm) 400000 (25 cpm)

2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


2DF

1-4-41


U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count

DescriptionDisplays, clears and changes the maintenance count.

PurposeTo check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.

MethodPress the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.


Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.

U252 Setting the destination

DescriptionSwitches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.

PurposeTo be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by runningmaintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.


Setting1. Select the destination. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specificationsINCH Inch (North America) specificationsEUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specificationsASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications

2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as whenthe power is turned on.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

SupplementThe specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. Tochange the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.• Initial setting according to the destinations

Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric,item No. Asia Pacific

253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double255 Setting auto clear time 120 s 90 s 90 s


2DF

1-4-42

U253 Switching between double and single counts

DescriptionSwitches the count system for the total counter and other counters.

PurposeAccording to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" × 17" paper is to be counted as one sheet(single count) or two sheets (double count).


Setting1. Select double or single count. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

DOUBLE COUNT Double count for A3/11" × 17" paper onlySINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper

Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U254 Turning auto start function on/off

DescriptionSelects if the auto start function is turned on.

PurposeNormally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve theproblem.


Setting1. Select either ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

ON Auto start function onOFF Auto start function off

Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


2DF

1-4-43


U255 Setting auto clear time

DescriptionSets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.

PurposeTo be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the samesettings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.



Auto clear time 0 to 270 90

The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.

2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off

DescriptionSelects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.

PurposeAccording to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without therecovery time from preheat mode.



Display Description

ON Auto preheat/energy saver function onOFF Auto preheat/energy saver function off


When the setting is changed from OFF to ON, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15minutes.



2DF

1-4-44

U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection

DescriptionSelects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that canbe made after the detection.


Setting1. Select single or continuous copying. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

SINGLE Enables only single copying.CONTINUE Enables single and continuous copying.

Initial setting: SINGLE2. Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor up/down keys.


Number of copies after toner empty detection 5 to 200 (copies) 70

The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.

3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U260 Changing the copy count timing

DescriptionChanges the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.

PurposeTo be set according to user (copy service provider) request.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paperejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is countedbefore the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, thecopy timing should be made later.


Setting1. Select the copy count timing . The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

FEED When secondary paper feed startsEJECT When the paper is ejected

Initial setting: EJECT2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


2DF

1-4-45


U264 Setting the display order of the date

DescriptionSelects year, month and day as the order of that appears on lists, etc.

PurposeSet according to the user preference.


Setting1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the desired order.

Display Setting

YEAR-MONTH-DATE Year/Month/DayMONTH-DATE-YEAR Month/Day/YearDATE-MONTH-YEAR Day/Month/Year

Initial setting: "MONTH-DATE-YEAR" (for the inch specifications)"DATE-MONTH-YEAR" (for the metric specifications)



U265 Setting OEM purchaser code

DescriptionSets the OEM purchaser code.

PurposeSets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like.

MethodPress the start key.

Setting1. Use the numeric keys or cursor up/down keys to adjust the preset value.2. Press the start key. The count is set , and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item is displayed.

U274 Setting the laser scanner unit type

DescriptionSets the type of the laser scanner unit according to the label stuck on the laser scanner unit. Moreover,changes output power of the laser scanner unit.

PurposeTo set the type when the laser scanner unit control is changed. Also if reproducibility of half tone is not proper,this mode is used to increase the output power of the laser scanner unit to increase the density.




ADJUST DATA Type of the laser scanner unit 0 to 3 2LASER POWER Laser scanner unit output power 0 to 1 0

The setting of LASER POWER is changed into 1 from 0, the output power of LSU is go up and half-tone iscome to come out darkly.

3.Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.



2DF

1-4-46

U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy

DescriptionSets the initial mode for the Auto rotation copy/Sort copy selected when auto clear is triggered or the reset keyis pressed.

PurposeTo be set as required according to the user.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.

Setting Auto rotation copy1. Select ON or OFF.


Setting Sort copy1. Select ON or OFF.



U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation

DescriptionWhen sort copying is set to perform automatically in the output form setting of the user simulation, sets thenumber of sheets at which the eject location is switched to the optional finisher (only when the finisher isinstalled).

PurposeTo be set as required according to the number of copies the user makes.


Setting1. Set the number of sheets (o to 250) using the numeric keys or cursor up/down keys.2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U331 Switching the finisher eject section

DescriptionSets whether or not copies made by copying from the original table are ejected face up to the auxiliary tray ofthe optional 3000-sheet finisher or booklet stitcher.

PurposeSelect ON to eject copies to the auxiliary tray regardless of the ejection section priority.


Setting1. Select FACE UP ON or FACE UP OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

FACE UP ON To eject copies to the auxiliary tray face upFACE UP OFF To eject copies to the eject section with the highest priority

Initial setting: OFF2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


1-4-45-1

1-4-47

2DF



2DF

1-4-46

U332 Setting the size conversion factor

DescriptionSets the factor for converting each paper size into A4/11" × 81/2". The black ratio is converted for the A4/11" ×81/2" size using the factor set in this maintenance item. Values set are displayed in the user simulation.

PurposeTo set the factor to convert the black ratio of each paper size for A4/11" × 81/2" size.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the paper size.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

The size conversion factor can be set separately for the copier mode (COPY), the printer mode (PRI) andthe fax mode (FAX) at the screen for setting the size conversion factor.Metric models

Display Description Setting Initial setting

COPY PRI FAX

A3 Size conversion factor for A3 0.0 to 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0B4 Size conversion factor for B4 0.0 to 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5A4 Size conversion factor for A4 0.0 to 3.0 1.0 1.0 1.0B5 Size conversion factor for B5 0.0 to 3.0 0.7 0.7 0.7A5 Size conversion factor for A5 0.0 to 3.0 0.5 0.5 0.5B6 Size conversion factor for B6 0.0 to 3.0 0.4 0.4 0.4FOLIO Size conversion factor for folio 0.0 to 3.0 0.3 0.3 0.3OTHER Size conversion factor for non-standard sizes 0.0 to 3.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Inch models

Display Description Setting Initial setting

COPY PRI FAX

11 × 17 Size conversion factor for 11" × 17" 0.0 to 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.08.5 × 14 Size conversion factor for 8.5" × 14" 0.0 to 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.58.5 × 11 Size conversion factor for 8.5" × 11" 0.0 to 3.0 1.0 1.0 1.05.5 × 8.5 Size conversion factor for 5.5" × 8.5" 0.0 to 3.0 0.7 0.7 0.7OTHER Size conversion factor for non-standard sizes 0.0 to 3.0 0.5 0.5 0.5

4. Press the start key. The setting is set.


U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function

DescriptionSets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).

PurposeTo use a paper feed location only for printer output.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the paper feed location for the printer. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

FIRST Upper drawerSECOND Lower drawerTHIRD Optional upper drawerFOURTH Optional lower drawerLCF Optional large paper deck


CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

2DF

1-4-47


U342 Setting the ejection restriction

DescriptionSets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject trayis selected as the eject location.

PurposeAccording to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select ON or OFF.

Display Description

ON Sets restriction on the number of sheetsOFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets

Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed)

Condition Number of sheets

When no optional ejection device is installed 250When the job separator or duplex unit is installed 150When the finisher is installed 100



U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode

DescriptionSwitches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.

PurposeTo be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.



Display Description

ON Duplex copyOFF Simplex copy

Initial setting: OFF2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.



2DF

1-4-48

U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode

DescriptionChanges the control for preheat/energy saver mode.

PurposeAccording to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.


Setting1. Select control mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Control in preheat mode

INSTANT READY Without decreasing the fixing control temperature, the display on theoperation panel is turned off.

ENERGY STAR The fixing control temperature is set at 130°C.The copier is forcibly stabilized 30 s after exiting preheat/energy saver mode.

E 2000 The fixing control temperature is decreased by 70°C.

Initial setting: ENERGY STAR2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

DescriptionSets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting thenumber of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenancecount reaches the set value, the message is displayed.This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification.

U346 Setting the sleep mode operation

DescriptionIf the machine is equipped with the facsimile feature, this mode sets whether or not the machine performsfinisher initialization when the machine receives a facsimile with the main switch off.

PurposeTo disable finisher initialization, change the setting value to MODE1. If MODE1 is selected, however, even if themain switch is turned off, control in the sleep mode will be performed and the power supply PCB will not beturned off, resulting in increase of power consumption.


Setting1. Select MODE0 or MODE1. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Description

MODE0 To enable finisher initializationMODE1 To disable finisher initialization

Initial setting: MODE02. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U402 Adjusting margins of image printing


U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass


2DF

1-4-49


U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF

DescriptionAdjusts margins for scanning the original from the DF.

PurposeUsed if margins are not correct when the optional DF is used.


U402 U403 U404



Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step

A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10 2 0.5 mmB MARGIN Leading edge margin 0 to 10 3 0.5 mmC MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10 2 0.5 mmD MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10 2 0.5 mm

Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

DF leading edge margin (3 ± 1.5 mm)

Ejection direction (reference)

DF trailing edge margin (2 ± 1.0 mm)

DF left margin (2 ± 1.0 mm)

DF right margin (2 ± 1.0 mm)

Figure 1-4-7 Correct margin amount




U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing



2DF

1-4-50

U500 Setting the limit on data size for email transmission

DescriptionSets the limit on the amount of data (number of originals) sent via email from the optional network scanner.

PurposeTo change the setting according to the network environment.


Setting1. Select the desired transmission capacity. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Display Setting

LITTLE 512 K bytesMEDIUM 51024 K bytesLARGE 2048 K bytesUNLIMITED 999 number-of-sheets restrictions

Initial setting: LITTLE2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U501 Setting image area

DescriptionImplements the command to cut the area around the image when sending image data to the optional networkscanner.

PurposeTo disable image cut.



Display Setting

ON Cuts the image area (6.5 mm)OFF Does NOT cut the image area

Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


1-4-49-1

2DF

1-4-51


U504 Initializing the scanner NIC

DescriptionInitializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default.

PurposeTo return to a setup at the time of factory shipments.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized.


U505 Setting Data Base Assistant

DescriptionSets whether or not the database linkage setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.

PurposeAccording to user request, changes the setting.



Display Description

ON Database linkage setting is enabled.OFF Database linkage setting is disabled.



U540 Adjusting the auxiliary scanning magnification

DescriptionChanges the magnification ratio in the auxiliary scanning direction when an optional network scanner is used.

PurposeWhen an optional network scanner is used, if stripes appear at regular intervals in the auxiliary scanningdirection, this mode allows fine adjustment of the magnification ratio to suppress the stripes.


Setting1. Select the resolution. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.


200dpi Auxiliary scanning magnification -50 to +50 0at the time of resolution 200 dpi






1-4-49-2


2DF

1-4-50

U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations

DescriptionDisplays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.

PurposeTo check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Paper feed locations

BYPASS Bypass trayFIRST Upper drawerSECOND Lower drawerTHIRD Optional drawer 1FORTH Optional drawer 2LCF Optional large paper deckDUPLEX Optional duplex unit

When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.

Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, press ALL on the touch panel.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U902 Checking/clearing finisher punch count

DescriptionSets the punch limit and displays and clears the punch-hole scrap count when the optional finisher is attached.

PurposeSets the punch limit to notify the user of the time to collect punch-hole scrap. Also, used to manually clear thepunch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch-hole scrap is shown on the touch panel aftercollection. If punch-hole scrap is collected with the copier power turned off, the punch-hole scrap count is notcleared and consequently this problem occurs.

Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting in item is displayed.2. Select the item. The selecting an item is displayed in reverse.


PUNCH LIMIT Punch limit 0 to 999000 20000(maximum number of punching times)

PUNCH COUNT Punch-hole scrap count – –(current number of punching times)

Setting the punch limit1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set.



2DF

1-4-51


U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts

DescriptionDisplays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.

PurposeTo check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key. The jam count is displayed by jam codes.2. Change the screen using the * or # keys.

Clearing1. Press the reset key. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts

DescriptionDisplays or clears the service call code counts by types.

PurposeTo check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacingconsumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key. The service call count is displayed by service call codes.2. Change the screen using the * or # keys.

Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse. To clear all counts, press the reset

key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When all counts are cleared, the screen for selecting a

maintenance item No. is displayed.



2DF

1-4-52

U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices

DescriptionDisplays or clears the counts of the optional DF or finisher.

PurposeTo check the use of the DF and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked and press the start key. The count of the selected

device is displayed.• DF

Display Description

CHANGE Original replacement countADF No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DF in ADF modeRADF No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DF in RADF mode

• Finisher (SORTER)

Display Description

CP CNT No. of copies that has passedSTAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activatedPUNCH Frequency the punch has been activatedSTACK Frequency the stacker has been activated

Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.


U906 Resetting partial operation control

DescriptionResets the service call code for partial operation control.

PurposeTo be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and therelated parts are serviced.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine

returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.

2DF

1-4-53


U908 Changing the total counter value

DescriptionDisplays, clears and changes the total counter value.

PurposeTo check the total counter value.


Display Description

COUNT (PRINTER) The total count value at the time of printer useCOUNT (FAX) The total count value at the time of facsimile use

Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Setting1. Select the count to be changed.2. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current total counter value, press the stop/clear key. Thescreen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U910 Clearing the black ratio data

DescriptionClears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets.

PurposeTo clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Press CANCEL on the touch panel.3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a

maintenance item is displayed.


U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes

DescriptionDisplays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes.

PurposeTo check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.

Clearing1. Select the paper size. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

To clear all counts, press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item is displayed.


2DF

1-4-54

U937 Model name setting

DescriptionSets the product name to be displayed on the printer status screen, etc. when installing a printer board(optional).

PurposeTo set the name if initialization is performed.


Setting1. Select the **30 or **31. The selected item is displayed in reverse.

Initial setting: **302. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list

DescriptionOutputs machine used circumstances list and clears the data.

PurposeTo check the machine operation situation. Also to clear the data.


Outputting the list1. Select OUTPUT.2. Press the start key to output the list.

Clearing1. Select COUNT CLEAR.2. Press the start key to clear the count.


U968 Shading plate switching setting

DescriptionAdjusts the reference value for shading correction in accordance with the new or old type of shading plate.

PurposeTo set the value when the shading plate is replaced.


Setting1. Set the preset value in accordance with the new or old type of shading plate.

New shading plate (part No.: 2BC12130): 1Old shading plate (part No.: 35912200): 0



2DF

1-4-55


U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light

DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.

PurposeTo check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp afterreplacement.

MethodPress the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.

Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No.

is displayed.

Setting1. Enter a six-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count

DescriptionDisplays or clears the scanner operation count.

PurposeTo check the status of use of the scanner.


Display Description

TOTAL SCAN COUNT Counts of scanner operationNT SCAN COUNT Counts of network scanner operation

Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Setting1. Select the item to be changed.2. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric key.3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.


1-4-54-1

1-4-56

2DF


2DF

1-4-57


U992 Checking or clearing the printer/fax count

DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the optional printer board or fax unit isinstalled.

PurposeTo check the frequency of use of the printer or fax.


Display Description

PRINTER COUNT Print count of the printerFAX COUNT Print count of the fax

Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Setting1. Select the item to be changed.2. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.

To clear the counts for both printer and fax, press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The value is set.


1-4-55


2DF

1-4-58

U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern

DescriptionSelects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.

PurposeWhen performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that ofthe scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.

Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output.

Display PG pattern to be output Purpose

• Center line adjustment

• Lateral squareness adjustment• Magnification adjustment

PG1

PG2

PG3

3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.


1-4-56

2DF

1-5-1

1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the front cover, conveying cover, side cover or drawer.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch 1or 2 off and on.

• Misfeed in drawerJam code 10Jam code 12Jam code 13Jam code 15Jam code 16Jam code 17

• Misfeed inside conveying coverJam code 18Jam code 21Jam code 22

• Misfeed in conveying coverJam code 30Jam code 35Jam code 40Jam code 50Jam code 51Jam code 52Jam code 60Jam code 61

• Misfeed in side coverJam code 19

• Misfeed in bypassJam code 14Jam code 20Jam code 23

• Misfeed in SRDF*Jam code 70Jam code 71Jam code 72Jam code 73Jam code 74Jam code 75Jam code 76

• Misfeed in STDF*Jam code 70Jam code 71Jam code 72Jam code 73

• Misfeed in built-in finisher*Jam code 81Jam code 82Jam code 83Jam code 84

2DF

1-5-2

Jam code Contents See pape

10111213141516171819202122233035405051525360617071727374757681828384

P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-5P.1-5-5P.1-5-5P.1-5-5P.1-5-5P.1-5-6P.1-5-6P.1-5-6P.1-5-8P.1-5-8P.1-5-9P.1-5-9P.1-5-9P.1-5-10P.1-5-10P.1-5-11P.1-5-11P.1-5-12P.1-5-12P.1-5-13P.1-5-13P.1-5-13P.1-5-14P.1-5-14P.1-5-14P.1-5-15P.1-5-15P.1-5-15P.1-5-15P.1-5-15

No paper feed from the upper drawerNo paper feed from the lower drawerNo paper feed from large paper deck*/paper feed desk* upper drawerNo paper feed from paper feed desk* lower drawerNo paper feed from bypassJam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying sectionJam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying sectionJam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying sectionMisfeed in copier vertical paper conveying sectionMisfeed in paper feed desk* vertical paper conveying sectionMisfeed in bypass* vertical paper conveying sectionMultiple sheets in copier paper feed sectionMultiple sheets in copier vertical conveying sectionMultiple sheets in bypass vertical conveying sectionMisfeed in registration/transfer sectionSecondary paper feed does not startMisfeed in fixing sectionMisfeed in eject sectionMisfeed in job separator* eject sectionMisfeed in feedshift sectionMisfeed in switchback section (switchback unit*)Duplex paper conveying section 1 (duplex unit*)Duplex paper conveying section 2 (duplex unit*)No original feed (SRDF*)An original jam in the original feed/conveying section (SRDF*)An original jam in the original feed section (SRDF*)An original jam in the original conveying section (SRDF*)An original jam remaining after retries (SRDF*)An original jam in the switchback section 1 (SRDF*)An original jam in the switchback section 2 (SRDF*)Jam between the finisher and copier (built-in finisher*)Intake jam (built-in finisher*)Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1 (built-in finisher*)Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2 (built-in finisher*)

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-3

(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions

FSW1

FSW2

FSW3

DUPPCSW

RSWRCL

BYPFCL BYPPFCL

BYPFSWPFCL-U

PFCL-L

DPFCL-U

DPFCL-L

ESW

FSSWPCSW

FCL1

DUPFCL

FCL2

FCL3

DFSWDFCL

OFSW

SRDF

Built-in finisher

Paper feed deskLarge paper deck

Duplexunit

OSBSW

DFTSW

PFCL1 PFCL2

PPSENS1 PPSENS3

PPSENS2

Figure 1-5-1

2DF

1-5-4

*Optional.

1. Paper feed section• No paper feed from the upper drawer (jam code 10)Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 841 ms of the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turning on; the clutch is thensuccessively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 841 ms.

PFCL-U OFF

ON

OFF

ON

FSW1

1 s

841 ms 841 ms

Timing chart 1-5-1

• No paper feed from the lower drawer (jam code 11)Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within 882 ms of the lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) turning on; the clutch is thensuccessively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 882 ms.

PFCL-L OFF

ON

OFF

ON

FSW2

1 s

882 ms 882 ms

Timing chart 1-5-2

• No paper feed from large paper deck* (jam code 12)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within 650 ms of paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on.

PFCL1 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

FSW3650 ms

Timing chart 1-5-3

• No paper feed from paper feed desk* upper drawer (jam code 12)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) turning on; the clutchis then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms.

DPFCL-U OFF

ON

OFF

ON

FSW3

1 s

880 ms 880 ms

Timing chart 1-5-4

• No paper feed from paper feed desk* lower drawer (jam code 13)Desk feed switch (DFSW) does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) turning on; the clutchis then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms.

DPFCL-L OFF

ON

OFF

ON

DFSW

1 s

880 ms 880 ms

Timing chart 1-5-5

2DF

1-5-5

*Optional.

• No paper feed from bypass (jam code 14)The bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) does not turn on within 1730 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on;the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 1730 ms.

BYPPFCL OFF

ON

OFF

ON

BYPFSW

1 s

1730 ms 1730 ms

Timing chart 1-5-6

• Jam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 15)Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within 290 ms of the paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on.

PFCL2 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PPSENS3290 ms

Timing chart 1-5-7

• Jam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 16)Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) does not turn on within 310 ms of the paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on.

PPSENS3 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PPSENS2310 ms

Timing chart 1-5-8

• Jam in large paper deck* horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 17)Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) does not turn on within 190 ms of the paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on.

PPSENS2 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PPSENS1190 ms

Timing chart 1-5-9

• Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 18)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 936 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on.

936 ms

FSW1

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-10

2DF

1-5-6

Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 1079 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on.

1079 ms

FSW2

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-11

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on.

1203 ms

FSW3

FSW2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-12

• Misfeed in paper feed desk* vertical paper conveying section (jam code 19)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within 888 ms of the desk feed switch (DFSW) turning on.

888 ms

DFSW

FSW3

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-13

• Misfeed in bypass* vertical paper conveying section (jam code 20)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 3932 ms of the bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) turning on.

3932 ms

BYPFSW

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-14

• Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section (jam code 21)Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 1123 msof turning on.

OFF

ONPaper size + 1123 msFSW1

Timing chart 1-5-15

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 1123 msof turning on.

OFF


Timing chart 1-5-16

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-7

Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 635 ms ofturning on.

OFF


Timing chart 1-5-17

The desk feed switch (DFSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 635ms of turning on.

OFF

ONPaper size + 635 msDFSW

Timing chart 1-5-18

The bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus1123 ms of turning on.

OFF

ONPaper size + 1123 msBYPFSW

Timing chart 1-5-19

Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 841 ms of the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turning on.

841 ms

PFCL-U

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-20

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within 882 ms of the lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) turning on.

882 ms

PFCL-L

FSW2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-21

The bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) does not turn off within 1730 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on.

1730 ms

BYPPFCL

BYPFSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-22

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-8

• Multiple sheets in copier vertical conveying section (jam code 22)Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1910 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning off.

1910 ms

FSW2

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-23

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning off.

1203 ms

FSW3

FSW2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-24

Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1910 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on.

1910 ms

FSW2

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-25

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on.

1203 ms

FSW3

FSW2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-26

• Multiple sheets in bypass vertical conveying section (jam code 23)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1510 ms of the bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) turning off.

1505 ms

BYPFSW

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-27

2DF

1-5-9

The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1505 ms of the bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) turning on.

1505 ms

BYPFSW

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-28

2. Paper conveying section• Misfeed in registration/transfer section (jam code 30)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1657 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning off.

1657 ms

FSW1

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-29

The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1657 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on.

1657 ms

FSW1

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-30

• Secondary paper feed does not start. (jam code 35)Secondary paper feed does not start within 30 s of arrival of paper at the registration section.

3. Fixing section• Misfeed in fixing section (jam code 40)The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

2898 ms

RCL

ESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-31

The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

2983 ms

RCL

FSSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-32

2DF

1-5-10

4. Eject section• Misfeed in eject section (jam code 50)The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.

2898 ms

RSW

ESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-33

The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

2898 ms

RCL

ESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-34

• Misfeed in job separator* eject section (jam code 51)The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-35

The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-36

The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-37

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-11

5. Feedshift section• Misfeed in feedshift section (jam code 52)The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 873 ms of the start of eject motor (EM) reverse rotation.

873 ms

Fwd. rotation Rev. rotationEM

FSSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-38

During paper switchback operation, the feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the lengthof the used paper size plus 317 ms of turning on.

OFF

ONPaper size + 317 msFSSW

Timing chart 1-5-39

The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.

2898 ms

RSW

FSSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-40

The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

2898 ms

RCL

FSSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-41

6. Switchback unit*• Misfeed in switchback section (jam code 53)The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn off within 1421 ms (2797 ms) of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

1421(2797) ms

FSSW

SBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

The value in the parentheses indicates the value in switchback operation.

Timing chart 1-5-42

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-12

The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn on within 1421 ms (2797 ms) of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

1421(2797) ms

FSSW

SBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON


Timing chart 1-5-43

The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn off within 1421 ms (2797 ms) of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

1421(2797) ms

FSSW

SBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON


Timing chart 1-5-44

7. Duplex section*• Duplex paper conveying section 1 (jam code 60)The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn on within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

1285 ms

FSSW

DUPPCSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-45

The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn off within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

1285 ms

FSSW

DUPPCSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-46

• Duplex paper conveying section 2 (jam code 61)Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning on.

1126 ms

DUPPCSW

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-47

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-13

Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning off.

1126 ms

DUPPCSW

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-48

8. SRDF*• No original feed (jam code 70)When the DF START signal is received, switches other than the original set switch (OSSW) and original size length switch(OSLSW) on the contact glass are on.

• No original feed (jam code 70)During the primary feed of the first original in the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the original feed switch (OFSW)does not turn on within 800 ms of the original feed motor (OFM) turning on.

• No original feed (jam code 70)During the primary feed of the second or later original in the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the original feed switch(OFSW) does not turn on within 800 ms of the start of forward rotation of the original feed motor (OFM).

OFM OFF

ON (Fwd.)

OFF

ON

OFSW800 ms

Timing chart 1-5-49

• An original jam in the original feed/conveying section (jam code 71)During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original mode, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on within967 ms of the start of reverse rotation of the original feed motor (OFM). Alternatively, during continuous original feed in single-sided original mode, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on for the second time under the above conditions.

OFM OFF

ON (Rev.)

OFF

ON

DFTSW967 ms

Timing chart 1-5-50

• An original jam in the original feed section (jam code 72)During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn off within1654 ms of the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turning on.

OFSW OFF

ON

OFF

ON

DFTSW

1654 ms

Timing chart 1-5-51

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-14

• An original jam in the original feed section (jam code 72)During original switchback operation in the double-sided original mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) remains on whenthe original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OSBSW

OFSW

Timing chart 1-5-52

• An original jam in the original conveying section (jam code 73)During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does notturn off within 2399 ms of turning on.

DFTSW OFF

ON2399 ms

Timing chart 1-5-53

• An original jam in the original conveying section (jam code 73)In the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns off within 474 ms of turning on.

DFTSW OFF

ON474 ms

Timing chart 1-5-54

• An original jam remaining after retries (jam code 74)In the single-sided or double-sided original mode, secondary original feed does not start after 5 retries.

• An original jam in the switchback section 1 (jam code 75)During the switchback operation of an original in the double-sided original mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW)does not turn off within 7040 ms of turning on.

OSBSW OFF

ON7040 ms

Timing chart 1-5-55

• An original jam in the switchback section 1 (jam code 75)During the secondary original feed in the double-sided original mode, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on within433 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM) turning on.

OCM OFF

ON

OFF

ON

DFTSW433 ms

Timing chart 1-5-56

2DF

1-5-15

• An original jam in the switchback section 2 (jam code 76)While scanning the first face (reverse face) of the original in the double-sided original mode, the original switchback switch(OSBSW) does not turn on within 770 ms of the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turning on.

DFTSW OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OSBSW770 ms

Timing chart 1-5-57

• An original jam in the original switchback section 2 (jam code 76)During the switchback operation of the second or later original in the double-sided original mode, the original switchbackswitch (OSBSW) remains off when the trailing edge of the preceding original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) off.

9. Built-in finisher*• Jam between the finisher and copier (jam code 81)The paper conveying switch does not turn on within 1550 ms of the signal requesting paper ejection is output from the copier.

• Intake jam (jam code 82)During paper intake from the copier, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within 1960 to 3480 ms (dependingon paper size) of paper conveying switch (PCSW) turning on.

1960 to 3480 msPCSWOff

On

Timing chart 1-5-58

• Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1 (jam code 83)When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn on within 1590 ms of the paper conveyingmotor (PCM) turning on.

1590 ms

PCM

PCSW

Off

On

Off

On

Timing chart 1-5-59

• Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2 (jam code 84)When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within 2260 to 3190 ms (variesdepending on the paper size) of the paper conveying motor (PCM) turning on.


On

Timing chart 1-5-60

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-16

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(3) Paper misfeeds

(1)A paper jam in thepaper feed, convey-ing or eject sectionis indicated as soonas the main switchis turned on.

(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from upperdrawer).Jam code 10

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround feed switch 1/2/3,registration switch, ejectswitch or feedshift switch.

Defective feed switch 1.



Defective registrationswitch.

Defective eject switch.

Defective feedshift switch.

Paper in the upper draweris extremely curled.

Check if the upper paperfeed pulley, separationpulley or forwarding pulleyof the upper drawer aredeformed.

Broken feed switch 1 ac-tuator.


Check if the upper paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theupper paper feed clutch.

Check visually and remove it, if any.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and offmanually. Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond-ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse.



Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch onand off manually. Replace the registration switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayedin reverse.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch onand off manually. Replace the feedshift switch if indication of thecorresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed inreverse.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.

Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken.


Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feedclutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.

Check (see page 1-5-53).

2DF

1-5-17


(3)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from lowerdrawer).Jam code 11

(4)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from large pa-per deck*).Jam code 12

(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from paperfeed desk* upperdrawer).Jam code 12

Paper in the lower draweris extremely curled.

Check if the lower paperfeed pulley, separationpulley or forwarding pulleyof the lower drawer aredeformed.



Check if the lower paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thelower paper feed clutch.

Paper in the large paperdeck is extremely curled.



Check if paper feed clutch1 and 2 malfunctions.

Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 1 and 2.

Check if the deck feedclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thedeck feed clutch.

Paper in the paper feeddesk upper drawer is ex-tremely curled.

Check if the paper feedpulley, separation pulley orforwarding pulley of thepaper feed desk upperdrawer are deformed.



Change the paper.




Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feedclutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


Change the paper.



Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 1 or 2on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.

Check.

Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutch onthe operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.

Check.

Change the paper.




*Optional.

2DF

1-5-18


(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from paperfeed desk* upperdrawer).Jam code 12

(6)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from paperfeed desk* lowerdrawer).Jam code 13

(7)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from bypass).Jam code 14

Check if the desk upperpaper feed clutch malfunc-tions.

Electrical problem with thedesk upper paper feedclutch.

Paper in the paper feeddesk lower drawer is ex-tremely curled.

Check if the paper feedpulley, separation pulley orforwarding pulley of thepaper feed desk lowerdrawer are deformed.

Broken desk feed switchactuator.

Defective desk feedswitch.

Check if the desk lowerpaper feed clutch malfunc-tions.

Electrical problem with thedesk lower paper feedclutch.

Paper on the bypass tableis extremely curled.

Check if the bypass paperfeed pulley, separationpulley or forwarding pulleyof the bypass are de-formed.

Broken bypass feed switchactuator.

Defective bypass feedswitch.

Check if the bypass paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thebypass paper feed clutch.

Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk upper paperfeed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off.Check the status and remedy if necessary.

Check.

Change the paper.


Check visually and replace desk feed switch if its actuator is bro-ken.

With 5 V DC present at CN2-8 on the desk main PCB, check ifCN2-7 on the desk main PCB remains low when the desk feedswitch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the desk feedswitch.

Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk lower paperfeed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off.Check the status and remedy if necessary.

Check.

Change the paper.


Check visually and replace bypass feed switch if its actuator isbroken.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the bypass feed switch onand off manually. Replace the bypass feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayedin reverse.

Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feedclutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


*Optional.

2DF

1-5-19


(8)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam inlarge paper deck*horizontal paperconveying section).Jam code 15



(11)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam incopier vertical paperconveying section).Jam code 18


Check if the paper sideguides are deformed.

Defective paper path sen-sor 3.

Check if paper feed clutch2 malfunctions.

Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 2.




Check if paper feed clutch1 malfunctions.










Change the paper.

Check visually and replace.

With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the deck main PCB, check ifCN6-11 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper pathsensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sen-sor 3.

Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 2 onthe operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.

Check.

Change the paper.




Check.

Change the paper.



Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutch onthe operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.

Check.




*Optional.

2DF

1-5-20



(12)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam in pa-per feed desk* verti-cal conveying sec-tion).Jam code 19

(13)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam in by-pass conveying sec-tion).Jam code 20

(14)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier pa-per feed section).Jam code 21





Check if the feed pulleysand feed roller are de-formed.




Defective desk feedswitch.












Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Check and repair if necessary.



Check visually and replace desk feed switch if its actuator is bro-ken.


Check visually and replace the bypass feed switch if its actuatoris broken.








*Optional.

2DF

1-5-21


(14)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier pa-per feed section).Jam code 21

(15)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier ver-tical conveying sec-tion).Jam code 22


Broken desk feed switch*actuator.

Defective desk feedswitch*.



Check if the upper paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theupper paper feed clutch.

Check if the lower paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thelower paper feed clutch.

Check if the bypass paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thebypass paper feed clutch.








Check visually and replace the desk feed switch if its actuator isbroken.




Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feedclutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feedclutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass feed clutchon the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.




Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and offmanually. Replace the switch if indication of the correspondingswitch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse.




*Optional.

2DF

1-5-22


(15)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier ver-tical conveying sec-tion).Jam code 22

(16)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in bypassconveying section).Jam code 23

(17)A paper jam in thepaper conveyingsection is indicatedduring copying (jamin registration/trans-fer section).Jam code 30

(18)A paper jam in thepaper conveyingsection is indicatedduring copyingJam code 35

(19)A paper jam in thefixing section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in fixingsection).Jam code 40










Check if the registrationclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theregistration clutch.

Broken eject switch actua-tor.


Broken feedshift switchactuator.











Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutchon the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.


Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-ken.


Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator isbroken.


2DF

1-5-23


(19)A paper jam in thefixing section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in fixingsection).Jam code 40

(20)A paper jam in theeject section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in ejectsection).Jam code 50

(21)A paper jam in theeject section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in job sepa-rator* eject section).Jam code 51

(22)A paper jam in thefeedshift section isindicated duringcopying (jam infeedshift section).Jam code 52



Broken eject switch actua-tor.




Broken job separator ejectswitch actuator.

Defective job separatoreject switch.

Check if the feedshift sole-noid malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thefeedshift solenoid.








Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-ken.




Check visually and replace the job separator eject switch if itsactuator is broken.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the job separator ejectswitch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayedin reverse.

Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid onthe operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.







*Optional.

2DF

1-5-24


(23)A paper jam in theswitchback sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam inswitchback unit*).Jam code 53

(24)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex paper convey-ing section 1*).Jam code 60

(25)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex paper convey-ing section 2*).Jam code 61

(26)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (no originalfeed).Jam code 70



Broken switchback ejectswitch actuator.

Defective switchback ejectswitch.



Broken duplex paper con-veying switch actuator.

Defective duplex paperconveying switch.

Broken duplex paper con-veying switch actuator.

Defective duplex convey-ing switch.



Defective original feedswitch.

Check if the original feedmotor malfunctions.



Check visually and replace the switchback eject switch if its ac-tuator is broken.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-2 on the switchback unit main PCB,check if CN5-4 on the switchback unit main PCB remains lowwhen the switchback eject switch is turned on and off. If it does,replace the switchback eject switch.


Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch ifits actuator is broken.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paper convey-ing switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indicationof the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not dis-played in reverse.


Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paper convey-ing switch on and off manually. Replace the duplex paper con-veying switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the op-eration panel is not displayed in reverse.



Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motoron the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.

*Optional.

2DF

1-5-25


(27)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal feed/con-veying section).Jam code 71

(28)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal feed sec-tion).Jam code 72

(29)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal conveyingsection).Jam code 73

(30)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal switchbacksection 1).Jam code 75

(31)An original jams inthe SRDF* is indi-cated during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal switchbacksection 2).Jam code 76

Defective DF timingswitch.

Check if the original feedmotor malfunctions.


Defective original feedswitch.

Defective original switch-back switch.




Check if the original con-veying motor malfunctions.


Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motoron the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check the statusand remedy if necessary.


Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchbackswitch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayedin reverse.




Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveyingmotor on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


*Optional.

2DF

1-5-26


(32)Paper jams in thebuilt-in finisher* dur-ing copying (intakejam).Jam code 82

(33)Paper jams in thebuilt-in finisher* dur-ing copying (jamduring paper con-veying for batchejection 1).Jam code 83

(34)Paper jams in thebuilt-in finisher* dur-ing copying (jamduring paper con-veying for batchejection 2).Jam code 84

Defective paper conveyingswitch.

Check if the feedshift rolleror feedshift pulley is de-formed.


Check if the feedshift rolleror press roller is deformed.


Check if the eject roller oreject pulley is deformed.

With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the finisher main PCB, checkif CN4-10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low whenthe paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, re-place the paper conveying switch.

Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.





*Optional.

2DF

1-5-27

1-5-2 Self-diagnosis

(1) Self-diagnostic functionThis unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problemdisplayed as a code consisting of "C" followed by a number between 0030 and 8500, indicating the nature of the problem.A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches 1 or 2 off and back on.

Figure 1-5-2 Service call code display

Call for service.

012345678901234

C2000

2DF

1-5-28

(2) Self diagnostic codes

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

C0030

C0110

C0210

C0240

C0250

C0280

C0420

Fax board* problem• Problems with data from fax board.

Backup memory data problem• Data in the specified area of the

backup memory does not match thespecified values.

Operation unit PCB communicationproblem• There is no reply after 20 retries at

communication.

Printer board* communication prob-lem• There is no reply after 20 retries at

communication.

Scanner network board* communi-cation problem• There is no reply after 20 retries at

communication.

Fax board* communication problem• There is no reply after 20 retries at

communication.

Large paper deck*/paper feed desk*communication problem• Communication errors from the com-

munication microcomputer on themain PCB.No communication: there is no replyafter 5 retries.Abnormal communication: a commu-nication error (parity or checksum er-ror) is detected five times in succes-sion.

Defective faxboard.

Problem with thebackup memorydata.

Defective backupRAM.

Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.

Defective mainPCB or operationunit PCB.


Defective mainPCB or printerboard.


Defective mainPCB or scannernetwork board.


Defective mainPCB or fax board.


Defective mainPCB.

Defective deckmain PCB/deskmain PCB.

Replace the fax board and check for cor-rect operation.

Turn safety switch 1 off and back on andrun maintenance item U020 to set the con-tents of the backup memory data again.

If the C011 is displayed after re-setting thebackup memory contents, replace thebackup RAM.

Check the connection of connectors CN36,CN42 on the main PCB and CN1, CN2 andCN3 on the operation unit PCB, and thecontinuity across the connector terminals.Repair or replace if necessary.

Replace the main PCB or operation unitPCB and check for correct operation.

Check the connection of connector CN43on the main PCB and the connector on theprinter board. Repair or replace if neces-sary.

Replace the main PCB or printer board andcheck for correct operation.

Check the connection of connector CN46on the main PCB and the connector on thememory PCB. Repair or replace if neces-sary.

Replace the main PCB or scanner networkboard and check for correct operation.

Check the connection of connector CN44on the main PCB and the connector on thememory PCB. Repair or replace if neces-sary.

Replace the main PCB or fax board andcheck for correct operation.

Check the connection of connectors CN3on the main PCB and the connector on thedeck main PCB/desk main PCB, and thecontinuity across the connector terminals.Repair or replace if necessary.

Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.

Replace the deck main PCB/desk mainPCB and check for correct operation.

*: Optional

2DF

1-5-29



C0440

C0450

C0470

C0600

C0610

C0620

C0630

Finisher* communication problem• Communication errors from the com-


Mailbox* communication problem• Communication errors from the com-


Switchback unit* communicationproblem• Communication errors from the com-


DIMM problemThe DIMM on the memory PCB doesnot operate correctly.

Bitmap problem• There is a problem with the data or

address bus of the bitmap DRAM.

Memory input interface problemReading-in of an image does not com-plete within 10 s of the start of imagetransmission.

DMA problem• DMA transmission of compressed,

decompressed, rotated, relocated orblanked-out image data does notcomplete within the specified periodof time.


Defective mainPCB.

Defective finishermain PCB.


Defective mainPCB.

Defective mailboxmain PCB.


Defective mainPCB.

Defective switch-back unit mainPCB.

DIMM installedincorrectly.

Defective DIMM.

Defective mainPCB.

Defective mainPCB.

Defective mainPCB.

Check the connection of connectors CN4,CN5 on the main PCB and CN2 on the fin-isher main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.


Replace the finisher main PCB and checkfor correct operation.

Check the connection of connectors CN3on the main PCB and CN1 on the mailboxmain PCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.


Replace the mailbox main PCB and checkfor correct operation.

Check the connection of connectors CN3on the main PCB and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.


Replace the switchback unit main PCB andcheck for correct operation.

Check if the DIMM is inserted into thesocket on the main PCB correctly.

Replace the DIMM and check for correctoperation.




*: Optional

2DF

1-5-30



C1010

C1020

C1030

Upper lift motor problem• When the upper drawer is inserted,

the upper lift limit switch does not turnon within 6 s of the upper lift motorturning on and the upper lift limitswitch does not turn on by turning offthe upper lift motor for 200 ms andretrying twice.

• During copying, the upper lift limitswitch does not turn on within 200 msof the upper lift motor turning on.

Lower lift motor problem• When the lower drawer is inserted,

the lower lift limit switch does not turnon within 6 s of the lower lift motorturning on and the lower lift limitswitch does not turn on by turning offthe lower lift motor for 200 ms andretrying twice.

• During copying, the lower lift limitswitch does not turn on within 200 msof the lower lift motor turning on.

Desk upper lift motor problem• When the upper drawer of the paper

feed desk* is inserted, the desk upperlift limit switch does not turn on within6 s of the desk upper lift motor turningon and the desk upper lift limit switchdoes not turn on by turning off thedesk upper lift motor for 200 ms andretrying twice.

• During copying, the desk upper liftlimit switch does not turn on within200 ms of the desk upper lift motorturning on.

Broken gears orcouplings of theupper lift motor.

Defective upperlift motor.

Poor contact ofthe upper lift mo-tor connector ter-minals.

Defective upperlift limit switch.

Poor contact ofthe upper lift limitswitch connectorterminals.

Broken gears orcouplings of thelower lift motor.

Defective lower liftmotor.

Poor contact ofthe lower lift motorconnector termi-nals.

Defective lower liftlimit switch.

Poor contact ofthe lower lift limitswitch connectorterminals.

Broken gears orcouplings of thedesk upper liftmotor.

Defective deskupper lift motor.

Poor contact ofthe desk upper liftmotor connectorterminals.

Defective deskupper lift limitswitch.

Replace the upper lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the upper lift motor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.

Check if CN13-B9 on the main PCB goeslow when the upper lift limit switch is turnedoff. If not, replace the upper lift limit switch.


Replace the lower lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the lower lift motor.


Check if CN13-B15 on the main PCB goeslow when the lower lift limit switch is turnedoff. If not, replace the lower lift limit switch.


Replace the desk upper lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the desk upper lift motor.


Check if CN1-5 on the desk main PCBgoes low when the desk upper lift limitswitch is turned off. If not, replace the deskupper lift limit switch.

2DF

1-5-31



C1030

C1040

C1100

C1110

Desk upper lift motor problem• When the upper drawer of the paper

feed desk* is inserted, the desk upperlift limit switch does not turn on within6 s of the desk upper lift motor turningon and the desk upper lift limit switchdoes not turn on by turning off thedesk upper lift motor for 200 ms andretrying twice.

• During copying, the desk upper liftlimit switch does not turn on within200 ms of the desk upper lift motorturning on.

Desk lower lift motor problem• When the lower drawer of the paper

feed desk* is inserted, the desk lowerlift limit switch does not turn on within6 s of the desk lower lift motor turningon and the desk lower lift limit switchdoes not turn on by turning off thedesk lower lift motor for 200 ms andretrying twice.

• During copying, the desk lower liftlimit switch does not turn on within200 ms of the desk lower lift motorturning on.

Paper deck motor 1* problem• A motor over-current signal is de-

tected continuously for 1 s or longer.

Paper deck motor 2* problem• A motor over-current signal is de-

tected continuously for 1 s or longer.

Poor contact ofthe desk upper liftlimit switch con-nector terminals.

Broken gears ofcouplings of thedesk lower lift mo-tor.

Defective desklower lift motor.

Poor contact ofthe desk lower liftmotor connectorterminals.

Defective desklower lift limitswitch.

Poor contact ofthe desk lower liftlimit switch con-nector terminals.

Paper deck motor1 does not rotatecorrectly (the mo-tor is overloaded).

Paper deck motor1 connectormakes poor con-tact.




Replace the desk lower lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the desk lower lift motor.


Check if CN1-7 on the desk main PCBgoes low when the desk lower lift limitswitch is turned off. If not, replace the desklower lift limit switch.


Check the gears and remedy if necessary.




*: Optional

2DF

1-5-32



C1120

C1130

C1160

Deck right lift* position problem• Deck level switch 2 does not turn on

within 30 s of paper deck motor 2turning on.

Deck left lift* position problem• Deck level switch 2 does not turn on

within 30 s of paper deck motor 2turning on.

Large paper deck*/paper feed desk*sequence problem

Defective decklevel switch 2.

Poor contact ofdeck level switch2 connector termi-nals.

Defective paperdeck motor 2.

Poor contact ofpaper deck motor2 connector termi-nals.

The deck right liftdoes not riseproperly.





The deck left liftdoes not riseproperly.

Operation startrequest is sentfrom the copier tothe large paperdeck/paper feeddesk while paperfeed is disabled.

Paper feed re-quest is sent fromthe copier to thelarge paper deck/paper feed deskbefore operationstart request.

Check if CN5-4 on the desk main PCBgoes low when desk level switch 2 isturned off. If not, replace desk level switch2.


Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace paper desk motor 2.


Check the gears and belts, and remedy ifnecessary.






Turn the power off and back on (reset re-quest is sent from the copier to the largepaper deck/paper feed desk to cancel op-eration start request).

Turn the power off and back on (reset re-quest is sent from the copier to the largepaper deck/paper feed desk to cancel op-eration start request).

*: Optional

2DF

1-5-33



C1170

C2000

C2500

C2600

Large paper deck* (paper feed desk*)incorrect type problem

Drive motor problem• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1

s, 1 s after the drive motor has turnedon.

Paper feed motor problem• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1

s, 1 s after the paper feed motor hasturned on.

Deck conveying motor*/desk drivemotor* problem• No pulse is input within 500 ms of the

start-up.• No pulse is input within 100 ms of the

previous pulse input.

Deck/desk for theprinter is installed.

Poor contact inthe drive motorconnector termi-nals.

Defective drivemotor rotationcontrol circuit.

Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.

Poor contact inthe paper feedmotor connectorterminals.

Defective paperfeed motor rota-tion control circuit.

Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.

Defective deckconveying motorPCB/desk drivemotor PCB.

Deck conveyingmotor /desk drivemotor does notrotate correctly(the motor is over-loaded).

Poor contact inthe deck convey-ing motor/deskdrive motor con-nector terminals.

Replace the deck/desk fot the copier.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.

Replace the drive motor.

Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.


Replace the paper feed motor.

Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.

Replace the deck conveying motor PCB/desk drive motor PCB and check for cor-rect operation.



*: Optional

2DF

1-5-34



C3100

C3200

C3300

C4000

Scanner carriage problem• The home position is not correct

when the power is turned on or at thestart of copying using the bypass ta-ble.

Exposure lamp problem• Check the CCD input value for the

lighting status of the exposure lamp100 ms after the exposure lamp is litand the carriage is moved to theshading position. If the exposure lampdoes not light, turn off the lamp. After500 ms, light the lamp again and, afurther 500 ms later, check the CCDinput.The exposure lamp does not light af-ter 5 retries.

Optical system problem• After AGC, correct input is not ob-

tained at CCD.

Polygon motor synchronizationproblem• When the polygon motor starts, the

motor does not become stable evenafter 20 s.


Defective scannerhome positionswitch.

Defective mainPCB or scannerdrive PCB.

Defective scannermotor.

Poor contact ofthe connector ter-minals.

Defective expo-sure lamp.

Defective mainPCB.

Incorrect shadingposition.


Defective mainPCB.

Poor contact inthe polygon motorconnector termi-nals.

Defective polygonmotor.

Defective powersource PCB.

Defective mainPCB.

Check the connection of connector CN37on the main PCB and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.

Replace the scanner home position switch.

Replace the main PCB or scanner drivePCB and check for correct operation.

Replace the scanner motor.

Check the connection of connectors CN34and CN37 on the main PCB, and the conti-nuity across the connector terminals. Re-pair or replace if necessary.

Replace the exposure lamp or inverterPCB.


Adjust the position of the contact glass(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,replace the scanner home position switch.

Check the connection of connector CN34on the main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.



Replace the LSU (see page 1-6-20).

Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN2-1 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the powersource PCB.

Check if 24 V DC is output from CN8-10 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the mainPCB.

2DF

1-5-35



C4010

C4200

C5300

C6000

C6020

Polygon motor steady-state problem• When high-speed rotation from low-

speed rotation is requested, the motordoes not become stable even after 20s.

BD steady-state problem• The VTC detects a BD error for 600

ms after the polygon motor rotationhas been stabilized.

Broken cleaning lamp wireWhile the cleaning lamp is on, the bro-ken cleaning lamp wire detection signalis detected for 2 s continuously.

Broken fixing heater wire• After secondary stabilization, de-

tected temperature of the fixing ther-mistor is lower than 100 °C/212 °F

• When the fixing heater is turned on,the output voltage of terminal CN2-1of the power supply PCB is lowerthan 0.2 V.

• 7 s after the fixing heater is turned on,the output voltage of terminal CN2-1of the power supply PCB is lowerthan 0.2 V.

• When the output voltage of terminalCN 2-1 of the power supply PCB ischecked every 45 s during continuouscopying, the voltage becomes lowerthan 0.2 V.

• When the fixing temperature be-comes lower than 140 °C/284 °F dur-ing copying, the output voltage of ter-minal CN 2-1 of the power supplyPCB is checked and the voltage islower than 0.2 V.

Abnormally high fixing unit thermis-tor temperature• The fixing thermistor detects tempera-

ture 240 °C/464 °F or higher.

Poor contact inthe polygon motorconnector termi-nals.


Defective powersource PCB.

Defective mainPCB.

Defective laserdiode.


Defective mainPCB.

Defective cleaninglamp.

Defective mainPCB.

Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistor con-nector terminals.

Fixing unit ther-mistor installedincorrectly.

Fixing unit ther-mostat triggered.

Fixing unit heaterM or S installedincorrectly.

Broken fixing unitheater M or Swire.

Shorted fixing unitthermistor.

Broken fixing unitheater control cir-cuit on the powersource PCB.



Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN2-1 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the powersource PCB.

Check if 24 V DC is output from CN8-10 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the main PCB.




Replace the cleaning lamp.



Check and reinstall if necessary.

Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.


Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit heater M or S (see page 1-6-38).

Measure the resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.

Replace the power source PCB.

2DF

1-5-36



*: Optional

C6050

C6410

C6420

C7300

C7400

Abnormally low fixing unit thermis-tor temperature• The fixing thermistor detects tempera-

ture lower than 100 °C/212 °F for 10s.

• When fixing heater M is on, the tem-perature of the fixing thermistor islower than 40 °C/104 °F and contin-ues to drop for 24 s. (If the tempera-ture in the copier is 10 °C/50 °F orless when power is turned on.)

• When fixing heater M is on, the tem-perature of the fixing thermistor islower than 40 °C/104 °F and contin-ues to drop for 14 s. (If the tempera-ture in the copier is higher than 10 °C/50 °F when power is turned on.)

Fixing unit connector insertion prob-lem• Absence of the fixing unit is detected

continuously for 1500 ms while thereis no error on the copier.

Broken fixing unit thermistor wire• The fixing temperature remains at 0

°C/32 °F for 30 s continuously whenthe fixing heater is on.

Toner sensor problem• While the toner container sensor is

on, the toner sensor in the developingunit does not turn on after the tonersensor turns off and toner is replen-ished from the toner container.

Image formation unit connector in-sertion problem• Absence of the image formation unit

is detected continuously for 1500 mswhile there is no error on the copier.


Broken fixing unitthermistor wire.

Fixing unit ther-mistor installedincorrectly.

Fixing unit ther-mostat triggered.

Fixing unit heaterM or S installedincorrectly.

Broken fixing unitheater M or Swire.

Fixing unit con-nector insertedincorrectly.

Defective fixingunit connector.


Broken fixing unitthermistor wire.

Defective tonersensor.

Poor contact inthe toner sensorconnector termi-nals.

Defective tonercontainer sensor.

Defective tonercontainer.

Image formationunit connector in-serted incorrectly.

Defective imageformation unitconnector.


Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.


Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.


Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit heater M or S.

Reinsert the fixing unit connector if neces-sary.

Replace the fixing unit.


Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.

Replace the toner sensor.


Replace the toner container sensor.

Replace the toner container.

Reinsert the image formation unit connec-tor if necessary.

Replace the image formation unit.

2DF

1-5-37



*: Optional

C7410

C7800

C7810

C8010

C8030

Drum unit connector insertion prob-lem• Absence of the drum unit is detected

continuously for 1500 ms while thereis no error on the copier.

Broken external temperature ther-mistor wire• The input voltage is above 4.5 V.

Short-circuited external temperaturethermistor• The input voltage is below 1.0 V.

Finisher* paper conveying motorproblem• The paper conveying motor lockup

signal is detected for 0.5 s or longer.

Finisher* paper conveying belt prob-lem• An on-to-off or off-to-on state change

of the paper conveying belt home po-sition sensor is not detected within 2 sof the paper conveying belt clutchturning on.

Drum unit connec-tor inserted incor-rectly.

Defective drumunit connector.

Poor contact inthe humidity sen-sor PCB connec-tor terminals.

Defective externaltemperature ther-mistor.

Poor contact inthe humidity sen-sor PCB connec-tor terminals.

Defective externaltemperature ther-mistor.

Poor contact inthe paper convey-ing motor connec-tor terminals.

The paper con-veying motor mal-functions.


The paper con-veying belt is outof phase.

The paper con-veying belt clutchmalfunctions.

The paper con-veying belt homeposition sensormalfunctions.

The paper con-veying belt homeposition sensorconnector makespoor contact.

The internal trayis incorrectly in-serted.

Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces-sary.

Replace the drum unit.


Replace the humidity sensor PCB.


Replace the humidity sensor PCB.


Replace the paper conveying motor andcheck for correct operation.


Adjust the paper conveying belt so that it isin phase and check for correct operation.

Replace the paper conveying belt clutchand check for correct operation.

Replace the paper conveying belt homeposition sensor and check for correct op-eration.


Check whether the internal tray unit or frontcover catches are damaged.

2DF

1-5-38



*: Optional

C8140

C8170

C8180

Finisher* tray elevation motor prob-lem• The sort tray is not detected in the

home position within 30 s of the startof the tray elevation motor rotation.

Finisher* front side registration mo-tor problem• If the front side registration home po-

sition sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570ms of starting initialization.

• If the front side registration home po-sition sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 3180ms of starting initialization.

Finisher* rear side registration motorproblem• If the rear side registration home posi-

tion sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570ms of starting initialization.

• If the rear side registration home posi-tion sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 2880ms of starting initialization.

Poor contact inthe tray elevationmotor connectorterminals.

The tray elevationmotor malfunc-tions.


The front side reg-istration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The front side reg-istration motormalfunctions.

The front side reg-istration home po-sition sensor con-nector makespoor contact.

The front side reg-istration home po-sition sensor mal-functions.


The rear side reg-istration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The rear side reg-istration motormalfunctions.

The rear side reg-istration home po-sition sensor con-nector makespoor contact.

The rear side reg-istration home po-sition sensor mal-functions.



Replace the tray elevation motor andcheck for correct operation.



Replace the front side registration motorand check for correct operation.


Replace the front side registration homeposition sensor and check for correct op-eration.



Replace the rear side registration motorand check for correct operation.


Replace the rear side registration homeposition sensor and check for correct op-eration.


2DF

1-5-39



*: Optional

C8190

C8210

C8220

C8300

C8310

Finisher* trailing edge registrationmotor problem• If the trailing edge registration home

position sensor is on in initialization,the sensor does not turn off within570 ms of starting initialization.

• If the trailing edge registration homeposition sensor is off in initialization,the sensor does not turn on within4550 ms of starting initialization.

Finisher* front stapler problem• The front stapler home position sen-

sor does not change state from non-detection to detection within 200 msof the start of front stapler motorcounterclockwise (forward) rotation.

• During initialization, the front staplerhome position sensor does notchange state from non-detection todetection within 600 ms of the start offront stapler motor clockwise (re-verse) rotation.

Finisher* rear stapler problem• The rear stapler home position sensor

does not change state from non-de-tection to detection within 200 ms ofthe start of rear stapler motorcounterclockwise (forward) rotation.

• During initialization, the rear staplerhome position sensor does notchange state from non-detection todetection within 600 ms of the start ofrear stapler motor clockwise (reverse)rotation.

Booklet stitcher* paper ejection mo-tor problem

Booklet stitcher* elevation motorproblem

The trailing edgeregistration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The trailing edgeregistration motormalfunctions.

The trailing edgeregistration homeposition sensorconnector makespoor contact.

The trailing edgeregistration homeposition sensormalfunctions.


The front staplerconnector makespoor contact.

The front staplermalfunctions.a) The front sta-pler is blockedwith a staple.b) The front sta-pler is broken.


The rear staplerconnector makespoor contact.

The rear staplermalfunctions.a) The rear sta-pler is blockedwith a staple.b) The rear sta-pler is broken.


A problem is de-tected with thepaper ejectionmotor.

A problem is de-tected with theelevation motor.


Replace the trailing edge registration motorand check for correct operation.


Replace the trailing edge registration homeposition sensor and check for correct op-eration.



a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, andcheck the cartridge and the stapling sec-tion of the stapler.b) Replace the front stapler and check forcorrect operation.



a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, andcheck the cartridge and the stapling sec-tion of the stapler.b) Replace the front stapler and check forcorrect operation.


See the booklet stitcher service manual.


2DF

1-5-40



C8320

C8330

C8340

C8350

C8360

C8370

C8380

C8390

C8400

C8410

C8420

C8430

C8440

C8450

Booklet stitcher* rear jog motorproblem

Booklet stitcher* front jog motorproblem

Booklet stitcher* staple motor prob-lem

Booklet stitcher* batch processingmotor problem

Booklet stitcher* stapler shift motorproblem

Booklet stitcher* paddle motor prob-lem

Booklet stitcher* folding problem

Booklet stitcher* backup RAM dataproblem

Booklet stitcher* incorrect typeproblem

Booklet stitcher* punch motor prob-lem

Booklet stitcher* shift motor prob-lem

Booklet stitcher* punch communica-tion problem

Booklet stitcher* punch sensor prob-lem

Booklet stitcher* side punch sensorproblem

A problem is de-tected with therear jog motor.

A problem is de-tected with thefront jog motor.

A problem is de-tected with thestaple motor.

A problem is de-tected with thebatch processingmotor.

A problem is de-tected with thestapler shift mo-tor.

A problem is de-tected with thepaddle motor.

A problem is de-tected with thefolding sensor.

A backup RAMdata error is de-tected.

An incorrect typeerror is detected.

A problem is de-tected with thepunch motor.

A problem is de-tected with theshift motor.

A problem is de-tected with thepunch communi-cation.

A problem is de-tected with thepunch sensor.

A problem is de-tected with theside punch sen-sor.















*: Optional

2DF

1-5-41



Booklet stitcher* punch backup RAMdata problem

Booklet stitcher* punch dust sensorproblem

Booklet stitcher* broken punchpower source wire problem

Mailbox* drive motor problem• While the mailbox drive motor is driv-

ing, synchronization signals do notsynchronize continually for 464 ms(motor lockup).

A problem is de-tected with thepunch backupRAM data.

A problem is de-tected with thepunch dust sen-sor.

A broken punchpower source wireproblem is de-tected.

Defective mailboxdrive motor ormailbox mainPCB.




Run a simulation of the mailbox (communi-cation test mode, see page 3-2-2 of themailbox service manual). If there is anyproblem with the communication, replacethe mailbox drive motor or the mailboxmain PCB and check for correct operation.

C8460

C8470

C8480

C8500

*: Optional

2DF

1-5-42

1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears(entirely white).

See page 1-5-43

(2) No image appears(entirely black).

See page 1-5-44

(3) Image is too light.

See page 1-5-45

(4) Background is visible.

See page 1-5-45

(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.

See page 1-5-45

(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.

See page 1-5-46

(7) A black line appearslaterally.

See page 1-5-46

(8) One side of the copyimage is darker thanthe other.

See page 1-5-46

(9) Black dots appear onthe image.

See page 1-5-47

(10) Image is blurred.

See page 1-5-47

(11)The leading edge of theimage is consistentlymisaligned with theoriginal.

See page 1-5-47

(12)The leading edge of theimage is sporadicallymisaligned with theoriginal.

See page 1-5-48

(13)Paper creases.

See page 1-5-48

(14)Offset occurs.

See page 1-5-48

(15)Image is partly missing.

See page 1-5-49

(16)Fixing is poor.

See page 1-5-49

(17) Image is out of focus.

See page 1-5-49

(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.

See page 1-5-50

(19)Image is not square.

See page 1-5-50

2DF

1-5-43

(1) No image appears(entirely white).

Causes1. No transfer charging.2. No LSU laser is output.3. No developing bias is output.


1. No transfer charging.

A. The connector terminals of the high-voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.

B. Defective main PCB.

C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

2. No LSU laser is output.

A. Defective laser scanner unit.

B. Defective main PCB.

3. No developing bias is output.

A. Defective main PCB.

B. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Check if CN7-10 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance itemU101 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.

Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-10 on the high-voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 isrun. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.

Replace the laser scanner unit.



Check if developing bias voltage is output when the main PCB isnormal while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.

2DF

1-5-44

(2) No image appears(entirely black).

Causes1. No main charging.2. Exposure lamp fails to light.


1. No main charging.

A. Broken main charger wire.

B. Leaking main charger housing.

C. The connector terminals of the high-voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.

D. Defective main PCB.

E. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

A. The connector terminals of the exposurelamp make poor contact.

B. Defective inverter PCB.

C. Defective scanner drive PCB.

D. Defective main PCB.

Replace the main charger unit.

Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.



Check if main charging takes place when CN1-3 on the high-voltagetransformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. Ifnot, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.


Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1-1 and 1-2 on theinverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,replace the inverter PCB.

Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1-3 on the scanner drivePCB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replacethe scanner drive PCB.


2DF

1-5-45


1. Foreign matter in the developing unit.

2. Dirty shading plate.

(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.

Causes1. Foreign matter in the developing unit.2. Dirty shading plate.

(3) Image is toolight.

(4) Background is visible.

Causes1. Insufficient toner.2. Deteriorated toner.3. The transfer voltage is not output properly.4. Dirty main charger wire.


1. Insufficient toner.

2. Deteriorated toner.

3. The transfer voltage is not output properly.

4. Dirty main charger.

Causes1. Deteriorated toner.2. Dirty main charger.


1. Deteriorated toner. Perform the drum refresh operation.

2. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.

If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment,replace the cartridge.

Perform the drum refresh operation.

Clean or check the transfer roller.

Clean the main charger or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.

Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Replace thedeveloping unit if any foreign matter.

Clean the shading plate.

2DF

1-5-46


1. Dirty contact glass.

2. Dirty or flawed drum.

3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

4. Dirty scanner mirror.

5. Dirty main charger wire.

(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.

Causes1. Dirty contact glass.2. Dirty or flawed drum.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.4. Dirty scanner mirror.5. Dirty main charger wire.

Clean the contact glass.

Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replacethe drum unit.

Replace the cleaning blade.

Clean the scanner mirror.

Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.


1. Dirty main charger wire.

2. Defective exposure lamp.


1. Flawed drum.

2. Dirty developing section.

3. Leaking main charger housing.

4. Leaking separation electrode.

(7) A black line ap-pears laterally.

Causes1. Flawed drum.2. Dirty developing section.3. Leaking main charger housing.4. Leaking separation electrode.

(8) One side of thecopy image isdarker than theother.

Causes1. Dirty main charger wire.2. Defective exposure lamp.

Replace the drum unit.

Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section.

Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.

Clean the separation electrode.

Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.

Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replacethe exposure lamp (see page 1-6-25).

2DF

1-5-47

(11)The leading edge ofthe image is consist-ently misaligned withthe original.

Causes1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge

registration.


1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.

2. Misadjusted scanner leading edgeregistration.

(10)Image is blurred.

(9) Black dots appearon the image.

Causes1. Dirty or flawed drum.2. Dirty contact glass.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.4. Dirty drum separation claws.5. Dirty heat roller separation claws.


1. Dirty or flawed drum.

2. Dirty contact glass.

3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

4. Dirty drum separation claws.

5. Dirty the heat roller separation claws.

Causes1. Scanner moves erratically.2. Deformed press roller.3. Paper conveying section drive problem.


1. Scanner moves erratically.

2. Deformed press roller.

3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scannerrails. If any, remove it.

Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-63).

Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.

Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-17).

Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-17).

Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replacethe drum unit.

Clean the contact glass.

Replace the cleaning blade.

Clean the drum separation claws.

Clean the heat roller separation claws.

2DF

1-5-48

(12)The leading edge ofthe image is sporadi-cally misaligned withthe original.

Causes1. Feed clutch, paper feed clutch, bypass paper

feed clutch or registration clutch installed oroperating incorrectly.


1. Feed clutch, paper feed clutch, bypass paperfeed clutch or registration clutch installed oroperating incorrectly.

Check the installation position and operation of the feed clutch,paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed clutch and registration clutch. Ifany of them operates incorrectly, replace it.

(14)Offset occurs.

(13)Paper creases. Causes1. Paper curled.2. Paper damp.3. Defective pressure springs.4. Defective separation.5. Defective fans.


1. Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.

2. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.

3. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.

4. Defective separation. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws.

5. Defective fans. Replace the fans.

Causes1. Defective cleaning blade.2. Defective fixing section.


1. Defective cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-46).

2. Defective fixing section. Replace the heat roller and press roller.

2DF

1-5-49

(17) Image is out offocus.

Causes1. Defective image scanning unit.2. Drum condensation.


1. Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-30).

2. Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation.

(15) Image is partly miss-ing.

Causes1. Paper damp.2. Paper creased.3. Drum condensation.4. Flawed drum.


1. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.

2. Paper creased. Replace the paper.

3. Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation.

4. Flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replacethe drum unit.

(16)Fixing is poor. Causes1. Wrong paper.2. Defective pressure springs.3. Flawed press roller.4. Defective fixing heater S.


1. Wrong paper. Check if the paper meets specifications.

2. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.

3. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-63).

4. Defective fixing heater S. Replace the fixing heater S (see page 1-6-63).

2DF

1-5-50

(19)Image is notsquare.

Causes1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.


1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.

2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.

Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit(see page 1-6-30).

Adjust the installation position of the image scanning unit(see page 1-6-30).


1. Misadjusted center line of image printing. Readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-6-19).

2. Misadjusted scanner center line. Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-37).

3. Original placed incorrectly. Place the original correctly.

(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.

Causes1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.2. Misadjusted scanner center line.3. Original placed incorrectly.

2DF

1-5-51

1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(1)The machine doesnot operate whenthe main switch isturned on.

(2)The drive motordoes not operate(C2000).

(3)The paper feed mo-tor does not operate(C2500).

(4)The eject motordoes not operate.

No electricity at the poweroutlet.

The power cord is notplugged in properly.

The front cover, conveyingcover and/or side coverare/is not closed com-pletely.

Broken power cord.

Defective main switch.

Blown fuse in the powersource PCB.

Defective safety switch 1or 2.

Defective power sourcePCB.

Poor contact in the drivemotor connector terminals.

Broken drive motor gear.

Defective drive motor.

Defective main PCB.

Poor contact in the paperfeed motor connector ter-minals.

Broken paper feed motorgear.

Defective paper feed mo-tor.

Defective main PCB.

Poor contact in the ejectmotor connector terminals.

Broken eject motor gear.

Defective eject motor.


Measure the input voltage.

Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.

Check the front cover, conveying cover and side cover.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace themain switch.

Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing andreplace the fuse.

Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none,replace the switch.

With AC present, check for 24 V DC at CN1-1 and 5 V DC atCN1-5 on the power source PCB. If none, replace the powersource PCB.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary.

Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor oper-ates when CN11-9 on the main PCB goes low. If not, replace thedrive motor.

Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN11-9 on the mainPCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.


Check visually and replace the paper feed motor if necessary.

Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper feed motoroperates when CN11-10 on the main PCB goes low. If not, re-place the paper feed motor.



Check visually and replace the eject motor if necessary.

Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper-ates when CN16-B11, CN16-B12, CN16-B13 and CN16-B14 onthe main PCB go low. If not, replace the eject motor.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the switch if indication of the correspondingswitch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse.

2DF

1-5-52


(4)The eject motordoes not operate.

(5)The upper lift motordoes not operate(C1010).

(6)The lower lift motordoes not operate(C1020).

(7)The scanner motordoes not operate.

(8)Cooling fan motor 1does not operate.




Defective main PCB.

Broken upper lift motorcoil.

Poor contact in the upperlift motor connector termi-nals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken lower lift motorcoil.

Poor contact in the lowerlift motor connector termi-nals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken scanner motor coil.

Poor contact in the scan-ner motor connector termi-nals.

Broken cooling fan motor 1coil.

Poor contact in the coolingfan motor 1 connector ter-minals.







Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN16-B11, CN16-B12, CN16-B13 and CN16-B14 on the main PCB go low. If not,replace the main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the upperlift motor.


Check if 24 V DC is output across CN13-A17 on the main PCBright after the upper drawer is installed. If not, replace the mainPCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the lower liftmotor.


Check if 24 V DC is output across CN13-B7 on the main PCBright after the lower drawer is installed. If not, replace the mainPCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scannermotor.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fanmotor 1.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.







2DF

1-5-53







(17)The upper paperfeed clutch does notoperate.

(18)The lower paperfeed clutch does notoperate.

(19)Feed clutch 1 doesnot operate.











Broken upper paper feedclutch coil.

Poor contact in the upperpaper feed clutch connec-tor terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken lower paper feedclutch coil.

Poor contact in the lowerpaper feed clutch connec-tor terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken feed clutch 1 coil.

Poor contact in feed clutch1 connector terminals.

Defective main PCB.











Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the upperpaper feed clutch.


Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN16-B1 on the mainPCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the lowerpaper feed clutch.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed clutch1.



2DF

1-5-54




(22)The bypass paperfeed clutch does notoperate.

(23)The bypass feedclutch does not op-erate.

(24)The registrationclutch does not op-erate.

(25)The feedshift sole-noid does not oper-ate.

(26)The toner feed sole-noid does not oper-ate.



Defective main PCB.



Defective main PCB.

Broken bypass paper feedclutch coil.

Poor contact in the bypasspaper feed clutch connec-tor terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken bypass feed clutchcoil.

Poor contact in the bypassfeed clutch connector ter-minals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken registration clutchcoil.

Poor contact in the regis-tration clutch connectorterminals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken feedshift solenoidcoil.

Poor contact in thefeedshift solenoid connec-tor terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Broken toner feed solenoidcoil.

Poor contact in the tonerfeed solenoid connectorterminals.

Defective main PCB.



Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN13-A12 on themain PCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.



Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN13-A5 on the mainPCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypasspaper feed clutch.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypassfeed clutch.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the registra-tion clutch.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the feedshiftsolenoid.


Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN16-A1 and CN16-A2 on the main PCB go low. If not, replace the main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the tonerfeed solenoid.



2DF

1-5-55


(27)The cleaning lampdoes not turn on.

(28)The exposure lampdoes not turn on.

(29)The exposure lampdoes not turn off.

(30)The fixing heaterdoes not turn on(C6000).

(31)The fixing heaterdoes not turn off.

(32)Main charging is notperformed.

(33)Transfer charging isnot performed.

Poor contact in the clean-ing lamp connector termi-nals.

Defective cleaning lamp.

Defective main PCB.

Poor contact in the expo-sure lamp connector termi-nals.

Defective inverter PCB.

Defective scanner drivePCB.

Defective main PCB.

Defective inverter PCB.

Defective scanner drivePCB.

Broken wire in fixingheater M or S.

Fixing unit thermostat trig-gered.

Broken fixing unit thermis-tor wire.

Dirty sensor part of thefixing unit thermistor.

Broken main charger wire.

Leaking main chargerhousing.

Poor contact in the high-voltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Defective high- voltagetransformer PCB.

Poor contact in the high-voltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltagetransformer PCB.


Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.

If the cleaning lamp turns on when CN9-B7 on the main PCB isheld low, replace the main PCB.


Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lampturns on with CN1-1 and CN1-2 on the inverter PCB go low. Ifnot, replace the inverter PCB.

Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lampturns on with CN1-3 on the scanner drive PCB goes low. If not,replace the scanner drive PCB.


If the exposure lamp does not turn off with CN1-1 and CN1-2 onthe inverter PCB high, replace the inverter PCB.

If CN1-3 on the scanner drive PCB are always low, replace thescanner drive PCB.

Check for continuity across each heater. If none, replace theheater M or S.

Check for continuity across thermostat. If none, remove thecause and replace the thermostat.

Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the fixing unit ther-mistor.

Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.

See page 1-5-44.

See page 1-5-43.

2DF

1-5-56


(34)No developing biasis output.

(35)The original size isnot detected.

(36)The original size isnot detected cor-rectly.

(37)The touch panelkeys do not work.

(38)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in the upperdrawer.

(39)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in the lowerdrawer.

(40)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent on the by-pass tray.

(41)The size of paper inthe upper drawer isnot displayed cor-rectly.

Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltagetransformer PCB.

Defective original detec-tion switch.

Original is not placed cor-rectly.

Poor contact in the originalsize detection sensor con-nector terminals.

Defective original size de-tection sensor.

Poor contact in the touchpanel connector terminals.

Defective touch panel oroperation unit PCB.

Poor contact in the upperpaper switch connectorterminals.

Defective upper paperswitch.

Poor contact in the lowerpaper switch connectorterminals.

Defective lower paperswitch.

Poor contact in the bypasspaper switch connectorterminals.

Defective bypass paperswitch.

Poor contact in the upperpaper length switch con-nector terminals.

Defective upper paperlength switch.

Poor contact in the upperpaper width switch con-nector terminals.

Defective upper paperwidth switch.

See page 1-5-43.

If the level of CN5-2 on the scanner drive PCB does not changewhen the original detection switch is turned on and off, replacethe original detection switch.

Check the original and correct if necessary.


Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it.


If any keys do not work after the touch panel has been initial-ized, replace the touch panel or operation unit PCB.


Check if CN13-B12 on the main PCB goes low when the upperpaper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN13-B13 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the upper paper switch.


Check if CN13-B18 on the main PCB goes low when the upperpaper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN13-B19 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the lower paper switch.


Check if CN6-A6 on the main PCB goes low when the bypasspaper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN6-A5 on themain PCB. If not, replace the bypass paper switch.


Check if CN13-B2 on the main PCB goes low when the upperpaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the upper paperlength switch.


Check if the levels of CN12-3, CN12-4 and CN12-5 on the mainPCB change alternately when the width guide in the upperdrawer is moved. If not, replace the upper paper width switch.

2DF

1-5-57


(42)The size of paper inthe lower drawer isnot displayed cor-rectly.

(43)The printing width ofthe paper on thebypass tray is notdetected correctly.

(44)A paper jam in thepaper feed, paperconveying or fixingsection is indicatedwhen the mainswitch is turned on.

Poor contact in the lowerpaper length switch con-nector terminals.

Defective lower paperlength switch.

Poor contact in the lowerpaper width switch con-nector terminals.

Defective lower paperwidth switch.

Poor contact in the bypasspaper length switch con-nector terminals.

Defective bypass paperlength switch.

Poor contact in the bypasspaper width switch con-nector terminals.

Defective bypass paperwidth switch.

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround feed switch 1/2/3,registration switch,feedshift switch or ejectswitch.








Check if CN13-A19 on the main PCB goes low when the lowerpaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the lower paperlength switch.


Check if the levels of CN12-9, CN12-10 and CN12-11 on themain PCB change alternately when the width guide in the lowerdrawer is moved. If not, replace the lower paper width switch.


Check if CN6-B11 on the main PCB goes low when the bypasspaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the bypass pa-per length switch.


Check if the levels of CN6-A1, CN6-A2 and CN6-A3 on the mainPCB change alternately when the insert guide on the bypasstable is moved. If not, replace the bypass paper width switch.

Check and remove if any.





Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the switch if indication of the correspondingswitch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re-verse.

2DF

1-5-58


(45)The message re-questing covers tobe closed is dis-played when thefront cover and con-veying cover areclosed.

(46)Others.

Poor contact in the con-nector terminals of safetyswitch 1 or 2.

Defective safety switch 1or 2.

Wiring is broken, shortedor makes poor contact.

Noise.


Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuitywhen the switch is on, replace it.

Check for continuity. If none, repair.

Locate the source of noise and remove.

2DF

1-5-59


1-5-5 Mechanical problems

(1)No primary paper feed.

(2)No secondary paperfeed.

(3)Skewed paper feed.

(4)The scanner does nottravel.

(5)Multiple sheets of paperare fed at one time.

(6)Paper jams.

Check if the surfaces of the following rollersor pulleys are dirty with paper powder: up-per/lower forwarding pulleys, upper/lowerpaper feed pulleys, upper/lower separationpulleys, feed rollers, registration rollers, by-pass forwarding pulleys, bypass paper feedpulleys and bypass separation pulleys.

Check if the upper/lower forwarding pulleys,upper/lower paper feed pulleys or upper/lower separation pulleys is deformed.

Electrical problem with the following electro-magnetic clutches: upper/lower paper feedclutches, feed clutches 1/2/3, bypass paperfeed clutch and bypass feed clutch.

Check if the surfaces of the right and leftregistration rollers are dirty with paper pow-der.

Electrical problem with the registrationclutch.

Width guide in a drawer installed incorrectly.

Deformed width guide in a drawer.

Check if a pressure spring along the paperconveying path is deformed or out of place.

Check if the scanner wire is loose.

The scanner motor malfunctions.

Check if the upper or lower separation pulleyis worn.

Check if the paper is curled.

Check if the paper is excessively curled.

Deformed guides along the paper conveyingpath.

Check if the contact between the right andleft registration rollers is correct.

Check if the contact between the feed rollerand feed pulley is correct.

Check if the press roller is extremely dirty ordeformed.

Check if the contact between the heat rollerand its separation claws is correct.

Check if the contact between the eject rollerand pulley is correct.

The feedshift solenoid malfunctions.

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check visually and replace any deformedpulleys (see page 1-6-3).

See pages 1-5-53 and 54.


See page 1-5-54.

Check the width guide visually and corrector replace if necessary.

Repair or replace if necessary .

Repair or replace.

Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-6-16).

See page 1-5-52.

Replace the upper or lower separation pul-ley if it is worn (see page 1-6-3).

Change the paper.

Change the paper.

Repair or replace if necessary.

Check visually and remedy if necessary.


Clean or replace the press roller.

Repair if any springs are off the separationclaws.


See page 1-5-54.

2DF

1-5-60


(7)Toner drops on the pa-per conveying path.

(8)Abnormal noise isheard.

Check if the developing unit is extremelydirty.

Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears oper-ate smoothly.

Check if the following electromagneticclutches are installed correctly: upper/lowerpaper feed clutches, feed clutches 1/2/3,bypass paper feed clutch and bypass feedclutch.

Clean the developing unit.

Grease the bearings and gears.

Correct.

2DF

1-6-1

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be

seriously damaged.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:

Hioki 3200Sanwa MD-180CSanwa YX-360TRBeckman TECH300Beckman DM45Beckman 330*Beckman 3030*Beckman DM850*Fluke 8060A*Arlec DMM1050Arlec YF1030C* Capable of measuring RMS values.

• Prepare the following as test originals:1. NTC (new test chart)2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)

2DF

1-6-2

(2) Running a maintenance item


Enter “001” using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys

and press the start key.

Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys

or numeric keys.

The selected maintenance item is run.



Start

End

Maintenance mode is entered.

The maintenance item is selected.

Maintenance mode is exited.

Repeat the same maintenance item?

Run another maintenance item?

No

No

Yes

Yes

2DF

1-6-3

1-6-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleysFollow the procedure below to replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys.

Procedure• Removing the primary paper feed units

1. Open the front cover and pull out the upperand lower drawers.

2. Remove the one screw from each of theprimary paper feed units and then the units.

Figure 1-6-1

• Removing the forwarding pulley3. Remove the stopper.4. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the

direction the arrow, and remove from theprimary paper feed unit.

Figure 1-6-2

5. Remove the stop ring, pull the forwardingpulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, andremove the forwarding pulley.

Figure 1-6-3

Primary paper feed units

Forwarding pulley retainer

Stopper

Forwarding pulley shaftStop ring

Forwarding pulley

2DF

1-6-4

• Removing the paper feed pulley6. Remove the two stop rings.7. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of

the primary paper feed unit (in the direction ofthe arrow) and remove the paper feed pulley.

Figure 1-6-4

• Removing the separation pulley8. Remove the stop ring on the rear of the

primary paper feed unit.9. Pull the separation shaft toward the machine

rear (in the direction of the arrow) andremove the separation pulley.

Figure 1-6-5

10. Replace the forwarding, paper feed andseparation pulleys.

Caution:• When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it

correctly as shown in Figure 1-6-6.• When fitting the separation pulley, keep the blue

end of the separation toward the machine rear.

11. Refit all removed parts.

Figure 1-6-6

Stop rings

Paper feed shaft

Paper feed pulley

Separation shaft

Stop ring

Separation pulley

Forwarding pulley

Machine front Machine rear

2DF

1-6-5

(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass separation, bypass paper feed and bypass forwarding pulleysFollow the procedure below to replace the bypass separation, bypass paper feed and bypass forwarding pulleys.

Procedure• Removing the bypass unit

1. Remove the four screws holding the lowerright cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-7

2. Remove the two screws holding the bypassunit and disconnect the two connectors, andthen remove the unit.

Figure 1-6-8

• Removing the bypass separation pulley3. Reverse the bypass unit and remove the

spring and stop ring from the bypassseparation pulley and move the bushinginside.

Figure 1-6-9

Lower right cover

Bypass unit

Connectors

Stop ringBushing

Bypass separation shaft

Spring

2DF

1-6-6

4. Raise the bypass separation shaft as shownin the diagram, remove the holder plate andthe bushing, and then remove the bypassseparation pulley.* Take care not to remove the spring pin ofthe gear at the rear of the bypass separationshaft. If it is removed, refit it to its originalposition.

Figure 1-6-10

• Removing the bypass paper feed pulley5. Detach the connector of the bypass paper

switch and remove the wire from the threeclamps.

6. Remove the screw holding the bypass unitcover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-11

7. Remove the stop ring and bushing on thefront of the bypass paper feed shaft.

Figure 1-6-12

Holder plate

Bushing

Bypass separation pulley

Bypass separation shaft

Clamps

Connector

Bypass unit cover

Stop ring

Bypass paper feed shaft

Bushing

2DF

1-6-7

8. Raise the bypass paper feed shaft as shownin the illustration, remove the stop ring, andthen remove the bypass paper feed pulley.

Caution:• When fitting the bypass paper feed pulley, keep

the blue end of the paper feed toward themachine rear.

Figure 1-6-13

• Removing the bypass forwarding pulley9. Remove the wire of the bypass paper feed

clutch from the clamp.10. Remove the stop ring and bypass paper feed

clutch.• When refitting, insert the cutout in the

bypass paper feed clutch over the stopperon the copier.

Figure 1-6-14

11. Remove the screw from the cam at the rearof the bypass forwarding pulley shaft andmove the cam and the bushing toward theinner side.

Figure 1-6-15

Stop ring

Bypass paper feed pulley


Bypass paper feed clutch

Stop ring

Clamp

Bushing

Bypass forwarding pulley shaft

Cam

2DF

1-6-8

12. Remove the stop ring of the bypass paperfeed shaft and slide the bushing in thedirection of the arrow.

Figure 1-6-16

13. Slide the bypass forwarding pulley shafttemporarily toward the rear side and thenraise it to remove from the bypass unit.* Remove the shaft while raising the actuatorof the bypass paper switch.

Figure 1-6-17

14. Remove the bushing an cam on the rear ofthe bypass forwarding pulley shaft.

Figure 1-6-18


BushingStop ring


Acutuator

Cam

Bushing


2DF

1-6-9

15. Remove the stop ring and slide the bypassforwarding pulley with the forwarding pulleyretainer from the shaft to remove it.

16. Replace the bypass separation, bypass paperfeed and bypass forwarding pulleys.

Figure 1-6-19

17. Refit all removed parts.* Fit the bypass unit cover so that the film onthe cover is positioned under the bypasspaper feed shaft.

Figure 1-6-20

Stop ring


Bypass forwarding pulley

Films


2DF

1-6-10

(3) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacementPerform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.

(3-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.

U034U066

(P. 1-6-29)U071

(P. 1-4-16)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.

Procedure

Yes

No

Start

Enter maintenance mode.



Press the interrupt key.

Is the leading edge registration correct?

Press the start key

The new setting is stored

Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

End

Select the items to be adjusted.

For output example 1, increase the value using the cursor down key.For output example 2, decrease the value using the cursor up key.

Message displayRCL ON : Leading edge registrationRCL ON (DUP) : Leading edge registration for duplex copying (second face)RCL ON (BYP) : Leading edge registration for feeding the bypass

Setting range (initial setting)RCL ON: –30.0 – +30.0 (0.5)RCL ON (DUP): –10.0 – +10.0 (0)RCL ON (BYP): –10.0 – +10.0 (-1.0)Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.5 mm.

Press the start key to output a test pattern.

Correct image Output example 1

Output example 2

Leading edge registration (50 ± 1 mm)

Figure 1-6-21

2DF

1-6-11

(3-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leadingedge of the original during memory copying.

U053(P. 1-4-12)

U066(P. 1-6-29)

U065(P. 1-6-27, 28)

U407U034

(P. 1-6-10)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

Procedure


Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-22

Yes

No

Start





Press the start key and make a test copy.

Is the leading edge registration correct?


The new setting is stored.

Setting range: –10 – +10Initilal setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 1 mm.


End

For copy example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.

2DF

1-6-12

(3-3) Adjusting the center line of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original whenpaper is fed from the drawer.

U034U067

(P. 1-6-30)U072

(P. 1-4-17)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.

Procedure

Center line of printing


Output example 2

Figure 1-6-23

Yes

No

Start






Is the image correct?




End

For output example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For output example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.

Setting range (initial setting)LSU OUT: –10.0 – +10.0 (–7.2)LSU OUT (DUP): –5.0 – +5.0 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.1 mm.

LSU OUT: Optical axis adjustment dataLSU OUT (DUP): Optical axis adjustment

data for duplex copying (second face)

Select the item to be adjusted.

2DF

1-6-13

(3-4) Adjusting the margins for printingMake the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.

U402U403

(P. 1-6-31)U404

(P. 1-4-49)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments inmaintenance mode.

Procedure

Yes

No

Start




Press the start key to output a test pattern using A3/11" ¥ 17" paper.



Setting range (initial setting)Printer leading edge margin: 0 – +10 (3.7)Printer left/right margin: –5 – +10 (2.7)Printer trailing edge margin: –5 – +10 (4.2)Printer trailing edge margin for duplex copying

(second face): –5 – +10 (3.5)Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.5 mm.

Select the items to be adjusted.

Are the margins correct?

Change the setting. Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin winder. Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower.


LEAD : printer leading edge marginAC : printer left/right marginsTRAIL : printer trailing edge margin TRAIL (DUP) : printer trailing edge margin for

duplex copying (second face)

Yes

No


End

Proceed to another mode?

Ejection direction(reference)

Printer trailing edge margin for duplex copying (6 ± 2.5 mm)

Printer leading edge margin(6 ± 2.5 mm)

Printer left margin

(6 ± 2.0 mm)

Printer right margin(6 ± 2.0 mm)

Printer trailing edge margin(6 ± 2.5 mm)

Duplex copy mode (second face, A3/11" × 17")

Normal copy mode (A3/11" × 17")

Figure 1-6-24

2DF

1-6-14

(3-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paperMake the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.

Procedure

End

Start



Yes

Yes

No

No



Press the start key to make a test copy.

Decrease the value using the cursor down key.

Setting range (initial setting)• Amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller

DECK DATA : –30 – +20 (0)BYPASS DATA : –30 – +20 (0)DUPLEX DATA : –30 – +20 (0)

• Amount of slack in the paper at the paper feed rollerBYPASS : 0 – +255 (110)1ST DECK : 0 – +255 (20)2ND DECK : 0 – +255 (0)3RD DECK : 0 – +255 (0)4TH DECK : 0 – +255 (0)LCF : 0 – +255 (0)

The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.



Select "RESIST DATA" or "FEED DATA".

• Amount of slack in the paper at the registration rollerDECK DATA : DrawersBYPASS DATA : Bypass trayDUPLEX DATA : Duplex copying (second face)

• Amount of slack in the paper at the paper feed rollerBYPASS : Bypass tray1ST DECK : Upper drawer2ND DECK : Lower drawer3RD DECK : Optional drawer 14TH DECK : Optional drawer 2LCF : Optional large paper deck

Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly (copy

example 1)?

Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy

example 2)?

Increase the value using the cursor up key.



Original Copyexample 1

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-25

2DF

1-6-15

1-6-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lampReplace the exposure lamp as follows.

Procedure1. Remove the original cover or the DF.2. Remove the upper right cover, upper front

cover, upper rear cover and contact glass.

Figure 1-6-26

3. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of themachine.Caution: When moving the mirror 1 frame, donot touch the exposure lamp nor the inverterPCB.

4. Remove the two screws holding the metalplate on the rear of the machine and then theplate.

Figure 1-6-27

5. Detach the exposure lamp connector from theinverter PCB.

6. Remove the two screws holding the exposurelamp and then the lamp.

7. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all theremoved parts.

Figure 1-6-28

Metal plate

Connector

Exposure lamp

Upper right cover

Upper rear coverContact glass

2DF

1-6-16

(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wiresTake the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.

Caution:After replacing the scanner wire, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform theadjustments (see pages 1-6-25 to 31).

(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires

Procedure1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-6-

19).2. Remove the upper left cover and scanner left

cover.

Figure 1-6-29

3. Remove the inverter wire guide plate andthen the wire from the inverter PCB.

Figure 1-6-30

4. Remove the screw holding each of the frontand rear wire retainers and then remove themirror 1 frame from the scanner unit.

Figure 1-6-31

Upper left cover

Scanner left cover

Inverter wire

Inverter wire guide plate

Front wire retainer

Mirror 1 frame

Rear wire retainer

2DF

1-6-17

5. Unhook the round terminal of the scannerwire from the scanner tension spring on theleft side of the scanner unit.

6. Remove the scanner wire.

Figure 1-6-32

(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires

Caution:When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.Machine front: P/N 2AV1219 (black)Machine rear: P/N 2AV1220 (gray)

Fitting requires the following tools:Two frame securing tools (P/N 2AV6808)Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811)

Procedure1. Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner

wires into the hole in the respective scannerwire drum and wind the scanner wire threeturns inward and four turns outward.• With the locating ball as the reference point,

wind the shorter end of each of the wiresinward.

2. Secure the scanner wires using the scannerwire stoppers.

Figure 1-6-29

Scanner wire

Scanner tension spring

Scanner wire

Three turns inward Three turns inward

Four turns outward Four turns outwardLocating ball

Scanner wire drum

Scanner wire stoppers

2DF

1-6-18

3. Insert the two frame securing tools into thepositioning holes at the front and rear of thescanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame inposition.

Figure 1-6-34

4. Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the right of the scanner unit,winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 1

5. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above tobelow. .............................................................................................................................................................. 2

6. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. .............................................................. 3

Figure 1-6-35

Frame securing tools

Mirror 2 frame

2DF

1-6-19

7. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire pulleys at the left of thescanner unit, winding from below to above. .................................................................................................... 4

8. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below toabove. ............................................................................................................................................................. 5

9. Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit. ........ 610. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 7

Figure 1-6-36

11. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and framesecuring tools.

12. Gather the scanner wires toward the locatingballs.

13. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side tocorrectly locate the wires in position.

14. Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail andmove it toward the left side of the machine.

15. Insert the frame securing tools into thepositioning holes (leftmost holes) at the frontand the rear of the scanner unit and screwthe mirror 1 frame while securing both themirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame.

16. Remove the two frame securing tools17. Refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-37

Mirror 1 frame

Frame securing tools

2DF

1-6-20

(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unitTake the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced.

Procedure1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit

(see pages 1-6-32 and 34).2. Remove the four screws holding the lower

right cover and then the cover.Remove the three screws holding the ejectcover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-38

3. Remove the four screws holding the frontright cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-39

4. Remove the five screws holding the innercover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-40

Eject cover

Lower right cover

Front right cover

Inner cover

2DF

1-6-21

5. Remove the two screws and detach theconnector and then remove the fan duct.

Figure 1-6-41

6. Remove the six screws holding the tonercontainer retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-6-42

7. Remove the four screws and detach theconnector and then remove the laser scannerunit.

8. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit allthe removed parts.

Figure 1-6-43

Fan duct Connector

Toner container retainer

Laser scanner unit

Connector

2DF

1-6-22

Figure 1-6-44

(4) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateralsquareness not obtained).

Caution:• After adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit, make a test copy and check the copy image. If lateral squareness is

still not obtained, perform "(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU" (see page 1-6-25).

Procedure

Refit the laser scanner unit and turn the main switch on.

Yes

No

Press the start key and make a copy at 100% magnification.

Start

End





Select “VTC-PG2”.


Turn the main switch off and carry out steps 1 to 6 of "(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit" (see page 1-6-20).* In case of copy sample 1 Loosen the screw in the direction of the white arrow (e). Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the white arrow (e).* In case of copy sample 2 Tighten the screw in the direction of the black arrow (\). Increase the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the black arrow (\) (See figure 1-6-45).


Correct image Copy example 1

Copy example 2

LSU spacer

Screw

Figure 1-6-45

2DF

1-6-23

(5) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be checked or replaced.

Caution:After replacing the ISU, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform the adjustments(see pages 1-6-25 to 31).

ISU installation requires the following tools:Two positioning pins (P/N 1856812)

Procedure• Detaching the ISU

1. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-6-19).2. Remove the rear and shield covers and

detach connector CN34 on the main PCB.

Figure 1-6-46

3. Remove the eight screws holding the ISUcover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-47

4. Remove the two screws holding the originalsize detection sensor retainer and then theretainer.

5. Remove the four screws holding the ISU andthen the ISU.

6. Check or replace the ISU.

Figure 1-6-48

CN34

ISU cover

ISU

Original size detection sensor retainer

2DF

1-6-24

• Refitting the ISU1. Fit the ISU using the two positioning pins.2. Secure the ISU using the four screws.3. Remove the two positioning pins and refit all

the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-49

ISU

Positioning pins

2DF

1-6-25

(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateralsquareness not obtained).

Caution:• Be sure to perform “(4-1) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit” (page 1-6-22) first.• Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for

the adjustment.

Procedure

Figure 1-6-50

Correct image Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Refit the contact glass.

Remove the contact glass and adjust the lateral squareness of the ISU by rotating the pin.

For copy example 1, rotate the pin in the direction of the black arrow (\).For copy example 2, rotate the pin in the direction of the white arrow (e).Yes

No

Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.

Start

End


Place the original on the contact glass.

Figure 1-6-51

Pin

2DF

1-6-26

(7) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained).

Caution:• Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-14) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image,

and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.• Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for

the adjustment.

Procedure


Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-52

Yes

No

Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.

Start

Remove the contact glass. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame.For copy example 1, move the frame in the direction of the white arrow (e).For copy example 2, move the frame in the direction of the black arrow (b).

End


Place the original on the contact glass.

Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass.

Figure 1-6-53

Mirror 2 frame

Screws

2DF

1-6-27

(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.

U067(P. 1-6-30)

U053(P. 1-4-12)

U065 (main scanning

direction)

U065 (auxiliary scanning

direction) (P. 1-6-28)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.Also, perform “(9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction” (page 1-6-28) and “(11)Adjusting the scanner center line” (page 1-6-30) after this adjustment.

Procedure



Yes

No

Start

End


Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.


Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image wider, and decreasing it makes the image narrower.

For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.



Select “MAIN SCAN ADJ” (main scanning direction).



Original Copyexample

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-54

2DF

1-6-28

(9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.

U053(P. 1-4-12)

U070(P. 1-4-15)

U065 (auxiliary scanning

direction)

U065 (main scanning

direction) (P. 1-6-27)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

Procedure



Yes

No

Start




Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: –2Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image longer, and decreasing it make the image shorter.

For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.




Select “SUB SCAN ADJ” (auxiliary scanning direction).

End



Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-55

2DF

1-6-29

(10) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registrationPerform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.

U034(P. 1-6-10)

U071(P. 1-4-16)

U066


Procedure

Is the scanner leading edge registration

correct?

Yes

No

Start






For copy example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.




Setting range (initial setting)ADJUST DATA: -32 - +32 (7)ADJUST DATA2: -20 - +20 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.17 mm.


End

ADJUST DATA: Scanner leading edge registrationADJUST DATA2: Scanner leading edge registration for rotate copying


Copy example 2

Scanner leading edge registration

Figure 1-6-56

2DF

1-6-30

(11) Adjusting the scanner center linePerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.

U034(P. 1-6-12)

U072(P. 1-4-17)

U067


Procedure

Yes

No

Start







Is the scanner center line correct?


The new settingis stored.

Setting range (initial setting)ADJUST DATA: -39 - +39 (-18)ADJUST DATA2: -39 - +39 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.17 mm.

For copy example 1, decrease the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the cursor down key.


End

ADJUST DATA: Scanner axisadjustment dataADJUST DATA2: Scanner axisadjustment data for rotate copying


Copy example 2

Scanner center line

Figure 1-6-57

2DF

1-6-31

(12) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glassPerform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.

U402(P. 1-6-13)

U404(P. 1-4-49)

U403


Procedure

Change the setting.Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin wider.Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower.Yes

No

Start







Setting range (default)Scanner left margin: 0 – +10 (3)Scanner leading edge margin: 0 – +10 (1.5)Scanner right margin: 0 – +10 (2)Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 – +10 (2)

Changing the value by one moves the margin by 0.5 mm for all.


Are the margins correct?


A MARGIN: scanner left marginB MARGIN: scanner leading edge marginC MARGIN: scanner right marginD MARGIN: scanner trailing edge margin

Yes

No

Proceed to another mode?

End

Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode. Scanner leading edge margin (3 ± 1.5 mm)

Scannerleft margin

(2 ± 1.0 mm)

Scanner right margin(2 ± 1.0 mm)

Ejection direction(reference)

Scanner trailing edge margin(2 ± 1.0 mm)

Figure 1-6-58

2DF

1-6-32

1-6-4 Drum section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unitFollow the procedure below to replace the drum unit.

Cautions:• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit.• Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit.

Procedure1. Open the conveying cover and remove the

developing unit (see page 1-6-34).2. Remove the screws holding the drum unit

and then the unit.3. Replace the drum unit and refit all the

removed parts.

Figure 1-6-59

(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unitFollow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit.

Procedure1. Open the front cover.2. Pull out the main charger unit holding the

knob.3. While pushing the hole with a sharp-pointed

object, remove the main charger unit.4. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the

removed parts.

Figure 1-6-60

Drum unit

Main charger unitKnob

Hole

2DF

1-6-33

(3) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assembliesFollow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claw assemblies.

Procedure1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-32).2. Push the drum separation claw assemblies

with the minus driver from the top of thecorner hole and remove the claw assemblies.

3. Replace the drum separation clawassemblies and refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-61

Drum separation claw assemblies

Coner hole

2DF

1-6-34

1-6-5 Developing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unitFollow the procedure below to replace the developing unit.

Procedure1. Open the front cover.2. Remove the toner container and toner

disposal tank.3. Remove the screw and turn the developing

release lever in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 1-6-62

4. Remove the developing unit.5. Replace the developing unit and refit all the

removed parts.

Figure 1-6-63

Developing release lever

Developing unit

2DF

1-6-35

1-6-6 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assemblyFollow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller assembly.

Procedure1. Open the conveying cover.2. While holding down the projection, slide the

transfer roller assembly toward the front toremove it.

3. Replace the transfer roller assembly and refitall the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-64

Transfer roller assembly

Projection

2DF

1-6-36

1-6-7 Fixing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unitFollow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.

Procedure1. Open the front cover and conveying cover.2. Remove the three screws holding the front

left cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-65

3. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit andthen the unit.

4. Check or replace the transfer roller assemblyand refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-66

(2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation clawsFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit.2. Remove the two screws and detach the

upper fixing cover while holding the fourclaws.

Figure 1-6-67

Front left cover

Fixing unit

Upper fixing cover

Claw

Claw

Claw

Claw

2DF

1-6-37

3. Remove the heat roller separation claws fromthe upper fixing cover.

4. Replace the heat roller separation claws andrefit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-68

(3) Detaching and refitting the press rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the press roller.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-36).2. Remove the upper fixing cover (see page 1-

6-36).3. Remove the front and rear press springs.

Figure 1-6-69

4. Detach the press roller from the fixing unitand remove the front and rear bearings.

5. Replace the press roller and refit all theremoved parts.

Figure 1-6-70

Heat roller separation claws

Press spring

Press spring

Press roller

Bearing

Bearing

2DF

1-6-38

(4) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and SFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater M and S.


6-36).3. Remove the screw on the front of the fixing

unit thermostat and two screws on the rear ofthe fixing unit.

Figure 1-6-71

4. Pull out the fixing heater M and S from thefixing unit.

Figure 1-6-72

5. Replace the fixing heater M and S, and refitall the removed parts.* When refitting the fixing heaters, take carenot to refit fixing heaters M and S to wrongpositions. Refit fixing heater M (black wire) tothe fixing unit housing with mark B and fixingheater S (white wire) to the housing with markW.

Figure 1-6-73

Fixing unit thermostat Screws

Fixing heater M

Fixing heater S

Fixing heater M

Fixing heater S

2DF

1-6-39

(5) Detaching and refitting the heat rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.


6-36).3. Remove the press roller and fixing heater M

and S (see pages 1-6-37 and 38).4. Remove the fixing gear.

Figure 1-6-74

5. Detach the heat roller from the fixing unit.Remove the C ring, gear, bearing andbushing on the rear of the heat roller and thenremove the C ring, bearing and bushing onthe front.

6. Replace the heat roller and refit all theremoved parts.

Figure 1-6-75

Fixing gear

Heat roller

Bushing

Bearing

BearingC ring

Gear

Bushing

C ring

2DF

1-6-40

(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistorFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit thermistor.


6-36).3. Disconnect the connector of the fixing unit

thermistor.

Figure 1-6-76

4. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-39).5. Turn the fixing unit over and remove the

screw to remove the fixing unit thermistor.

Figure 1-6-77

Connector

Fixing unit thermistor

2DF

1-7-1

Figure 1-7-1

1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)

NOTEWhen writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.(For formatting, insert a Compact Flash and select a drive.)For a desktop computer, connect a Compact Flash card reader/writer to it. For a notebook computer, use a PC card adapteror a connection portion only for Compact Flash.

Procedure1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the

power plug.2. Remove the middle right cover.

Insert it with its rear side toward the front sideof the machine.

3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of thecopier.

4. Insert the power plug and turn the mainswitch on. Upgrading firmware starts for 3minutes.Caution:Never turn the main switch off duringupgrading.

5. "Completed" is displayed on the touch panelwhen upgrading is complete.

6. Turn the main switch off and disconnect thepower plug.

7. Remove Compact Flash from the copier andrefit the middle right cover.

8. Insert the power plug and turn the mainswitch on.

CompactFlash

Notch hole

2DF

1-7-2

1-7-2 Replacing the backup ROM

Replacing the backup ROM requires the following tools:ROM replacing tool

Procedure1. Insert the claw of the ROM replacing tool into

the groove of the backup ROM.2. Press the ROM replacing tool from both the

right and the left sides. The backup ROM isremoved.

3. Replace the backup ROM.

Figure 1-7-3

ROM replacing tool

Backup ROM

2DF

1-7-3

1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.• High-voltage transformer PCB: VR42, VR201, VR204, VR205• Inverter PCB: VR1, VR2

2DF

2-1-1


The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper fromthe upper drawer, lower drawer or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feedtakes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.

Each drawer consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components. Each drawer can hold up to 500 sheets ofpaper. Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. The separation pulleyprevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque limiter.

Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed from the upper and lower drawers

1Upper forwarding pulley2Lower forwarding pulley3Upper paper feed pulley4Lower paper feed pulley5Upper separation pulley6Lower separation pulley7Upper paper switch (PSW-U)8Lower paper switch (PSW-L)9Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U)0Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L)!Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U)@Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L)#Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U)$Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L)%Drawer lift^Right registration roller

&Left registration roller*Registration switch (RSW)(Feed roller 1)Feed pulley⁄Feed switch 1 (FSW1)¤Feed roller 2‹Feed pulley›Feed switch 2 (FSW2)fiFeed roller 3flFeed pulley‡Feed switch 3 (FSW3)°Front registration guide·Paper conveying guide‚Vertical paper conveying guide 1ŒVertical paper conveying guide 2

2DF

2-1-2

The bypass table can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time. Paper is fed from the bypass table by the rotation ofthe bypass forwarding pulley and bypass paper feed pulley. Also during paper feed, the bypass separation pulleyprevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter.

Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed from the bypass table

1Bypass table2Bypass lift guide3Bypass forwarding pulley4Bypass paper feed pulley5Bypass separation pulley6Bypass feed roller 17Bypass feed pulley8Bypass feed roller 29Bypass feed pulley0Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW)!Bypass feed switch (BYPFSW)@Bypass paper length switch (BYPPLSW)#Bypass paper width switch (BYPPWSW)

2DF

2-1-3

MPCB

CN16-B6RCL

PFCL-U

PFCL-L

FCL1

FCL2

FCL3

FSW2

FSW3

FSW1

RSW

PSW-U

PSW-L

LICSW-U

LICSW-L

CN10-A2

CN11-14

CN11-17

CN13-B9

CN13-B12

CN16-B1

CN13-A12

CN13-B15

CN13-B18

CN16-B4

CN13-A5

CN13-A2

CN13-A7

Figure 2-1-3 Paper feed section block diagram (upper and lower drawers)

MPCB

CN

9-A

2

CN

6-A

11

CN

6-A

6

CN

6-A

9

BYPPFCLBYPFCL

BYPPSW

BYPFSW

Figure 2-1-4 Paper feed section block diagram (bypass table)

2DF

2-1-4

48 ms

FSW1

RSW

PFCL-U

FCL1

RCL

DM

Start key100 ms

30 ms

Image ready

124 ms

17 ms

75 ms

Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the upper drawer

a:100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on to start the drive for the paper feed section. At thesame time, the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turns on, and the forwarding and paper feed pulleys rotate to startprimary paper feed.

b:75 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the feed switch 1 (FSW1) on, the feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turns on andthe feed roller 1 rotates.

c:17 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) and feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turn off.

d: 48 ms after image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, and the right registration roller rotatesto start secondary paper feed. At the same time, feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turns on for 30 ms.

e: 124 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turnsoff.

48 ms

RSW

BYPFCL

BYPPFCL

RCL

DM

Start key100 ms

Image ready

124 ms

35 ms

300 ms

100 ms

280 ms

Timing chart 2-1-2 Paper feed from the bypass tray

a: 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on to start the drive for the paper feed section.b: 300 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on.c: 100 ms after the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on, the bypass feed clutch (BYPFCL) turns on.d: 280 ms after the bypass feed clutch (BYPFCL) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns off.e: 35 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns on, the bypass feed clutch (BYPFCL) turns off.f: 48 ms after image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, and the right registration roller rotates

to start secondary paper feed.g:124 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns

off.

2DF

2-1-5

2-1-2 Main charging section

The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly, drum and so on. The drum is electrically chargeduniformly (500 µA) by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface.The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface, the shield grid ensuring thecharge is applied uniformly.

Main charger unit

Shield grid

Tungsten wire

Drum

Figure 2-1-5 Main charging section

MC REM

24 V DC

MC

Grid

ZENER PCB

DrumHVTPCB

CN7-4

CN7-2CN1-2

CN1-4

MPCB

Figure 2-1-6 Main charging section block diagram

2DF

2-1-6

ESW

EM

MC REM

DM

Start key 100 ms

100 ms 5 s

409 ms

Timing chart 2-1-3 Main charging section operation

a:100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on.b:100 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, main charging (MC REM) starts.c:The leading edge of the paper turns on the eject switch (ESW), and at the same time the eject motor (EM) turns on.d:409 ms after the paper is ejected and the eject switch (ESW) turns off, main charging (MC REM) ends.e: 5 s after the end of main charging (MC REM), the eject motor (EM) turns off.

2DF

2-1-7

2-1-3 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unitfor printing.

Figure 2-1-7 Optical section

1Mirror 1 frame2Mirror 2 frame3Exposure lamp (EL)4Mirror 15Mirror 26Mirror 37Lens8CCD PCB (CCDPCB)9 Image scanning unit0Laser scanner unit (LSU)!Scanner motor (SM)@Scanner home position switch (SHPSW)

2DF

2-1-8

(1) Original scanningThe original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the imagescanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side toside. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner.When the DF* is used, the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.* Optional.

CN

2-1-

CN

4-2

CN

5-2

CN

2-6

CN

37-1

-

CN

37-1

4

CN

34-1

-

CN

34-1

5

CN

1-1-

CN

1-14

CN3-2CN3-1-

CN1-2CN1-1-

SDPCB

INPCB

CCDPCB

MPCB

SM

SH

PS

W

OD

SW

EL

Original

Figure 2-1-8 Optional section block diagram

Start key

SM

Fwd. rotation

Rev. rotation

SHPSW

FVSYNC signal

338 P

472 P

9922 P

10394 P

200 P

200 P

Timing chart 2-1-4 Scanner operation

a: When the start key is pressed, the scanner motor (SM) reverses for 338 pulses and then rotates forward.b: 472 pulses after the scanner motor (SM) starts rotating forward, the FVSYNC signal turns on for 9922 pulses for

scanning.c: The scanner motor (SM) reverses for 10394 pulses and then rotates forward.d: 200 pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) reverses.e: 200 pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off, the scanner motor (SM) turns off, and the

scanner stops at its home position.

2DF

2-1-9

(2) Image printingThe image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as imageprinting data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms alatent image on the drum surface.

Figure 2-1-9 Laser scanner unit (1)

1Laser diode PCB (LDPCB)2Collimator lens3Cylindrical lens4Polygon motor (PM)5Polygon mirror6 fθ lens7Mirror8Mirror9BD sensor mirror0Cylindrical correcting lens!BD sensor

2DF

2-1-10

Drum

Figure 2-1-10 Laser scanner unit (2)

1Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.2Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam.3Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.4Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 28031 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam

toward the drum for one main-direction scan.5 fθ lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter

constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beamis on the drum surface.

6Mirror: Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction.7Mirror: Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction.8BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal.9Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD

sensor.0BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to

provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.

2DF

2-1-11

The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-11.

Less than 100 µm

Less than 85 µm

Figure 2-1-11

Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction isprovided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-12. Electricalcharge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.

Main scanning direction

Auxilary scanning direction

: laser beam is on

Figure 2-1-12

2DF

2-1-12

2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container.The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and thedeveloping spirals that agitate the toner.When the toner sensor (TNS) detects a low toner level in the developing unit, the toner replenishment signal is output tothe main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) that has received the signal turns on the toner replenishment solenoid(TNFSOL) and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit.Also, the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container.

Figure 2-1-13 Developing section

Right developing spiral

Left developing spiral

Developing roller

Developing paddle

Flow of the toner

Figure 2-1-14 Flow of the toner

1Developing unit housing2Developing roller3Toner sensor (TNS)4Doctor blade5Right developing spiral6Left developing spiral

2DF

2-1-13

(1) Formation of magnetic brushThe developing roller consists of a magnet roller with four poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller aroundthe magnet roller entrains toner, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of themagnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on themagnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing rollerto provide image contrast.

A

A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller; 0.23 to 0.35 mm N1:870 × 10-4TN2:420 × 10-4TS1:700 × 10-4TS2:910 × 10-4T

N1

90 88

88

S1

S2

N2

Doctor blade

Developing roller

Figure 2-1-15 Forming a magnetic brush

TNFSOLTNFSOL

TCS

TNS SIG

TNS

DB REM

24 V DC

HVTPCB

MPCB

CN1-1

DBCN1-2

CN9-B2

TCSCN9-A5

CN9-A9

CN7-1

CN7-2

Figure 2-1-16 Developing section block diagram

2DF

2-1-14

(2) Computing the absolute humidityThe humidity sensor (HUMSENS) converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing element into a voltageand sends it to the main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) computes the absolute humidity based on this HUMSENSsignal and the temperature (ETTH signal) detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH).

HUMPCB

MPCB

HUMSENS

3 HUMSENS

4 5 V DC

CN16-B10

CN16-B9

CN16-B8

CN16-B7

1

2

ETTHETTH

GNDHumidity

sensing element

Figure 2-1-17 Absolute humidity computation block diagram

2DF

2-1-15

(3) Single component developing systemThis machine uses the single component developing system, and reversal processing is performed with a + chargeddrum (a-Si) and a + charged magnetic toner.With the single component developing system, toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and +charged when it passes through the magnetic doctor blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic doctorblade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developingsleeve is the nearest to the drum, toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of themagnetic pole. Then, when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum, on theportion of the drum that has been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between thedeveloping bias and the drum surface and development is performed. On the other hand, on the portion of the drum thathas not been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. When tonercomes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large, an electric field disappears andtoner does not leave the developing sleeve. Development is complete.

North pole

South pole

Developing sleeveDrum

Magnetic toner blade

Toner

Figure 2-1-17-1 Single component developing system

2-1-14-1

2DF

2-1-16

Developing bias parametersFor the bias to the developing sleeve, an alternatingcurrent (AC) is applied. Parameters for thedeveloping bias are shown below.

Vp-p: Difference between the maximum and theminimum of applied voltage1.72 kV (fixed)Vf: FrequencyTypically 2.6 kHz. This value varies depending on thepreset value of the drum surface potential and theenvironmental correction. (Can be adjusted with themaintenance item U101.)Duty: Ratio of time where + voltage is applied in acycleTypically 45%. This value varies depending on thepreset value of the drum surface potential and theenvironmental correction. (Can be adjusted with themaintenance item U101.)Vde: Developing shift bias potential160 V (Can be changed to 180 V with themaintenance item U101)

SupplementationV0: Drum surface potential on non-image area (areanot exposed to light)VL: Drum surface potential on image area (areaexposed to light)

Vdc

Vo

Duty

Vf

Vp-pVL

0

V

Figure 2-1-17-2 Developing bias waveform

2-1-14-2

2DF

2-1-15

2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections

The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separationclaws.A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfercharging (100 µA).aper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high-voltagetransformer PCB (HVTPCB) to the separation electrode (60 or 10 µA depending on the paper).

Drum separation claw

Drum

Separation electrode

Transfer roller

Figure 2-1-18 Transfer and separation sections

TC REM

TC

SC

SC REM

CN1-9

CN1-6

CN7-9

CN7-6

24 V DCCN1-2CN7-2

MPCB

HVTPCB

Transfer roller

Separationelectrode

Drum

Figure 2-1-19 Transfer and separation sections block diagram

2DF

2-1-16

48 ms

TC REM

ESW

RSW

EM

RCL

190 ms

323 ms

1 ms

124 ms

1 ms

Image readySecondary paperfeed start

Secondary paper feed end

SC REM

Timing chart 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections operation

a: 190 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed, transfer charging (TC REM) starts.b: 1 ms after transfer charging (TC REM) starts, separation bias (SC REM) turns on.c: 323 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.d: 1 ms after transfer charging (TC REM) ends, separation bias (SC REM) turns off.

2DF

2-1-17

2-1-6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections

The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transferprocess, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner tank.The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging.Also the toner quantity in the waste toner tank is sensed with the overflow sensor (OFS).

Cleaning rollerCleaning spiral

Drum

Cleaning lamp (CL)

Cleaning blade

Figure 2-1-20 Cleaning and charge erasing sections

CN9-B7

MPCB

CL

Drum

CL REM

CN6-B2OFS OFS

Figure 2-1-21 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram

2DF

2-1-18

2-1-7 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-22. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transferprocess, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M or S (FH-M or FH-S).Pressure is applied by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto thepaper. The heat roller is heated by fixing heaters M or S (FH-M or FH-S) inside it; its surface temperature is detected bythe fixing unit thermistor (FTH) and is regulated by the fixing heaters turning on and off.If the fixing section becomes abnormally hot, fixing unit thermostat (FTS) operates shutting the power to the fixingheaters off. When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws andis conveyed from the copier to eject and switchback section.

Figure 2-1-22 Fixing section

FH

-M

FH

-S

FTS

FH

-M R

EM

FH

-S R

EM

CN

1-6

CN

1-5

MPCB

CN

10-A

6

CN

10-A

5

FT

H

5 V

DC

FTH

CN5-1

CN5-3

CN5-2

PSPCB

CN

2-1

CN

2-2

Heat roller

ILSW

Figure 2-1-23 Fixing section block diagram

1Upper fixing unit cover2Fixing housing3Heat roller4Heat roller separation claw5Fixing heater M (FH-M)6Fixing heater S (FH-S)7Fixing unit thermostat (FTS)8Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)9Press roller0Press roller separation claw

2DF

2-1-19

CFM(for second speed)

CFM(for first speed)

PM

TC REM

DB REM

DM

FH-S

FH-M

MSW

Fixing temperature 165°C/329°F(secondary stabilization)

Fixing temperature 110°C/230°F(primary stabilization) Copying enabled Aging end

500 ms

500 ms

100 ms

900 ms

1 s

10 s

15 s

13 s

30 s

Full speed

Half speed Half speedFull speed

Timing chart 2-1-6 Fixing section operation

a: 500 ms after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on to heat the heat roller. At the sametime, cooling fan motor (CFM) turns on.* The fan motor for second speed rotates at half speed and the motor for first speed rotates at full speed.

b: 500 ms after fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on, fixing heater S (FH-S) turns on.c: 1 s after fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on, the polygon motor (PM) of the laser scanner unit turns on.d: When the fixing temperature reaches 110°C/230°F, the copier enters primary stabilization, and fixing heater M (FH-

M) turns off temporarily and turns on again after 13 s.e: 100 ms after the primary stabilization, the drive motor (DM) turns on. Also the cooling fan motor (for second speed)

switches to full speed rotation.f: 900 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, the developing bias (DB REM) turns on and at the same time transfer

charging (TC REM) starts.g: When the fixing temperature reaches 165°C/329°F, the copier enters secondary stabilization. Fixing heaters M and S

(FH-M and FH-S) are turned on and off to keep the fixing temperature at 165°C/329°F and aging starts.h: 10 s after copying is enabled, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.i: 30 s after the secondary stabilization, the drive motor (DM) turns off and the aging ends.j: 15 s after the drive motor (DM) turns off, the cooling fan motor (for second speed) switches to half speed rotation.

2DF

2-1-20

2-1-8 Eject and switchback sections

The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forwardrotation of the eject motor.In duplex copying, paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor. When paper is transferred to the jobseparator or the internal finisher, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch thepaper transfer path.

Figure 2-1-24 Eject and switchback sections

CN

16-A

5

CN

16-B

11-

CN

16-B

14

CN

16-A

1-C

N16

-A2

CN

16-A

11

MPCB

ESW

EM

FSSW FSSOL

Figure 2-1-25 Eject and switchback sections block diagram

1Feedshift guide2Eject roller3Eject pulley4Switchback roller5Switchback pulley6Eject switch (ESW)7Feedshift switch (FSSW)8Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)

2DF

2-1-21

FSSW

ESW

RSW

EM

RCL

40 ms 518 ms

50 ms 50 ms

Secondary paper feed end

Fwd. rotation Fwd. rotationRev. rotation

Timing chart 2-1-7 Eject and switchback sections operation

a: The leading edge of paper (front face) turns on the eject switch (ESW), and at the same time the eject motor (EM)starts forward rotation.

b: 40 ms after passing of the trailing edge of paper turns off the eject switch (ESW), the eject motor (EM) turns off for 50ms and then starts reverse rotation.

c: The leading edge of paper (reverse face) turns on the eject switch (ESW), and at the same time the eject motor (EM)turns off for 50 ms and then starts forward rotation.

d: 518 ms after passing of the trailing edge of the paper turns off the eject switch (ESW), the eject motor (EM) turns off.

2DF

2-2-1

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PCBs

Figure 2-2-1 PCBs

1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices.2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates +24 V DC, 12 V DC and 5V DC; controls the fixing heater.3. High-voltage transformer PCB

(HVTPCB) .................................................... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages fortransfer.

4. Scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) ...................... Controls the scanning section.5. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.6. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.7. Right operation unit PCB (OPCB-R) ............ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.8. Left operation unit PCB (OPCB-L) ............... Controls touch panel and LCD indication.9. Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser light.

2

1

4

3

9

5 8 76

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

2DF

2-2-2

(2) Switches and sensors

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.2. Interlock switch (ILSW) ................................ Turns the AC power for the fixing heater on and off.3. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.4. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the conveying unit is opened.5. Upper paper switch (PSW-U) ....................... Detects the presence of paper in the upper drawer.6. Lower paper switch (PSW-L) ....................... Detects the presence of paper in the lower drawer.7. Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U) .................. Detects the upper drawer lift reaching the upper limit.8. Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L) .................. Detects the lower drawer lift reaching the upper limit.9. Upper paper size length switch

(PLSW-U)..................................................... Detects the length of paper in the upper drawer.10. Lower paper size length switch

(PLSW-L) ..................................................... Detects the length of paper in the lower drawer.11. Upper paper size width switch

(PWSW-U) ................................................... Detects the width of paper in the upper drawer.12. Lower paper size width switch

(PWSW-L) .................................................... Detects the width of paper in the lower drawer.13. Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW) ................. Detects the presence of paper on the bypass tray.14. Bypass paper size length switch

(BYPPLSW) ................................................. Detects the length of paper on the bypass tray.

1

9

10

11

16

23

17

35

26

29

30

28

18

19

33

32

3424

25

20 2122

15

143127

13

12

23

4

5

7

6

8

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

2DF

2-2-3

15. Bypass paper size width switch(BYPPWSW) ................................................ Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray.

16. Feed switch 1 (FSW1) ................................. Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing.17. Feed switch 2 (FSW2) ................................. Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing18. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) ................................. Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing19. Bypass feed switch (BYPFSW) ................... Controls bypass feed clutch drive timing20. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the optical system in the home position.21. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Operates the original size detection sensor.22. Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ........ Detects the size of the original.23. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.24. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.25. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy.26. Toner sensor (TNS) ..................................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit.27. Toner container detection switch

(TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container.28. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container.29. Toner disposal tank detection switch

(TDDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner disposal tank.30. Overflow sensor (OFS) ................................ Detects when the toner disposal tank is full.31. Humidity sensor (HUMSENS) ...................... Detects absolute humidity.32. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.33. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.34. Conveying cover switch (CCSW) ................. Detects the opening and closing of the conveying cover.35. Side cover switch (SCSW) ........................... Detects the opening and closing of the side cover.

2DF

2-2-4

(3) Motors

3

4

16

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1

15

12,13,14

2

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.2. Paper feed motor (PFM) .............................. Drives paper feed section.3. Upper lift motor (LM-U) ................................ Drives upper drawer lift.4. Lower lift motor (LM-L) ................................. Drives lower drawer lift.5. Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system.6. Eject motor (EM) .......................................... Drives the eject section.7. Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the machine interior.8. Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) ........................ Cools the machine interior.9. Cooling fan motor 3 (CFM3) ........................ Cools the machine interior.

10. Cooling fan motor 4 (CFM4) ........................ Cools the machine interior (LSU).11. Cooling fan motor 5 (CFM5) ........................ Cools the machine interior (around the power supply unit).12. Cooling fan motor 6 (CFM6) ........................ Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex

copying.13. Cooling fan motor 7 (CFM7) ........................ Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex

copying.14. Cooling fan motor 8 (CFM8) ........................ Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex

copying.15. Cooling fan motor 9 (CFM9) ........................ Cools the machine interior.16. Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.

2DF

2-2-5

16

13 14

2

1

3

4

5

6

17

7

9

10

11

12

15

8

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

(4) Other electrical components

Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components

1. Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) .............. Primary paper feed from the upper drawer.2. Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) ............... Primary paper feed from the lower drawer.3. Feed clutch 1 (FCL1) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.4. Feed clutch 2 (FCL2) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.5. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.6. Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.7. Bypass feed clutch (BYPFCL) ..................... Controls the drive of bypass feed roller.8. Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed.9. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feedshift guide.

10. Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) .................... Replenishes toner.11. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.12. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.13. Fixing heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller.14. Fixing heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller.15. Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ........................ Prevents overheating in the fixing section.16. Total counter (TC) ........................................ Displays the total number of copies produced.17. Drawer heater (DH) ..................................... Dehumidifies the drawer section.

2DF

2-3-1

2-3-1 Power source PCB

C201

C102C101

D3F1

F2

C5

++ +

+

Q1

T1

24 V DCAC input

Power source PCB

Rectifier circuit

Fixing heatercontrol circuit

HEATERMAIN ON

HEATERSUB ON

GND

5 V DC

GND

HEATERREM1

HEATERREM2

ZERO CROSSOUT

24 V DCoutputcircuit

5 V DCoutputcircuit

Switchingcontrol circuit

IC1

D101D102

Zero-crosscircuitPC3

Overvoltage detection circuit

IC201PC1

PC2

TRA1

TRA2

PC5

PC4

Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC and 5 V DC. Itincludes a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC output circuit and a fixing heatercontrol circuit.The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input using the diode bridge D3. The smoothing capacitor C5 smoothes out thepulsed current from the diode bridge.In the switching control circuit, PWM controller IC1 turns the power MOSFET Q1 on and off to switch the current induced inthe primary coil of the transformer T1.The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diodes D101 andD102 and smoothing capacitors C101 and C102, and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit IC201 andthe power MOSFET Q201. For 24 V DC output, the PWM controller IC (IC1) of the switching control circuit changes the dutyof the switching pulse width of the power MOSFET Q1 via a photo coupler PC4 based on the output voltage status to adjustthe 24 V DC output.The 5 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diodes D101 andD102 and smoothing capacitors C101 and C102, and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit IC201 andthe power MOSFET Q201. For 5 V DC output, the PWM controller IC (IC1) of the switching control circuit changes the dutyof the switching pulse width of the power MOSFET Q1 via a photo coupler PC5 based on the output voltage status to adjustthe 5 V DC output.The overvoltage detection circuit IC201 monitors the overvoltage status of 24 V DC and 5 V DC, and when it detects anabnormal status, it gives immediately feedback to the PWM controller IC (IC1) via a photocoupler PC5 to stop controloperation and moves the power source to a standby condition.The fixing heater control circuit sends a waveform of which zero-cross is detected to the main PCB (MPCB), which controlsthe timing of HEATER REM 1 and 2 based on it to turn on the phototriacs PC1 and PC2. When the phototriacs PC1 and PC2turn on, AC current flows through the triacs TRA1 and TRA2 to turn the fixing heaters M and S on.

2DF

2-3-2

CT

101

J2

D30

1C

301

PC

1

PC

2Z

3

R54

C21

1C1

R26

R30

D6

C17

D7

J29

C12

BE

A10

2

D10

2

Q10

2

Q10

1

F20

1

F20

2

T10

A 1

25V

T10

A 1

25V

D10

1

R38

PC

3

J3Z

1C

7 C6

C3

C4

CN5 1

J1

CIJ36

CN91

TB1

FG1

RI

CN7TB2

TB3L1

L2D2

D1

F4

C2

CN9

1

NTC1

NTC2

D3

1

F1 250VT2.5AH

F2 250V

T8AH 250VF3

T6.3AH 250V

L3

L4

J5

R53

TRA2

J4

Z2

C20TRA1

1CN2

Q120

C16

R39

BEA1

C212 L202 T5A 250VF203

J231

FG2CN4

CN11

J22

J21

L203

C21

3

C21

4

VF

201

J19

19 20

Q3

PC5

PC4

Q4

C5

C15J8

J6

T1

C11

C130VR101

IC101

D201J11R204

C131BEA101

BEA104C104

BEA103

C302

BEA4 Q1

J7

J34

C20

5R20

1

R20

2R

203

C20

3+

24V

AD

JQ

201

L201

J28

J12

IC201

C201J10

J9 L103

C102

C101L101

L102

C106

C107

J30

J31

J14 J2

6J2

0

J27

J24

J25

J13

CN

31 2

C20

7

J18

J17

CN

6 1

J15J16

+5VADJ

T6.3AH

CT

101

J2

D30

1C

301

PC

1

PC

2Z

3

R54

C21

1C1

R26

R30

D6

C17

D7

J29

C12

BE

A10

2

D10

2

Q10

2

Q10

1

F20

1

F20

2

T10

A 1

25V

T10

A 1

25V

D10

1

R38

PC

3

J3Z

1C

7 C6

C3

C4

CN5 1

J1

CIJ36

CN91

TB1

FG1

RI

CN7TB2

TB3L1

L2D2

D1

F4

C2

NTC1

NTC2

D3

1

F1 125VT2.5A

F2 T10A 125V

H15A 250VF3

T10A 125V

L3

L4

J5

R53

TRA2

J4

Z2

C20TRA1

1CN2

Q120

C16

R39

BEA1

C212 L202 T5A 250VF203

J231

FG2CN4

CN11

J22

J21

L203

C21

3

C21

4

VF

201

J19

19 20

Q3

PC5

PC4

Q4

C5

C15J8

J6

T1

C11

C130VR101

IC101

D201J11R204

C131BEA101

BEA104C104

BEA103

C302

BEA4 Q1

J7

J34

C20

5R20

1

R20

2R

203

C20

3+

24V

AD

JQ

201

L201

J2E

J12

IC201

C201J10

J9

J31

L103

C102

C101L101

L102

C106

C107

J30

J14 J2

6J2

0

J27

J24

J25

J13

CN

31 2

C20

7

J18

J17

CN

6 1

J15J16

+5VADJ

100V

200V

Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram

2DF

2-3-3

Terminals (CN) Voltage RemarksTB-1 TB-2 120V AC 120 V AC supply, inputTB-1 TB-2 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC supply, input1-1 1-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SSW1, output1-5 1-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for MPCB, output1-6 1-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for MPCB, output2-1 2-2 0 - 5 V DC Heater current monitor signal, output2-3 2-2 0/5 V DC FH-S on/off, input2-4 2-2 0/5 V DC FH-M on/off, input2-5 2-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply from MPCB, input2-6 2-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal, input2-7 2-2 0/5 V DC CFM5 remote signal, input2-8 2-2 0/5 V DC SLEEP singal, input3-1 3-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for finisher*, output3-2 3-6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for finisher*, output3-3 3-7 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for finisher*, output3-4 3-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for finisher*, output3-9 3-10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for finisher*, output3-11 3-12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, output3-14 3-13 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, output3-15 3-18 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for mailbox*, output3-16 3-19 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for mailbox*, output3-17 3-20 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for mailbox*, output4-1 6-1 0/24 V DC CFM5 on/off, output4-2 6-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CFM5, output5-1 5-3 120/0 V AC FH-M on/off, output5-1 5-3 220-240/0 V AC FH-M on/off, output5-2 5-3 120/0 V AC FH-S on/off, output5-2 5-3 220-240/0 V AC FH-S on/off, output6-2 6-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SDPCB, output6-4 6-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SDPCB, output6-5 6-7 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for STDF*/SRDF*, output6-6 6-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for STDF*/SRDF*, output6-9 6-11 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for STDF*/SRDF*, output6-10 6-12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for STDF*/SRDF*, output9-1 TB-2 120 V AC 120 V AC supply for MSW, output9-1 TB-2 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC supply for MSW, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-4

2-3-2 Main PCB

LCD display data

Fax transmission/reception data

Odd

Analog image data

Scan signal

Main PCB

Detection signal input

Data bus

Address bus

Even

Printer data

Printing data

Control signal output

Detection signal input

Control signal output

Detaction signal input

Add

ress

bus

Dat

a bu

s

Main CPUU8

Main CPUFLASH

U7

Main CPUSRAMU11, 56

XIOU14,15

VTCU22

MIPU21

Operation unitCPUU26

Operation unitXIOU42

Operation CPU

FLASHU29, 34

LCDcontroller

U24

BackupFLASH

U9

A/DconverterU17,18

S/H ICU16

BUF

BUF

BUF

Driver

Driver

Fax board*

CCD PCB

Printerboard*

CompactFlash

LCD

Operationunit PCB

Scannerdrive PCB

LSU

High-voltagetransformer PCB

Paper feed unitDrum unit

Developing unitFixing unit

Duplex unit*STDF*SRDF*

Job separator*Saddle finisher*Built-in finisher*Booklet stitcher*

SDRAMU25

*Optional.

Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram

2DF

2-3-5

The main PCB (MPCB) consists of the main CPU and operation unit CPU. The main CPU U8 communicates with otherPCBs, the image processing system and the engine drive system. The operation unit CPU U26 controls the LCD displayand the entire operation section.The main CPU U8 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM U11 and U56 for work memory and FLASH U9 for backupmemory. In accordance with the control program in the main CPU FLASH U7, the main CPU U8 communicates with theoperation unit CPU and optional devices via the serial communication function in the CPU and XIO U14 and U15. The mainCPU U8 controls the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), which is for image input control, and the LSU, which is for image output controlvia the image processing ASIC MIP U21, and drives the machine, conveys paper and detects abnormalities via XIO U14,U15 and U22.The operation unit CPU U26 operates on an 32-bit bus. It uses the SRAM U25 for work memory. In accordance with thecontrol program in the main CPU FLASH U29, which also contains LCD display fonts, the operation unit CPU U26 controlskey switches and LEDs on the operation unit PCB (OPCB) and controls the LCD display via the LCD controller U24.

2DF

2-3-6

CN34 CN37 CN32 CN33

CN46U40

U58

U42

U29

U37

U47

U49

CN14

U52

U45

U22

U24 CN43

CN50

CN44

CN31

CN15

CN45

CN8CN4

CN35 CN2 CN16 CN10 CN11CN5CN12CN13CN3

U8

U7U9U11

U56

U21

U14

U15

U38

U26U16C

N47

CN41 CN42 CN38

U25

CN

48

CN

49C

N40

CN

7C

N1

CN

51

CN

39C

N36

CN

6C

N9

Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram

2DF

2-3-7

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-7 0/5 V DC SLEEP signal, output1-2 1-7 0/5 V DC CFM5 remote signal, output1-3 1-7 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal, input1-4 1-7 5 V DC 5V DC supply for PSPCB, output1-5 1-7 0/5 V DC FH-M on/off, output1-6 1-7 0/5 V DC FH-S on/off, output1-8 1-7 0 - 5 V DC Heater current monitor signal, input2-1 2-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from SSW2, input2-5 2-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input2-6 2-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input3-A1 3-A2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal for mailbox*, input3-A3 3-A4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal from mailbox*, output3-A5 3-A4 0/5 V DC Mailbox* connection signal, input3-A6 3-A4 0/5 V DC RESET signal for mailbox*, output3-B1 3-B2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal for large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, output3-B3 3-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal from large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, input3-B5 3-B4 0/5 V DC FSW on/off signal from large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, input3-B6 3-B4 0/5 V DC RESET signal for large paper deck*/paper feed desk*, output4-1 4-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal from finisher*, input4-3 4-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal for finisher*, output5-1 4-4 0/5 V DC RESET signal for finisher*, output5-2 4-4 0/5 V DC Finisher* connection signal, input6-A1 6-A4 0/5 V DC BYPPWSW paper width detection signal, input6-A2 6-A4 0/5 V DC BYPPWSW paper width detection signal, input6-A3 6-A4 0/5 V DC BYPPWSW paper width detection signal, input6-A5 6-A4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for BYPPSW, output6-A6 6-A4 0/5 V DC BYPPSW on/off, input6-A8 6-A7 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL, output6-A9 6-A7 0/24 V DC BYPPFCL on/off, output6-A10 6-A7 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for BYPFCL, output6-A11 6-A7 0/24 V DC BYPFCL on/off, output6-B1 6-B3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for OFS, output6-B2 6-B3 0/5 V DC OFS on/off, input6-B4 6-B5 0/5 V DC TDDSW on/off, input6-B6 6-B7 0/5 V DC FRCSW on/off, input6-B8 6-B9 0/24V DC CFM3 on/off, output6-B10 6-B12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for BYPPLSW, output6-B11 6-B12 0/5 V DC BYPPLSW on/off, input7-1 7-3 0 - 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage, output7-2 7-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for HVTPCB, output7-4 7-3 0/5 V DC Main charging on/off, output7-5 7-3 0/5 V DC (pulse) Developing bias CLOCK signal, output7-6 7-3 0/5 V DC Separation charging on/off, output7-7 7-3 0 - 5 V DC Separation charging control voltage, output7-8 7-3 0 - 5 V DC Transfer charging control voltage, output7-9 7-3 0 - 5 V DC Transfer limit voltage, output7-10 7-3 0/5 V DC Transfer charging on/off, output7-11 7-3 0/5 V DC Transfer reverse bias remote signal, output7-12 7-3 0/5 V DC Transfer forward bias remote signal, output7-13 7-3 0/5 V DC Transfer current detection signal, input7-14 7-3 0/5 V DC Transfer current detection signal, input8-1 8-7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LSU, output8-2 8-7 0/5 V DC LSU SAMPLE signal, output8-3 8-7 0/5 V DC LSU POWCONT signal, output8-4 8-7 0/5 V DC LSU LASER signal, output8-5 8-7 0/5 V DC LSU VIDEO + signal, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-8

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks8-6 8-7 0/5 V DC LSU VIDEO - signal, output8-8 8-9 0/5 V DC LSU PD signal, input8-10 8-11 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PM, output8-12 8-11 0/24 V DC PM SCAN signal, output8-13 8-9 0/5 V DC PM READY signal, input8-14 8-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) PM CLOCK signal, output9-A2 9-A1 0/5 V DC BYPFSW on/off, input9-A3 9-A1 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for BYPFSW, output9-A4 9-A6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for TCS, output9-A5 9-A6 0/5 V DC TCS on/off, input9-A8 9-A10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for TNS, output9-A9 9-A10 0/5 V DC TNS on/off, input9-A11 9-A10 0/5 V DC Developing unit detection signal, input9-A12 9-A10 0/5 V DC Developing unit FUSE CUT signal, output9-B2 9-B1 0/24 V DC TNFSOL on/off, output9-B3 9-B4 0/5 V DC TCDSW on/off, input9-B7 9-B6 0/5 V DC CL on/off, output9-B8 9-B6 0/5 V DC Drum unit DATA signal, output9-B9 9-B6 0/5 V DC Drum unit CLOCK signal, output9-B11 9-B10 0/5 V DC Drum unit detection signal, input9-B12 9-10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for drum unit, output10-A2 10-A1 0/5 V DC RSW on/off, input10-A3 10-A1 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for RSW, output10-A5 10-A8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FTH, output10-A6 10-A8 0 - 5 V DC FTH detection voltage, input10-A7 10-A8 0/5 V DC FTH FUSE CUT signal, input10-B1 10-B3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DUPFCL*, output10-B2 10-B3 0/24 V DC DUPFCL* on/off, output10-B4 10-B3 0/5 V DC DUPPCSW* on/off, input10-B5 10-B3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DUPPCSW*, output10-B7 10-B6 0/5 V DC Duplex unit* connection signal, input11-1 11-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DM, output11-2 11-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFM, output11-5 11-7 5 V DC 24 V DC supply for DM, input11-9 11-3 0/24 V DC DM S/S signal, output11-10 11-4 0/24 V DC PFM S/S signal, output11-11 11-3 0/24 V DC DM L/D signal, input11-12 11-4 0/24 V DC PFM L/D signal, input11-13 11-7 0/5 V DC (pulse) DM CLOCK signal, output11-14 11-4 0/24 V DC FCL1 on/off, output11-15 11-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FCL1, output11-17 11-16 0/5 V DC FSW1 on/off, input11-18 11-16 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FSW, output12-1 12-6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PWSW-U, output12-2 12-6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from PWSW-U, input12-3 12-6 0/24 V DC PWSW-U paper width detection signal, input12-4 12-6 0/24 V DC PWSW-U paper width detection signal, input12-5 12-6 0/24 V DC PWSW-U paper width detection signal, input12-7 12-12 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PWSW-L, output12-8 12-12 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from PWSW-L, input12-9 12-12 0/24 V DC PWSW-L paper width detection signal, input12-10 12-12 0/24 V DC PWSW-L paper width detection signal, input12-11 12-12 0/24 V DC PWSW-L paper width detection signal, input13-A2 13-A1 0/5 V DC FSW3 on/off, input13-A3 13-A1 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FSW3, output13-A4 13-A16 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FCL3, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-9

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks13-A5 13-A16 0/24 V DC FCL3 on/off, output13-A7 13-A6 0/5 V DC FSW2 on/off, input13-A8 13-A6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FSW2, output13-A10 13-A9 0/5 V DC SCSW on/off, input13-A11 13-A16 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FCL2, output13-A12 13-A16 0/24 V DC FCL2 on/off, output13-A13 13-A14 0/5 V DC LM-U paper level detection switch on/off, input13-A15 13-A14 0/5 V DC LM-U paper level detection switch on/off, input13-A17 13-A16 0/24 V DC LM-U on/off, output13-A19 13-A18 0/5 V DC PLSW-L on/off, inout13-B2 13-B1 0/5 V DC PLSW-U on/off, inout13-B3 13-B4 0/5 V DC LM-L paper level detection switch on/off, input13-B5 13-B4 0/5 V DC LM-L paper level detection switch on/off, input13-B7 13-B6 0/24 V DC LM-L on/off, output13-B9 13-B8 0/5 V DC LICSW-U on/off, input13-B10 13-B8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LICSW-U, output13-B12 13-B11 0/5 V DC PSW-U on/off, input13-B13 13-B11 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PSW-U, output13-B15 13-B14 0/5 V DC LICSW-L on/off, input13-B16 13-B14 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LICSW-L, output13-B18 13-B17 0/5 V DC PSW-L on/off, input13-B19 13-B17 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PSW-L, output16-A1 16-A14 0/24 V DC FSSOL release signal, output16-A2 16-A14 0/24 V DC FSSOL acutuate signal, output16-A3 16-A14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSSOL, output16-A5 16-A4 0/5 V DC FSSW on/off, input16-A6 16-A4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FSSW, input16-A11 16-A10 0/5 V DC ESW on/off, input16-A12 16-A10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for ESW, output16-A13 16-A14 0/24 V DC CFM1 on/off, output16-A16 16-A15 0/5 V DC CCSW on/off, input16-B1 16-A14 0/24 V DC PFCL-U on/off, output16-B2 16-A14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCL-U, output16-B3 16-A14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCL-L, output16-B4 16-A14 0/24 V DC PFCL-L on/off, output16-B5 16-A14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for RCL, output16-B6 16-A14 0/24 V DC RCL on/off, output16-B7 16-B9 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for HUMSENS, output16-B8 16-B9 0 - 5 V DC HUMSENS detection voltage, input16-B10 16-B9 0 - 5 V DC ETTH detection voltage, input16-B11 16-A14 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM coil energization pulse, output (B)16-B12 16-A14 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM coil energization pulse, output (B)16-B13 16-A14 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM coil energization pulse, output (A)16-B14 16-A14 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM coil energization pulse, output (A)16-B15 16-A14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CFM4, output16-B16 16-A14 0/24 V DC CFM4 on/off, output31-1 2-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from MSW, input31-2 2-2 0/5 V DC MSW on/off, output31-3 2-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for TC, output31-4 2-2 0/5 V DC TC count signal, output31-8 31-7 0/5 V DC Key counter* connection signal, input31-9 2-2 24 V DC 24V DC supply for key counter*, output31-10 2-2 0/5 V DC Key counter* count signal, output32-1 2-2 0/5 V DC OFM* RET signal, output32-2 2-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) OFM* CLOCK signal, output32-3 2-2 0/5 V DC OFM* CWB signal, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-10

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks32-4 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* ENABLE signal, output32-5 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* RET signal, output32-6 2-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) OCM* CLOCK signal, output32-7 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* CWB signal, output32-8 2-2 OCM* current control voltage Vref, output32-9 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* drive control signal M3, output32-10 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* drive control signal M2, output32-11 2-2 0/5 V DC OCM* drive control signal M1, output33-A2 2-2 0/5 V DC OSBSW* on/off, input33-A3 2-2 0/5 V DC OFSW* on/off, input33-A4 2-2 0/5 V DC OSSW* on/off, input33-A7 2-2 0/5 V DC SRDF* connection signal, input33-A8 2-2 0/5 V DC OSWSW* on/off, input33-A9 2-2 0/5 V DC DFSSW2* on/off, input33-A10 2-2 0/5 V DC DFSSW1* on/off, input33-A11 2-2 0/5 V DC OSLSW* on/off, input33-A12 2-2 0/5 V DC DFTSW* on/off, input33-B1 2-2 0/5 V DC OSLED* (red) on/off, output33-B2 2-2 0/5 V DC OSLED* (green) on/off, output33-B3 2-2 0/24 V DC SBPSOL* release signal, output33-B4 2-2 0/24 V DC SBPSOL* actuate signal, output33-B5 2-2 0/24 V DC OFCL* on/off, output33-B6 2-2 0/24 V DC EFSSOL* on/off, output33-B8 2-2 0/24 V DC SBFSSOL* on/off, output33-B9 2-2 0/24 V DC OFSOL* release signal, output33-B10 2-2 0/24 V DC OFSOL* actuate signal, output33-B11 2-2 0/5 V DC OFM* ENABLE signal, input33-B12 2-2 0/5 V DC OFM* ENABLE signal, input34-2 34-1 4.5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB ODD signal, input (analog)34-4 34-3 4.5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB EVEN signal, input (analog)34-5 34-7 12 V DC 12 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output34-6 34-7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output34-8 34-9 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLP signal, output34-10 34-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB SHIFT signal, output34-12 34-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLOCK + signal, output34-13 34-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLOCK - signal, output34-14 34-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB RS + signal, output34-15 34-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB RS - signal, output35-1 35-3 0/5 V DC JBESW* on/off, input35-2 35-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for JBESW*, output35-5 35-4 0/5 V DC Job separator* connection signal, input35-7 35-6 0/5 V DC EPDSW* on/off, input35-8 35-6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for EPDSW*, output35-9 35-4 0/5 V DC LED (JOB)* on/off, output35-10 35-4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LED (JOB)*, output35-11 35-4 0/24 V DC FSSOL (JOB)* release signal, output35-12 35-4 0/24 V DC FSSOL (JOB)* actuate signal, output35-13 35-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSSOL (JOB)*, output36-1 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED6 signal, output36-2 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED5 signal, output36-3 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED4 signal, output36-4 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED3 signal, output36-5 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED2 signal, output36-6 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED1 signal, output36-7 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN4 signal, output36-8 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN3 signal, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-11

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks36-9 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN2 signal, output36-10 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN1 signal, output36-11 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY3 signal, input36-12 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY2 signal, input36-13 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY1 signal, input37-2 37-1 0/5 V DC SHPSW on/off, input37-3 37-1 0/5 V DC EL on/off, output37-4 37-1 0/5 V DC SM ENABLE signal, output37-5 37-1 0/5 V DC SM RET signal, output37-6 37-1 0/5 V DC SM CWB signal, output37-7 37-1 0/5 V DC (pulse) SM CLOCK signal, output37-8 37-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control signal M5, output37-9 37-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control signal M4, output37-10 37-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control signal M3, output37-11 37-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control signal M2, output37-12 37-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control signal M1, output37-13 37-1 SM current control voltage Vref, output37-14 37-1 0/5 V DC ODSW on/off, input37-16 37-15 0/5 V DC OSDS on/off, input37-17 37-15 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for OSDS, output42-A1 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-L BUZZER signal, output42-A2 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X1, input42-A3 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y1, input42-A4 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X2, output42-A5 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y2, output42-A6 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD FRAME signal, output42-A7 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD LOAD signal, output42-A8 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD CP signal, output42-A9 42-B4 GND LCD VSS signal, output42-A10 42-B4 5 V DC LCD VDD signal, output42-A11 42-B4 GND LCD VSS signal, output42-A12 42-B4 0/5 V DC LCD DISPLAY signal, output42-A13 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D0 data, output42-A14 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D1 data, output42-A15 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D2 data, output42-A16 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D3 data, output42-A17 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD VEE signal, output42-B2 42-B1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for OPCB-R, output42-B3 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R LAMP OFF signal, output42-B5 42-B4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for OPCB-R, output42-B6 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R DIGLED8 signal, output42-B7 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R DIGLED7 signal, output42-B8 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN8 signal, output42-B9 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN7 signal, output42-B10 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN6 signal, output42-B11 42-B4 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN5 signal, output42-B12 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY9 signal, input42-B13 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY8 signal, input42-B14 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY7 signal, input42-B15 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY6 signal, input42-B16 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY5 signal, input42-B17 42-B4 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY4 signal, input43-A1 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* PRINTN signal, output43-A3 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* SI signal, output43-A4 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* SCLK signal, input43-A5 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* SBSY signal, output*Optional.

2DF

2-3-12

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks43-A6 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* SO signal, input43-A7 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* RESET signal, output43-A8 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* PDOUT signal, output43-A10 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* VDATAP signal, input43-A12 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* VDATAN signal, input43-A14 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* FPCLKsignal, output43-A15 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* FPDAT signal, input43-A17 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* VDATA signal, input43-B1 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B2 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B3 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B4 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* SDIR signal, output43-B5 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* ESGIR signal, output43-B6 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* VDFON signal, output43-B7 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* VSREQN signal, output43-B12 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* FPDIR signal, output43-B13 43-A2 5/0 V DC (pulse) Printer board* FPPOWER signal, output43-B15 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B16 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B17 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B18 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B19 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output43-B20 43-A2 5 V DC Printer board* 5 V DC supply, output44-1 44-2 3.3 V DC Fax board* 3.3 V DC supply, output44-3 44-4 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FPVCLK signal, output44-5 44-6 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FVCLK signal, input44-7 44-8 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FMRE signal, input44-9 44-10 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FPVD signal, input44-11 44-12 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FPHSYNC signal, output44-13 44-14 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FPVSYNC signal, output44-15 44-16 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FOVSYNC signal, output44-17 44-18 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FOHSTHIN signal, output44-19 44-20 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FMIPOUTO signal, output44-21 44-22 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FMREOUT signal, output44-23 44-24 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* FFOCLK signal, output44-25 44-26 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /MMISTS signal, output44-27 44-28 Analog Fax board* FMMI_TXD2 signal, output44-29 44-30 Analog Fax board* FMMI_RXD2 signal, input44-31 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FAXRESET signal, output44-32 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /FAXREADY signal, input44-33 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /PREQ signal, input44-34 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /SREQ signal, input44-35 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /SETFAX signal, input44-36 44-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) Fax board* /MAINSTS signal, output44-38 44-37 Analog Fax board* FMAIN_TXD0 signal, output44-40 44-39 Analog Fax board* FMAIN_RXD0 signal, input

2DF

2-3-13

2-3-3 Operation unit PCB

L10-1

L10-2

DIGKEY1

Operation unit right PCB

DIGKEY2

DIGKEY3

SCAN1SCAN2SCAN3SCAN4

DIGLED1

DIGLED2

DIGLED3

DIGLED4

DIGLED5

DIGLED6

L11-1L11

L10

D4

KEY31KEY36

KEY32KEY37

KEY27KEY28KEY33

KEY29KEY34

KEY23 KEY24 KEY25

A

A A A A

A B

B B

B B

B

KEY30KEY35

KEY26

D5 D6 D7

L16

L15

L14

L21

L19

L25

L23

L17

L11-2

L7-1

L7-2

L8-1L8

L7

R100

R102

R104

R106

R108

R110

L8-2

L9-1L9

L9-2

CN1-1

CN1-2

CN1-3

CN1-4CN1-5CN1-6CN1-7

CN1-8

CN1-9

CN1-10

CN1-11

CN1-12

CN1-13

DIGKEY4

DIGKEY5

DIGKEY9

Main PCB

SCAN5SCAN6SCAN7SCAN8

DIGLED7

DIGLED8

L5

D1

KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4

KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 KEY8

D2 D3

L6

L3

L4

L2L1R1

R2

CN3-1

CN3-2

DIGKEY6 KEY9 KEY10 KEY11 KEY12CN3-3

DIGKEY7 KEY13 KEY14 KEY15 KEY16CN3-4

DIGKEY8 KEY17 KEY18

KEY21 KEY22

KEY19 KEY20CN3-5

CN3-6

CN3-7CN3-8CN3-9CN3-10

CN3-11

CN3-12

Operation unit left PCB

Figure 2-3-5 Operation unit PCB block diagram

2DF

2-3-14

The operation unit PCB (OPCB) consists of the operation unit left PCB (OPCB-L) and the operation unit right PCB (OPCB-R).The operation unit right PCB (OPCB-R) consists of key switches and LEDs. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scansignals (SCAN5 to SCAN8) and LED lighting selection signals (DIGLED7 to DIGLED8) from the main PCB (MPCB). Thekey switches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN5 to SCAN8) and the return signals (DIGKEY4 toDIGKEY9).As an example, to light LED 1 (L1), the LED lighting selection signal (DIGLED7) should be driven low in synchronization witha low level on the scan signal (SCAN5). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations.As another example, if KEY 1 is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal(SCAN5) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (DIGKEY4). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the position wherethe line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which key switchwas operated.The operation unit left PCB (OPCB-L) consists of key switches and LEDs. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scansignals (SCAN1 to SCAN4) and LED lighting selection signals (DIGLED1 to DIGLED6) from the main PCB (MPCB). Thekey switches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN1 to SCAN4) and the return signals (DIGKEY1 toDIGKEY3).As an example, to light LED 7 (L7), the LED lighting selection signal (DIGLED1) should be driven low in synchronization witha low level on the scan signal (SCAN1). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations.As another example, if KEY 23 is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal(SCAN1) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (DIGKEY1). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the position wherethe line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which key switchwas operated.

2DF

2-3-15

B11K19

C1 C3C2 C4

K20

K1 K5 K9

K2 K6 K10

K3 K7 K11

L3

L6

K4 K8 K12 K15K18

L5

K17

L4

K16

L2

K22

K14

17B3

CN3

B2L1

K21

5

610

C6

1K13

TR2

C5

TR1

TR4

TR3

LF1

T1

CN

61

3

FG FG

FG

Figure 2-3-6 Operation unit right PCB silk-screen diagram

FG

FG

FG

FG

VR1

L7

L8

L12

L13

B100K23

K24

L9 L14K25

TR

5

121 1

4

CN

5

CN

4

L10L15

L16

K26

L11 K27

TH1

C111 C110

CN2K28

L17K33

C100

C101

IC11 9 1 17

+

+

+

K29L19

K34CN1

1 13

K30L21

K35 K31L23

K36 K32

BZ1

L25K37

Figure 2-3-7 Operation unit left PCB silk-screen diagram

2DF

2-3-16

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY1 signal, output1-2 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY2 signal, output1-3 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-L DIGKEY3 signal, output1-4 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN1 signal, input1-5 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN2 signal, input1-6 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN3 signal, input1-7 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L SCAN4 signal, input1-8 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED1 signal, input1-9 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED2 signal, input1-10 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED3 signal, input1-11 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED4 signal, input1-12 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED5 signal, input1-13 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L DIGLED6 signal, input2-1 3-14 0/5 V DC LCD VEE signal, input2-2 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D3 data, input2-3 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D2 data, input2-4 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D1 data, input2-5 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D0 data, input2-6 3-14 0/5 V DC LCD DISPLAY signal, input2-7 3-14 GND LCD VSS signal, input2-8 3-14 5 V DC LCD VDD signal, input2-9 3-14 GND LCD VSS signal, input2-10 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD CP signal, input2-11 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD LOAD signal, input2-12 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD FRAME signal, input2-13 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y2, input2-14 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X2, input2-15 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y1, output2-16 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X1, output2-17 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-L BUZZER signal, input3-1 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY4 signal, output3-2 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY5 signal, output3-3 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY6 signal, output3-4 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY7 signal, output3-5 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY8 signal, output3-6 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R DIGKEY9 signal, output3-7 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN5 signal, input3-8 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN6 signal, input3-9 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN7 signal, input3-10 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R SCAN8 signal, input3-11 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R DIGLED7 signal, input3-12 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB-R DIGLED8 signal, input3-13 3-14 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for OPCB-R, input3-15 3-14 0/5 V DC OPCB-R LAMP OFF signal, input3-16 3-17 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for OPCB-R, input4-1 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y2, output4-2 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X2, output4-3 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage Y1, input4-4 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) Touch panel detection voltage X1, input5-1 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD FRAME signal, output5-2 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD LOAD signal, output5-3 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD CP signal, output5-4 3-14 GND LCD VSS signal, output5-5 3-14 5 V DC LCD VDD signal, output5-6 3-14 GND LCD VSS signal, output5-7 3-14 Analog LCD control signal, output

2DF

2-3-17

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks5-8 3-14 0/5 V DC LCD DISPLAY signal, output5-9 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D0 data, output5-10 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D1 data, output5-11 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D2 data, output5-12 3-14 0/5 V DC (pulse) LCD D3 data, output6-1 3-14 Analog LCD BACK LIGHT control signal, output6-3 3-14 GND LCD BACK LIGHT control signal, output

2DF

2-3-18

2-3-4 Scanner drive PCB

SM

SM A

SM _A

SM B

SM _B

SM Vref

SM M1

SM M2

SM M3

SM M4

SM M5

SM CLK

SM CWB

SM RET

DT1

DT2

SM ENABLE

EL ON REM EL

EL

INPCB

ODSWODSW

SHPSWSHPSW

SDPCB

MPCB

SteppingmotordriverIC1

Figure 2-3-8 Scanner drive PCB block diagram

The scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) consists of a stepping motor driver IC (IC1) as the center, digital transistors DT1 and DT2,etc.Drive of the scanner motor (SM) is controlled by the current setting voltage (SM Vref) that is output from the main PCB(MPCB), the mode signals (SM M1 to M5, SM CWB), the phase switchover clock signal (SM CLK), and the drive/stop signal(SM ENABLE).Also the main PCB (MPCB) outputs a control signal (EL) through a digital transistor (DT2) to the inverter PCB (INPCB) toturn on or off the exposure lamp (EL).Also the scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) acts as an interchange circuit of signals for the original detection switch (ODSW) andthe scanner home position switch (SHPSW).

2DF

2-3-19

C111

L1

CN6

C22D1

4

E

22 1

C B

1

JP102 CN1

C12DT1 C13 IC1

JP11

J5

J9

C117

C21

C115

C114

141

L2

C11

C112

C110

J11

TP1

E C BDT2

L5 CN3

21

56

J12

C11

8

13

CN

4

C11

3

C11

9

J4J1

0

C5

C10

1

L3

J1

J2

C1

R12

R1

R7

R8

R9

R2

R3

R15

R16

JP7

JP8

R6

C6

C7

C8

C9

C3

C12

0

L4

JP10

1JP

100

JP16

JP6

J8

J13

C23

CN

5C

N2

J16

11

6

J3

3

J17C

102

C12

1

C11

6

C10

0

C19

C20 J7

J6

J14

JP9J1

5

JP15

JP5

C10

C16 C17

C18+

+ +

+

Figure 2-3-9 Scanner drive motor PCB silk-screen diagram

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-2 1-1 0/5 V DC SHPSW on/off, output1-3 1-1 0/5 V DC EL on/off, input1-4 1-1 0/5 V DC SM ENABLE signal, input1-5 1-1 0/5 V DC SM RET signal, input1-6 1-1 0/5 V DC SM CWB signal, input1-7 1-1 0/5 V DC (pulse) SM CLOCK signal, input1-8 1-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control voltage M5, input1-9 1-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control voltage M4, input1-10 1-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control voltage M3, input1-11 1-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control voltage M2, input1-12 1-1 0/5 V DC SM drive control voltage M1, input1-13 1-1 SM current control voltage Vref, input1-14 1-1 0/5 V DC ODSW on/off, input2-1 3-6 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (_B)2-2 3-6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SM, output2-3 3-6 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (B)2-4 3-6 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (A)2-5 3-6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SM, output2-6 3-6 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (_A)3-1 3-5 0/5 V DC EL on/off, output3-2 3-5 0/5 V DC EL on/off, output3-3 3-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for INPCB, output3-4 3-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for INPCB, output4-1 4-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SHPSW, output4-2 4-3 0/5 V DC SHPSW on/off, output5-1 5-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for ODSW, output5-2 5-3 0/5 V DC ODSW on/off, output6-2 6-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input6-4 6-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input

2DF

2-3-20

2-3-5 CCD PCB

1

2

RS

CLP

SHIFT

Odd

Even

RS

CLK

CLP

Clock driverIC1, 4 Differential

receiverIC3

Main PCB

CCD PCB

CCDIC2

Transistor Q2

Transistor Q1

SHIFT

Odd

Even

Figure 2-3-10 CCD PCB block diagram

The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor IC2 for original scanning.The clock signals (CLK, RS, CLP, and SHIFT) for driving the CCD sensor (IC2) are sent as differential signals from the mainPCB (MPCB), reconstructed to normal signals by the differential receiver (IC3), and then input to the CCD sensor (IC2) viathe clock driver (IC1 and IC4).Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals areamplified by emitter followers in the transistors Q1 and Q2 and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in themain PCB (MPCB).

2DF

2-3-21

R40

R11

R19

R46

R43

R6

C23

Q3

C6

C7

R23R22R15TP1

R16

C19

R24R35R36

Q1

C21

L4Q2C22

R39R38

R21

R33R45 C17

R32R30

R28R26

C9

9

1 C18

C16

C10

C8

IC19

9

C1

C2

R41

R42

R4

C4

1

R20

R44

CN

1

1415

C13

C12

R18

IC3

211

SG

C20

L5 L6

C15

C14

IC4

R5R8R10R13

R3

R2TP4

C11

L1L2

L3

Figure 2-3-11 CCD PCB silk-screen diagram

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB RS – signal, input1-2 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB RS + signal, input1-3 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLOCK – signal, input1-4 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLOCK + signal, input1-6 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB SHIFT signal, input1-8 1-7 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB CLP signal, input1-10 1-9 5 V DC 5 V DC supply from CCDPCB, input1-11 1-9 12 V DC 12 V DC supply from CCDPCB, input1-12 1-13 4.5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB EVEN signal, output (analog)1-14 1-15 4.5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB ODD signal, output (analog)

2DF

2-4-1

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 1F

rom

th

e m

ain

sw

itch

tu

rned

on

to

mac

hin

e st

abili

zati

on

MSW: On

MS

W

FH

-M

FH

-S

DM

DB

RE

M

CN

31-1

CN

1-5

CN

1-6

CN

11-9

,11

CN

7-1

CF

M (

seco

nd s

peed

)

CF

M (

first

spe

ed)

PM

TC

RE

M

CN

8-12

CN

7-10

500

ms

500

ms

10 s

*310

0 m

s

+40

0 V

+30

00 V

+40

0 V

13 s

3 s

900

ms

2 s

1000

ms

*1: C

opyi

ng is

ena

bled

as

follo

ws:

1. W

hen

fixin

g te

mpe

ratu

re a

t the

mai

n sw

itch

turn

ing

on is

100

°C/2

12°F

or

low

er A

bsol

ute

hum

idity

is 1

5 g/

m3

or h

ighe

r: C

opyi

ng is

ena

bled

120

s a

fter

fixin

g he

ater

M (

FH

-M)

turn

ing

on.

2. W

hen

fixin

g te

mpe

ratu

re a

t the

mai

n sw

itch

turn

ing

on is

100

°C/2

12°F

or

low

er T

he fi

xing

tem

pera

ture

at t

he m

ain

switc

h tu

rnin

g on

is 1

3°C

/55.

4°F

or

high

er a

nd th

e am

bien

t tem

pera

ture

is 1

8°C

/64.

4°F

or

high

er:

Cop

ying

is e

nabl

ed a

t the

ear

lier

timin

g of

eith

er 4

1 s

afte

r fix

ing

heat

er M

(F

H-M

) tu

rnin

g on

or

whe

n th

e co

pier

ent

ers

seco

ndar

y st

abili

zatio

n. O

ther

than

the

abov

e: C

opyi

ng is

ena

bled

at t

he la

ter

timin

g of

eith

er 6

9 s

afte

r fix

ing

heat

er M

(F

H-M

) tu

rnin

g on

or

whe

n th

e co

pier

ent

ers

seco

ndar

y st

abili

zatio

n. 3

. Oth

er c

ondi

tions

than

1 a

nd 2

Cop

ying

is e

nabl

ed w

hen

the

copi

er e

nter

s se

cond

ary

stab

iliza

tion.

*2: R

otat

es fo

r 18

0 s

at fu

ll sp

eed

whe

n th

e fix

ing

tem

pera

ture

at t

he m

ain

switc

h tu

rnin

g on

is 1

00°C

/212

°F o

r lo

wer

, and

the

abso

lute

hum

idity

is 1

5 g/

m3

or h

ighe

r.

*3: 6

0 s

whe

n th

e fix

ing

tem

pera

ture

at m

ain

switc

h tu

rnin

g on

is 1

00°C

/212

°F o

r lo

wer

, and

the

abso

lute

hum

idity

is 1

5 g/

m3

or h

ighe

r.

Primary stabilizationfixing temperature110°C/230°F

Secondary stabilizationfixing temperature165°C/329°F

Copying enabled*1

Hal

f spe

edH

alf s

peed

Ful

l spe

ed

Ful

l spe

ed *2

30 s

15 s

700

ms

2DF

2-4-2

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 2S

can

ner

init

ializ

atio

n

200

P

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Sca

nner

initi

aliz

atio

n (S

HP

SW

: ON

, OD

SW

: ON

)

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-2

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Sca

nner

initi

aliz

atio

n (S

HP

SW

: OF

F, O

DS

W: O

FF

)

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-2

114

P

200

P20

0 P

114

P

200

P

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Sca

nner

initi

aliz

atio

n (S

HP

SW

: ON

, OD

SW

: OF

F)

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-2

114

P

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Sca

nner

initi

aliz

atio

n (S

HP

SW

: OF

F, O

DS

W: O

N)

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-220

0 P

200

P11

4 P

1418

P94

4 P

944

P14

18 P

1418

P94

4 P

824

P94

4 P

1418

P

1418

P94

4 P

944

P14

18 P

1418

P94

4 P

824

P94

4 P

1418

P

2DF

2-4-3

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 3O

rig

inal

sca

nn

ing

op

erat

ion

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-2

FV

SY

NC

sig

nal

338

P47

2 P

9922

P

1039

4 P

SM

Off

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Rev

. rot

atio

n

CN

37-8

,9,1

0

11,

12

SH

PS

WC

N37

-2

FV

SY

NC

sig

nal

338

P47

2 P

200

P82

4 P

9922

P

Sca

nnin

g an

A3/

11"

× 17

" or

igin

al, m

agni

ficat

ion

ratio

100

% (

OD

SW

: ON

)

Sca

nnin

g an

A3/

11"

× 17

" or

igin

al, m

agni

ficat

ion

ratio

100

% (

OD

SW

: OF

F)

200

P

200

P

200

P

1039

4 P

2DF

2-4-4

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 4C

op

yin

g a

n A

3/11

" ×××× ×17

" o

rig

inal

on

to a

n A

5R/5

1 /2"

×××× ×81 /

2" c

opy

pap

er f

rom

th

e by

pas

s ta

ble

,m

agn

ific

atio

n r

atio

25%

, man

ual

co

py

den

sity

co

ntr

ol

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

6-A

9

CN

6-A

11

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

10-A

2

CN

16-A

11

CN

9-A

2

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

CN

7-6

CN

11-1

4

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

BY

PP

FC

L

BY

PF

CL

MC

RE

M

EM

RS

W

ES

W

BY

PF

SW

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

SC

RE

M

FC

L1

100

ms 20

0 m

s

280

ms

100

ms

35 m

s

323

ms

210

ms

409

ms

190

ms

48 m

s

124

ms

100

ms

5000

ms

19 m

s

11 m

s

324

ms

Image ready

2DF

2-4-5

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 5C

op

yin

g a

n A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

ori

gin

al o

nto

an

A4/

11" ×××× ×

81/ 2

" co

py p

aper

fro

m t

he

cop

ier

up

per

dra

wer

, mag

nif

icat

ion

rati

o 1

00%

, au

to c

op

y d

ensi

ty c

on

tro

l

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

FC

L1

PF

CL-

U

MC

RE

M

EM

RS

W

ES

W

FS

W1

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

SC

RE

M

100

ms

100

ms

323

ms

30 m

s75

ms

48 m

s 190

ms

124

ms

Min

78

ms

409

ms

5000

ms

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

11-1

4

CN

16-B

1

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

10-A

2

CN

16-A

11

CN

11-1

7

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

CN

7-6

17 m

s

19 m

s 1 m

s32

4 m

s

210

ms

Image ready

2DF

2-4-6

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 6C

op

yin

g a

n A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

ori

gin

al o

nto

an

A4/

11" ×××× ×

81/ 2

" co

py

pap

er f

rom

th

e co

pie

r u

pp

er d

raw

er, m

agn

ific

atio

nra

tio

100

%, a

uto

co

py

den

sity

co

ntr

ol,

ejec

tio

n t

o t

he

job

sep

arat

or

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

11-1

4

CN

16-B

1

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

16-A

2

CN

35-1

2

CN

10-A

2

CN

11-1

7

CN

16-A

5

CN

35-1

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

FC

L1

PF

CL-

U

MC

RE

M

EM

FS

SO

L

FS

SO

L(JO

B)

RS

W

FS

W1

FS

SW

JBE

SW

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

100

ms

124

ms

48 m

s 190

ms

100

ms

17 m

s

Min

78

ms

970

ms

323

ms

500

ms

350

ms

215

ms

300

ms

200

ms

30 m

s

296

ms

Image ready

2DF

2-4-7

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 7C

on

tin

uo

us

copy

ing

of

an A

5R/5

1 /2"

×××× ×81 /

2" o

rig

inal

on

to t

wo

sh

eets

of

A3/

11" ×××× ×

17"

copy

pap

er f

rom

th

e co

pie

rlo

wer

dra

wer

, mag

nif

icat

ion

rat

io 4

00%

, man

ual

co

py

den

sity

co

ntr

ol

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

11-1

4

CN

13-A

12

CN

16-B

4

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

10-A

2

CN

16-A

11

CN

11-1

7

CN

13-A

10

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

FC

L1

FC

L2

PF

CL-

L

MC

RE

M

EM

RS

W

ES

W

FS

W1

FS

W2

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

100

ms

100

ms

17 m

s

323

ms

323

ms

500

ms

300

ms

350

ms

215

ms

30 m

s30

ms

190

ms

48 m

s

190

ms

124

ms

124

ms

200

ms

518

ms

Min

78

ms

78 m

s

17 m

s

Image ready

2DF

2-4-8

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 8D

up

lex

copy

ing

of

an A

3/11

" ×××× ×17

" b

oo

k o

rig

inal

on

to o

ne

du

ple

x A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

copy

fro

m t

he

cop

ier

up

per

dra

wer

,m

agn

ific

atio

n r

atio

100

%, a

uto

co

py

den

sity

co

ntr

ol

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

11-1

4

CN

16-B

1

CN

10-B

2

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

10-A

2

CN

16-A

11

CN

11-1

7

CN

16-A

5

CN

10-B

4

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

FC

L1

PF

CL-

U

DU

PC

L

MC

RE

M

EM

RS

W

ES

W

FS

W1

FS

SW

DU

PP

CS

W

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

100

ms

48 m

s48

ms

300

ms

500

ms

350

ms

215

ms

100

ms

323

ms

40 m

s

50 m

s50

ms

30 m

s

190

ms

190

ms

124

ms

Min

78

ms

Min

78

ms

17 m

s

323

ms

200

ms

518

ms

124

ms

30 m

s

15 m

s

Fw

d.ro

tatio

nat

low

spe

edF

wd.

rota

tion

at lo

w s

peed

Image ready

Image ready

Rev

. rot

atio

nat

hig

h sp

eed

2DF

2-4-9

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 9C

on

tin

uo

us,

du

ple

x co

pyi

ng

of

two

sin

gle

-sid

ed A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

ori

gin

als

on

to t

wo

du

ple

x A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

cop

ies

fro

m t

he

cop

ier

up

per

dra

wer

, mag

nif

icat

ion

rat

io 1

00%

, au

to c

op

y d

ensi

ty c

on

tro

l

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

PF

M

RC

L

FC

L1

PF

CL-

U

DU

PC

L

MC

RE

M

EM

RS

W

ES

W

FS

W1

FS

SW

DU

PP

CS

W

TC

RE

M

DB

RE

M

CN

11-9

,11

CN

11-1

0,12

CN

16-B

6

CN

11-1

4

CN

16-B

1

CN

10-B

2

CN

7-4

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

CN

10-A

2

CN

16-A

11

CN

11-1

7

CN

16-A

5

CN

10-B

4

CN

7-10

CN

7-1

100

ms

17 m

s30

ms

30 m

s

40 m

s

50 m

s

190

ms

48 m

s

Min

78

ms

100

ms

323

ms

323

ms

323

ms

Min

78

ms

15 m

s

17 m

s15

ms

48 m

s

Min

200

0 m

s

1400

ms

1400

ms

124

ms

124

ms

124

ms

124

ms

190

ms

190

ms

190

ms

50 m

s50

ms

50 m

s

323

ms

215

ms

350

ms

300

ms

200

ms

518

ms

500

ms

30 m

s30

ms

40 m

s

Fwd.

rota

tion

at lo

w s

peed

Rev

. rot

atio

nat

hig

h sp

eed

Rev

. rot

atio

nat

hig

h sp

eed

Image ready

Image ready

Fwd.

rota

tion

at lo

w s

peed

Fwd.

rota

tion

at lo

w s

peed

2DF

2-4-10

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 10

Co

nti

nu

ou

s co

pyi

ng

an

A3/

11" ×××× ×

17"

ori

gin

al o

nto

tw

o s

hee

ts o

f A

3/11

" ×××× ×17

" co

py p

aper

fro

m t

he

pap

er fe

ed d

esk

up

per

dra

wer

, mag

nif

icat

ion

rat

io 1

00%

, au

to c

opy

den

sity

co

ntr

ol

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

CN

11-9

,11

PF

MC

N11

-10,

12

DD

M

RC

LC

N16

-B6

FC

L1C

N11

-14

FC

L2C

N13

-A12

FC

L3C

N13

-A5

DP

FC

L-U

MC

RE

MC

N7-

4

EM

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

RS

WC

N10

-A2

ES

WC

N16

-A11

FS

W1

CN

11-1

7

FS

W2

CN

13-A

10

FS

W3

CN

13-A

2

TC

RE

MC

N7-

10

DB

RE

MC

N7-

1

17 m

s

78 m

s

124

ms

124

ms

48 m

s

Min

78

ms

100

ms

30 m

s30

ms

190

ms

190

ms

1379

ms

323

ms

323

ms

350

ms

500

ms

518

ms

200

ms

Imag

e re

ady

215

ms

17 m

s

1379

ms

300

ms

100

ms

2DF

2-4-11

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 11

Co

pyi

ng

an

A4/

11" ×××× ×

81/ 2

" o

rig

inal

on

to a

n A

4/11

" ×××× ×81

/ 2"

copy

pap

er f

rom

th

e p

aper

feed

des

k lo

wer

dra

wer

, m

agn

ific

atio

n r

atio

100

%, m

anu

al c

op

y d

ensi

ty c

on

tro

l

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

CN

11-9

,11

PF

MC

N11

-10,

12

DD

M

RC

LC

N16

-B6

FC

L1C

N11

-14

FC

L2C

N13

-A12

FC

L3C

N13

-A5

DF

CL

DP

FC

L-L

MC

RE

MC

N7-

4

EM

CN

16-B

11 -

B14

RS

WC

N10

-A2

ES

WC

N16

-A11

FS

W1

CN

11-1

7

FS

W2

CN

13-A

10

FS

W3

CN

13-A

2

DF

SW

TC

RE

MC

N7-

10

DB

RE

MC

N7-

1

100

ms

123

ms

123

ms

17 m

s

30 m

s

48 m

s

Min

78

ms

124

ms

100

ms

344

ms

323

ms

518

ms

500

ms

200

ms

300

ms

350

ms

190

ms

Imag

e re

ady

215

ms

2DF

2-4-12

Ch

art

of

imag

e ad

just

men

t p

roce

du

res

Item

Imag

eD

escr

ipti

on

Adj

ustin

g th

e sk

ew o

f the

lase

r sc

anne

r un

it (p

rintin

g ad

just

men

t)A

djus

ting

the

late

ral s

quar

e-ne

ss (

prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

––

1-6-

22––

Item

No.

Mo

de

Ori

gin

alP

age

Rem

arks

Mai

nte

nan

ce m

od

e

U99

3 (P

G2)

Test

cha

rt

Ad

just

-in

go

rder

1

Pol

ygon

mot

or s

peed

adj

ustm

ent

Adj

ustin

g th

e m

agni

ficat

ion

in th

e m

ain

scan

ning

di-

rect

ion

(prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

PO

LYG

ON

M

OT

OR

1-

4-12

U05

3U

053

test

pa

ttern

2

Adj

ustin

g th

e LS

U p

rint s

tart

tim

ing

Adj

ustin

g th

e ce

nter

line

of

the

bypa

ss ta

ble

(prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

LSU

OU

TT

he c

ente

r lin

e of

the

bypa

ss

tabl

e is

use

d as

the

refe

renc

e in

the

adju

stm

ent o

f the

cen

ter

lines

for

othe

r pa

per

sour

ces.

1-6-

12U

034

U03

4 te

st

patte

rn4

Adj

ustin

g th

e ce

nter

line

of

the

draw

ers

and

larg

e pa

per

deck

(pr

intin

g ad

just

men

t)

––A

djus

ts th

e po

sitio

n of

eac

h pa

per

sour

ce.

––––

U03

4 te

st

patte

rn5

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

turn

ing

on ti

min

g (s

econ

dary

pap

er fe

ed s

tart

tim

ing)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

adin

g ed

ge

regi

stra

tion

(prin

ting

adju

st-

men

t)

RC

L O

NTo

mak

e an

adj

ustm

ent f

or

dupl

ex c

opyi

ng, s

elec

t “R

CL

ON

(D

UP

)”.

1-6-

10U

034

U03

4 te

st

patte

rn6

LSU

illu

min

atio

n st

art t

imin

gA

djus

ting

the

lead

ing

edge

m

argi

n (p

rintin

g ad

just

men

t)LE

AD

1-

6-13

U40

2U

402

test

pa

ttern

7

LSU

illu

min

atio

n en

d tim

ing

Adj

ustin

g th

e tr

ailin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

TR

AIL

To m

ake

an a

djus

tmen

t for

du

plex

cop

ying

, sel

ect “

TR

AIL

(D

UP

)”.

1-6-

13

U40

2U

402

test

pa

ttern

8

Adj

ustin

g th

e po

sitio

n of

the

rack

ad

just

er

Driv

e m

otor

spe

ed a

djus

tmen

tA

djus

ting

the

mag

nific

atio

n in

the

auxi

liary

sca

nnin

g di

-re

ctio

n (p

rintin

g ad

just

men

t)

MA

IN M

OT

OR

1-

4-12

U05

3U

053

test

pa

ttern

3

2DF

2-4-13

Item

Imag

eD

escr

ipti

on

Dat

a pr

oces

sing

Adj

ustin

g m

agni

ficat

ion

of

the

scan

ner

in th

e m

ain

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n (s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

MA

IN S

CA

N A

DJ

No

adju

stm

ent f

or c

opyi

ng

usin

g th

e D

F.1-

6-27

U06

5

Item

No.

Mo

de

Ori

gin

alP

age

Rem

arks

Mai

nte

nan

ce m

od

e

Test

cha

rt

Ad

just

-in

go

rder

!

Orig

inal

sca

nnin

g sp

eed

Adj

ustin

g m

agni

ficat

ion

of

the

scan

ner

in th

e au

xilia

ry

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n (s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

SU

B S

CA

N A

DJ

AD

JUS

T D

ATA

U06

5: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

0: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

28

1-

4-15

U06

5U

070

Test

cha

rt

@

Orig

inal

sca

n st

art t

imin

gA

djus

ting

the

lead

ing

edge

re

gist

ratio

n (s

cann

ing

ad-

just

men

t)

AD

JUS

T D

ATA

LEA

D E

DG

E A

DJ

U06

6: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

1: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

29

1-

4-16

U06

6U

071

Test

cha

rt

$

Adj

ustin

g th

e ce

nter

line

(s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

AD

JUS

T D

ATA

AD

JUS

T D

ATA

U06

7: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

2: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

301-

4-17

U06

7U

072

Test

cha

rt

#

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

adin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(sca

nnin

g ad

just

-m

ent)

B M

AR

GIN

B M

AR

GIN

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

31

1-

4-49

U40

3U

404

Test

cha

rt

%

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e tr

ailin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(sca

nnin

g ad

just

-m

ent)

D M

AR

GIN

D M

AR

GIN

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

31

1-

4-49

U40

3U

404

Test

cha

rt

^

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

LSU

illu

min

atio

n st

art/e

nd ti

min

gA

djus

ting

the

left

and

right

m

argi

ns (

prin

ting

adju

st-

men

t)

AC

1-

6-13

U40

2U

402

test

pa

ttern

9

Adj

ustin

g th

e po

sitio

n of

the

ISU

(sc

ann-

ing

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e la

tera

l squ

are-

ness

(sc

anni

ng a

djus

tmen

t)––

1-

6-25

––Te

st c

hart

0

2DF

2-4-14

Whe

n m

aint

enan

ce it

em U

092

(Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r au

tom

atic

ally

) is

run

usi

ng th

e sp

ecifi

ed o

rigin

al (

P/N

2A

0680

20),

the

follo

win

g ad

just

men

ts a

re a

utom

atic

ally

mad

e:•

Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r ce

nter

line

(U

067)

•A

djus

ting

the

scan

ner

lead

ing

edge

reg

istr

atio

n (U

066)

•A

djus

ting

the

scan

ner

mag

nific

atio

n in

the

mai

n sc

anni

ng d

irect

ion

(U06

5)•

Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r m

agni

ficat

ion

in th

e au

xilia

ry s

cann

ing

dire

ctio

n (U

065)

Item

Imag

eD

escr

ipti

on

Item

No.

Mo

de

Ori

gin

alP

age

Rem

arks

Mai

nte

nan

ce m

od

eA

dju

st-

ing

ord

er

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

ft an

d rig

ht

mar

gins

(sc

anni

ng a

djus

t-m

ent)

AC

MA

RG

INA

C M

AR

GIN

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

311-

4-49

U40

3U

404

Test

cha

rt

&

Imag

e q

ual

ity

Item

Spe

cific

atio

ns10

0% m

agni

ficat

ion

Cop

ier:

±0.

8%U

sing

SR

DF

: ±1.

5%E

nlar

gem

ent/r

educ

tion

Cop

ier:

±1.

0%U

sing

SR

DF

: ±1.

5%La

tera

l squ

aren

ess

(cop

ier

mod

e)C

opie

r: ±

1.5

mm

/375

mm

Usi

ng S

RD

F: ±

2.5

mm

/375

mm

Late

ral s

quar

enes

s (p

rinte

r m

ode)

±1.

0 m

m/3

75 m

mM

argi

ns (

copi

er m

ode)

A: 2

.0+

2.0 m

mB

: 3.0

± 2

.5 m

mC

: 2.0

+2.

0 mm

D: 3

.0 ±

2.5

mm

Mar

gins

(pr

inte

r m

ode)

A: 6

.0 ±

2.0

mm

B: 6

.0 ±

2.5

mm

C: 6

.0 ±

2.0

mm

D: 6

.0 ±

2.5

mm

Lead

ing

edge

reg

istr

atio

nD

raw

er: ±

2.5

mm

Byp

ass:

±2.

5 m

mD

uple

x co

pyin

g: ±

2.5

mm

Ske

wed

pap

er fe

ed (

left-

right

diff

eren

ce)

Dra

wer

: 1.5

mm

or

less

Byp

ass:

1.5

mm

or

less

Dup

lex

copy

ing:

2.0

mm

or

less

Late

ral i

mag

e sh

iftin

gD

raw

er: ±

2.0

mm

or

less

Byp

ass:

±2.

0 m

m o

r le

ssD

uple

x co

pyin

g: ±

3.0

mm

or

less

Cur

ling

Dra

wer

: ±3.

0 m

m o

r le

ssB

ypas

s: 1

0.0

mm

or

less

Dup

lex

copy

ing:

10.

0 m

m o

r le

ss

–1.5

–1.5

2DF

2-4-15

Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part namePart No. Fig. No. Ref. No.

Name used in service manual Name used in parts list

Upper/lower paper feed pulley PULLEY, PAPER FEED 2AR07220 4 4Upper/lower separation pulley PULLEY, SEPARATION 2AR07230 4 5Upper/lower fowarding pulley PULLEY, LEADING FEED 2AR07240 4 6Bypass paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY, BYPASS 61706770 10 29Bypass separation pulley PULLEY, SEPARATION 2AR07230 10 20Bypass forwarding pulley PULLEY, LEADING FEED 2AR07240 10 34Bypass feed roller 1 ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED 2BL06540 11 11Bypass feed roller 2 ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED 2BL06560 11 12Left registration roller ROLLER REGIST L 2BL16021 7 11Right registration roller RIGHT ROLLER REGIST 2BL06270 5 51Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 6,7 37,8Feed roller 1 PULLEY FEED 2BL06930 5 59Feed roller 2 ROLLER B FEED 2BL06080 5 5Feed roller 3 ROLLER C FEED 2BL06090 5 6Registration switch SWITCH REGISTRATION 2BL27420 5 32

Contact glass CONTACT GLASS 35912010 9 46Slit glass CONTACT GLASS, ADF 2AV12250 9 19Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2AV12150 9 9Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 2AV12160 9 10Exposure lamp LAMP, SCANNER 2AV12100 9 4Original size detection switvh SENSOR, ORIGINAL 35927290 9 53

Transfer roller unit TR-700 TRANSFER ASS’Y 5PLPXHLAPKX 7 25

Developing unit DEVELOPER ASS’Y 2BJ93010 13 1

Drum unit DRUM ASS’Y 2BJ93020 15 1Main charger unit MC ASS’Y 2BL93090 15 48

Fixing unit FIXING ASS’Y 120 2BJ93040 14 -FIXING ASS’Y 230 2BJ93050 14 -

Press roller separation claw CLAW, PRESS ROLLER 2BL20350 6 8

Eject roller ROLLER EXIT 2BL21020 8 4Switchback roller ROLLER FEED SHIFT 2BL21030 8 3Eject pulley PULLEY EXIT B 2BL21520 8 37Switchback pulley PULLEY FEED SHIFT 2BL21330 6 2

2DF

2-4-16

Periodic maintenance procedures

MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page

Test copy and Perform at the maximum Test copy Every servicetest print copy size


Paper feed Upper/lower paper feed Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-3section pulley

Upper/lower separation Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-3pulley

Upper/lower forwarding Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-3pulley

Bypass paper feed pulley Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-5

Bypass separation pulley Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-5

Bypass forwarding pulley Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-5

Bypass feed roller 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Bypass feed roller 2 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Left registration roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Right registration roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Feed pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Feed roller 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.



Registration switch Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.


Optical section Slit glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.

Contact glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.

Mirror 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth only if vertical blacklines appear on the copy image.

Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth only if vertical blacklines appear on the copy image.

Lens Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth only ifvertical black lines appear onthe copy image.

Reflector Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth only ifvertical black lines appear onthe copy image.

Exposure lamp Clean or replace Every service Replace if an image problemoccurs.

Optical rail Grease Every service Check noise and shifting andthen apply scanner rail greasePG671.

Original size detection Clean Every service Clean the sensor emitter andsensor receiver with alcohol or a dry

cloth only if there is a problem.

2DF

2-4-17


Transfer/ Transfer roller unit Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-35separationsection


Developing Developing unit Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-34section


Main charging/ Drum unit Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-32drum section


Fixing section Fixing unit Replace Every service Replace. 1-6-36Press roller separation Check, replace Every service Check and replace if it isclaw and clean deformed. Clean with alcohol

after feeding 500,000 sheets.


Eject section Eject roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Eject pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Switchback roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Switchback pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.


Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.


Other Image quality Check and adjust Every service

2DF

2-4-18

Optional devices supplied parts list

Paper feed desk

Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.

Retainer Retainer 3AT02150Pin Pin 74315200CVM4 × 06 cross-head chromate binding screw Cross-head chromate binding screw, CVM4 × 06 B1004060Stay Stay 3AT02250M4 × 10 chrome TP screw Chrome TP screw, M4 × 10 B4104100


Fax board Fax board 3CM01020Auxiliary power source PCB (100 V) Auxiliary power source PCB (100 V) 3CM01030Auxiliary power source PCB (200 V) Auxiliary power source PCB (200 V) 3CM01040Fax kit label sheet Fax kit label sheet 3CM05010Certification label (120 V only) FCC68 label sheet (120 V only) 3CM05040Certification label (120 V only) LINE IC label sheet (120 V only) 3CM05030NCU retainer NCU retainer 3CM26010Auxiliary power source retainer Auxiliary power source retainer 3CM26020Fax cable Fax cable 3CM27010Fax-PCB-Power cable Fax-PCB-Power cable 3CM27040NCU board (N.A.) NCU board (N.A.) 3CM01030NCU board (CTR) NCU board (CTR) 3CM01040NCU board (EUG) NCU board (EUG) 3CM01050NCU cable NCU cable 2AW27020Battery pack Battery pack 2AW27070Speaker Speaker 35427120Modular connecter cable (120 V only) “B“ Modular connecter cable (120 V only) 76727300M3 × 06 chrome binding screw +TP-A chrome binding screw M3 × 06 B4103060Upper-sheet Upper-sheet 3CM26030Lower-sheet Lower-sheet 3CM26040

Facsimile System


Fax board Fax board 3DB01010Auxiliary power source PCB assembly (100 V) Auxiliary power source PCB assembly (100 V) 3CM01030Auxiliary power source PCB assembly (200 V) Auxiliary power source PCB assembly (200 V) 3CM01040Fax kit label sheet Fax kit label sheet 3CM05010Certification label (120 V only) FCC68 label sheet (120 V only) 3CM05040Certification label (120 V only) LINE IC label sheet (120 V only) 3CM05030Modular connecter cable (120 V only) “B“ Modular connecter cable (120 V only) 76727300M3 × 06 chrome binding screw +TP-A chrome binding screw M3 × 06 B4103060Fax cable Fax cable 3CM27010Fax-PCB-Power cable Fax-PCB-Power cable 3CM27040NCU board assembly (N.A.) NCU board assembly (N.A.) 3B101030NCU board assembly (CTR) NCU board assembly (CTR) 3B101040NCU cable NCU cable 2AW27020

Network facsimile System


Clamp Clamp, CKN-05 M2105890Band Band M2307010

Printing System

2DF

2-4-19


RTC board RTC board 3CS01010Sccaner board Sccaner board 3B301010CD-ROM (scanner) CD-ROM (scanner) 3B327010CD-ROM (document processing) CD-ROM (document processing) 3BJ27060

Scanning System


Nut plate Nut plate 2BL07120M3 × 10 bronze binding screw M3 × 10 bronze binding screw B1303100

Duplex unit


Large ejection cover Large ejection cover 3B504020Front ejection cover Front ejection cover 3B504080Rear ejection cover Rear ejection cover 3B504090Flat spring ejection Flat spring ejection 3B502050+TP-A chrome screw M3 × 05 +TP-A chrome screw M3 × 05 B4103050+TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05 +TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05 B4303050

Built-in finisher


Job separator tray Job separator tray 3B620030Left front cover JS Left front cover JS 3B604010+TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05 +TP-A bronze screw M3 × 05 B4303050

Job separator

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

General wiring diagram 2DF

2-4-20

C32-2 BEC32-1 RDC119

21

24VPG

C55(CN44)

C32(CN45)

C11

9-1

C11

9-2

1 2P

G-

24V

C107

C62 C72 C77

C61

C112

C111

RESERVE

14

PD

GN

DR

24V

GN

DS

CA

NS

CR

DY

NS

CC

LK

5V S

AFE

SA

MP

LEP

OW

CO

NT

LAS

ER

VD

O+

VD

O-

GN

D

10111213 6789 5 4 3 2 1

C18-1 OE

C18-2 BE

C18-3 YWC18-4 BEC18-5 LBC115-1 PEC115-2 BE

C116

987654321

FFC

C70

C67

C68

C69

C66

C65

C18

C11

5C

116-

9 B

EC

116-

8 P

EC

116-

7 LB

C11

6-6

BE

C11

6-5

YW

C11

6-3

BE

C11

6-1

OE

C110

C109C57 C56

C53C54

C71

C51

C114

C108

C52

C11

C100

C97

C98

1 2 3 4

C1-1 RDC10-1 RD

C3-3 RDC3-2 RDC3-1 RD

C3-8 BEC3-7 BEC3-6 BEC3-5 BEC3-4 RD

C89

C88

C94

C95

C90

C92

C91

C93

C99

C106

C107

C105

C101

C31-10 GYC31-9 YW

C31-15 YWC31-14 GYC31-13 YWC31-12 GYC31-11 YW

C31-2 YWC31-1 GY

C31-8 GYC31-7 YWC31-6 GYC31-5 GYC31-4 YWC31-3 GY

5V12VEVENGNDODDGND

RS-

GNDCLPGNDSHIFTGNDCLK-CLK+RS+

1

15141312111098765432

11G

ND

C10

5-5

YW

C59

C3-10C3-9

C24-2C24-1C23-4 BEC23-3 WEC23-2 BEC23-1 RD

C36-9 GYC36-10 GYC36-11 GYC36-12 GY

C36-8 GYC36-7 GYC36-6 GYC36-5 GYC36-4 GYC36-3 GYC36-2 GYC36-1 GY

C35-1 RDC35-2 BEC35-3 BEC35-4 YW

C35-6 GNC35-7 GYC35-8 RD

C35-10 RDC35-9 WE

C35-12 GNC35-11 WE

C29-B5 YW

C29-B3 YWC29-B4 YW

C29-B1 YWC29-B2 YW

C29-B6 YWC29-B7 YW

C29-B8 YWC29-B9 YW

C97

-2 G

YC

97-1

GY

C97

-4 G

YC

97-3

GY

C97

-6 G

YC

97-5

GY

C97

-8 G

YC

97-7

GY

C97

-10

GY

C97

-9 G

Y

C97

-12

GY

C97

-11

GY

C98

-2 B

EC

98-1

RD

C98

-4 Y

WC

98-3

BE

C98

-6 G

NC

98-5

BN

C98

-8 R

DC

98-7

GY

C98

-10

RD

C98

-9 W

E

C98

-12

GN

C98

-11

WE

C40

-12

WE

C40

-13

WE

C40

-14

WE

C40

-10

WE

C40

-11

WE

C40

-8 W

EC

40-9

WE

C40

-6 W

EC

40-7

WE

C40

-4 W

EC

40-5

WE

C40

-2 W

EC

40-3

WE

C10

0-3

WE

C40

-1 W

E

C10

0-1

WE

C10

0-2

WE

C10

5-2

GY

C10

5-1

YW

C10

5-4

GY

C10

5-3

YW

C10

5-6

GY

C10

5-7

YW

C10

5-8

GY

C10

5-9

YW

C10

5-10

GY

C10

5-11

GY

C10

5-12

YW

C10

4-13

GY

C10

5-14

YW

C10

1-15

GY

C10

3-1

YW

C10

3-3

YW

C10

3-2

YW

C10

7-2

YW

C10

7-1

YW

C10

6-2

YW

C10

6-1

YW

C10

5-2

YW

C10

5-1

YW

C10

5-4

YW

C10

5-3

YW

C10

5-5

YW

GNDGNDGNDGND

N.CF1 24VF1 24VF1 24VF1 24V

F3 5VGNDRXD

SET SIGRESETGNDTXDGND

C46-A8 WEC46-A7 WEC46-A6 WEC46-A5 WEC46-A4 WE

C10

9-2

C10

9-2

RD

C11

0-1

C11

0-2

RD

C16

C14

-2 P

EC

14-1

RD

MS

W O

FF R

EM

24V

C14-5C14-6

C14-3C14-4

24VTC2 REM

24VTC REM

C15

C14-7 BEC14-8 YWC14-9 RDC14-10 LB

GNDSET SIG24VK.COUNT REM

C102

C103

C104

C10

4-2

WE

C10

4-1

WE

C10

4-8

WE

C10

4-3

WE

C10

4-4

WE

C10

4-7

WE

C10

4-6

WE

C10

4-5

WE

C10

4-9

WE

C10

4-10

WE

C10

4-11

WE

C73

C74

C75

C87

C86

C85

C96

C84

C80

C79

C78

C76

C83

C82

C81

C7-1 BKC22-B6 GNC3-11 OEC3-12 BEC3-13 BEC3-14 RD

C3-15 RDC3-16 RDC3-17 OEC3-18 BEC3-19 BEC3-20 BE

C7-3 WEC22-B5 YWC22-B4 BEC22-B3 RDC22-B2 BEC22-B1 WE

C22-A6 PKC22-A5 BNC22-A4 BEC22-A3 WEC22-A2 BEC22-A1 RD

C7-1 BKC7-3 WE

1234567891011121314

C28-14 WEC28-13 WEC28-12 WEC28-11 WEC28-10 WEC28-9 WEC28-8 WEC28-7 WEC28-6 WEC28-5 WEC28-4 WEC28-3 WEC28-2 WEc28-1 WE

C25-1 GYC25-2 GYC25-3 GYC25-4 GYC25-5 GYC25-6 GYC25-7 GYC25-8 GYC25-9 GYC25-10 GYC25-11 GYC25-12 GY

C33-15 WEC33-16 WEC33-17 WE

GNDOSDS5V

C10

8-13

WE

C10

8-14

WE

C10

8-1

WE

C10

8-7

WE

C10

8-12

WE

C10

8-11

WE

C10

8-8

WE

C10

8-9

WE

C10

8-10

WE

C10

8-6

WE

C10

8-5

WE

C10

8-4

WE

C10

8-2

WE

C10

8-3

WE

BVSELR24VGNDMHVDRHVCLKRHVDRRiSELTiCTLTVSELTHVDRTHRDRTHFDRTiSENSTVSENS

C10

2-14

LB

C10

2-13

BN

C10

2-12

PE

C10

2-11

BE

C10

2-10

RD

C10

2-9

DE

C10

2-8

PK

C10

2-7

BE

C10

2-6

YW

C10

2-5

GY

C10

2-4

GN

C10

2-3

BN

C10

2-2

LBC

102-

1 P

E

24VP.GNDGNDCOIN ENF.GFEED COUNTEJECT COUNTCOPYING SIGTXDGNDRXDGND

CON--

GND

DREQACKRXD

TXDGNDGNDGND5V5V

C29-B10 YWC29-B11 YWC29-B12 YW

C29-A1 WEC29-A2 WEC29-A3 WEC29-A4 WEC29-A5 WEC29-A6 WEC29-A7 WEC29-A8 WEC29-A9 WEC29-A10 WEC29-A11 WE

C30-1 LBC30-2 BNC30-3 PEC30-4 BEC30-5 RDC30-6 DEC30-7 PKC30-8 BEC30-9 YWC30-10 GYC30-11 GNC30-12 BNC30-13 LBC30-14 PE

C6-1 BEC6-2 RDC6-3 BEC6-4 OE

C33-14 WEC33-13 WEC33-12 WEC33-11 WEC33-10 WEC33-9 WEC33-8 WEC33-7 WEC33-6 WEC33-5 WEC33-4 WEC33-3 WEC33-2 WEC33-1 WE

5V(200Ω)BYPPLSW BYPPLSW

BYPPWSW

BYPPSW

BYPPFCL

BYPFCL

GND

BYPPWSW0BYPPWSW1BYPPWSW2GND5VBYPPSWGND24VBYPPFCL24VBYPFCL

C11

4-6

GY

C11

4-5

GY

C11

4-4

GY

C11

4-3

GY

C11

4-2

GY

C11

4-1

GY

C11

4-12

GY

C11

4-11

GY

C11

4-10

GY

C11

4-9

GY

C11

4-8

GY

C11

4-7

GY

C52

-2C

52-1

C52

-6 R

DC

52-5

BE

C52

-4 W

EC

52-3

BE

C54

-7 W

EC

54-8

BE

C54

-9 R

DC

54-1

0 B

EC

54-1

1 Y

WC

53-5

GN

C57

-6 R

DC

57-5

BE

C57

-4 W

EC

57-3

BE

C57

-2 B

NC

57-1

PK

C95

-1 Y

W

C95

-4 Y

WC

95-3

YW

C95

-2 Y

W

C94

-1 Y

WC

95-6

YW

C95

-5 Y

W

C94

-2 Y

W

C94

-5 Y

WC

94-4

YW

C94

-3 Y

W

C93

-2 Y

WC

93-1

YW

C94

-6 Y

W

C93

-5 Y

WC

93-4

YW

C93

-3 Y

W

C99

-1 Y

W

C92

-2 W

EC

92-1

WE

C99

-2 Y

W

C91

-3 W

EC

91-2

WE

C91

-1 W

E

C90

-1 W

EC

91-5

WE

C91

-4 W

E

C90

-2 W

E

C90

-5 W

EC

90-4

WE

C90

-3 W

E

C90

-8 W

EC

90-7

WE

C90

-6 W

E

C90

-11

WE

C90

-10

WE

C90

-9 W

E

C90

-12

WE

C89

-4 G

YC

89-1

GY

C89

-2 G

Y

C89

-5 G

YC

89-6

GY

C89

-3 G

Y

C88

-4 G

YC

88-1

GY

C88

-2 G

Y

C88

-5 G

YC

88-6

GY

C88

-3 G

Y

C87

-3 B

EC

87-4

GN

C87

-5 O

E

C85

-7 P

KC

87-1

PE

C87

-2 R

D

C86

-3 B

NC

85-6

PE

C86

-4 Y

W

C85

-4 B

E

C85

-5 L

B

C86

-2 B

EC

85-3

OE

C85

-1 R

DC

86-1

RD

C85

-2 B

E

C84

-2 Y

WC

84-1

YW

C96

-2 Y

WC

96-1

YW

C80

-2 Y

WC

80-1

YW

C84

-4 Y

WC

84-3

YW

C79

-2 Y

WC

79-1

YW

C80

-4 Y

WC

80-3

YW

C76

-2 Y

WC

76-1

YW

C78

-2 Y

WC

78-1

YW

C82

-2 W

EC

82-1

WE

C83

-2 W

EC

83-1

WE

C81

-4 W

EC

81-3

WE

C81

-2 W

EC

81-1

WE

C81

-8 W

EC

81-7

WE

C81

-6 W

EC

81-5

WE

C81

-12

WE

C81

-11

WE

C81

-10

WE

C81

-9 W

E

C75

-3 Y

WC

75-2

YW

C75

-1 Y

WC

74-2

YW

C74

-1 Y

W

C75

-8 Y

WC

75-7

YW

C75

-6 Y

WC

75-5

YW

C75

-4 Y

W

C71

-3 W

EC

71-2

WE

C71

-1 W

E

C73

-3 W

EC

73-2

WE

C73

-1 W

EC

71-5

WE

C71

-4 W

E

C68

-5 W

EC

68-6

WE

C68

-7 W

EC

68-8

WE

C68

-9 W

EC

68-1

0 W

EC

69-1

WE

C69

-2 W

EC

69-3

WE

C70

-1 W

EC

70-2

WE

C70

-3 W

E

C65

-3 Y

WC

65-4

YW

C65

-5 Y

WC

65-6

YW

C65

-7 Y

WC

65-8

YW

C65

-9 Y

WC

65-1

0 Y

WC

66-1

YW

C66

-2 Y

WC

67-1

YW

C67

-2 Y

W

C19-B13 YWC19-B12 YWC19-B11 YWC19-B10 YWC19-B9 YWC19-B8 YW

C19-B19 YWC19-B18 YWC19-B17 YWC19-B16 YWC19-B15 YWC19-B14 YW

C19-B7 YW

C21-1 RD


C19-B6 YWC19-B5 YWC19-B4 YWC19-B3 YW

C19-A19 WEC19-A18 WE

C19-B2 YWC19-B1 YW

C21-5 OEC21-3 BE

C21-9 LBC21-7 BE

C21-13 PKC21-11 PE

C21-4 BEC21-2 RD

C21-12 YWC21-10 BN

C20-1 GYC20-2 GYC20-3 GYC20-4 GYC20-5 GYC20-6 GY

C20-12 GYC20-11 GYC20-10 GYC20-9 GYC20-8 GYC20-7 GY

C21-14 PEC21-15 RDC21-16 BEC21-17 GNC21-18 OE

C19-A1 WEC19-A2 WEC19-A3 WEC19-A4 WEC19-A5 WEC19-A6 WEC19-A7 WE


C46-B8 YWC46-B7 YWC46-B6 YWC46-B5 YWC46-B4 YW

C46-B1 YWC46-B2 YWC46-B3 YW

C45-B16 YWC45-B15 YW




C45-A12 WEC45-A11 WEC45-A10 WEC45-A9 WEC45-A8 WEC45-A7 WEC45-A6 WEC45-A5 WEC45-A4 WEC45-A3 WEC45-A2 WEC45-A1 WE


C46-A3 WEC46-A2 WEC46-A1 WE


C47-A10 WE



C47-B2 YWC47-B1 YW

C47-B4 YWC47-B3 YW

C46-B10 YWC46-B9 YW

C45-B2 YWC45-B1 YW


C45-B4 YWC45-B3 YW

C45-B6 YWC45-B5 YW

121

2

121

2

PFCL-UUP24V

C47-B12 YWC47-B11 YWC47-B10 YWC47-B9 YWC47-B8 YWC47-B7 YWC47-B6 YWC47-B5 YW

C64

-1 W

EC

64-2

WE

C64

-3 W

EC

64-4

WE

C64

-5 W

EC

64-6

WE

C64

-7 W

EC

64-8

WE

C64

-9 W

EC

64-1

0 W

EC

64-1

1 W

EC

64-1

2 W

EC

64-1

3 W

E

C64

C63

-1 W

EC

63-2

WE

C63

-3 W

EC

63-4

WE

C63

-5 W

EC

63-6

WE

C63

-7 W

EC

63-8

WE

C63

-9 W

EC

63-1

0 W

EC

63-1

1 W

EC

63-1

2 W

EC

63-1

3 W

EC

63-1

4 W

EC

63-1

5 W

EC

63-1

6 W

EC

63-1

7 W

E

C63C60

C60

-1 W

EC

60-2

WE

C60

-3 W

EC

60-4

WE

C60

-5 W

EC

60-6

WE

C60

-7 W

EC

60-8

WE

C60

-9 W

EC

60-1

0 W

EC

60-1

1 W

EC

60-1

2 W

EC

60-1

3 W

EC

60-1

4 W

EC

60-1

5 W

EC

60-1

6 W

EC

60-1

7 W

E

C48-11 WEC48-12 WEC48-13 WE

C48-1 WEC48-2 WEC48-3 WEC48-4 WEC48-5 WEC48-6 WEC48-7 WEC48-8 WEC48-9 WEC48-10 WE

C59

-1 W

EC

59-2

WE

C59

-3 W

EC

59-4

WE

C59

-5 W

EC

59-6

WE

C59

-7 W

EC

59-8

WE

C59

-9 W

EC

59-1

0 W

EC

59-1

1 W

EC

59-1

2 W

EC

59-1

3 W

E

C49

-B17

WE

C49

-B16

WE

C49

-B15

WE

C49

-B14

WE

C49

-B13

WE

C49

-B12

WE

C49

-B11

WE

C49

-B10

WE

C49

-B9

WE

C49

-B8

WE

C49

-B7

WE

C49

-B6

WE

C49

-B5

WE

C49

-B4

WE

C49

-B3

WE

C49

-B2

WE

C49

-B1

WE

P.G

ND

R24

VLA

MP

OFF

S.G

ND

DIG

LED

8D

IGLE

D7

SC

AN

8S

CA

N7

SC

AN

6S

CA

N5

DIG

KE

Y9

5V DIG

KE

Y4

DIG

KE

Y5

DIG

KE

Y6

DIG

KE

Y7

DIG

KE

Y8

4 3 2 117 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

C49

-A17

WE

C49

-A16

WE

C49

-A15

WE

C49

-A14

WE

C49

-A13

WE

C49

-A12

WE

C49

-A11

WE

C49

-A10

WE

C49

-A9

WE

C49

-A8

WE

C49

-A7

WE

C49

-A6

WE

C49

-A5

WE

C49

-A4

WE

C49

-A3

WE

C49

-A2

WE

C49

-A1

WE

4 3 2 117 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

DIG

LED

61 2 3

DIG

LED

4D

IGLE

D5

4 5D

IGLE

D2

DIG

LED

3

6 7S

CA

N4

DIG

LED

1

8 9S

CA

N2

SC

AN

3

10 11D

IGK

EY

3S

CA

N1

DIG

KE

Y1

DIG

KE

Y2

12 13

C6-

5 R

DC

6-6

RD

C6-

7 B

EC

6-8

BE

C6-

9 O

EC

6-10

OE

C6-

11 B

EC

6-12

BE

F2 2

4V

GN

DF2

24V

GN

DF3

5V

F3 5

VG

ND

GN

DN

.C

OFM

RE

TO

FM C

LK

OC

M M

1

OC

M M

2O

CM

M2

OC

M V

RE

FO

CM

CW

BO

CM

CLK

OC

M R

ET

OC

M E

NA

BLE

OFM

CW

B

OFM

RE

TO

FM C

LK

OFM

EN

AB

LE

OFS

OL(

AC

T)O

FM E

NA

BLE

SB

FSS

OL

OFS

OL(

RE

T)

RE

SE

RV

E(S

OL)

EFS

SO

LO

FCL

SB

PS

OL(

AC

T)S

BP

SO

L(R

ET)

OS

LED

(GR

EE

N)

OS

LED

(RE

D)

OS

LSW

DFT

SW

DFS

SW

2D

FSS

W1

OS

WS

WD

F S

ET

RE

SE

RV

E(S

W)

RE

SE

RV

E(S

W)

OS

SW

OFS

WO

SB

SW

N.C

C27

-12A

GY

C27

-11A

GY

C27

-10A

GY

C27

-9A

GY

C27

-8A

GY

C27

-7A

GY

C27

-6A

GY

C27

-5A

GY

C27

-4A

GY

C27

-3A

GY

C27

-2A

GY

C27

-1A

GY

C27

-11B

YW

C27

-10B

YW

C27

-9B

YW

C27

-8B

YW

C27

-7B

YW

C27

-6B

YW

C27

-5B

YW

C27

-4B

YW

C27

-3B

YW

C27

-2B

YW

C27

-1B

YW

C26

-1 G

YC

26-2

GY

C26

-3 G

YC

26-4

GY

C26

-5 G

YC

26-6

GY

C26

-7 G

YC

26-8

GY

C26

-9 G

YC

26-1

0 G

YC

26-1

1 G

Y

C17

-8 B

NC

17-7

BE

C17

-6 Y

WC

17-5

PK

C17

-4 O

EC

17-3

GN

C17

-2 G

YC

17-1

PE

DIG

LED

61 2 3

DIG

LED

4D

IGLE

D5

4 5D

IGLE

D2

DIG

LED

3

6 7S

CA

N4

DIG

LED

1

8 9S

CA

N2

SC

AN

3

10 11D

IGK

EY

3S

CA

N1

DIG

KE

Y1

DIG

KE

Y2

12 13

C50(CN36)

VE

E O

FF

LCD

VS

S

LCD

FR

AM

EY

2

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

X2

A3

Y1

A2

X1

A1

BU

ZZE

R

LCD

DIS

P O

FF

LCD

D2

LCD

D1

LCD

D0

LCD

VD

DLC

D V

SS

LCD

CP

LCD

LO

AD

A13

A14

A12

A9

A10

A11

LAM

P O

FFR

24V

P.G

ND

LCD

D3

B2

B3

B1

A15

A16

A17

SC

AN

8

SC

AN

5S

CA

N6

SC

AN

7

DIG

LED

7D

IGLE

D8

5VS.G

ND

B10

B11

B9

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

DIG

KE

Y5

DIG

KE

Y4

DIG

KE

Y6

DIG

KE

Y7

DIG

KE

Y8

DIG

KE

Y9

B17

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

C49(CN42)

R24

V13 12 11

FSS

OL2

FSS

OL1

10 9LE

D R

EM

5V(2

00Ω

)

8 7E

PD

SW

5V

6 5S

ET

SIG

GN

D

4 3G

ND

GN

D

JBE

SW

5V2 1

C48(CN35)

GN

DTC

S

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

5VA

35V

A2

BY

PFS

WA

1G

ND

DV

UN

ITN

N.C

DE

VH

ITN

GN

DTN

S5VP

0

A13

A12

A9

A10

A11

TCD

SW

TNFS

OL

GN

DB

2B

3

B1

EE

DA

TA

DR

UN

ITN

GN

DE

ES

CLK

CL

GN

DP

0G

ND

B10

B11

B9

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

N.C

5VB

12B

13

C47(CN9)

FTH

5V

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

P0

A3

5VA

2R

SW

A1

GN

D

5VGN

DFT

H O

UT

A9

A10

GN

DD

UP

FCL

24V

B2

B3

B1

DU

P P

0R

24V

SE

T S

IGG

ND

5VDU

PP

CS

W

B10

B9

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

5VFSS

W

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

GN

DA

324

VA

2FS

SO

L1A

1FS

SO

L2

ES

W

GN

DC

FM1

24V

5VGN

D5VG

ND

A13

A14

A12

A9

A10

A11

LO24

VU

P24

VP

FCL-

UC

CS

WG

ND

B2

B3

B1

A15

A16

HU

MS

EN

S

EM

B-D

ETT

HG

ND

5VRC

L24

VP

FCL-

L

B10

B11

B9

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

CFM

4 R

EM

R24

VE

M A

EM

A-D

EM

BB

12B

13B

14B

15B

16

ODSWSM VREFSM M1SM M2SM M3SM M4SM M5SM CLKSM CWBSM RETSM ENABLEEL REMSHPSWGND

LIVERESET

GNDGND5V

24VDECK orDESKOPTION

NEUTRALFSW3 SIG

GNDRXDGND

TXD

F1 24VF1 24V

GNDF3 5V

GNDGND

A4

B4

A1

B1

A2

B2

A3

B3

A5

B5

A6

B6

A7

B7

A8

B8

A9

B10

A10

B91211109876541 2 31211109876541 2 3 15 14 13 12

GN

D

GN

D

12V

EV

EN

SH

IFT

OD

D

CLP

GN

D

GN

D

5V710 9 8 6 5 4 3 2 1

BY

PP

LSW

GN

D11

B12

B

GN

D5V

(20

0Ω)

9B10B

CFM

38B

GN

D7B

FRC

SW

6BG

ND

5BTD

DS

W4B

GN

D3B 2B

5VOFS

1B

BY

PFC

L

11A

12A

BY

PP

FCL

24V

9A10A

24V

8AG

ND

7AB

YP

PS

W6A

5V5A

GN

D4A

BY

PP

WS

W2

3A 2AB

YP

PW

SW

0B

YP

PW

SW

11A

OS

LSW

DFT

SW

11B

12B

DFS

SW

2D

FSS

W1

9B10B

OS

WS

W

8B

DF

SE

T

7B

RE

SE

RV

E(S

W)

6B

RE

SE

RV

E(S

W)

5B

OS

SW

4B

OFS

W

3B 2B

OFM

EN

AB

LE

OS

BS

W

1B

OFS

OL(

AC

T)O

FM E

NA

BLE

11A

12A

SB

FSS

OL

OFS

OL(

RE

T)

9A10A

RE

SE

RV

E(S

OL)

8A

EFS

SO

L

7A

OFC

L

6A

SB

PS

OL(

AC

T)

5A

SB

PS

OL(

RE

T)

4A

OS

LED

(GR

EE

N)

3A 2AN

.C

OS

LED

(RE

D)

1A

OC

M M

111

OC

M M

2O

CM

M2

910

OC

M V

RE

F8

OC

M C

WB

7O

CM

CLK

6O

CM

RE

T5

OC

M E

NA

BLE

4O

FM C

WB

3 2O

FM R

ET

OFM

CLK

1

SE

T S

IGR

ES

ET

1112

RX

DG

ND

910

GN

D8

TXD

7G

ND

65V

5G

ND

4G

ND

3 2F2

24V

F2 2

4V1

RE

SE

TS

ET

SIG

12

N.C

N.C

910

N.C

8N

.C7

N.C

6N

.C5

GN

D4

TXD

3 2R

XD

GN

D1

RE

SE

TB

6FS

W3

SIG

B5

GN

DB

4R

XD

B3

B2

TXD

GN

DB

1R

ES

ET

A6

SE

T S

IGA

5G

ND

A4

TXD

A3

A2

RX

DG

ND

A1

PG

PG

5V 5V65432

R24

V1

R24

V

7 8S

GS

G

9 10P

FM S

/SD

M S

/S

11 12P

FM L

/DD

M L

/D

13 14FC

L1D

M C

LK

15 16G

ND

24V

5VFSW

117 18

C21(CN11)

1 2U

P24

VR

24V

3 4P

WS

W-U

1P

WS

W-U

0

5 6G

ND

PW

SW

-U2

7 8LO

24V

R24

V

9 10P

WS

W-L

1P

WS

W-L

0

GN

DFC

L3

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

24V

A3

5VA

2FS

W3

A1

GN

D

24V

GN

DLM

-U S

W2

FCL2

SC

SW

GN

D5VFS

W2

A13

A14

A12

A9

A10

A11

PLS

W-L

LM-L

SW

2P

LSW

-UG

MD

GN

D L

M-U

RE

MG

ND

LM-U

SW

1

B2

B3

B1

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

GN

D

GN

D5VLI

CS

W-U

LM-L

RE

MG

ND

LM-L

SW

1G

ND

B10

B11

B9

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

5V 5VPS

W-L

GN

D

LIC

SW

-LG

ND

5VPS

W-U

B18

B19

B17

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

C19(CN13)

54321

C1-

3 B

E

C11

-2 R

D

C1-

6 R

DC

1-5

OE

C1-

4 B

E

C1-

2 B

E

C2-

4 P

K

C2-

6 G

N

C2-

1 B

NC

2-2

BE

C2-

3 Y

W

C2-

5 O

E

C2-

7 G

YC

2-8

PE

F2 2

4V6

5V5

GN

D4

GN

D3 2

R24

VG

ND

1

LMP

MO

N8

GN

D7

FH-S

6FH

-M5

5V4

ZCR

OS

S3 2

SLE

EP

CFM

51

C15

-1 L

BC

15-2

RD

C15

-3 Y

WC

15-4

BE

12

11K

.CO

UN

T R

EM

1024

V9

SE

T S

IG8

GN

D7

TC2

RE

M6

24V

5TC

RE

M4

24V

3 224

VM

SW

OFF

RE

M1

C12-1 BEC12-2 RDC12-3 BEC12-4 OEC13-1 RDC13-2 RDC13-3 BEC13-4 BEC13-5 OEC13-6 OEC13-7 BE

C51

-2 R

DC

51-3

RD

C51

-4 R

DC

51-5

RD

C51

-6 B

EC

51-7

BE

C51

-8 B

EC

51-9

BE

C52

-8 R

DC

52-7

BE

C53

-4 O

EC

53-3

BE

C52

-2 B

EC

52-1

RD

C56

-6 R

DC

56-5

RD

C56

-4 R

DC

56-3

BE

C56

-2 B

EC

56-1

BE

C10

-6 R

DC

10-5

OE

C10

-4 B

EC

10-3

BE

C10

-2 B

E

H LIVEFH-SFH-M1

23

C5(C

N5)

GN

DP

WS

W-L

211 12

F1 2

4V

GN

DG

ND

GN

DF3

5V

F1 2

4V

24V

GN

DG

ND

5V GN

D24

V

GN

DG

ND

5VF2 2

4V

16 5 4 3 2

5V SLE

EP

CFM

5ZC

RO

SS

FH-M

FH-S

GN

DLM

PM

ON

7 861 2 3 4 5

GN

D

GND12GND11F3 24VF3 24VGNDGNDF2 24VF2 24V5VGND24VGND

910

78

6

12345

GN

DF3

24V

GN

DG

ND

GN

D

F1 2

4VF1

24V

F1 2

4VF1

24V

9 10 117 861 2 3 4 5

121

2 121

2 CFM4

212

1

3213

21

C39

-12

GY

23

1

4 1234

CFM4 REMR24V

12

12

12

12

DUP P0

3213

21

123

321

21

21

23

1

4

3

12

12345

12 TC2

21

N.C

N.C

21

54321

123

123

1110

4

321

9876543

1110

98765 3

21

12

12

CCSWGNDCCSW

21

C45(CN16)

R24VCFM2 REM

21

3

R24VPG

DM S/SDM L/DDM CLK

4321

EM A-DEM A

121

2

8

8

PFM L/DPFM S/S

SG5V

67

5V

5VGND

GND

UNITFEED1

1234567 4

5

321

45

321

12FCL1

24VFCL1

FSW15V

GNDFSW1

321

789101112

789101112

67

FSSW

321

321

123456

SET SIGGND

C46(CN10)

4

3

FSSOL2

1 ETTH234

GNDHUMSENS5V

HUMSENS

GNDFSSW5V6

543

21

FSSOL

24VFSSOL12

1

ESW UNITEJECTESW

EM1234

EM BEM B-D

CFM1CFM1 24VGND

DUPLEX UNITOPTION

321

12

54321

5VDUPPCSWGNDDUPFCL24V DUPFCL

DUPPCSW

UNIT-RATIONRESIST

123

321 1

23

RSW

RCL RCL24V

GNDRSW5V

PFCL-L

121

2

PFCL-LLO24V

DM

12

3

5

PFM

R24VPG

P0

P0

GND

12

21

BYPFSWGND

5VBYPFSW

321

321 3

21

10987654321

10987654321

REMGND

109

109

321

123

5V87654321

GND

TCS

21 2

1

TCDSWCFM2

PFCL-U

TNFSOL

21

TCDSWGND

GNDTCS

5V

TNFSOL

EEPROM

DRUM UNIT

TNS

FUSE

CL

UNITDEVELOPING

87654321

EEDATAEESCLK

GNDDRUNITN

5V

TNSGND

DVUNITNDEVHITN

CL

P0

GNDFTH OUTFTH5V

12

12345

54321

12345

FTH

1221

C25(CN50)

BU

ILT-

IN F

INIH

SE

RO

PTI

ON

C38

789101112 123456

6

12345

12

7891011

RESETSET SIG

GNDRXDGND

TXDGND5V

F2 24VGNDGND

F2 24V

21

3

21

3

654321

654321

FEED UNITLOWER

LICSW-L

PSW-L321

123

2 81 74 63 56 45 38 27 1

321

123

2 81 74 63 56 45 38 27 1

LICSW-U

PSW-U

FEED UNITUPPER

5V

GND

5V

GND

5V

GND

5V

GND

OPCB-L

1 2

DR

EQ

AC

K

TXD

123456789101112

123456789101112

11

5V5V

VE

E O

FFLC

D D

3LC

D D

2LC

D D

1LC

D D

0LC

D D

ISP

OFF

LCD

VS

S (S

G)

LCD

VD

D (+

5V)

LCD

VS

S (S

G)

LCD

CP

LCD

LO

AD

LCD

FR

AM

E

X2

Y1

Y2

X1

C50

-13

WE

1234567

89101112

8

98

8

21

TDDSW

12 1

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14

5VPD

GND123

5V SAFE

8

14

1213

11

910

76

12345

7

11109

141312

654321

C30(CN8)

LASER SCANNER UNIT

7654321

123

54321

PD

SCRDYNSCCLK

PDGNDR24VGNDSCAN

SAMPLEPOWCONTLASERVDO+VDO-GND

19 20

12

2

24VFCL3

GNDFSW35V

(#25

0)TB

2(#

250)

TB1

UNITINVERTER

BA

CK

LIG

HT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CC

FT C

OLD

N.C

CC

FT H

OT

N.C

1 2 3 4X

1Y

1

Y2

X2

PANELTOUCH

LCD

VS

S(S

G)

LCD

CO

NT

LCD

DIS

P O

FF

LCD

LO

AD

LCD

LCD

FR

AM

E

LCD

CP

LCD

VS

S(S

G)

LCD

D0

LCD

D1

LCD

VD

D(+

5V)

LCD

D2

LCD

D3

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BU

ZZE

R

C50

-12

WE

C50

-11

WE

C50

-10

WE

C50

-9 W

EC

50-8

WE

C50

-7 W

EC

50-6

WE

C50

-5 W

EC

50-4

WE

C50

-3 W

EC

50-2

WE

C50

-1 W

E

GND

12

12

DH(Optional for 120V spec. and 220-240V spec.)

67

1FCL2

21

FCL224V

11

131211

910

FSSOL2

R24VFSSOL1

321

FSSOL

C35(CN39)

1234567891011121314

1413121110987654321

1

3

123

321

17161514131211

2121

2

1

C9(CN9)

LIV

E

(#187)TB3

C4(CN4)

5VGND

AGND12V

122

1

MO

DR

XD

RX

INM

OD

TXD

/RIN

GD

ET

/ON

HO

OK

2/O

NH

OO

K1

NC

UTY

PE

1/O

FFH

OO

KN

CU

TYP

E3

NC

UTY

PE

2FA

XS

EL

TELS

EL

EA

RTH

PLS

DIL

SH

UN

TK

MU

TEE

XTR

ING

2E

XTR

ING

1G

ND

+5V

AG

ND

+12V

121222

22

123334353637383940 5678910111314151617181920212223242526272829303132

FMA

IN_R

XD

0

12

4

/SE

TFA

X

/PR

EQ

/FA

XR

EA

DY

/SR

EQ

/MA

INS

TS

FMA

IN_T

XD

0

/MM

ISTS

FMM

I_TX

D2

FMM

I_R

XD

2

/FA

XR

ES

ET

/FO

HS

THIN

FMIP

OU

T0

FMR

EO

UT

FFO

CLK

/FP

VD

/FP

HS

YN

C

/FP

VS

YN

C

FOV

SY

NC

FMR

E

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

DFV

CLK

FPV

CLK

GN

DM

3.3V

C11

-1 R

D

1 2 1 2

C6(C

N6)

C3(CN3) C1(CN1)

9 10

UNITSEPARATERJOBOPTION

EPDSW321

LED

1312

87654321

123

45678910GND

JBESW

LED REM5V

5V(200Ω)

EPDSW

GND5V

GNDSET SIG

C24(CN5) C23(CN4)C36(CN40)C34(CN38)

C33(CN37) C31(CN34) C26(CN32)

C14(CN31)

C22(CN3)

C27(CN33)C29(CN6)

C20(CN12)

SDPCB

GND12

43

5VGND24V

C12(CN6)C41(CN2)

C44(CN5)

C43(CN4)

C40 (CN1)

OD

SW

SM

VR

EF

SM

M1

SM

M2

SM

M3

SM

M4

SM

M5

SM

CLK

SM

CW

BS

M R

ET

SM

EN

AB

LEE

L R

EM

SH

PS

WG

ND

EL

EL O

N

24V

GNDMSWMRYAGND12VN.CGNDN.C5V

3

C42(CN3)

OR KEY COUNTERKEY CARD 1 OPTION

23

1

3

12

C2(CN2)

PSPCB SUBOPTION

NO

CO

M

NO

CO

M

24VR24V

SSW2 SSW1

LIV

EN

EU

TRA

L

MRY

54321

54321

2

GN

DS

IG5V

F.G

5VB7

5VB6

5VB5

5VB4

5VB3

5VB2

5VB1

5VB0

CO

PY

EN

AB

LEG

ND

24V

KE

Y C

AR

D R

EM

(ONLY JAPAN)KEY CARD MK-1OPTION

5

F.G

OPCB-R

(ON

LY JA

PA

N)

KM

AS

OP

TION

109876541 2 3

7

1098

GN

DR

XD

-CO

N

1112

N.C

24V

654321

GN

DG

ND

GN

D

FEE

D C

OU

NT

CO

IN E

NG

ND

P.G

ND

GN

DR

XD

GN

DTX

DC

OP

YIN

G S

IGE

JEC

T C

OU

NT

10

6789

4321

(ON

LY JA

PA

N)

CO

IN V

EN

DE

RO

PTIO

N

4321

TC21

C37C39C58

C39

-6 G

Y

C39

-1 G

Y

C38

-1 Y

W

C39

-2 G

Y

C39

-5 G

YC

39-4

GY

C39

-3 G

Y

C39

-7 G

Y

6789101112

1 2 3 4 5

123456

C39

-8 G

YC

39-9

GY

C39

-11

GY

C39

-10

GY

127 8 9 10 11

C37

-1 G

Y

C37

-4 G

YC

37-3

GY

C37

-2 G

Y

C37

-5 G

Y

67891011

1 2 3 4 5

123456

C37

-6 G

YC

37-7

GY

C37

-10

GY

C37

-9 G

YC

37-8

GY

C37

-11

GY

7 8 9 10 11

F.G

7 8

C13-8 BE

7

C38

-2 Y

W

C38

-5 Y

WC

38-4

YW

C38

-3 Y

W

C38

-6 Y

W

6

789101112

11 10 9 8

STDF or SRDFOPTION

1 2 3 4 5

123456

6 5 4 3 2 1

61 2 3 4 5

C38

-7 Y

WC

38-8

YW

C38

-11

YW

C38

-10

YW

C38

-9 Y

W

127 8 9 10 11

9876

12345

1

78

65432

6

12345

123456

654321

11 12

12

7891011

N.C987

87

654321

FINIH

SE

RO

PTIO

N

6

12345

654321

BOXMAILOPTION

1813 14 15 16 17

RESETSET SIG

GNDTXDGND

RXD6

12345

JBESW213

2 1

CFM5

CFM

5 R

EM

24V

FRCSW

21

5VOFSGND

GND

OFS3

12

TDDSW

54321

CFM3

12

FCL3

FSW312111098

321

GNDFSW2

5V

BATTERYBACKUP

+2.4

VS

.GN

D

SPEAKER

122

SP

EA

KE

RS

.GN

D

1234567891011131415161718192021

1234567891011131415161718192021

NCUPCBOPTION

FAXPCBOPTION

123

3334353637383940 12345678910111314151617181920212223242526272829303132

654321

6

45

3

12

/B

/A 6

45

3

12

A24V

SM

SHPSW

INPCB

OSDS

ODSW

24VB

EL

GND 6

45

3

12

24VGND

EL24V

321

123

GNDSHPSW5V

GNDODSW5V

CLK

+

RS

-R

S+

CLK

-

CC

DP

CB

PLSW-L

GND21

PLSW-U

PLSW-L21

PLSW-U

LM-L

LM-U

12345

12345

SCSW21

FSW254

321

CONVEYING UNITVERTICAL

GNDLM-L REM

SCSWGND

GNDLM-L SW2

GNDLM-U REM

LM-U SW1GNDLM-U W2

LM-L SW1

PWSW-L

LOWER DRAWER

PWSW-U

UPPER DRAWER

654321

654321

LICSW-L

PSW-U

PSW-L

LICSW-U

785634128

7654321

785634128

7654321

PWSW-L0PWSW-L1

UP24VR24V

GND

LO24VR24V

PWSW-U0PWSW-U1PWSW-U2GND

PWSW-L2

C28(CN7)

FG

HVTPCB

1

5432

9876

1011121314

1

RiS

EL

RH

VD

RH

VC

LKM

HV

DR

GN

DR

24V

BV

SE

L

TVS

EN

STi

SE

NS

THFD

RTH

RD

RTH

VD

RTV

SE

LTi

CTL

5432 9876 10 11 12 13 14

C10(CN2)

GN

DM

SW

C16

-1 P

EC

16-2

RD

C17(CN1)

MPCB

4321

4321FIXING UNIT

MSW

PSPCB

FH-S

INLE

T

GR

OU

ND

CO

M

LIV

E

170°C

FH-M

ILSW

FTS

1-1-1

3CX

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Part names ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-31-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-4

1-2 Installation1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-1


(1) Paper misfeed indication ............................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions .............................................................................................. 1-3-2(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-3

1-3-2 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-4(1) The duplex feed clutch does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-3-4

1-3-3 Mechanical problems ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-5(1) Paper jams. ................................................................................................................................... 1-3-5(2) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-3-5


(1) Precautions ................................................................................................................................... 1-4-11-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly ........................................................................................... 1-4-2

(1) Adjusting the margin for printing ................................................................................................... 1-4-2(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration roller ................................................................. 1-4-3(3) Adjusting the center line of image printing .................................................................................... 1-4-4

2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Construction of each section ................................................................................................................ 2-1-1

(1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying .............................................................................. 2-1-2


2-3 AppendixesPeriodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-3-1

3CX

1-1-1


Type ............................................... EnclosedPaper .............................................. Plain paper: 75 – 80 g/m2

Special paper: colored paperPaper sizes .................................... A3 – A5R, folio/11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copierWeight ............................................ Approximately 4.8 kg/10.56 lbs

3CX

1-1-2

1-1-2 Part names

Figure 1-1-1

Duplex unit

3CX

1-1-3


Figure 1-1-2

Paper path

Duplex unit

3CX

1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

Figure 1-1-3

1 Pulley T302 Duplex belt3 Pulley T304 Duplex feed clutch gear5 Gear 256 Idle gear 207 Gear 25

3CX

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking


1 Duplex unit2 Nut plate3 M3 × 10 bronze binding screws4 Outer case5 Bar-code label6 Air-padded bag7 Plastic bag

3CX

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the copieroperation panel.To remove the jammed paper, open the conveying cover.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the conveying cover to turn safty switch 2 off and on.

Figure 1-3-1 Paper misfeed detection

FSW1

DUPPCSW

FSSW

DUPFCL

3CX

1-3-2

(2) Paper misfeed detection condition

• Duplex paper conveying section 1 (jam code 60)The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn on within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

1285 ms

FSSW

DUPPCSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-1

The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn off within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

1285 ms

FSSW

DUPPCSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-2

• Duplex paper conveying section 2 (jam code 61)Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning on.

1126 ms

DUPPCSW

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-3

Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning off.

1126 ms

DUPPCSW

FSW1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-4

3CX

1-3-3

(3) Paper misfeeds


(1)Paper jams in theduplex unit when themain switch is turnedon.

(2)Paper jams in theduplex unit duringcopying (jam induplex paperconveying section 1).

(3)Paper jams in theduplex unit duringcopying (jam induplex paperconveying section 2).

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround duplex paperconveying switch.




Broken duplex paperconveying switch actuator.


Broken duplex paperconveying switch actuator.

Defective duplex conveyingswitch.

Broken feed switch 1actuator.


Remove any found.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paperconveying switch on and off manually. Replace the switch ifindication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel isnot displayed in reverse.


Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on andoff manually. Replace the switch if indication of the correspondingswitch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse.


Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paperconveying switch on and off manually. Replace the switch ifindication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel isnot displayed in reverse.


Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paperconveying switch on and off manually. Replace the duplex paperconveying switch if indication of the corresponding switch on theoperation panel is not displayed in reverse.



3CX

1-3-4


(1)The duplex feedclutch does notoperate.

Broken duplex feed clutchcoil.

Poor contact of the duplexfeed clutch connectorterminals.

Defective main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplexfeed clutch.


Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN10-B2 on the copiermain PCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.


3CX

1-3-5


(1)Paper jams.


Check if the duplex feed pulley, upper duplexfeed roller or lower duplex feed roller isdeformed.

Check if the rollers and gears operatesmoothly.

Check visually and replace the pulley orroller if deformed.

Grease the bushings and gears.


3CX

1-4-1


(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:



3CX

1-4-2

1-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly

(1) Adjusting the margin for printingPerform the following adjustment if the printer leading edge margin for duplex copying (second face) is not correct.

Procedure

Yes

No

Start




Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.Is the margin correct?



Select “TRAIL (DUP)”.




End

Setting range: –5.0 to +10.0Reference: 4.5Changing the value by 1 moves the margin by 0.5 mm.Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

Figure 1-4-1

Printer leading edge margin for duplex copying (second face, 3 ± 2.5 mm)

3CX

1-4-3

(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration rollerPerform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded during duplex copying.

Procedure

End

Start


Yes

Yes

No

No


Select “DUPLEX DATA”.

Increase the value using the cursor up key.

Decrease the value using the cursor down key.


Make a test copy in duplex mode.

Is the leading edge of the image missing

or varying randomly (copy example 1)?

Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy example 2)?

Setting range: –30 to +20Reference: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 0.1 mm.Initial setting: 0The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack




Select “RESIST DATA”.


Figure 1-4-2


Copy example 2

3CX

1-4-4

(3) Adjusting the center line of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original whencopying using the duplex unit.

Procedure

Yes

No





Start

End


Select “LSU OUT (DUP)”.

Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.



Setting range: –5.0 to +5.0Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 1.0 mm.Initial setting: 0

For output example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For output example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.

Center line of printing


Output example 2

Figure 1-4-3

3CX

2-1-1

2-1-1 Construction of each section

The duplex unit consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face ofthe paper, the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex unit. The paper is then conveyed tothe copier paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers.

Figure 2-1-1 Duplex unit

1 Feedshift guide2 Upper duplex feed roller3 Lower duplex feed roller4 Duplex feed pulley5 Duplex feed pulley6 Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)

Figure 2-1-2 Duplex unit block diagram

CN10-B4

CN10-B2

MPCB

DUPPCSW

DUPFCL

3CX

2-1-2

(1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copyingPaper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section, the eject motor switchesfrom nomal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation, and the paper conveying direction isreversed. Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex unit via the eject roller and the switchback roller.Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex unit is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplexfeed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed.

Figure 2-1-3

Copying onto reverse side(normal rotation of eject motor)

Switchback operation(reverse rotation of eject motor)

Copying onto front side(normal rotation of eject motor)

Upper duplex feed roller

Paper path

Eject roller Eject roller

Lower duplex feed roller

Eject rollerSwitchback roller

3CX

2-2-1


Figure 2-2-1 Duplex unit

1. Duplex paper conveying switch(DUPPCSW) ................................................ Detects a paper jam in the duplex unit.

2. Duplex paper feed clutch(DUPFCL) .................................................... Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller.

2

1

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

3CX

2-3-1



Paper Upper duplex feed roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.conveying Lower duplex feed roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.section

F-2305

1-1-1

3B5

CONTENTS




(1) Paper misfeed indication ............................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................ 1-3-2(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-3

1-3-2 Self-diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3-4(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................. 1-3-4(2) Self-diagnostic codes .................................................................................................................... 1-3-4

1-3-3 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-7(1) The paper conveying motor does not operate. ............................................................................. 1-3-7(2) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-3-7(3) The pickup solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-3-7(4) The front side registration motor does not operate. ...................................................................... 1-3-7(5) The rear side registration motor does not operate. ....................................................................... 1-3-7(6) The trailing edge registration motor does not operate. ................................................................. 1-3-7(7) The cooling fan motor does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-3-8



(1) Precautions ................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor

and trailing edge registration cursor (reference) ........................................................................... 1-4-2(3) Cleaning the stapler ...................................................................................................................... 1-4-3(4) Adjusting the pressure of curl eliminator mechanism ................................................................... 1-4-4


(1) Paper conveying operation in sort mode ...................................................................................... 2-1-22-1-2 Intermediate tray section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-3

(1) Paper registration on the intermediate tray ................................................................................... 2-1-42-1-3 Stapler section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-5


(1) Paper conveying section ............................................................................................................... 2-2-1(2) Intermediate tray section............................................................................................................... 2-2-2(3) Stapler section .............................................................................................................................. 2-2-3

2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-1

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Timing chart No. 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3Periodic maintenance procedure .................................................................................................................... 2-4-4Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................................ 2-4-5

3B5

1-1-1


Type ............................................... Built-inNumber of trays.............................. 1 (intermediate tray)Stapling limit ................................... A4/11" × 81/2" or smaller: 30 sheets

Other sizes than above: 20 sheetsPower source ................................. Electrically connected to the copierWeight ............................................ Approximately 11 kg/24.2 lbs

3B5

1-1-2

1-1-2 Part names

Figure 1-1-1

1 Intermediate tray2 JAM release lever3 Eject tray

3B5

1-1-3



1 Paper conveying section2 Intermediate tray section3 Eject section

Paper path

3B5

1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

Figure 1-1-3

1 Paper conveying motor gear2 Gear 31/203 Gear 284 Gear 185 Gear 186 Gear 257 Gear 148 Gear 16

9 Central gear0 Gear 21! Gear 26@ Clutch cam# Stopper gear$ Gear 32% Gear 26

3B5

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking


1 Paper conveying unit2 Intermediate tray unit3 Eject tray4 Stapler cover5 Staple cartridge6 Large eject cover7 Cross-head chrome TP-A screws M3 × 058 Cross-head bronze binding TP-A screws M3 × 059 Front eject cover0 Rear eject cover! Paper conveying unit pad@ Upper intermediate tray pad# Lower intermediate tray pad

$ Outer case% Spacer 1^ Spacer 2& Spacer 3* Spacer 4( Plastic bag) Plastic bag⁄ Plastic sheet¤ Plastic bag‹ Plastic bag› Air-padded bagfi Bar-code labels

3B5

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the copieroperation panel.To remove the jammed paper, lower the intermediate tray.To reset the paper misfeed detection, detach and refit the intermediate tray to turn the tray open/close switch off and on.


PCSW

3B5

1-3-2


• Jam between the finisher and copier (jam code 81)The paper conveying switch does not turn on within 1550 ms of the signal requesting paper ejection is output from thecopier.

• Intake jam (jam code 82)During paper intake from the copier, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within 1960 to 3480 ms(depending on paper size) of paper conveying switch (PCSW) turning on.


On

Timing chart 1-3-1

• Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1 (jam code 83)When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn on within 1590 ms of the paperconveying motor (PCM) turning on.

1590 ms

PCM

PCSW

Off

On

Off

On

Timing chart 1-3-2

• Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2 (jam code 84)When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within 2260 to 3190 ms (dependingon the paper size) of the paper conveying motor (PCM) turning on.


On

Timing chart 1-3-3

3B5

1-3-3

(3) Paper misfeeds

(1)Paper jams in thefinisher when themain switch is turnedon.

(2)Paper jams in thefinisher duringcopying (intake jam).Jam code 82

(3)Paper jams in thefinisher duringcopying (jam duringpaper conveying forbatch ejection 1).Jam code 83

(4)Paper jams in thefinisher duringcopying (jam duringpaper conveying forbatch ejection 2).Jam code 84

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround the paperconveying switch.



Check if the feedshift rolleror feedshift pulley isdeformed.


Check if the feedshift rolleror press roller is deformed.


Check if the eject roller oreject pulley is deformed.

Remove any found.

With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the main PCB, check if CN4-10on the main PCB remains low when the paper conveying switchis turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveyingswitch.

With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the main PCB, check if CN4-10on the main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveyingswitch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paperconveying switch.







3B5

1-3-4


(1) Self-diagnostic functionThis unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problemdisplayed as a code consisting of “C” followed by a number between 0440 and 8220, indicating the nature of the problem.A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the tray open/close switch or copier safetyswitch 1 or 2 off and back on.

(2) Self-diagnostic codes


Causes Check procedure/corrective measures

C0440 Finisher communication problemAn error code from the side deck isdetected eight times in succession.No communication: there is no replyafter 3 retries.Abnormal communication: acommunication error (parity orchecksum error) is detected five times insuccession.

C8170 Finisher front side registration motorproblemIf the front side registration homeposition sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570 msof starting initialization.If the front side registration homeposition sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 3180 msof starting initialization.

C8180 Finisher rear side registration motorproblemIf the rear side registration homeposition sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570 msof starting initialization.If the rear side registration homeposition sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 2880 msof starting initialization.

Poor contact in theconnectorterminals.

Defective copiermain PCB.


The front sideregistration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The front sideregistration motormalfunctions.

The front sideregistration homeposition sensorconnector makespoor contact.

The front sideregistration homeposition sensormalfunctions.


The rear sideregistration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The rear sideregistration motormalfunctions.

The rear sideregistration homeposition sensorconnector makespoor contact.

The rear sideregistration homeposition sensormalfunctions.

Check the connection of connectors CN4,CN5 on the copier main PCB and CN2 onthe finisher main PCB, and the continuityacross the connector terminals. Repair orreplace if necessary.

Replace the copier main PCB and check forcorrect operation.


Reinsert the connector. Also check forcontinuity within the connector cable. Ifnone, remedy or replace the cable.

Replace the front side registration motorand check for correct operation.


Replace the front side registration homeposition sensor and check for correctoperation.



Replace the rear side registration motor andcheck for correct operation.


Replace the rear side registration homeposition sensor and check for correctoperation.

3B5

1-3-5



C8180 Finisher rear side registration motorproblemIf the rear side registration homeposition sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570 msof starting initialization.If the rear side registration homeposition sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 2880 msof starting initialization.

C8190 Finisher trailing edge registrationmotor problemIf the trailing edge registration homeposition sensor is on in initialization, thesensor does not turn off within 570 msof starting initialization.If the trailing edge registration homeposition sensor is off in initialization, thesensor does not turn on within 4550 msof starting initialization.

C8210 Finisher front stapler problemThe front stapler home position sensordoes not change state from non-detection to detection within 200 ms ofthe start of front stapler motorcounterclockwise (forward) rotation.During initialization, the front staplerhome position sensor does not changestate from non-detection to detectionwithin 600 ms of the start of front staplermotor clockwise (reverse) rotation.


The trailing edgeregistration motorconnector makespoor contact.

The trailing edgeregistration motormalfunctions.

The trailing edgeregistration homeposition sensorconnector makespoor contact.

The trailing edgeregistration homeposition sensormalfunctions.


The front staplerconnector makespoor contact.

The front staplermalfunctions.a) The front stapleris blocked with astaple.b) The front stapleris broken.




Replace the trailing edge registration motorand check for correct operation.


Replace the trailing edge registration homeposition sensor and check for correctoperation.



a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, andcheck the cartridge and the stapling sectionof the stapler.b) Replace the front stapler and check forcorrect operation.




3B5

1-3-6

C8220 Finisher rear stapler problemThe rear stapler home position sensordoes not change state from non-detection to detection within 200 ms ofthe start of rear stapler motorcounterclockwise (forward) rotation.During initialization, the rear staplerhome position sensor does not changestate from non-detection to detectionwithin 600 ms of the start of rear staplermotor clockwise (reverse) rotation.

The rear staplerconnector makespoor contact.

The rear staplermalfunctions.a) The rear stapleris blocked with astaple.b) The rear stapleris broken.



a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, andcheck the cartridge and the stapling sectionof the stapler.b) Replace the front stapler and check forcorrect operation.


3B5

1-3-7


(1)The paper conveyingmotor does notoperate.

(2)The feedshiftsolenoid does notoperate.

(3)The pickup solenoiddoes not operate.

(4)The front sideregistration motordoes not operate.

(5)The rear sideregistration motordoes not operate.

(6)The trailing edgeregistration motordoes not operate.

Broken paper conveyingmotor coil.

Poor contact of the paperconveying motor connectorterminals.

Defective finisher mainPCB.


Poor contact of thefeedshift solenoidconnector terminals.


Broken pickup solenoidcoil.

Poor contact of the pickupsolenoid connectorterminals.


Broken front sideregistration motor coil.

Poor contact of the frontside registration motorconnector terminals.


Broken rear sideregistration motor coil.

Poor contact of the rearside registration motorconnector terminals.


Broken trailing edgeregistration motor coil.

Poor contact of the trailingedge registration motorconnector terminals.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paperconveying motor.


Check if a motor drive coil energization signal is output at CN9-9,CN9-10, CN9-11 and CN9-12 on the finisher main PCB. If not,replace the finisher main PCB.



Check if CN4-2 and CN4-4 on the finisher main PCB go low. Ifnot, replace the finisher main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the pickupsolenoid.


Check if CN4-7 on the finisher main PCB goes low. If not, replacethe finisher main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the front sideregistration motor.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the rear sideregistration motor.



Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the trailingedge registration motor.




3B5

1-3-8


(7)The cooling fanmotor does notoperate.

Broken cooling fan motorcoil.

Poor contact of the coolingfan motor connectorterminals.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the coolingfan motor.


Check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PCB goes low. If not, replacethe finisher main PCB.

3B5

1-3-9


(1)Paper jams.


Check if the contact between the feedshiftroller and feedshift pulley is correct.

Check if the contact between the feedshiftroller and press roller is correct.

Check if the contact between the eject rollerand eject pulley is correct.

Check if the rollers and gears operatesmoothly.

Check and remedy.

Check and remedy.

Check and remedy.



3B5

1-4-1


(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:



3B5

1-4-2


Make a test copy in staple-sort mode.





Select the item to be adjusted .


Yes

Yes

No

No

Start

End

Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.

Is the paper registration good?

Is the stapling position correct? See Figure 1-4-1.


ADJUST FRONT JOGGER: Stop position of the front side registration cursorADJUST REAR JOGGER: Stop position of the rear side registration cursorADJUST END JOGGER: Stop position of the trailing edge registration cursor

Setting range: 0 to 8Reference: 4Changing the value by 1 changes the position by 0.5 mm.Increasing the value moves the front or rear side registration cursor or trailing edge registration cursor outward (a); decreasing the value moves each cursor inward (e). See Figure 1-4-2.

(2) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor and trailing edgeregistration cursor (reference)

Perform the following adjustment if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area.

Procedure

Figure 1-4-1 Stapling position

Stapler5 ± 3.0 mm

5 ± 3.0 mm

Figure 1-4-2

Trailing edgeregistration cursor

Front sideregistration cursor

Rear side registration cursor

3B5

1-4-3

(3) Cleaning the staplerDuring periodic maintenance, remove all the staples remaining inside the machine due to failure of stapling.

Procedure1. Open the front and conveying covers of the

copier.2. Remove the staple cartridge.3. Remove the four screws securing the stapler

cover and then the cover.4. Remove the staples attracted to the magnet

on the inside of the stapler cover.5. Refit all the removed parts.

Stapler cover

Staple cartridge

Magnet

Staple

Figure 1-4-3

3B5

1-4-4

(4) Adjusting the pressure of curl eliminator mechanismIncrease the pressure of the curl eliminator mechanism to reduce upward curling of paper stacked on the intermediate trayif a paper jam occurs when batch ejection is performed because of strong upward curling.

Procedure1. Remove the paper conveying unit from the

copier.2. Loosen the two screws from the front and

rear curl eliminator pressure adjusting platesrespectively and then remove the plates.

3. Refit the all removed parts.

Paper conveying unit

Curl eliminator pressure adjusting plate

Curl eliminator pressure adjusting plate

Figure 1-4-4

3B5

2-1-1


The paper conveying section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the path for the paper conveyedfrom the copier in sort mode. Also the paper conveying section contains a curl eliminator mechanism, which reduces curlingof paper with curl eliminator rollers.

Figure 2-1-1 Paper conveying section

Figure 2-1-2 Paper conveying section block diagram

PCM

PCSW

FSSOLPUSOL

MPCB

CN

6-7-

CN

6-12

CN

4-10

CN

4-2,

4

CN

4-7

1 Feedshift pulley2 Feedshift roller3 Press roller4 Press roller lift5 Stopper6 Upper curl eliminator roller7 Lower curl eliminator roller

8 Feedshift claw9 Small feedshift claw0 Eject roller! Eject pulley@ Paper conveying switch (PCSW)# Upper guide plate$ Lower guide plate

3B5

2-1-2

(1) Paper conveying operation in sort modeWhen a copy is made in the sort mode, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and the feedshift guide of the copieroperates to switch the paper path to the paper conveying unit. After curling of the conveyed paper is eliminated by the curleliminator rollers, the paper is conveyed to the intermediate tray by the feedshift roller. When the trailing edge registrationcursor of the intermediate tray shifts the paper stocked in the intermediate tray to the stopper, the pickup solenoid (PUSOL)turns on to lift the press roller and release the stopper. The stack of paper on the intermediate tray is ejected to the eject trayby the feedshift roller and eject roller.

Figure 2-1-3

Stopper (PUSOL:ON)Press roller

Feedshift roller

Feedshift pulley

Feedshift claw

Small feedshift claw

Eject roller

Eject pulley Pick up solenoid

Feedshift guide(FSSOL:ON)

Stopper (PUSOL:OFF)

Press roller

Feedshift roller

To intermediate tray

Feedshift pulleyFeedshift solenoidUpper curleliminatorroller

Lower curleliminator roller

To eject tray

3B5

2-1-3

2-1-2 Intermediate tray section

The intermediate tray section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-4. It stores and evens up the paper conveyedfrom the paper conveying section and returns the stack of paper to the paper conveying section.

Figure 2-1-4 Intermediate tray section

Figure 2-1-5 Intermediate tray section block diagram

Trailing edge registration cursor

Intermediate tray

Front side registration cursor


SRFHPS

MPCB

CN

5-1-

CN

5-5

CN

4-12

CN

4-14

CN

4-26

SRRHPS TERHPS

CN

5-6-

CN

5-10

CN

6-1-

CN

6-4

FSRM RSRM TERM

3B5

2-1-4

(1) Paper registration on the intermediate trayIn sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors move to the size of the paper used to even up the sides of the stackof paper and the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the paper to the paper conveying section.In staple-sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors even up the sides of the stack of paper and shift the stacktoward the machine front, and then the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the stack to the stapling position.

Figure 2-1-6

Home positions

Paper registration

Shifting the paper tothe stapling position

Trailing edge registration cursor

Front side registration cursor


3B5

2-1-5

2-1-3 Stapler section

In staple-sort mode, paper stocked on the intermediate tray is stapled by the stapler.The stapler motor (STM) drives the stapler cam via the stapler drive gear to staple paper.

Stapler camStapler self-primingsensor

Stapler drive gear

Stapler cam

Stapler motor

Figure 2-1-7 Stapler section

Figure 2-1-8 Stapler section block diagram

MPCB

STES STCS

STHPS

STSPS

CN4-20

CN4-22

CN4-16

CN4-24

CN6-13 – CN6-16

STM

3B5

2-2-1


(1) Paper conveying section

Figure 2-2-1 Paper conveying section

1. Paper conveying motor (PCM) .................... Drives the paper conveying section. 2. Paper conveying switch (PCSW) ................. Detects a paper jam in the finisher.

3. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feedshift guide of the copier.4. Pickup solenoid (PUSOL) ............................ Operates the press roller.5. Tray open/close switch (TOCSW) ................ Detects if the intermediate tray is opened or closed.6. Cooling fan motor (CFM) ............................. Cools the stapler section.

6

3

2

1

4

5

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

3B5

2-2-2

(2) Intermediate tray section

Figure 2-2-2 Intermediate tray section

1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls electrical components.2. Intermediate tray sensor (ITS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper on the intermediate tray.3. Trailing edge registration motor (TERM) ...... Drives the trailing edge registration cursor.4. Front side registration motor (FSRM) .......... Drives the front side registration cursor.5. Rear side registration motor (RSRM) .......... Drives the rear side registration cursor.6. Trailing edge registration home position

sensor (TERHPS) ........................................ Detects the trailing edge registration cursor in the home position.7. Side registration front home position

sensor (SRFHPS) ........................................ Detects the front side registration cursor in the home position.8. Side registration rear home position

sensor (SRRHPS) ........................................ Detects the rear side registration cursor in the home position.

12

5 7,8 3,4

6

Machine front Machine inside

Machine rear

3B5

2-2-3

5

1 2

3

4


(3) Stapler section

Figure 2-2-3 Stapler section

1. Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples.2. Staple cartridge sensor (STCS) ................... Detects the presence of the staple cartridge.3. Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position.4. Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler.5. Stapler motor (STM) .................................... Drives the stapler.

3B5

2-3-1

2-3-1 Main PCB


The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC5 and motor drive circuit.The CPU IC5 detects the condition of the switches and sensors and controls the motors and solenoids by seriallycommunicating with the copier. The feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) operates with the control signals from the copier.

Feedshift solenoid Pickup solenoid

Main PCB

Copier

Motordrivecircuit

Motordrivecircuit

CPU (IC5)

TX

D

RX

D

Motors

Switchesand

sensorsBuffer IC12,IC13, IC14

Paper conveyingmotor

3B5

2-3-2


110

131

2C

N4

32C

N5

C2 C3

IC1

R1

R5 R6

R7

C9

R2

R8 R9

18

1 8CN8

IC4

TP1

C1

1

181C

4

TP2100

IC3

IC11

11 1

1

19

1

9

CN3

C12

ZD1 D2

TP5 D4

1 IC16

TR1

1D3

IC12

IC14

IC15

C13

L3F

1JP2 TP

4

IC10

C11

1 30

80

8151

50

31

R3

R4

X1

IC6

IC5

TP3

162

151

CN

2 112

JP1

CN

1 110

CN

6

IC9

C5 C7

C10

C6

1

8

8 8

8TR2

TR3

TR4C14

TR5

TR6

IC17 IC19IC18

1

8

121

IC20CN7

8

7

8

18 1

L1

1

8

1

IC7

1

516IC8

IC2

1

C8

D1

IC13

1

2

L2

3B5

2-3-3

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

2-1 2-3 0/5 V DC RESET signal, input2-2 2-3 0/5 V DC Finisher SET signal, input2-4 2-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal TXD, input2-6 2-7 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial signal RXD, output2-8 2-7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input2-11 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input2-12 2-10 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input3-7 3-4 0/24 V DC FSSOL release signal, input3-8 3-4 0/24 V DC FSSOL latch-on signal, input3-9 3-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSSOL, input4-1 4-29 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSSOL, output4-2 4-29 0/24 V DC FSSOL latch-on signal, output4-3 4-29 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CFM, output4-4 4-29 0/24 V DC FSSOL release signal, output4-5 4-29 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PUSOL, output4-6 4-29 0/24 V DC CFM on/off signal, output4-7 4-29 0/24 V DC PUSOL on/off, output4-9 4-29 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PCSW, output4-10 4-29 0/5 V DC PCSW on/off, input4-11 4-23 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SRFHPS, output4-12 4-23 0/5 V DC SRFHPS on/off, input4-13 4-25 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SRRHPS, output4-14 4-25 0/5 V DC SRRHPS on/off, input4-15 4-27 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for stapler, output4-16 4-27 0/5 V DC STHPS on/off, input4-17 4-21 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for ITS, output4-18 4-21 0/5 V DC ITS on/off, input4-19 4-28 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for TERHPS, output4-20 4-27 0/5 V DC STCS on/off, input4-22 4-27 0/5 V DC STES on/off, input4-24 4-27 0/5 V DC STSPS on/off, input4-26 4-28 0/5 V DC TERHPS on/off, input5-1 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)5-2 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSRM, output5-3 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)5-4 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)5-5 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)5-6 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)5-7 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for RSRM, output5-8 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)5-9 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)5-10 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)6-1 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)6-2 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)6-3 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)6-4 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)6-5 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for TERM, output6-7 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PCM, output6-8 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PCM, output6-9 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)6-10 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)6-11 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)6-12 2-9 0/24 V DC (pulse) PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)6-13 2-9 0/24 V DC STM forward rotation drive signal (F), output6-14 2-9 0/24 V DC STM forward rotation drive signal (F), output6-15 2-9 0/24 V DC STM reverse rotation drive signal (R), output6-16 2-9 0/24 V DC STM reverse rotation drive signal (R), output

3B5

2-3-4


7-3 2-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LCSW, output7-6 2-9 24/0 V DC LCSW on/off, input

3B5

2-4-1

PC

MC

N6-

9, 1

0, 1

1, 1

2

SR

FH

PS

CN

4-12

FS

RM

CN

5-1,

2, 3

, 5

SR

RH

PS

CN

4-14

RS

RM

CN

5-6,

8, 9

, 10

TE

RH

PS

CN

4-26

TE

RM

CN

6-1,

2, 3

, 4

PC

SW

CN

4-10

Initi

aliz

atio

n st

art

Sor

ten

dS

tand

by fo

r pa

per

entr

y

Pap

er e

ntry

Pos

ition

ing

for

side

reg

istr

atio

n

117

ms

117

ms

100

ms

100

ms

100

ms

100

ms

178

mm

/s

Ope

ratio

n st

art

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 1

3B5

2-4-2

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 2

SR

FH

PS

CN

4-12

FS

RM

CN

5-1,

2, 3

, 5

SR

RH

PS

CN

4-14

RS

RM

CN

5-6,

8, 9

, 10

TE

RH

PS

CN

4-26

TE

RM

CN

6-1,

2, 3

, 4

ST

MC

N6-

13,

1

4, 1

5, 1

6

ST

HP

SC

N4-

16

SR

FH

PS

CN

4-12

FS

RM

CN

5-1,

2, 3

, 5

SR

RH

PS

CN

4-14

RS

RM

CN

5-6,

8, 9

, 10

TE

RH

PS

CN

4-26

TE

RM

CN

6-1,

2, 3

, 4

SR

FH

PS

CN

4-12

FS

RM

CN

5-1,

2, 3

, 5

SR

RH

PS

CN

4-14

RS

RM

CN

5-6,

8, 9

, 10

TE

RH

PS

CN

4-26

TE

RM

CN

6-1,

2, 3

, 4

Sor

t end

Mov

ing

to s

tapl

ing

posi

tion

Sta

plin

gM

ovin

g to

shift

-eje

ctpo

sitio

n

To

batc

hej

ectio

nS

ort e

ndT

o ba

tch

ejec

tion

135

ms

135

ms

135

ms

Mov

ing

tosh

ift-e

ject

posi

tion

Sor

t end

To

batc

hej

ectio

nM

ovin

g to

shift

-eje

ctpo

sitio

n

300

ms

Sta

plin

g op

erat

ion

Non

-sta

plin

g op

erat

ion

(for

fron

t-sh

ift e

ject

ion)

Non

-sta

plin

g op

erat

ion

(for

rea

r-sh

ift e

ject

ion)

3B5

2-4-3

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 3

SR

FH

PS

CN

4-12

FS

RM

CN

5-1,

2, 3

, 5

SR

RH

PS

CN

4-14

RS

RM

CN

5-6,

8, 9

, 10

TE

RH

PS

CN

4-26

TE

RM

CN

6-1,

2, 3

, 4

PC

SW

CN

4-10

PC

MC

N6-

9,

1

0, 1

1, 1

2

PU

SO

LC

N4-

7

250

ms

178

mm

/s

257

mm

/s

Bat

ch e

ject

ion

star

t

Bat

ch e

ject

ion

3B5

2-4-4


• FinisherMaintenance

Section part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page

Stapler section Magnet Clean Every service Remove the staples attracted to 1-4-3the magnet inside the staplercover.

3B5

2-4-5

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJ

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Wir

ing

dia

gra

m

3213

21

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

2

RD C201-1

RD C201-2

YW C201-25OE C201-24

BE C201-26

BE C201-21OE C201-22YW C201-23

YW C201-20YW C201-19YW C201-18

GY C201-17GY C201-16

GY C201-15GY C201-14

GY C201-13

GY C201-10

GY C201-8

GY

C20

8-2

RD

C20

8-1

BE

C20

7-11

BE

C20

5-3

YW

C20

5-2

DE

C20

5-1

YW

C20

7-13

YW

C20

7-9

OE

C20

7-12

YW

C20

7-8

YW

C20

7-7

GY

C20

7-5

GY

C20

7-4

GY

C20

7-2

GY

C20

7-1

GY

C20

2-6

RD

C20

2-5

GY

C20

2-4

GY

C20

2-3

RD

C20

2-2

GY

C20

2-1

GY

C20

3-2

RD

C20

3-1

RD

C20

4-1

RD

C20

6-1

GY

C20

3-3

GY

C20

4-3

RD

C20

6-3

GY

C00

1-6

RD

C00

1-3

BE

C00

1-27

BE

C00

1-29

YW

C00

1-10

OE

C00

1-9

YW

C00

1-24

YW

C00

1-16

OE

C00

1-15

YW

C00

1-22

YW

C00

1-20

GY

C00

6-14

GY

C00

6-13

GY

C00

6-16

GY

C00

6-15

GY

C00

6-10

RD

C00

6-7

GY

C00

6-9

GY

C00

6-11

RD

C00

6-8

GY

C00

6-12

GY

C00

1-2

RD

C00

1-1

RD

C00

1-5

RD

C00

5-2

GY

C00

1-4

GY

C00

1-7

RD

C00

5-1

RD C006-5

GY C006-4GY C006-3GY C006-2

GY C006-1

GY C002-10GY C002-9GY C002-8

GY C002-6

GY C002-5GY C002-4GY C002-3

RD C002-7

RD C002-2GY C002-1

YW

C11

0-2

YW

C10

8-2

YW

C10

9-2

YW

C10

7-2

BE

C11

0-3

BE

C10

8-3

BE

C10

9-3

BE

C10

7-3

OE

C11

0-1

OE

C10

8-1

OE

C10

7-1

OE

C10

9-1

GY

C10

6-5

GY

C10

6-4

GY

C10

6-3

GY

C10

6-1

RD

C10

6-2

RD

C10

1-1

RD

C10

1-2

GY

C10

4-5

GY

C10

4-4

GY

C10

4-3

GY

C10

4-1

RD

C10

4-2

RD

C10

5-2

GY

C10

5-5

GY

C10

5-4

GY

C10

5-3

GY

C10

5-1

GY

C10

1-15

GY

C10

1-14

GY

C10

1-17

GY

C10

1-16

GY

C10

1-8

GY

C10

1-10

GY

C10

1-13

GY

C10

1-11

RD

RD

RD

RD

RD

C10

1-9

RD

C10

1-12

BE

C10

1-21

BE

C10

1-26

YW

C10

1-23

YW

C10

1-19

YW

C10

1-18

YW

C10

1-20

OE

C10

1-22

YW

C10

1-25

OE

C10

1-24

GY

C10

1-4

GY

C10

1-28

RD

C10

1-3

RD

C10

1-27

GY

C10

1-7

GY

C10

1-6

RD

C10

1-5

GY

C10

3-13

GY

C10

3-12

GY

C10

3-11

GY

C00

3-9

GY

C00

3-8

GY

C00

3-7

GY

C10

2-1

GY

C10

2-2

GY

C10

2-3

GY

C10

2-4

GY

C10

2-5

GY

C10

2-6

GY

C10

2-7

GY

C10

2-8

GY

C10

2-9

GY

C10

2-10

GY

C10

2-11

GY

C10

2-12

GY

C00

4-1

GY

C00

4-2

GY

C00

4-3

GY

C00

4-4

GY

C00

4-5

GY

C00

4-6

GY

C00

4-7

GY

C00

4-8

GY

C00

4-9

GY

C00

4-10

GY

C00

4-11

GY

C00

4-12

N.C

N.C

LCS

W

LCS

W 2

4V

RS

RM

AR

SR

M B

RS

RM

BR

SR

M 2

4VR

SR

M A

FS

RM

AF

SR

M B

FS

RM

BF

SR

M 2

4VF

SR

M A

ST

M R

ST

M R

ST

M F

ST

M F

PC

M B

PC

M B

PC

M A

PC

M A

PC

M 2

4VP

CM

24V

N.C

TE

RM

24V

TE

RM

BT

ER

M A

TE

RM

BT

ER

M A

N.C

TE

RH

PS

SG

ST

SG

TE

RH

PS

SR

RH

PS

SG

ST

SP

S

ST

ES

ITS

SG

ST

CS

TE

RH

PS

5V

ITS

ITS

5V

ST

HS

ST

5V

SR

RH

PS

SR

RH

PS

5V

321

123

TE

RM

RS

RM

FS

RM

TE

RH

PS

SR

RH

PS

SR

FH

PS

ITS

PC

SW

LCS

W

PU

SO

LP

CM

FSRM B

FSRM A

FSRM B

R24V

FSRM A

RSRM B

RSRM A

RSRM B

R24V

RSRM A

PUSOL

Sta

pler

5VSTSPS

FS

SO

L

CF

M

SR

FH

PS

SG

SR

FH

PS

SR

FH

PS

5V

PC

SW

SG

PC

SW

PC

SW

5V

PU

SO

L

PU

SO

L 24

V

N.C

CF

M R

CF

M 2

4VF

SS

OL

R

FS

SO

L A

FS

SO

L 24

V

5VPCSWSG 3

21

13121110987654321

STM F

STCSSTES

SG

STHS

STM F

STM RSTM R

LCSW

24V

RD C201-4

YW C001-18OE C001-17

BE C001-21

5VSIGSG 3

21

YW C001-12OE C001-11

BE C001-23

5VSIGSG

321

54321

54321

GY C201-28RD C201-27

GY C201-5GY C201-4RD C201-3

RD C201-3

FSSOL AFSSOL R

CFM

R24V

R24V

R24V

321

3

1

21

YW C001-14

YW C001-26

OE C001-13

OE C001-19

BE C001-25

BE C001-28

RD C201-12GY C201-11

RD C201-9

5VSIGSG

5VSIGSG

54321

TERM B

TERM A

TERM B

R24V

TERM A 54321

3

5

2

4

1

654321

321

321

PCM B

PCM B

PCM A

PCM A

R24V

R24V

302928272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321302928272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321

1312 11 345678910111212345678910

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

FS

SO

L R

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

24V

24V

FIN

DE

T

SG

RX

D

TX

D

SG

5VPG

PG

RE

SE

T

SG

11109

2F

SS

OL

A12

1F

SS

OL

24V

1387654321121110987654321

11109

N.C

FS

SO

L R

FS

SO

L A

87654321

PG

PG

24V

24V

1211109

RE

SE

T

SG

RX

D

SG

TX

D

SG

5V87654321

87654321

10987654321

27 28 29 30N

.C31

N.C

32

FS

SO

L 24

V

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

16151413121110987654321

2625242322212019181716151413121110987654321

MP

CB

C301 C302

C208

C203

C207

C206

C205

C204

C202

C20

1C

101

C110

C401

C108

C109

C105

C107

C104

C402 C106

C10

3

C10

2

CN

-7: C

005

CN

-5: C

002

CN

-3: C

003

CN

-6: C

006

CN

-4: C

001

CN

-2: C

004

FIN

SE

T

Wire

Col

orY

ELL

OW

BLU

ER

ED

OR

AN

GE

GR

AY

Mar

kY

W BE

RD

OE

GY

J-1402

1-1-1

3B6

CONTENTS




(1) Paper misfeed indication ............................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................ 1-3-2(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-3

1-3-2 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-4(1) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-3-4



(1) Switching the paper path .............................................................................................................. 2-1-2


2-3 AppendixesPeriodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-3-1

3B6

1-1-1


Type ............................................... EnclosedTray capacity .................................. 100 sheets of 45 – 160 g/m2 paperPaper .............................................. Plain paper: 75 – 80 g/m2

Special paper: colored paperPaper sizes .................................... A3 – A5R, folio/11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copierWeight ............................................ Approximately 1.0 kg/2.21 lbs

3B6

1-1-2

1-1-2 Part names

Figure 1-1-1

1 Job separator tray2 LED

3B6

1-1-3


Figure 1-1-2

Paper path

3B6

1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

Figure 1-1-3

1 Gear 202 Gear 283 Gear 284 Eject roller gear

3B6

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking


1 Job separator2 Job separator tray3 Pin4 Cross-head bronze binding screws

BMV3 × 055 Outer case6 Spacer7 Air-padded bag8 Bar-code labels9 Plastic bag0 Plastic bag

3B6

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the copieroperation panel.To remove the jammed paper, open the copier conveying cover.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the copier conveying cover to turn safety switch 2 off and on.


FSSW

JBESW

3B6

1-3-2

(2) Paper misfeed detection condition• Misfeed in job separator eject section (jam code 51)The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-1

The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-2

The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

2050 ms

FSSW

JBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-5-3

3B6

1-3-3

Remove any found.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the job separator ejectswitch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of thecorresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed inreverse.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn the job separator ejectswitch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of thecorresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed inreverse.

Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed.


(1)Paper jams when themain switch is turnedon.

(2)Paper jams in the jobseparator duringcopying (jam in jobseparator ejectsection).

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround the job separatoreject switch.



Check if the job eject pulleyor job eject roller isdeformed.

(3) Paper misfeeds

3B6

1-3-4



Defective main PCB.





Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN35-11 and CN35-12on the copier main PCB go low. If not, replace the main PCB.


3B6

1-3-5

Check and remedy.



(1)Paper jams.


Check if the contact between the job ejectpulley and job eject roller is correct.

Check if the job eject pulley, job eject rollerand gears operate smoothly.


3B6

2-1-1


The job separator consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the paper path to eject copied paper to thejob separator tray.

Figure 2-1-1 Job separator

1 Job eject roller2 Job eject pulley3 Job separator tray4 Job separator eject switch (JBESW)5 Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)

Figure 2-1-2 Job separator block diagram

JBESW

CN

35-1

CN

35-1

1,12

CN

35-7

EPDSW

MPCB

FSSOL

3B6

2-1-2

Feedshift guide(FSSOL:ON)

Feedshift solenoid

Job separator tray

(1) Switching the paper pathIf the job separator is selected for the copy eject location, when a copy is made, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on andthe feedshift guide of the copier operates to switch the paper path to the job separator. The copied paper is conveyed to thejob separator and then ejected to the job separator tray.

Figure 2-1-3

3B6

2-2-1


Figure 2-2-1

1. Job separator eject switch (JBESW) ........... Detects a paper jam in the job separator.2. Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW) ... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray.3. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feedshift guide of the copier.4. LED .............................................................. Indicates the presence of paper on the job separator tray.

12

34

Machine front Machine inside

Machine rear

3B6

2-3-1



Paper Job eject roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.conveyingsection

1-1-1

3CC

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-31-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-4

1-2 Installation1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-11-2-2 Installing the desk dehumidifier (service part) ...................................................................................... 1-2-2


(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-3-1(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-3

1-3-2 Self-diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3-5(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................................. 1-3-5(2) Self-diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-5

1-3-3 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-7(1) The paper feed desk does not operate when the copier print key is pressed. ............................... 1-3-7(2) The desk drive motor does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-3-7(3) The desk upper paper feed clutch does not operate. ..................................................................... 1-3-7(4) The desk lower paper feed clutch does not operate. ...................................................................... 1-3-7(5) The desk feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-3-7(6) The desk upper lift motor does not operate. ................................................................................... 1-3-8(7) The desk lower lift motor does not operate. ................................................................................... 1-3-8(8) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. ........................................................................... 1-3-8(9) The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed correctly. ................................................... 1-3-8

(10) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the desk left cover is closed. .... 1-3-9(11) Others. ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3-9

1-3-4 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-3-10(1) No paper feed. .............................................................................................................................. 1-3-10(2) Skewed paper feed. ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-10(3) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ............................................................................... 1-3-10(4) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. 1-3-10(5) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-3-10


(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4-11-4-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-2

(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys .................................... 1-4-2(2) Replacing the desk upper or lower paper width switches ............................................................... 1-4-4(3) Replacing the desk feed, upper and lower paper feed clutches ..................................................... 1-4-5(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster ...................................................................................... 1-4-7(5) Adjusting the amount of slack. ........................................................................................................ 1-4-8

2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Mechanical construction ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-1


2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Desk main PCB .................................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

1-1-2

3CC

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3

3CC-1

1-1-1


Paper .............................................. Plain paper (75 – 80 g/m2)Paper size ...................................... A3 – A5R, folio, 11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"Capacity ......................................... 550 x 2 sheetsPower source ................................. Electrically connected to the copier.Dimensions .................................... 585 (W) × 590 (D) × 315 (H) mm

231/16" (W) × 231/4" (D) × 123/8" (H)Weight ............................................ 25 kg/55 lbs

3CC

1-1-2

1-1-2 Parts names

1 Upper drawer2 Lower drawer3 Desk left cover

Figure 1-1-1

3

1

2

3CC

1-1-3


Paper path


3CC

1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

98 4

3

7

2

1

5

6

As viewed from machine front

Figure 1-1-3 Drive system

1 Desk drive motor gear2 Idle gear 67/343 Gear 414 Desk upper paper feed clutch gear5 Gear 41

6 Desk lower paper feed clutch gear7 Gear 208 Gear 269 Desk feed clutch gear

3CC

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking

1Paper feed desk2Retainer3Cross-head chromate binding screws,

CVM4 × 064Pins5Stays6Chrome TP screws, M4 × 107Outer case8Bottom pads

9Upper pad0Stays!Machine cover@Rear spacer#Plastic bag$Bar code label%Plastic bag^ Installation guide

Figure 1-2-1

9

0

0@

#

23456

%

8

8

^

!1

7

0

$

3CC

1-2-2

1-2-2 Installing the desk dehumidifier (service part)

Desk dehumidifier installation requires the following parts:Desk dehumidifier (P/N 33960020): for 220 – 240 V specifications onlyDesk dehumidifier (P/N 34860030): for 120 V specifications onlyTwo (2) M4 × 8 S tight screws (P/N B3324080)

Procedure1. Remove the upper and lower drawers.2. Remove the three screws holding the desk

rear cover and then the cover.3. Pass the desk dehumidifier cable to the

machine rear through the cable hole in themachine right.

4. Attach the desk dehumidifier using the two M4× 8 S tight screws.

Figure 1-2-2

5. Insert the desk dehumidifier connector into theconnector of the main harness.

6. Tidy up the desk dehumidifier cable using thewire saddle and route the cable while clippingthe wire saddles into the holes in the rearframe.


Figure 1-2-3

M4 × 8 S tight screws

Cable hole

Desk dehumidifier

Wire saddle Main harness

Desk dehumidifier cable

3CC

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen a paper jam occurs, the machine immediately stops operation. The operation unit of the copier shows a jam messageand the jam location.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the desk left cover to turn the desk safety switch off and on.


DFCL

DPFCL-U

DPFCL-L

FSW3FCL3

FSW2

DFSW

Figure 1-3-1 Paper feed desk

• No paper feed from desk upper drawer (jam code 12)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) turningon; the clutch is then held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms of the retry.

DPFCL-U

FSW3 (copier) 880 ms

On

Off

On

Off880 ms

1 s

Timing chart 1-3-1

• No paper feed from desk lower drawer (jam code 13)The desk feed switch (DFSW) does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) turning on; theclutch is then held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms of the retry.

DPFCL-L

DFSW 880 ms

On

Off

On

Off880 ms

1 s

Timing chart 1-3-2

3CC

1-3-2

• Jam in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 18)Feed switch 2 (FSW2) of the copier does not turn on within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier turning on.

FSW3 (copier)

1203 ms

On

Off

On

OffFSW2 (copier)

Timing chart 1-3-3

• Jam in paper feed desk vertical paper conveying section (jam code 19)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier does not turn on within 888 ms of the desk feed switch (DFSW) turning on.

DFSW

888 ms

On

Off

On

OffFSW3 (copier)

Timing chart 1-3-4

• Multiple sheets in paper feed section (jam code 21)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier and the desk feed switch (DFSW) do not turn off within the time required to convey thelength of the used paper size plus 635 ms of turning on.

FSW3 (copier)DFSW

Paper size + 635 msOn

Off

Timing chart 1-3-5

• Multiple sheets in vertical paper conveying section (jam code 22)Feed switch 2 (FSW2) of the copier does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier turning off.

FSW3 (copier)

1203 ms

On

Off

On

OffFSW2 (copier)

Timing chart 1-3-6

Feed switch 2 (FSW2) of the copier does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier turning on.

FSW3 (copier)

1203 ms

On

Off

On

OffFSW2 (copier)

Timing chart 1-3-7

3CC

1-3-3

(3) Paper misfeeds

Problem

(1)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from deskupper drawer).Jam code 12

(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from desklower drawer).Jam code 13


Causes/check procedures

Paper in the desk upperdrawer is extremely curled.

Check if the paper feedpulley, separation pulley orforwarding pulley of thedesk upper drawer isdeformed.

Broken copier feed switch 3actuator.

Defective copier feed switch3.

Check if the desk upperpaper feed clutchmalfunctions.

Electrical problem with thedesk upper paper feedclutch.

Paper in the desk lowerdrawer is extremely curled.

Check if the paper feedpulley, separation pulley orforwarding pulley of thedesk lower drawer isdeformed.


Defective desk feed switch.

Check if the desk lowerpaper feed clutchmalfunctions.




Corrective measures

Change the paper.


Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if the actuator isbroken.


Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk upper paperfeed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off.Check the status and remedy if necessary.


Change the paper.


Check visually and replace the desk feed switch if the actuatoris broken.

With 5 V DC present at CN2-8 on the desk main PCB, check ifCN2-7 on the desk main PCB goes low when the desk feedswitch is turned on. If not, replace the desk feed switch.





3CC

1-3-4

Problem

(4)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam inpaper desk verticalpaper conveyingsection).Jam code 19

(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in paper feedsection).Jam code 21

(6)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copiervertical conveyingsection).Jam code 22




Check if the desk lowerpaper feed clutchmalfunctions.


Check if the desk feedclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thedesk feed clutch.

Check if the desk feedrollers or pulleys are soiledwith paper powder.

Check if the desk feedrollers or pulleys are soiledwith paper powder.

Check if the copier feedrollers or pulleys are soiledwith paper powder.

Corrective measures





Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk feed clutchon the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


Check and clean with isopropyl alcohol if soiled.



3CC

1-3-5


Code

C0420

C1030

Causes

Poor contact ofthe connectorterminals.


Defective deskmain PCB.

Broken gears orcouplings of thedesk upper liftmotor.

Defective deskupper lift motor.

Poor contact ofthe desk upper liftmotor connectorterminals.

Defective deskupper lift limitswitch.

Poor contact ofthe desk upper liftlimit switchconnectorterminals.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Check the connection of connectors CN3on the copier main PCB and CN5 on thedesk main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Remedy orreplace if necessary.

Replace the copier main PCB and checkfor correct operation.

Replace the desk main PCB and check forcorrect operation.

Replace the desk upper lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the desk upper lift motor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check forcontinuity within the connector cable. Ifnone, repair or replace the cable.

Check if CN1-5 on the desk main PCBgoes low when the desk upper lift limitswitch is turned off. If not, replace the deskupper lift limit switch.


Contents

Communication problemAn error code from the paper feed deskis detected eight times in succession.No communication: there is no replyafter 3 retries.Abnormal communication: acommunication error (parity orchecksum error) is detected five timesin succession.

Desk upper lift motor problemWhen the upper drawer of the paperfeed desk is inserted, the desk upper liftlimit switch does not turn on within 6 sof the desk upper lift motor turning onand the desk upper lift limit switch doesnot turn on by turning off the deskupper lift motor for 200 ms and retryingtwice.During copying, the desk upper lift limitswitch does not turn on within 200 msof the desk upper lift motor turning on.

Remarks


(1) Self-diagnostic function

When a problem is detected in the paper feed desk, copying is disabled and the problem displayed on the operation unit ofthe copier as a code consisting of “C” followed by a number between 0420 and 2600, indicating the nature of the problem.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the desk safety switch off and back on.

3CC

1-3-6

Code

C1040

C1170

C2600

Causes

Broken gears ofcouplings of thedesk lower liftmotor.

Defective desklower lift motor.

Poor contact ofthe desk lower liftmotor connectorterminals.

Defective desklower lift limitswitch.

Poor contact ofthe desk lower liftlimit switchconnectorterminals.

Desk for theprinter is installed.

Defective deskdrive motor PCB.

Desk drive motordoes not rotatecorrectly (themotor is over-loaded).

Poor contact inthe desk drivemotor connectorterminals.


Replace the desk lower lift motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the desk lower lift motor.


Check if CN1-7 on the desk main PCBgoes low when the desk lower lift limitswitch is turned off. If not, replace the desklower lift limit switch.


Replace the desk fot the copier.

Replace the desk drive motor PCB andcheck for correct operation.



Contents

Desk lower lift motor problemWhen the lower drawer of the paperfeed desk is inserted, the desk lower liftlimit switch does not turn on within 6 sof the desk lower lift motor turning onand the desk lower lift limit switch doesnot turn on by turning off the desk lowerlift motor for 200 ms and retrying twice.During copying, the desk lower lift limitswitch does not turn on within 200 msof the desk lower lift motor turning on.

Paper feed desk incorrect typeproblem

Desk drive motor problemNo pulse is input within 500 ms of thestart-up.No pulse is input within 100 ms of theprevious pulse input.

Remarks

3CC

1-3-7


Problem

(1)The paper feeddesk does notoperate when thecopier print key ispressed.

(2)The desk drivemotor does notoperate.

(3)The desk upperpaper feed clutchdoes not operate.

(4)The desk lowerpaper feed clutchdoes not operate.

(5)The desk feedclutch does notoperate.

Causes

Poor contact of the signalcable connector terminalsbetween the paper feeddesk and the copier.

Defective desk safetyswitch.

Poor contact of the deskdrive motor connectorterminals.

Broken desk drive motorgear.

Defective desk drive motor.

Defective desk main PCB.

Broken desk upper paperfeed clutch coil.

Poor contact of the deskupper paper feed clutchconnector terminals.


Broken desk lower paperfeed clutch coil.

Poor contact of the desklower paper feed clutchconnector terminals.


Broken desk feed clutchcoil.

Poor contact of the deskfeed clutch connectorterminals.



Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace thedesk safety switch.


Check visually and replace the desk drive motor if necessary.

Check if the desk drive motor operates when CN4-6 on thedesk main PCB goes low. If not, replace the desk drive motor.

Check if CN4-6 on the desk main PCB goes low when the deskdrive motor is operated in maintenance item U247. If not,replace the desk main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deskupper paper feed clutch.


Check if CN1-14 on the desk main PCB goes low when thedesk upper paper feed clutch is operated in maintenance itemU247. If not, replace the desk main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the desklower paper feed clutch.


Check if CN1-13 on the desk main PCB goes low when thedesk lower paper feed clutch is operated in maintenance itemU247. If not, replace the desk main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deskfeed clutch.


Check if CN2-1 on the desk main PCB goes low when the deskfeed clutch is operated in maintenance item U247. If not,replace the desk main PCB.

3CC

1-3-8

Problem

(6)The desk upper liftmotor does notoperate.

(7)The desk lower liftmotor does notoperate.

(8)The size of paper inthe upper drawer isnot displayedcorrectly.

(9)The size of paper inthe lower drawer isnot displayedcorrectly.

Causes

Broken desk upper lift motorcoil.

Poor contact of the deskupper lift motor connectorterminals.


Broken desk lower lift motorcoil.

Poor contact of the desklower lift motor connectorterminals.


Poor contact of the deskupper paper length switchconnector terminals.

Poor contact of the deskupper paper width switchconnector terminals.

Defective desk upper paperlength switch.

Defective desk upper paperwidth switch.

Poor contact of the desklower paper length switchconnector terminals.

Poor contact of the desklower paper width switchconnector terminals.

Defective desk lower paperlength switch.

Defective desk lower paperwidth switch.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deskupper lift motor.


Check if 24 V DC is output across CN2-5 (–) and CN2-6 (+) onthe desk main PCB right after the desk upper drawer isinstalled. If not, replace the desk main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the desklower lift motor.


Check if 24 V DC is output across CN2-3 (–) and CN2-4 (+) onthe desk main PCB right after the desk lower drawer isinstalled. If not, replace the desk main PCB.



Check if CN3-7 on the desk main PCB goes low when the deskupper paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the deskupper paper length switch.

Check for continuity between CN3-9 and CN3-1, CN3-2, andCN3-3 on the desk main PCB. If the continuity is unaffected bymovement of the width guides in the upper drawer (i.e. eitherremains present or remains absent), then replace the deskupper paper width switch.



Check if CN3-8 on the desk main PCB goes low when the desklower paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the desklower paper length switch.

Check for continuity between CN3-10 and CN3-4, CN3-5, andCN3-6 on the desk main PCB. If the continuity is unaffected bymovement of the width guides in the lower drawer (i.e. eitherremains present or remains absent), then replace the desklower paper width switch.

3CC

1-3-9

Problem

(10)The messagerequesting covers tobe closed isdisplayed when thedesk left cover isclosed.

(11)Others.

Causes

Poor contact of the desksafety switch connectorterminals.

Defective desk safetyswitch.

Wiring is broken, shorted ormakes poor contact.

Noise.



Check for continuity across the contacts. If there is nocontinuity when the desk safety switch is on, replace it.

Check for continuity. If none, repair.

Locate the source of noise and remove.

3CC

1-3-10


Problem

(1)No paper feed.

(2)Skewed paper feed.


(4)Paper jams.



Check if the surfaces of the following rollersand pulleys are soiled with paper powder:forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley,separation pulley, desk feed roller and deskfeed pulley.

Check if the paper feed pulley or separationpulley is deformed.

Check if the forwarding pulley is deformed.

Electrical problem with the followingelectromagnetic clutches: desk upper/lowerpaper feed clutches and desk feed clutch.

Width guide in the drawer installedincorrectly.

Deformed width guide in the drawer.

Check if the separation pulley is deformed.

Check if the paper is curled.


Deformed guides along the paper conveyingpath.

Check if the pulleys, rollers and gearsoperate smoothly.

Check if the desk upper and lower paperfeed clutches and the desk feed clutch areinstalled correctly.

Corrective measures


Replace (see page 1-4-2).


See pages 1-3-7.

Check the width guide visually and remedyor replace if necessary.

Check the width guide visually and remedyor replace if it is deformed.

Replace the separation pulley if it is worn(see page 1-4-2).

Change the paper.

Change the paper.

Check visually and remedy or replace anydeformed guides.

Grease the bearings and gears.

Remedy.

3CC

1-4-1


(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch PCBs containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:

Hioki 3200Sanwa MD-180CSanwa YX-360TRBeckman TECH300Beckman DM45Beckman 330 (capable of measuring RMS values)Beckman 3030 (capable of measuring RMS values)Beckman DM850 (capable of measuring RMS values)Fluke 8060A (capable of measuring RMS values)Arlec DMM1050Arlec YF1030C

3CC

1-4-2


(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleysReplace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys as follows.

Procedure• Removing the primary paper feed units

1. Remove the upper and lower drawers.2. Remove the two screws holding the lower

front cover and then the cover.3. Remove the one screw from each of the

primary paper feed units and then the units.

Figure 1-4-1 Detaching the primary paper feed units

• Removing the forwarding pulley4. Remove the stopper.5. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the

direction of the arrow, and remove from theprimary paper feed unit.

Figure 1-4-2 Detaching the forwarding pulley retainer

6. Remove the stop ring, pull the forwardingpulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, andremove the forwarding pulley.

Figure 1-4-3 Detaching the forwarding pulley

Primary paper feed units

Screws


Stopper

Stop ring

Forwarding pulleyForwarding pulley shaft

3CC

1-4-3

• Removing the paper feed pulley7. Remove the two stop rings.8. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of

the primary paper feed unit (in the direction ofthe arrow) and remove the paper feed pulleyand gear.

Figure 1-4-4 Detaching the paper feed pulley

• Removing the separation pulley9. Remove the stop ring from the rear of the

primary paper feed unit.10. Pull the separation shaft toward the rear of

the machine (in the direction of the arrow)and remove the separation pulley.

11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed andseparation pulleys.


Figure 1-4-5 Detaching the separation pulley

Cautions:• When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it

correctly as shown in Figure 1-4-6.• When fitting the paper feed pulley and gear, keep

the blue end of the paper feed pulley and theblack end of the gear toward the machine rear.

Figure 1-4-6

Paper feed shaft Gear Paper feed pulley

Stop rings

Stop ring Separation shaft Separation pulley

Forwarding pulley

Machine front Machine rear

3CC

1-4-4

(2) Replacing the desk upper or lower paper width switchesReplace the desk upper or lower paper width switches as follows.

Caution:After replacing a desk paper width switch, be sure to perform (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.

Procedure1. Remove the drawer.2. Remove the two screws and 8-pin socket

from the rear of the drawer.3. Detach the 8-pin desk paper width switch

connector from the 8-pin socket.4. Remove the three screws holding the rack

adjuster.5. While raising the drawer lift in the direction of

the arrow, remove the rack adjuster.

Figure 1-4-7 Detaching the rack adjuster

6. Remove the two screws from the back of therack adjuster and then the desk paper widthswitch.

Figure 1-4-8 Detaching the desk paper width switch

7. Apply the specified grease to the printedsurface of the new desk paper width switch(shaded area in the diagram) and fit theswitch to the rack adjuster.


Figure 1-4-9 Desk paper width switch

Screws

Rack adjuster

Drawer lift

8-pin connector

Screws

8-pin socket

Screws

Desk paper width switch

Apply the specified grease.

3CC

1-4-5

(3) Replacing the desk feed, upper and lower paper feed clutchesReplace the desk feed, upper and lower paper feed clutches as follows.

Procedure1. Remove the three screws holding the desk

rear cover and then the cover.2. Remove the cable from the retainer clamp.3. Remove the three screws holding the retainer

and then the retainer.4. Remove the two screws holding the rear

cover left retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-4-10

5. Remove the upper and lower stop rings andbearings from the desk upper and lowerpaper feed clutches.

6. Remove the stop ring from the desk feedclutch.

Figure 1-4-11

7. Remove the three screws holding the deskdrive motor retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-4-12 Detaching the desk drive motor retainer

Clamp

Screws

ScrewsRetainer

Rear cover left retainer

Stop ring and bearing

Stop ring and bearingDesk upper paper feed clutch

Desk lower paper feed clutch

Stop ringDesk feed clutch

Desk drive motor retainer

Screws

3CC

1-4-6

8. Remove the connectors of the desk feed,upper and lower paper feed clutches andthen the clutches.

Figure 1-4-13 Detaching the desk feed, upper and lowerpaper feed clutches

9. Replace the clutches.10. Refit all removed parts.

Caution:When fitting the clutches, be sure to refit the whirl-stops.

Desk upper paper feed clutch

Desk feed clutch

Connector

Connector

Connector

Desk lower paper feed clutch

3CC

1-4-7

(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjusterPerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and the original on thepaper fed from the drawer.

Procedure

Yes

No

Run maintenance item U993. Select “VTC PG1” and output a test pattern.



Start

End


Loosen the three screws holding the rack adjuster and change the position of the adjuster so that the centers of the original and the copy image are aligned.• For output example 1, move

toward the machine front ( ).• For output example 2, move

toward the machine rear ( ).

Screws

Rack adjuster

Figure 1-4-15 Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster


Output example 2

Figure 1-4-14

3CC

1-4-8

(5) Adjusting the amount of slackPerform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.

Procedure


Copyexample 2

Figure 1-4-16

End

Yes

Yes

No

No



Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly

(copy example 1)?

Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy example 2)?



Decrease the value using the cursor lower key.

Increase the value using the cursor upper key.


Setting range: 0 – 255Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 0.67 mmReference: 0The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack;The smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.


Select the drawer to be adjusted.

Start




Select “FEED DATA.”

3CC

2-1-1

2-1-1 Mechanical construction

The paper feed desk feeds paper from either of its two drawers to the copier main body. When paper is fed from the lowerdrawer of the paper feed desk, the desk feed clutch (DFCL) is operated to rotate the desk feed roller and pulley to carry thepaper into the copier main body.

1

1

76 )

⁄

¤

$

5&!

4

92 #^(

3

3

0

8 2 @ % *

7 ‹

6

Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed desk

1Forwarding pulley2Paper feed pulley3Separation pulley4Desk feed roller5Desk feed pulley6Drawer lift7Lift operating plate8Desk upper feed guide9Desk middle feed guide0Desk lower feed guide!Desk feed guide@Desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U)

#Desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L)$Desk feed clutch (DFCL)%Desk upper paper switch (DPSW-U)^Desk lower paper switch (DPSW-L)&Desk feed switch (DFSW)*Desk upper lift limit switch (DLICSW-U)(Desk lower lift limit switch (DLICSW-L))Desk upper paper length switch (DPLSW-U)⁄Desk lower paper length switch (DPLSW-L)¤Desk upper paper width switch (DPWSW-U)‹Desk lower paper width switch (DPWSW-L)

DFCL

DFSW

DPFCL-U

DPSW-U

DPFCL-L

DLICSW-UDMPCB

CN1-5CN1-6CN1-14

CN2-1

CN1-7CN1-8CN1-13

CN2-7

DPSW-L DLICSW-L

Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed desk block diagram

3CC

2-1-2

• Paper feed from the desk upper drawer

1379 ms

100 ms

a

bc

d

Start key

DDM

FCL3 (copier)

DPFCL-U

RSW (copier)

FSW3 (copier)

DM (copier)

17 ms

Automatic copy density control; A3/11" × 17" paper; magnification of 100%

Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the desk upper drawer

a100 ms after the start key is pressed, the desk drive motor (DDM) turns on at the same time as the drive motor (DM) turnson, starting the drive for the paper feed desk. The desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) turns on to start rotating theforwarding pulley and paper feed pulley to start paper feed from the upper drawer.

b1379 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the feed switch 3 (FSW3) on, the desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) turns off.

c17 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.dThe desk drive motor (DDM) turns off at the same time as the drive motor (DM) turns off to stop the drive for the paper feed

desk.

3CC

2-1-3

• Paper feed from the desk lower drawer

a

b

c

d

e

f

Start key

DDM

FCL3 (copier)

DFCL

DPFCL-L

FSW3 (copier)

DFSW

DM (copier)

123 ms

100 ms

123 ms

344 ms

Manual copy density control; A4/11" × 81/2" paper; magnification of 100%

Timing chart 2-1-2 Paper feed from the desk lower drawer

a100 ms after the start key is pressed, the desk drive motor (DDM) turns on at the same time as the drive motor (DM) turnson, starting the drive for the paper feed desk. The desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) turns on to start rotating theforwarding pulley and paper feed pulley to start paper feed from the lower drawer.

bAt the same time as the leading edge of the paper turns the desk feed switch (DFSW) on, the desk feed clutch (DFCL) turnson to rotate the desk feed roller to convey the paper to the copier.

c344 ms after the desk feed switch (DFSW) turns on, the desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) turns off.d123 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the desk feed switch (DFSW) off, the desk feed clutch (DFCL) turns off.e123 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns feed switch 3 (FSW3) off, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.fThe desk drive motor (DDM) turns off at the same time as the drive motor (DM) turns off to stop the drive for the paper feed

desk.

3CC

2-2-1


2 11

17

15

12

164 6

97

1

13

10

18

8

14

3 5


Figure 2-2-1 Layout of electrical parts

1. Desk main PCB (DMPCB) ........................... Controls electrical parts.2. Desk safety switch (DSSW) ......................... Breaks the safety circuit when the desk left cover is opened, and resets

paper jam detection.3. Desk upper paper switch (DPSW-U) ........... Detects the presence of paper in the desk upper drawer.4. Desk lower paper switch (DPSW-L) ............. Detects the presence of paper in the desk lower drawer.5. Desk upper lift limit switch (DLICSW-U) ...... Detects the desk upper drawer lift reaching the upper limit.6. Desk lower lift limit switch (DLICSW-L) ........ Detects the desk lower drawer lift reaching the upper limit.7. Desk upper paper length switch (DPLSW-U) Detects the length of paper in the desk upper drawer.8. Desk lower paper length switch (DPLSW-L) Detects the length of paper in the desk lower drawer.9. Desk upper paper width switch (DPWSW-U) Detects the width of paper in the desk upper drawer.

10. Desk lower paper width switch (DPWSW-L) Detects the width of paper in the desk lower drawer.11. Desk feed switch (DFSW) ............................ Controls the desk lower paper feed clutch.12. Desk drive motor (DDM) .............................. Drives the paper feed desk.13. Desk upper lift motor (DCLM-U) .................. Drives the desk upper drawer lift.14. Desk lower lift motor (DCLM-L) ................... Drives the desk lower drawer lift.15. Desk upper paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U) ... Primary paper feed from the desk upper drawer.16. Desk lower paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L) .... Primary paper feed from the desk lower drawer.17. Desk feed clutch (DFCL) ............................. Conveys paper to the copier.18.Desk dehumidifier* (DDH) ............................. Dehumidifies paper.

* Service part.

3CC

2-3-1

2-3-1 Desk main PCB

Motordriver(IC8)

DDM

DESK RXD

DSSW

DFSW

Copiermain PCB(MPCB)

DESK TXD

FSW SIG

DMPCB

CPU(IC5)

DCLM-UDCLM-L

DPFCL-UDPFCL-LDFCL

DPSW-UDPSW-LDLICSW-UDLICSW-LDPLSW-UDPLSW-LDPWSW-UDPWSW-L

Figure 2-3-1 Desk main PCB block diagram

The desk main PCB (DMPCB) is controlled from the copier main PCB (MPCB) which controls the inputs from and outputsto the motors, clutches and switches on the paper feed desk through the CPU IC5 serially via two-way serial/parallel 8-bitdata conversion.

3CC

2-3-2

CN

51

10L7

L5D

2D

1J4

J5

J6

J8

J21

J13

J36J33

J35

J59

J61J58

J15

J38J20

J39

J12J11

J14J2

J10

J16J17J18

J7

J9

CN6

11 7

1112

12

3

J22

J23

IC3

J25

J26

J28

J29

J24J40

J44

J50J52

J54

J55J91

J111

J92

J103

J104 J74J41

C42

CN4

CN3

J53

J30

L14

L13

C4

J19

J3J34

J37

J56

J32

J64

C40

J63

J97J96

J60J57

J94

J93

J65J66J67J70

J62

J1IC

2

IC4

8+

1

1

IC5

IC1

C20

C16

J31J27

J45J48J49J51

J43J46J83J87J88J84J89J90J85J86

J75

J79J73

J71J72

J68

J69J77

J76J78J106

J110J109

J108

J105

L23

L25C

N2

J107

J102

J100J101

J99

J98J95

J42J80J81J82

J47

L9

1

8

+

+

+

+

22

17181

12

L249

IC8

8

X1

IC7

8

11

IC6

L22

1516

CN

112

Figure 2-3-2


3CC

2-3-3

1-1 1-9 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DLICSW-U, output1-2 1-10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DPSW-U, output1-3 1-11 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DLICSW-L, output1-4 1-12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DPSW-L, output1-5 1-9 5/0 V DC DLICSW-U on/off, input1-6 1-10 0/5 V DC DPSW-U on/off, input1-7 1-11 5/0 V DC DLICSW-L on/off, input1-8 1-12 0/5 V DC DPSW-L on/off, input1-13 5-8 0/24 V DC DPFCL-L on/off, input1-14 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DPFCL-L, output1-15 5-8 0/24 V DC DPFCL-U on/off, input1-16 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DPFCL-U, output2-1 5-8 0/24 V DC DFCL on/off, input2-2 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DFCL, output2-3 5-8 0/24 V DC DCLM-L on/off, input2-4 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DCLM-L, output2-5 5-8 0/24 V DC DCLM-U on/off, input2-6 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DCLM-U, output2-7 2-9 0/5 V DC DFSW on/off, output2-8 2-9 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DFSW, output2-15 2-13 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input2-16 2-14 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input2-17 2-13 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input2-18 2-14 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input3-1 3-9 0/5 V DC DPWSW-U (DIG0) on/off, input3-2 3-9 0/5 V DC DPWSW-U (DIG1) on/off, input3-3 3-9 0/5 V DC DPWSW-U (DIG2) on/off, input3-4 3-10 0/5 V DC DPWSW-L (DIG0) on/off, input3-5 3-10 0/5 V DC DPWSW-L (DIG1) on/off, input3-6 3-10 0/5 V DC DPWSW-L (DIG2) on/off, input3-7 3-11 0/5 V DC DPLSW-U on/off, input3-8 3-12 0/5 V DC DPLSW-L on/off, input4-1 4-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DDM, output4-4 4-3 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DDM, output4-5 4-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Clock signal to DDM, output4-6 4-2 0/5 V DC DDM on/off, output4-7 4-2 0/5 V DC LOCK signal to DDM, input5-1 5-2 0/5 V DC FSW3 on/off from the copier, input5-3 5-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication signal to the copier, output5-5 5-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication signal to the copier, input5-6 5-7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input5-10 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input6-1 5-8 24/0 V DC DSSW on/off, input6-3 5-8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DSSW, output

3CC

2-4-1

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

CN

11-A

3

DD

MC

N4-

6

RC

LC

N10

-A5

FC

L1C

N10

-A7

FC

L2C

N10

-A9

FC

L3C

N10

-A11

DP

FC

L-U

CN

1-14

MC

RE

MC

N9-

14

FS

MC

N2-

7, 8

, 9, 1

0

CL

CN

13-4

RS

WC

N8-

25

ES

WC

N2-

15

FS

W1

CN

15-5

FS

W2

CN

15-8

FS

W3

CN

15-1

1

TC

RE

MC

N9-

9

DB

RE

MC

N9-

11

17 m

s

78 m

s

124

ms

124

ms

48 m

s

Min

78

ms

100

ms

30 m

s30

ms

100

ms

190

ms

190

ms

1055

ms

1379

ms

323

ms

323

ms

350

ms

500

ms

518

ms

300

ms

200

ms

Imag

e re

ady

215

ms

17 m

s

1379

ms

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 1C

on

tin

uo

us

cop

yin

g a

n A

3/11

" ×××× ×

17"

ori

gin

al o

nto

tw

o s

hee

ts o

f A

3/11

" ×××× ×

17"

copy

pap

er f

rom

th

e p

aper

feed

des

k u

pp

er d

raw

er, m

agn

ific

atio

n r

atio

100

%, a

uto

co

py d

ensi

ty c

on

tro

l

3CC

2-4-2

Sta

rt k

ey

DM

CN

11-A

3

DD

MC

N4-

6

RC

LC

N10

-A5

FC

L1C

N10

-A7

FC

L2C

N10

-A9

FC

L3C

N10

-A11

DF

CL

CN

2-1

DP

FC

L-L

CN

1-13

MC

RE

MC

N9-

14

FS

MC

N2-

7, 8

, 9, 1

0

CL

CN

13-4

RS

WC

N8-

25

ES

WC

N2-

15

FS

W1

CN

15-5

FS

W2

CN

15-8

FS

W3

CN

15-1

1

DF

SW

CN

2-7

TC

RE

MC

N9-

9

DB

RE

MC

N9-

11

100

ms

123

ms

123

ms

17 m

s

30 m

s

48 m

s

Min

78

ms

124

ms

100

ms

344

ms

323

ms

518

ms

500

ms

200

ms

300

ms

350

ms

190

ms

Imag

e re

ady

215

ms

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 2C

op

yin

g a

n A

4/11

" ×××× ×

81/ 2

" o

rig

inal

on

to a

n A

4/11

" ×××× ×

81/ 2

" co

py

pap

er f

rom

th

e p

aper

feed

des

k lo

wer

dra

wer

,m

agn

ific

atio

n r

atio

100

%, m

anu

al c

op

y d

ensi

ty c

on

tro

l

3CC

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2-4-3

Wiring diagram

5 V

5 V

5 V

5 V

DLI

CS

W-U

DP

SW

-UD

LIC

SW

-LD

PS

W-L

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

DP

FC

L-L

DP

FC

L-U

24 V

24 V

OE

:C11

5-3

OE

:C11

5-6

OE

:C11

6-3

OE

:C11

6-6

YW

:C11

5-2

LB:C

115-

5Y

W:C

116-

2LB

:C11

6-5

BE

:C11

5-1

BE

:C11

5-4

BE

:C11

6-1

BE

:C11

6-4

YW

:C12

1-3

YW

:C11

7-3

RD

:C11

3-6

RD

:C11

2-6

YW

:C12

0-3

RD

:C12

0-1

GN

:C11

0-2

RD

:C11

0-1

GN

:C10

8-2

RD

:C10

8-1

LB:C

119-

3O

E:C

119-

2B

E:C

119-

1

CN

1:C

101

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

123456789

10

FSW3 SIGGNDRXDGNDTXD5.1 VGNDGND

24 V

1 2D

DH

CO

MD

DH

LIV

E

12611109874321

WEBKPEBEYWBEPKOEBEBERD

DF

CL

RE

M24

VD

CLM

-U R

EM

24 V

DC

LM-L

RE

M24

VD

FS

W5

VG

ND

GN

DG

ND

DC

LM-U

SIG

1D

CLM

-L S

IG1

DC

LM-U

SIG

2D

CLM

-L S

IG2

CN

2:C

102

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

GN

:C11

2-3

PE

:C11

2-4

PK

:C11

2-1

GN

:C11

3-3

PE

:C11

3-4

PK

:C11

3-1

YW

:C10

7-2

YW

:C10

6-2

BE

:C11

2-2

BE

:C11

3-2

BE

:C10

7-1

BE

:C10

6-1

DP

WS

W-L

DIG

0D

PW

SW

-L D

IG1

DP

WS

W-L

DIG

2D

PW

SW

-U D

IG0

DP

WS

W-U

DIG

1D

PW

SW

-U D

IG2

DP

LSW

-U

DP

LSW

-L

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

CN

3:C

103

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RD

:C11

4-1

BE

:C11

4-2

BE

:C11

4-3

OE

:C11

4-4

YW

:C11

4-5

YW

:C11

4-6

GN

:C11

4-7

24 V

GN

DG

ND

5 V

DD

M C

LOC

KD

DM

RE

MD

DM

LO

CK

CN

4:C

104

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

RD

:C11

8-1

BN

:C11

8-2

24 V

DS

SW

CN

6:C

105

1 2 3

YW:C103-7BE:C103-11

12

CN107GNDDPLSW-U

Copier

YW:C103-8BE:C103-12

12

CN106GNDDPLSW-L

123123

GY:C201-4GY:C201-3GY:C201-6GY:C201-5GY:C201-8GY:C201-7


OE:C101-2LB:C101-6BE:C101-10OE:C101-1YW:C101-5BE:C101-9

C203

DPSW-U

UPPER DRAWERPAPER FEED UNIT

DLICSW-U

C201C115

C202

5 VDPSW-UGND5 VDLICSW-UGND1

23

45

67

8

78

56

34

12

123123



OE:C101-4LB:C101-8BE:C101-12OE:C101-3YW:C101-7BE:C101-11

C213

DPSW-L

DLICSW-L

DCLM-L

C211C116

C212

5 VDPSW-LGND5 VDLICSW-LGND

12345

RD:C102-6GN:C102-5LB:C102-16BE:C102-14PE:C102-18

C10824 VDCLM-L REMDCLM-L SIG1COMDCLM-L SIG2

1234567

RD:C104-1BE:C104-2BE:C104-3OE:C104-4YW:C104-5YW:C104-6GN:C104-7

C114

DDM

24 VGNDGND5 VDDM CLOCKDDM REMDDM LOCK

123

321

YW:C101-13

RD:C113-5

C124C121 DPFCL-L

DPFCL-L REM

24 V

14

32

56

78

78

56

34

12

12345

BE:C301-8YW:C301-5LB:C301-6PK:C301-7

RD:C301-3RD:C301-4BE:C302-1YW:C302-2LB:C302-3PK:C302-4

RD:C101-16RD:C117-1BE:C103-9GN:C103-1PE:C103-2PK:C103-3

C302

DPWSW-L

UPPER DRAWER

LOWER DRAWERPAPER FEED UNIT

C301C112

GNDDPWSW-L DIG0DPWSW-L DIG1DPWSW-L DIG21

43

25

67

8

76

58

34

12

12345

BE:C311-8YW:C311-5LB:C311-6PK:C311-7

RD:C311-3RD:C311-4BE:C312-1YW:C312-2LB:C312-3PK:C312-4

RD:C101-15RD:C121-1BE:C103-10GN:C103-4PE:C103-5PK:C103-6

C312

DPWSW-U

LOWER DRAWER

C311C113

GNDDPWSW-U DIG0DPWSW-U DIG1DPWSW-U DIG21

43

25

67

8

76

58

34

12

DCLM-U

DPLSW-U

DPLSW-L

MPCB

12345

RD:C102-4GN:C102-3LB:C102-15BE:C102-13PE:C102-17

C110

DDH

24 VDCLM-U REMDCLM-U SIG1COMDCLM-U SIG2

123

321

YW:C102-1

RD:C102-2

C123C120

123

123

BE:C102-9OE:C102-8LB:C102-7

BE:C402-1OE:C402-2LB:C402-3

BE:C401-1OE:C401-2LB:C401-3

C119 C401 C402

DFCL

DSSW

DFCL REM

24 V

123

RD:C105-1BN:C105-3

C118

24 VDSSW

123

GND5 VDFSW

123

321

YW:C101-14

RD:C112-5

C124C121

DPFCL-U

DFSW

DPFCL-U REM

24 V

Wire color Mark

Brown

Yellow

Blue

White

Red

Orange

Light blue

Gray

Black

Purple

Green

Pink

BN

YW

BE

WE

RD

OE

LB

GY

BK

PE

GN

PK

1-1-1

3CP

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Part names ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-21-1-3 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-3



(1) Paper misfeed indication ............................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions .............................................................................................. 1-3-2(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-3

1-3-2 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-4(1) The switchback conveying motor does not operate. ..................................................................... 1-3-4(2) The switchback eject motor does not operate. ............................................................................. 1-3-4(3) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-3-4(4) The press solenoide does not operate. ........................................................................................ 1-3-4



(1) Paper switchback operation .......................................................................................................... 2-1-2


(1) PCBs ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-1(2) Switches and solenoids ................................................................................................................ 2-2-2(3) Motors ........................................................................................................................................... 2-2-3

2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-1

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2

3CP

1-1-1

1-1-1 Part names

Figure 1-1-1

Switchback unit

Switchback unit open/close lever

3CP

1-1-2


Figure 1-1-2

Paper path

Switchbackunit

3CP

1-1-3

1-1-3 Drive system

Figure 1-1-3

1 Switchback motor gear2 Eject motor gear3 Gear 23/314 Gear 21

3CP

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking


1 Switchback unit2 Front cover3 Spacer4 Binding screws M3 × 085 Binding screws M4 × 066 TP screws M4 × 127 TP screws M4 × 16

8 Front bottom pad9 Rear bottom pad0 Upper pad! Outer case@ Plastic bag# Plastic bag$ Bar-code labels

3CP

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the copieroperation panel.To remove the jammed paper, raise the switchback unit open/close lever and open the switchback unit.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the switchback unit to turn the switchback unit safty switch off and on.


FSSW

SBESW

SBFISW

3CP

1-3-2


• Misfeed in switchback section (jam code 53)The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn off within 2797 ms of the copier feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.

2798 ms

FSSW

SBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-1

The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn on within 3680 ms (6500 ms) of the switchback feed in switch(SBFISW) turning on.

3680 (6500) ms

Paper size: A4R/81/2"×11"The value in the parentheses indicates A3/11"×17"

SBFISW

SBESW

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-2

The switchback eject switch (SBESW) does not turn off within 1050 ms (2100 ms) of turning on.

1050 (2100) ms

Paper size: A4R/81/2"×11"The value in the parentheses indicates A3/11"×17"

SBESW OFF

ON

Timing chart 1-3-3

3CP

1-3-3

(3) Paper misfeeds


A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround the switchbackeject switch and switchbackfeed in switch.

Defective switchback feedin switch.


Broken switchback ejectswitch actuator.

Defective switchback feedin switch.


Remove any found.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-1 on the main PCB, check if CN5-3on the main PCB remains high or low when the switchback feedin switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the switchbackfeed in switch.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-2 on the main PCB, check if CN5-4on the main PCB remains high or low when the switchback ejectswitch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the switchbackeject switch.

Check visually and replace the switchback eject switch if itsactuator is broken.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-1 on the main PCB, check if CN5-3on the main PCB remains high or low when the switchback feedin switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the switchbackfeed in switch.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-2 on the main PCB, check if CN5-4on the main PCB remains high or low when the switchback ejectswitch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the switchbackeject switch.

(1)Paper jams in theswitchback unit whenthe main switch isturned on.

(2)Paper jams in theswitchback section isindicated duringcopying (jam inswitchback unit).Jam code 53

3CP

1-3-4



Broken switchbackconveying motor coil.

Poor contact of theswitchback conveyingmotor connector terminals.

Broken switchback ejectmotor coil.

Poor contact of theswitchback eject motorconnector terminals.



Broken press solenoid coil.

Poor contact of the presssolenoid connectorterminals.

(1)The switchbackconveying motordoes not operate.

(2)The switchback ejectmotor does notoperate.


(4)The press solenoidedoes not operate.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace theswitchback conveying motor.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace theswitchback eject motor.




Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the presssolenoid.


3CP

1-3-5

(1)Paper jams.


Check if the contact between the switchbackpress pulley and switchback press roller iscorrect.

Check if the contact between the switchbackeject pulley and switchback eject roller iscorrect.

Check if the switchback press pulley,switchback press roller and gears operatesmoothly.

Check if the switchback eject pulley,switchback eject roller and gears operatesmoothly.

Check and remedy.

Check and remedy.





3CP

2-1-1


The switchback unit consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-1 and performs switchback operation for switching theejection side of paper when ejecting paper to the saddle finisher.

Figure 2-1-1 Switchback unit

Figure 2-1-2 Switchback unit block diagram

1 Feedshift guide2 Switchback press roller3 Switchback press pulley4 Switchback eject roller5 Switchback eject pulley6 Switchback feed in switch7 Switchback eject switch

CN5-3

CN5-4

CN1-1-CN1-12

SBESW

SBFISW

MPCB

Copier

3CP

2-1-2

(1) Paper switchback operationPaper of which copying is complete is conveyed to the switchback unit and sent to the switchback section by the feedshiftguide. In the switchback section, paper is conveyed by touching of the switchback press roller rotated by normal rotation ofthe switchback feed motor (SBFM), with the switchback press pulley activated by turning on the press solenoid (PRSOL).When a certain time (depending on the paper size) elapses, the switchback feed motor (SBFM) reverses the direction ofrotation to reverse the rotation of the switchback press roller to switch the direction of paper conveyance.Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the saddle finisher by the switchback eject roller rotated by turning on theswitchback eject motor (SBEM) and the switchback eject pulley. At this time, the second paper is conveyed to theswitchback unit, the press solenoid (PRSOL) is turned off, the switchback press pulley separates from the switchback pressroller, and the first paper and the second paper are interchanged in the switchback section.(Depending on the copier model and the paper size, the press solenoid may not turn off and the switch press pulley mayalways touch the switchback press roller.)

Figure 2-1-3

(PRSOL:ON)

Feedshift guide

(SBFM:fwd.)

Switchbackpress roller



(SBFM:fwd.)

Paper path

Switchbackpresspulley

Switchbackpresspulley Switch

backpresspulley

(PRSOL:ON)

(SBFM:rev.)

(SBEM:ON) (SBEM:ON)

Entry second paper

Switchbackeject roller

Switchbackeject roller

(PRSOL:OFF)

Ejectfirstpaper

3CP

2-2-1


(1) PCBs

Figure 2-2-1 PCBs

1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the electrical components.

1


3CP

2-2-2

(2) Switches and solenoids

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and solenoids

1. Safty switch (SSW) ...................................... Breaks the safty circuit when the switchback unit is opened.2. Switchback feed in switch (SBFISW) ........... Detects the presence of paper in the switchback unit.3. Switchback eject switch (SBESW) ............... Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback unit.4. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feedshift guide.5. Press solenoid (PRSOL) .............................. Operates the switchback press solenoid.

3

1

4

5

2


3CP

2-2-3

(3) Motors

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Switchback eject motor (SBEM) .................. Drives the switchback eject roller.2. Switchback feed motor (SBFM) ................... Drives the switchback press roller.

1

2


3CP

2-3-1

2-3-1 Main PCB


The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC2 and motor drive circuit.The CPU IC2 detects the condition of the switches and controls the motors and solenoids by serially communicating withthe copier.

Feedshift solenoid

Press solenoid

Main PCB

Copier

Motordrivecircuit

CPUIC2

TXD

RXD

24 V DC

5 V DC

24 V

Switchback feed in switchSwitchback eject switch

Safty switch

Switchbackconveying

motor

Motordrivecircuit

Switchbackeject motor

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

5 V

3CP

2-3-2


CN2

CN3

CN4

CN

1 CN

5


1-1 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input1-2 1-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input1-6 1-5 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input1-7 1-8 0/5 V DC (pulse) Sirial signal TXD, output1-9 1-10 0/5 V DC (pulse) Sirial signal RXD, input1-11 1-5 0/5 V DC RESET signal, input1-12 1-5 0/5 V DC Switchback unit SET signal, output2-1 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SSW, output2-3 1-3 0/24 V DC SSW on/off, input3-1 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBEM coil energization pulse, output (A)3-2 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBEM coil energization pulse, output (A)3-3 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBEM coil energization pulse, output (B)3-4 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBEM coil energization pulse, output (B)3-5 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SBEM, output4-1 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBFM coil energization pulse, output (A)4-2 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBFM coil energization pulse, output (A)4-3 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBFM coil energization pulse, output (B)4-4 1-3 0/24 V DC (pulse) SBFM coil energization pulse, output (B)4-5 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SBFM, output5-1 5-5 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SBFISW, output5-2 5-6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SBESW, output5-3 5-5 0/5 V DC SBFISW on/off, input5-4 5-6 0/5 V DC SBESW on/off, input5-9 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for FSSOL, output5-10 1-3 0/24 V DC FSSOL on/off signal, output5-11 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PRSOL, output5-12 1-3 0/24 V DC PRSOL acutuate signal, output5-14 1-3 0/24 V DC PRSOL release signal, output

3CP

2-4-1

SB

FIS

WC

N5-

3

Cop

ying

sta

rt

• P

aper

siz

e: A

4R/8

1/2"

× 1

1"

• P

aper

siz

e: A

3/11

" ×

17" The

tim

ing

of a

ll th

e m

otor

s an

d th

e so

leno

ids

is c

ontr

olle

d ba

sed

on th

e O

N e

dge

of th

e sw

itchb

ack

feed

in s

witc

h (S

BF

ISW

) as

the

star

ting

poin

t.

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Rev

. rot

atio

nF

wd.

rot

atio

nF

wd.

rot

atio

nR

ev. r

otat

ion

Firs

t pap

er

Cop

ying

sta

rt

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Rev

. rot

atio

n

Firs

t pap

er

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Fw

d. r

otat

ion

Rev

. rot

atio

n

Sec

ond

pape

r

Sec

ond

pape

r

SB

ES

WC

N5-

4

SB

EM

CN

3-1,

2,3,

4

SB

FM

CN

4-1,

2,3,

4

PR

SO

L(r

elea

se)C

N5-

12

PR

SO

L(a

cutu

ate)C

N5-

14

SB

FIS

WC

N5-

3

SB

ES

WC

N5-

4

SB

EM

CN

3-1,

2,3,

4

SB

FM

CN

4-1,

2,3,

4

PR

SO

L(r

elea

se)C

N5-

12

PR

SO

L(a

cutu

ate)C

N5-

14

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 1

3CP

2-4-2

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJ

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Wir

ing

dia

gra

m

CN5:C105123456789

1011121314

5 V5 VSBFISWSBESWSGSG

R24 VFSSOL ACTR24 VPRSOL ACT

PRSOL REF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 V

24 V

PG

PG

SG

5 V

TX

DS

GR

XD

SG

RE

SE

TS

ET

CN4:C104123456

SBFM ASBFM A_SBFM BSBFM B_COM(24V)

CN3:C103123456

SBEM ASBEM A_SBEM BSBEM B_COM(24V)

C201123

5 VSBFISWSG

CN2:C1021

3

24 V

R24 V

1

2

3

4

5

61

2

3

4

5

6

1 2

C202123

SG5 VSBESW

OE:C105-1LB:C105-3BE:C105-5

OE:C201-1OE:C202-2LB:C201-2LB:C202-3BE:C201-3BE:C202-1

RD:C203-2YW:C203-1RD:C204-3YW:C204-2

YW:C204-1BE:C105-6OE:C105-2LB:C105-4

C20321

12

R24 VFSSOL ACT

C204321

123

R24 VPRSOL ACTPRSOL REF

RD:C105-9YW:C105-10

RD:C105-11YW:C105-12YW:C105-14

MP

CB

FS

SO

L

SB

ES

W

SB

FIS

W

SB

FM

SB

EM

SS

W

Cop

ier

PR

SO

L

1-1-1

5FF

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-31-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-4

1-2 Installation1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-11-2-2 Installing the dehumidifier heaters (service part) ................................................................................. 1-2-2


(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-3-1(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-3

1-3-2 Self-diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3-5(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................................. 1-3-5(2) Self-diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-6

1-3-3 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-8(1) The large paper deck does not operate when the copier main switch is turned on. ....................... 1-3-8(2) The deck paper conveying motor does not operate. ...................................................................... 1-3-8(3) Paper deck motor 1 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-3-8(4) Paper deck motor 2 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-3-8(5) Paper feed clutch 1 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-3-8(6) Paper feed clutch 2 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-3-9(7) The paper conveying clutch does not operate. ............................................................................... 1-3-9

1-3-4 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-3-10(1) No primary paper feed. ................................................................................................................. 1-3-10(2) Paper is fed askew. ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-10(3) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ............................................................................... 1-3-10(4) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. 1-3-10(5) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-3-10


(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4-11-4-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-2

(1) Detaching and refitting the upper and lower deck separation rollers .............................................. 1-4-2(2) Detaching and refitting the deck paper conveying unit assembly ................................................... 1-4-3(3) Detaching and refitting deck paper feed rollers 1 and 2 ................................................................. 1-4-3(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment) .............................................. 1-4-4(5) Adjusting the amount of slack. ........................................................................................................ 1-4-5

2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Mechanical construction ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-1


2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Deck main PCB .................................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

(1) Paper deck motor drive circuits ...................................................................................................... 1-4-2(2) Operating principle of reflective photosensors

PPSENS1, PPSENS2, PPSENS3 and PESENS ........................................................................... 1-4-3

1-1-2

5FF

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3

5FF

1-1-1


Paper .............................................. Plain paper (75 – 80 g/m2)Paper size ...................................... A4, B5, 11" × 81/2"Capacity ......................................... 3000 sheets (1500 sheets × 2)Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copierDimensions .................................... 585 (W) × 590 (D) × 315 (H) mm

231/16" (W) × 231/4" (D) × 123/8" (H)Weight ............................................ 35 kg/77.2 lbs

5FF

1-1-2

1-1-2 Parts names

1

5

2

3

4

Figure 1-1-2 Parts names

1 Lifts2 Deck side cover3 Drawer4 Deck front cover5 Paper side guides

5FF

1-1-3


Paper path


5FF

1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

3 ( 6 8 0 5@! 7 8 4 5 ^

4) 7 9 4

21

$#

^(

& *

#

%

⁄

As viewed from machine front

Figure 1-1-4

1 Pulley 2M-402 Pulley S3M-163 Gear 0.8-35/1-204 Gear 2.65 Gear 0.8-236 Pulley 2M-187 Pickup roller gear 0.8-238 Gear 0.9-269 Gear 300 Gear 0.8-24! Pulley 3M-18

@ Pulley 14, gear 0.8-32# Gear 1.0-24$ Pulley S2M-18% Pulley 43, gear 20^ Lift pulley& Left lift belt assembly* Right lift belt assembly( Belt S3M276) Belt 2M0950⁄ Belt 2M0840

5FF

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking

1Large paper deck2Outer case3Lower front pad4Lower rear pad5Support6Upper pad7Stay

8Retainer9Pins0Cross-head chromate binding screws,

CVM4 × 06!Chrome TP screws, M4 × 16@Machine cover#Plastic bag$Plastic bag

Figure 1-2-1

5FF

1-2-2

Screw

ScrewDeck paper conveying unit assembly

1-2-2 Installing the dehumidifier heaters (service part)

Dehumidifier heater installation requires the following parts:Two (2) dehumidifier heaters (P/N 33960020): for 220 – 240 V specifications onlyTwo (2) dehumidifier heaters (P/N 34860030): for 120 V specifications onlyTwo (2) dehumidifier heater retainers (P/N 5A707690)Six (6) M4 × 6 IT tap-tight (S-tight) screws (P/N 37611570)Relay wire (P/N 5A707890)Ten (10) wire saddles (P/N M2109000)

Procedure1. Remove the two screws from each of the deck

right cover and deck left cover and then thecovers.

2. Remove the three screws holding the deckrear cover and then the cover.

3. Open the large paper deck.4. Remove the two screws holding the deck

paper conveying unit assembly and then theassembly.

Figure 1-2-2

5. Fit the dehumidifier heaters to the dehumidifierheater retainers using the two screws and wiresaddle for each.

6. Fit the dehumidifier heater retainers to the leftand right of the large paper deck using onescrew for each.

Figure 1-2-3

7. Pull the dehumidifier heater cable out to themachine rear through the cable hole.

Machine rightMachine left

Dehumidifier heater

Wire saddle

Dehumidifier heater retainer

Wiresaddle

Screws

Dehumidifier heater

Dehumidifier heater retainer

Screws

Screw

5FF

1-2-3

8. Detach the open connector from the connectorof the main harness on the machine rear.

Figure 1-2-4

9. Insert the dehumidifier heater connectors intothe relay wire connectors.

10. Insert the main harness connector into therelay wire connector.

11. Tidy up the dehumidifier heater cable and relaywire using the eight wire saddles and route thecable and wire while clipping the wire saddlesinto the holes in the rear frame.


Figure 1-2-5

Main harnessOpen connector

Wire saddles

Wire saddlesWire saddles

Relay wire

Wire saddle

5FF

1-3-1


(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen a paper jam occurs, the machine immediately stops operation. The operation unit of the copier shows a jam messageand the jam location.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the deck side cover or the large paper deck to turn the side coverswitch or the deck open/closed safety switch off and on.


PFCL1 PFCL2

PPSENS1

FCL3FSW3

PPSENS3

PPSENS2

Figure 1-3-1 Large paper deck

• No paper feed from large paper deck (jam code 12)Feed switch 3 (FSW3) of the copier does not turn on within 650 ms of paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on.

650 ms

PFCL1

FSW3 (Copier)

Timing chart 1-3-1

5FF

1-3-2

• Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 15)Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within 290 ms of paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on.

290 ms

PFCL2

PPSENS3

Timing chart 1-3-2

• Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 16)Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) does not turn on within 310 ms of paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on.

310 ms

PPSENS3

PPSENS2

Timing chart 1-3-3

• Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section (jam code 17)Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) does not turn on within 190 ms of paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on.

190 ms

PPSENS2

PPSENS1

Timing chart 1-3-4

5FF

1-3-3

(3) Paper misfeeds

Problem

(1)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from large pa-per deck).Jam code 12

(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in paper feedsection).

(3)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam inlarge paper deckhorizontal paperconveying section).Jam code 15


Paper is extremely curled.

Check if the upper or lowerdeck separation roller, pa-per feed roller 1or 2 is de-formed.



Check if paper feed clutch 1and 2 malfunctions.

Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 1 and 2.



Check if the upper or lowerdeck separation roller issoiled with paper powder.



Defective paper path sensor3.

Check if paper feed clutch 2malfunctions.

Electrical problem withpaper feed clutch 2.

Corrective measures

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace any damaged rollers (see pages 1-4-2, 3).

Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if the actuator is bro-ken.


Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 1 or2 on the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.

Check. (see page 1-3-8, 9).

Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutchon the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.



Change the paper.


With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the deck main PCB, checkif CN6-11 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper pathsensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper pathsensor 3.



5FF

1-3-4

Problem







Check if paper feed clutch 1malfunctions.







Corrective measures

Change the paper.


With 5 V DC present at CN6-9 on the deck main PCB, check ifCN6-8 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper pathsensor 2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper pathsensor 2.



Change the paper.


With 5 V DC present at CN6-6 on the deck main PCB, check ifCN6-5 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper pathsensor 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper pathsensor 1.

Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutchon the operation panel to be turned on and off. Check thestatus and remedy if necessary.


5FF

1-3-5


(1) Self-diagnostic functionWhen a problem is detected in the large paper deck, copying is disabled and the problem displayed on the operation unitof the copier as a code consisting of “C” followed by a number between 0420 and 2600, indicating the nature of theproblem.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the deck open/closed safety switch offand back on.

5FF

1-3-6


Code

C0420

C1100

C1110

C1120

C1130

Causes



Defective deckmain PCB.




Paper deck motor2 connectormakes poorcontact.





The deck right liftdoes not riseproperly.




Check the connection of connectors CN3on the copier main PCB and CN1 on thedeck main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Remedy or re-place if necessary.

Replace the copier main PCB and checkfor correct operation.

Replace the deck main PCB and check forcorrect operation.












Contents

Communication problemCommunication errors from the com-munication microcomputer on thecopier main PCB:No communication: there is no replyafter 3 retries.Abnormal communication: a communi-cation error (parity or checksum error)is detected five times in succession.

Paper deck motor 1 problemA motor over-current signal is detectedcontinuously for 1 s or longer.

Paper deck motor 2 problemA motor over-current signal is detectedcontinuously for 1 s or longer.

Deck right lift position problemDeck level switch 2 does not turn onwithin 30 s of paper deck motor 2 turn-ing on.

Deck left lift position problemDeck level switch 2 does not turn onwithin 30 s of paper deck motor 2 turn-ing on.

Remarks

5FF

1-3-7

Code

C1130

C1160

C1170

C2600

Causes



The deck left liftdoes not riseproperly.

Operation startrequest is sentfrom the copier tothe large paperdeck while paperfeed is disabled.

Paper feed re-quest is sent fromthe copier to thelarge paper deckbefore operationstart request.

Deck for theprinter is installed.

Defective deckconveying motorPCB.

Deck conveyingmotor does notrotate correctly(the motor is over-loaded).

Poor contact inthe deck convey-ing motor connec-tor terminals.





Turn the power off and back on (reset re-quest is sent from the copier to the largepaper deck to cancel operation startrequest).

Turn the power off and back on (reset re-quest is sent from the copier to the largepaper deck to cancel operation start re-quest).

Replace the deck fot the copier.

Replace the deck conveying motor PCBand check for correct operation.



Contents

Deck left lift position problemDeck level switch 2 does not turn onwithin 30 s of paper deck motor 2 turn-ing on.

Sequence problem

Large paper deck incorrect typeproblem

Deck paper conveying motor prob-lemNo pulse is input within 500 ms of thestart-up.No pulse is input within 100 ms of theprevious pulse input.

Remarks

5FF

1-3-8


Problem

(1)The large paperdeck does not oper-ate when the copiermain switch isturned on.

(2)The deck paperconveying motordoes not operate.

(3)Paper deck motor 1does not operate.

(4)Paper deck motor 2does not operate.

(5)Paper feed clutch 1does not operate.

Causes

Incorrect connection withthe copier.

Poor contact of the deckpaper conveying motor con-nector terminals.

The deck paper conveyingmotor drive systemoverloaded.

Defective deck paper con-veying motor.

Defective deck main PCB.

Poor contact of the paperdeck motor 1 connector ter-minals.

Broken paper deck motor 1coil.


Poor contact of the paperdeck motor 2 connector ter-minals.

Broken paper deck motor 2coil.


Poor contact of the paperfeed clutch 1 connector ter-minals.

Broken paper feed clutch 1coil.



Check the connector.

Check for continuity across the connector terminals. If none,replace them.

Check the drive system.

Check if the deck paper conveying motor is operated in mainte-nance item U247 while the motor drive clock signal is presentat CN2-2 on the deck main PCB. If not, replace the deck paperconveying motor.

Check if the motor drive clock signal is present at CN2-2 on thedeck main PCB when the deck paper conveying motor is oper-ated in maintenance item U247. If not, replace the deck mainPCB.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paperdeck motor 1.

Check if CN7-13 on the deck main PCB goes low right after thedrawer is installed. If not, replace the deck main PCB.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paperdeck motor 2.

Check if CN7-6 on the deck main PCB goes low right after thedrawer is installed. If not, replace the deck main PCB.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 1.

Check if CN4-3 on the deck main PCB goes low when paperfeed clutch 1 is operated in maintenance item U247. If not, re-place the deck main PCB.

5FF

1-3-9

Problem

(6)Paper feed clutch 2does not operate.

(7)The paper convey-ing clutch does notoperate.

Causes

Poor contact of the paperfeed clutch 2 connector ter-minals.

Broken paper feed clutch 2coil.


Poor contact of the paperconveying clutch connectorterminals.

Broken paper conveyingclutch coil.




Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 2.

Check if CN4-1 on the deck main PCB goes low when paperfeed clutch 2 is operated in maintenance item U247. If not, re-place the deck main PCB.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paperconveying clutch.

Check if CN4-5 on the deck main PCB goes low when the pa-per conveying clutch is operated in maintenance item U247. Ifnot, replace the deck main PCB.

5FF

1-3-10


Problem

(1)No primary paper feed.

(2)Paper is fed askew.


(4)Paper jams.



Check if the upper or lower deck separationroller is soiled with paper powder.

Check if deck paper feed roller 1 or 2 issoiled with paper powder.

Check if the upper or lower deck separationroller is worn or deformed.

Check if deck paper feed roller 1 or 2 is wornor deformed.

Check if paper feed clutch 1, 2 or the paperconveying clutch malfunctions.


Check if deck paper feed roller 1 or 2 is wornor deformed.

Check if the paper side guides are de-formed.


Paper is not loaded correctly.



Check if the paper side guides are de-formed.

Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly.

Check for any abnormality with motors andclutches.

Check for any drive belt out of place.

Corrective measures





Remedy or replace.



Remedy or replace.

Change the paper.

Correct.


Change the paper.

Remedy or replace.


Replace.

Remedy if necessary.

5FF

1-4-1


(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch PCBs containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:

Hioki 3200Sanwa MD-180CSanwa YX-360TRBeckman TECH300Beckman DM45Beckman 330 (capable of measuring RMS values)Beckman 3030 (capable of measuring RMS values)Beckman DM850 (capable of measuring RMS values)Fluke 8060A (capable of measuring RMS values)Arlec DMM1050Arlec YF1030C

5FF

1-4-2


(1) Detaching and refitting the upper and lower deck separation rollersClean or replace the upper and lower deck separation rollers as follows.

Procedure1. Open the deck side cover.2. Remove stop ring 1.3. Remove the shaft.4. Remove the lower deck separation roller

assembly.5. Remove stop ring 2 securing the lower deck

separation roller and then the roller.6. Remove stop ring 3 securing the upper deck

separation roller and then the roller.7. Clean or replace the upper and lower deck

separation rollers.8. Refit all removed parts.

Figure 1-4-1 Detaching and refitting the upper and lowerdeck separation rollers

Stop ring 1

Shaft

Lower deck separation roller

Stop ring 2

Upper deck separation roller

Stop ring 3

Stop ring 1

Lower deck separation roller assembly

5FF

1-4-3

(2) Detaching and refitting the deck paper conveying unit assemblyReplace the desk upper or lower paper width switches as follows.

Procedure1. Open the drawer.2. Remove the left cover.3. Remove the two screws holding the deck

paper conveying unit assembly and then theassembly.

Figure 1-4-2 Detaching and refitting the deck paperconveying unit assembly

Deck paper conveying unit assembly

Screw

Screw

(3) Detaching and refitting deck paper feed rollers 1 and 2Clean or replace paper feed rollers 1 and 2 as follows.

Procedure1. Turn the deck paper conveying unit over.2. Remove the stop ring while lifting the deck

paper feed roller section.3. Pull out the shifting shaft and then deck paper

feed rollers 1 and 2.4. Clean or replace deck paper feed rollers 1

and 2.5. Refit all removed parts.

Figure 1-4-3 Detaching and refitting deck paper feed rollers1 and 2

Shifting shafts

Deck paper feed roller 2

Deck paper feed roller 1

Stop rings

5FF

1-4-4

(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment)Perform the following adjustment if the center lines of the copy image and the copy paper are misaligned.

Procedure

Figure 1-4-5 Adjusting the position of the center adjuster

Is the center of the image aligned with that of

the copy paper?

Run maintenance item U993. Select “VTC PG1” and output a test pattern.

Retighten two screws 1 and insert the drawer.

Open the drawer.

Loosen two screws 1 holding the center adjuster and change the position of the center adjuster.• For output example A, move

the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow ( ).

• For output example B, move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow ( ).

Loosen five screws 2 holding the deck front cover and change the position of the deck front cover so that the level indicating the position of the center adjuster and that of the deck front cover are the same.



Yes

Start

End

No

Retighten five screws 2.

Level indicators

Level indicators

Level indicatorLevel indicator

Screws 2

Screw 1 Screw 1 Screw 2

Center adjuster Deck front cover

Figure 1-4-4

Output example A Output example B

5FF

1-4-5

(5) Adjusting the amount of slackPerform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.

Procedure

Figure 1-4-6


Copy example 2

Start

Run maintenance item U051. Select “FEED DATA.”

Select “LCF.”

Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.




Is the leading edge of the image missing

or varying randomly (copy example 1)?

Is the copy paper Z-folded

(copy example 2)?

No

No

End


Increase the value using the cursor upper key.

Yes

Decrease the value using the cursor lower key.

Yes

Setting range: 0 – 255Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 0.67 mmReference: 0The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack;The smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.

5FF

2-1-1


The large paper deck consists mainly of the left and right cassettes and separation section. The left cassette paper feedsection sends paper from the lift to the upper and lower deck separation rollers. When the left cassette becomes empty, theright cassette paper feed section conveys paper onto the lift of the left cassette. The upper and lower deck separation rollersin the separation section convey paper received from the left cassette paper feed section into the copier, preventing multiplesheets from being fed at one time.

19 !

2

@

4

33

# $ % ^56

57 8

@

0

Figure 2-1-1 Mechanical construction

1Deck paper feed roller 12Deck paper feed roller 23Pickup arm4Paper conveying base5Lift6Paper guide U7Deck side cover8Upper deck separation roller

9Lower deck separation roller0Paper guide D!Guide pulley@Air damper# Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)$ Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2)% Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3)^ Paper empty sensor (PESENS)

5FF

2-1-2

• Left cassette paper feedAs the paper conveying clutch (CCL) turns on, the drive is transmitted to the upper and lower deck separation rollers,starting paper feed from the left cassette. The upper and lower deck separation rollers ensure that the paper is fed one sheetat a time and that it is fed into the copier correctly.To prevent multiple sheets from being fed, there is a torque limiter on the lower deck separation roller.• When the left cassette is empty, its lift serves as a guide for the paper being conveyed from the right cassette lift.

42 msFSW3 (copier)

FCL3 (copier)

PPSENS1

PPSENS2

PPSENS3

CCL

Paper feed signal from the copier

ab

c

Timing chart 2-1-1 Left cassette paper feed

aAt the same time as the paper feed signal from the copier turns on, the paper conveying clutch (CCL) turns on to start paperfeed.

b42 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns copier feed switch 3 (FSW3) on, the paper conveying clutch (CCL) turnsoff.

c42 ms after copier feed switch 3 (FSW3) has turned on, copier feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on to feed the paper to completepaper feed from the left cassette.

5FF

2-1-3

Paper path

Lower deckseparationroller

CCL

Upper deck separation rollerFSW3

Feed roller 2

FCL3Feed pulley

Copier

Figure 2-1-2 Left cassette paper feed section

CCL

CN4-5CN1-1

PDMPCB

CCLFSW3 SIG

FSW3 (copier)

Figure 2-1-3 Left cassette paper feed section block diagram

5FF

2-1-4

• Right cassette paper feedAs the last sheet in the left cassette is fed, paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) and paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turn on for paperfeed from the right cassette. Deck paper feed rollers 1 and 2 start to rotate to convey paper from the right cassette onto theleft cassette lift.

10 ms

42 ms

80 ms

FSW3 (copier)

PPSENS1

PPSENS2

PPSENS3

PFCL1

PFCL2a

b

c

d

Timing chart 2-1-2 Right cassette paper feed

a42 ms after the last paper from the left cassette has turned copier feed switch 3 (FSW3) on, paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2)turns on to start paper feed.

b80 ms after the leading edge of the paper from the right cassette has turned paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) on, paperfeed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turns on.

cAt the same time as the leading edge of the paper from the right cassette turns paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) on, paperfeed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turns off.

d10 ms after the leading edge of the paper from the right cassette turns paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) on, paper feedclutch 1 (PFCL1) turns off and paper stops in the left cassette to complete paper feed from the right cassette.

5FF

2-1-5

PPSENS1PPSENS2 PPSENS3

PFCL1 PFCL2

Deck paper feed roller 1 Deck paper feed roller 2

Paper path

Figure 2-1-4 Right cassette paper feed section

PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3PFCL1 PFCL2

PPSENS1PPSENS2PPSENS3PFCL2PFCL1

CN6-5CN6-8CN6-11CN4-1CN4-3

PDMPCB

FSW3 SIG

FSW3 (copier)

CN1-1

Figure 2-1-5 Right cassette paper feed section block diagram

5FF

2-1-6

• Raising and lowering the liftsThe following is a description of the right cassette lift operating mechanism. The left cassette lift operates in the samemanner.Paper deck motor 2 (PDM2) drives the right lift belt assembly that winches the belt up and hence raises the lift until it isstopped by deck level switch 2 (DLSW2).When paper is loaded on the lift and the deck is closed, the lift is raised until deck level switch 2 (DLSW2) turns on.When desk level switch 2 (DLSW2) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used, paper deck motor 2 (PDM2) starts to raisethe lift until the switch turns on.

Deck level switch 2

Air damper Lift belt assembly

Winch shaft

Lift

Paper deck motor 2

Figure 2-1-6 Raising and lowering the lift

When the deck is opened for removing a jammed paper or other purposes, the winch shaft is released from its holder onpaper deck motor 2 (PDM2), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The air damper buffers the impact of thedescending lift.

DLSW1

DLSW2

PDM1

PDM2

CN5-4

CN5-7

CN7-13

CN7-6

PDMPCB

PDM2

DLSW1 DLSW2

PDM1

Figure 2-1-7 Lift block diagram

5FF

2-1-7

• Detecting the paper levelThe lift rises as paper in the deck is used. When the remaining number of sheets in either right or left cassette reduces toaround 100 to 250 sheets, the projection on the lift belt assembly pushes against the sensor lever which turns the relevantpaper level detection sensor 1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2) on.When both paper level detection sensors 1 and 2 (PLDSENS1, 2) have turned on, the message “Low on paper.” is shown onthe copier message display. This message is not shown when only one of them is on.As more copies are made with the message on, paper path sensors 1, 2 and 3 (PPSENS1, 2, 3) or the paper empty sensor(PESENS) start to detect absence of paper, and the message “Place paper in deck.” is shown.

Paper level detection sensor 1, 2

Sensor lever

Lift belt assembly

Figure 2-1-7 Detecting the paper level

CN2-1CN3-3

PDMPCB

PLDSENS1 PLDSENS2

Figure 2-1-8 Paper level detection system block diagram

5FF

2-2-1


1


Figure 2-2-1 PCBs

1. Deck main PCB (PDMPCB) .............................. Controls electrical components and communications with the copier.

5FF

2-2-2

7

1 2 5 3 8 4 6

9 10


Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) ...................... Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.2. Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) ...................... Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.3. Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) ...................... Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.4. Paper empty sensor (PESENS) ........................ Detects the absence of paper in the right cassette.5. Deck level switch 1 (DLSW1) ............................ Detects the left cassette lift in the home position.6. Deck level switch 2 (DLSW2) ............................ Detects the right cassette lift in the home position.7. Side cover switch (SCSW) ................................ Detects if the deck side cover is open or closed.8. Deck open/closed safety switch (DOSSW) ....... Detects if the deck is open or closed.9. Paper level detection sensor 1 (PLDSENS1) .... Detects the paper level in the left cassette.

10. Paper level detection sensor 2 (PLDSENS2) .... Detects the paper level in the right cassette.

5FF

2-2-3

7

1

4

5 6

32

8


Figure 2-2-3 Other electrical components

1. Paper conveying clutch (CCL) .......................... Regulates drive transmission to the upper and lower deck separationrollers.

2. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ............................. Regulates drive transmission to deck paper feed roller 1.3. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ............................. Regulates drive transmission to deck paper feed roller 2.4. Deck paper conveying motor (CM) ................... Drives the large paper deck.5. Paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) ............................. Raises the left cassette lift.6. Paper deck motor 2 (PDM2) ............................. Raises the right cassette lift.7. Dehumidifier heater 1* (DH1) ............................ Dehumidifies paper in the left cassette.8. Dehumidifier heater 2* (DH2) ............................ Dehumidifies paper in the right cassette.

* Service part.

5FF

2-3-1

2-3-1 Deck main PCB

DECK RXD DECK TXD

FSW3 SIG

24 V DC5 V DCPGNDSGND

CM

PDM1

PDM2

PDM1drive circuit

Deck paperconveyingmotor drivecircuit

Communicationcircuit

Latch

CPU(IC8)

PDMPCB

LEDdrive circuit

ROM

PPSENS1

PPSENS2

PPSENS3

PESENS

DLSW1

DLSW2

SCSW

DOSSW

Oscillatorcircuit

PFCL1

PFCL2

CCL

PDM2drive circuit

Reset circuit

PLDSENS2

PLDSENS1

Clutchdrive circuit

Figure 2-3-1 Deck main PCB block diagram

The deck main PCB (PDMPCB) consists of the CPU IC8, which serially communicates with the copier main PCB (MPCB);the deck paper conveying motor drive circuit; the paper deck motor drive circuits; the clutch drive circuit; the reset circuit; andthe LED drive circuit. It controls the entire large paper deck.

5FF

2-3-2

(1) Paper deck motor drive circuits

CPU

IC8

–

+

24 V DC

5 V DC24 V DC

24 V DC

CN7-12

CN7-13 PDM1

5 V DC

8

1

2 24

5

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

1R52

1

3

C 21

21

2

E

B

2 1IC7.2

C17 R49

R53

R402 1

1

2

D32

2R46 R97

C

E 1

C 2

1E

Q1

K A

K

A

1

2D1

B

BQ7

322

1

1

1R32R1

3

1C2

2

R38

Q3

R14

R20

SGND

PGNDPDMPCB

PGNDPGND

16R3

Figure 2-3-2 Paper deck motor 1 drive circuit

The following is a description of the paper deck motor 1 drive circuit. Paper deck motors 1 and 2 are identical.When pin 8 of the CPU IC8 goes low, transistor Q1 is turned on causing paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) to rotate. Whentransistor Q1 is turned off, paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) stops. A brake circuit ensures the prompt stopping of the motor asfollows.When transistor Q1 turns off, transistor Q7 turns on, supplying 24 V DC to CN7-13 thereby preventing paper deck motor 1(PDM1) from rotating further under momentum.To prevent the cassette lift from being raised past its limit, an overcurrent lock detection circuit checks for the overcurrentthat would occur when paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) locks. The current from paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) into transistor Q1is converted to a voltage by resistor R46. This voltage is input to pin 5 of comparator IC7.2. If this voltage is higher than thereference at pin 4, 5 V DC is input to pin 16 of CPU IC8. If it is lower, 0 V is input to pin 16. Overcurrent of paper deck motor1 (PDM1) causes the voltage at pin 5 of IC7.2 to become higher than that at pin 4. This generates 5 V DC at pin 16 of CPUIC8, which detects overcurrent. If overcurrent lasts more than 1 s, paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) failure is determined, and pin8 of CPU IC8 outputs 5 V DC, turning paper deck motor 1 (PDM1) off.

5FF

2-3-3

(2) Operating principle of reflective photosensors PPSENS1, PPSENS2, PPSENS3 and PESENS

Off

On

Off

On

LED

CN6-12

CN6-10

CN6-11

Phototransistor

5 V DC5 V DC

5 V DC5 V DC

Q9

C

E 3

21 1 2 2 1 2 33

62

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

181 2

914

IC6.1R69R28

R89R90

IC7.4

R12

CPU

IC8

B 2

1R15R78

PPSENS3SGND SGND

C25R71 R88

SGND

SGND

Y A

+–

Figure 2-3-3 Reflective photosensor (PPSENS3) circuit

The following is the operating principle of paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3). Paper path sensors 1 and 2 (PPSENS1,PPSENS2) and the paper empty sensor (PESENS) operate in the same manner.A pulsating signal from pin 33 of the CPU IC8 turns Q9 on and off, causing the LED on the sensor PCB to flash. When theflashing LED light reflects on the paper, the phototransistor turns on and off. The on/off signal is then inverted by IC7.4 andthe paper presence signal (pulse) is input at pin 62 of the CPU IC8.If there is no paper, the phototransistor remains off and 5 V DC is input at pin 62 of the CPU IC8.

5FF

2-3-4

+5 V

+5 VS

GS

G

19

CP

1

+

+C

21C

22

CN

1ZD

3T

P2

TP

23T

P22

TP

19T

P21

TP

17T

P14 T

P16

TP

20

TP

25T

P4

TP

6T

P5 T

P8

TP

18 TP

15

IC6

115CN6

IC5

IC7

IC3

CN

4

CN

5

16

R48

R46

10 1

TP

1

+

C36

SW

1

TP

10TP

24

TP

7

60

E Q

8E

Q4

E Q

1E

Q7

110

TP

8

TP

12

TP

11

TP

13

CN

3

17

IC8

PS

W1

20

OSC1

30

+C

1LE

D1T

P3

8 1

CN2

IC1

4050

30

Figure 2-3-4


5FF

2-3-5

1-1 1-2 0/5 V DC FSW3 on/off from the copier, input1-3 1-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication signal to the copier, input1-5 1-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication signal to the copier, output1-6 1-4 0/5 V DC Reset signal from the copier, input1-7 1-8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input1-10 1-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input2-1 2-2 0/5 V DC PLDSENS1 on/off, input2-3 2-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS1, output2-5 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CM, output2-6 2-4 0/24 V DC CM on/off, output2-7 2-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) Lock signal to CM, output3-1 3-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS1, output3-3 3-2 0/5 V DC PLDSENS2 on/off, input4-1 2-4 0/24 V DC PFCL2 on/off, output4-2 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCL2, output4-3 2-4 0/24 V DC PFCL1 on/off, output4-4 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCL1, output4-5 2-4 0/24 V DC CCL on/off, output4-6 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CCL, output5-1 5-2 5/0 V DC DOSW on/off, input5-3 5-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DOSW, output5-4 5-5 0/5 V DC DLSW1 on/off, input5-6 5-5 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DLSW1, output5-7 5-8 0/5 V DC DLSW2 on/off, input5-9 5-8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DLSW2, output6-1 6-2 5/0 V DC SCSW on/off, input6-3 6-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SCSW, output6-4 6-2 5/4 V DC (pulse) Clock signal to PPSENS1, output6-5 6-2 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V PPSENS1 on/off, input6-6 6-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS1, output6-7 6-2 5/4 V DC (pulse) Clock signal to PPSENS2, output6-8 6-2 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V PPSENS2 on/off, input6-9 6-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS2, output6-10 6-2 5/4 V DC (pulse) Clock signal to PPSENS3, output6-11 6-2 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V PPSENS3 on/off, input6-12 6-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS3, output6-13 6-2 5/4 V DC (pulse)/ Clock signal to PESENS, output6-14 6-2 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V PESENS on/off, input6-15 6-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PESENS, output7-1 7-2 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input7-3 7-2 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input7-5 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PDM2, output7-6 2-4 0/24 V DC PDM2 on/off, output7-8 7-9 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input7-10 7-9 0/5 V DC Paper level detection switch on/off, input7-12 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PDM1, output7-13 2-4 0/24 V DC PDM1 on/off, output

5FF

2-4-1

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 1 P

aper

feed

fro

m la

rge

pap

er d

eck

left

cas

sett

e

Pap

er fe

ed r

eque

st s

igna

l

CM

CN

2-4,

6

FS

W3*

CN

15-1

1

PP

SE

NS

1C

N6-

5

PP

SE

NS

2C

N6-

8

PP

SE

NS

3C

N6-

11

PE

SE

NS

CN

6-14

FC

L3*

CN

10-A

11

CC

LC

N4-

5

Pap

er fe

ed s

tart

Aux

iliar

y pa

per

feed

sta

rtP

aper

feed

sta

rtA

uxili

ary

pape

r fe

ed s

tart

* C

opie

r

42 m

s42

ms

5FF

2-4-2

Tim

ing

ch

art

No

. 2 P

aper

feed

fro

m la

rge

pap

er d

eck

rig

ht

cass

ette

Pap

er fe

ed r

eque

st s

igna

l

CM

CN

2-4,

6

FS

W3*

CN

15-1

1

PP

SE

NS

1C

N6-

5

PP

SE

NS

2C

N6-

8

PP

SE

NS

3C

N6-

11

PE

SE

NS

CN

6-14

FC

L3*

CN

10-A

11

CC

LC

N4-

5

PF

CL1

CN

4-3

PF

CL2

CN

4-1

Pap

er fe

ed s

tart

Aux

iliar

y pa

per

feed

sta

rtP

aper

feed

sta

rtA

uxili

ary

pape

r fe

ed s

tart

* C

opie

r

10 m

s80

ms

42 m

s42

ms

5FF

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2-4-3

Wiring diagram

PFCL22

2 1

1

1

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

1

2 2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

6

5

4

3

2

1

PFCL12

2 1

1

CCL

DOSW

2

2 1

1

1

2

3

1

2

3

DLSW1

DLSW2

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

SCSW

1

2

3

1

2

3

PPSENS1

PPSENS2

PPSENS3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

PESENS

1

2

3

1

2

3

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

RD

RD

RD

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24 V

PG

ND

SG

ND

5.1

V

*RE

SE

T

NC

DE

CK

TX

D

SG

ND

DE

CK

RX

D

SG

ND

FS

W3

SIG

NC

24 V

PG

ND

SG

ND

5 V

*RE

SE

T

DE

CK

TX

D

SG

ND

DE

CK

RX

D

SG

ND

FS

W3

SIG

CN2

LD

CM

24 V

PGND

5 V

SGND

PLDSENS1

CN7

PDM2 SW2

SGND

PDM2 SW1

NC

24 V

PDM2

NC

PDM1 SW2

SGND

PDM1 SW1

NC

24 V

PDM1

1

2

3

1

2

3

CN3

5 V

SGND

PLDSENS2

CN4

PFCL2

24 V

PFCL1

24 V

CCL

24 V

CN5

DOSW

SGND

5 V

DLSW1

SGND

5 V

DLSW2

SGND

5 V

NC

CN6

SCSW

SGND

5 V

PPSENS1 CLK

PPSENS1

5 V

PPSENS2 CLK

PPSENS2

5 V

PPSENS3 CLK

PPSENS3

5 V

PESENS CLK

PESENS

5 V

Wire color Mark

Brown

Yellow

Blue

White

Red

Orange

Light blue

Gray

Black

Purple

BN

YW

BE

WE

RD

OE

LB

GY

BK

PE

Copier

DH1(Service part)

DH2(Service part)

BE 10

BE 11

YW

BE

GY

RD

BK

LB GY

OE

GY

BN

CN1

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

CM

PDM2

PLDSENS1

PLDSENS2

PDM1

PDMPCB

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

WE

EW

WE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

BE

Drawer connectors

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

!

@

#

$

%

^

&

*

(

)

⁄

¤

‹

›

fi

fl

‡

°

·

‚

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PE

PE

PE

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

!

@

#

$

%

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

!

@

#

$

%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

Fax System (C)

1-1-1

3CM

CONTENTS1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names and their functions ............................................................................................................ 1-1-4

(1) Copier ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1-4(2) Operation panel ............................................................................................................................. 1-1-5(3) Basic fax screen on the touch panel .............................................................................................. 1-1-6

1-1-3 Mechanical construction ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-7

1-2 Installation1-2-1 Setting and registering data .................................................................................................................. 1-2-1

(1) Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1(2) Registration .................................................................................................................................... 1-2-2

1-2-2 Installing the optional add-on memory .................................................................................................. 1-2-3

1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................ 1-3-1

(1) Maintenance mode item list ........................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items ........................................................................................... 1-3-4

1-4 Error Code1-4-1 Error codes ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4-1

(1) Error code ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Table of general classification........................................................................................................ 1-4-2

(2-1) U004XX error code table: interrupted phase B ..................................................................... 1-4-4(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit ................................................................. 1-4-4(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error ............................................................... 1-4-5(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error .................................................................... 1-4-5(2-5) U010XX errror code table: G3 transmission .......................................................................... 1-4-6(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception ................................................................................ 1-4-8(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ...................................................................... 1-4-10(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception ............................................................................ 1-4-10(2-9) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission ............................................................. 1-4-10

1-5 Self Diagnosis1-5-1 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1

(1) Self diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-1

1-6 Requirements on PCB Replacement1-6-1 Updating the firmware ........................................................................................................................... 1-6-1

(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (FLASH ROM) ...................................................... 1-6-1(2) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Compact Flash card) ........................................... 1-6-2

2-1 Electrical Parts Layout2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-1

2-2 Operation of the PCBs2-2-1 Fax control PCB .................................................................................................................................... 2-2-12-2-2 NCU PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-52-2-3 Auxiliary power source PCB .................................................................................................................. 2-2-9

1-1-2

3CM

3CM

1-1-1


Type........................................................... Optional Fax KitCompatibility .............................................. Group 3Line Requirement ...................................... Subscription telephone lineTransmission Speed .................................. Within 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T #1 chart)Modem Speed ........................................... 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/

7200/4800/2400 bpsData Compression .................................... JBIG/MMR/MR/MHError Correction......................................... ECMMaximum Document Dimensions ............. Width: 11" [297 mm] Length: 63" [1600 mm]Automatic Document Feeder Capacity...... RADF: Max. 100 pages, ADF: Max. 70 pagesAuxiliary Scanning Line Density ................ Horizontal x Vertical

Normal (8 dots/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)Fine (8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)Super fine (8 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)Ultra fine (16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)

Recording Resolution ................................ 600 dpi x 600 dpiGrayscale .................................................. 128 levels (Value differential diffusion)Speed-Dial Keys ........................................ Max. 300 destinationsBroadcast Transmission ............................ Max. 300 destinationsPolling Reception ...................................... Max. 300 locationsInstalled Bitmap Memory .......................... 4 MBInstalled Imaging Memory ......................... 4 MB (including 1 MB of working memory)Management Reports and Lists ................ Activity Report, Confirmation List, User Setting List, One-Touch Key List,

Telephone Directory List, Program Dial List, Group Dial List, Encryption KeyList, Restricted Access Report, Department List

Options ...................................................... Memory (8 MB)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

3CM

1-1-2

Reception functions Manual receptionAutomatic receptionFax/telephone auto selectionTAD receptionD.R.D. reception*1

Remote switching

Transmission functions Abbreviated dialing (up to 300 numbers can be stored)One-touch dialing*2

Program dialing*2

Group dialing*2

Chain dialing*2

Redialing (manual/automatic)Dial confirmation

Communication functions Direct feed transmissionMemory transmissionDirect receptionMemory reception (F-coded confidential reception and relay broadcastreception)

Additional communication functions Broadcast transmission (up to 300 numbers)Polling communicationEncrypted communication (no compatibility with models before thefacsimile kit for 23/31 cpm copier)Password check communicationMemory fax forwardingReserved transmissionTimer transmissionInterrupt transmissionShort protocolECMF-coded transmissionF-coded confidential receptionF-coded bulletin board communicationF-coded relay broadcast

Supplementary communication functions Printing out from F-coded confidential boxManual transmissionTelephone directoryTransmission destination displayTone transmissionMemory back-up (60 min.*3)Entry into F-coded bulletin boardCommunication result display

Supplementary transmission functions Batch transmissionTTI transmissionBulletin boardRotation transmissionDuplex transmission*4

Initial communication speed setting

Supplementary reception functions Memory reception2-in-1 receptionAuto reduce receptionRotation receptionDuplex reception*5

Recording paper setting (auto selection, fixed size or fixed cassette)During-reception copyingReception date and time recording

3CM

1-1-3

Reports Activity reportTransmission reportReception reportPower failure reportDelayed communication reportConfirmation reportUser settings listEncryption key listManagement reportDepartment listAbbreviated dial listOne-touch key listTelephone directory listProgram dial listGroup dial list

Others Memory editingRemote diagnosisDepartment control for faxes

*1: For 120 V specifications only.*2: To be registered under one-touch keys. Up to 300 one-touch keys can be used for one-touch dialing, program dialing,

group dialing and chain dialing.*3: When an optional add-on memory is installed.*4: Available only when a duplex document processor is installed.*5: Available only when a duplex unit is installed.

3CM

1-1-4

Figure 1-1-1

1 Operation panel ..................................... Use the operation panel to perform the procedures required for faxcommunication.

2 Fax storage section ................................ Received documents are ejected and stored face-down in the fax storagesection. Up to 250 sheets can be stored in this section at one time.

3 Drawers .................................................. This fax machine comes standard with two drawers installed. Each drawercan hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (60 g/m2 - 105 g/m2).

4 Multi-Bypass .......................................... Paper can be set in the Multi-Bypass as well. In order to use the Multi-Bypass, it is necessary to select "ON" under "Turning Manual Paper FeedON/OFF".

5 Telephone jack (T) .................................. Use this jack to connect a separately purchased telephone to the fax.6 Line jack (L) ........................................... Use this jack to connect the fax to a telephone line using the modular cord.7 Main switch ............................................ Turn this switch ON ( | ) in order to perform fax and copy operations. The

message display will light and operation will be possible.• Document ProcessorThere are 2 optional document processors available for use with this machine: the document processors for feeding one-sided documents, and the duplex document processor for using both sides of 2-sided documents.* Both the document processor and duplex document processor can be used with the 25 copies per minute machine.

However, only the duplex document processor can be used with the 35 copies per minute machine.8 Document table ...................................... Set the documents you want to transmit on this table. Up to 70 sheets of up

to 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper, or up to 50 sheets of 8 1/2" x 14" or 11" x 17"[A3 or Folio] size paper, can be set at one time.

9 Document insert guides ......................... Adjust these guides to match the width of the documents.10 Document processor reversing cover ..... Open this cover if a document jams.11 Document eject cover ............................ Documents are ejected onto this cover after being scanned.12 Eject guide ............................................. Open this guide when transmitting documents of a large size such as 8 1/2" x

14" or 11" x 17" [A3 or Folio].13 Document processor open/close lever ... Operate this lever when opening and closing the document processor.14 Document set indicator .......................... This indicator indicates the status of the documents set in the document

processor. Documents are set properly when the indicator is lit green.


(1) Copier

Figure 1-1-2

3CM

1-1-5

(2) Operation panel

1 Touch panel ......................... Indicates operation procedures as well as trouble with the machine. Keys related tooperational procedures which appear on the touch panel with their name displayed areindicated in this handbook within double quotation marks. In addition, you will beinstructed to "touch" any keys which appear on the touch panel rather than "press" them.(Ex.: Touch the "xxx" key.)

2 Keypad ................................ Use the keypad to enter fax numbers, etc.* Even if your telephone service is for pulse dialing, press the star (*) key and any key

pressed on the keypad after that will transmit the related tone signal. (Inch versiononly)

3 Start key .............................. Press this key when you want to initiate a fax communication.4 Fax key/Fax indicator .......... Press this key when you want to switch between the Copy Operation and Fax Operation

modes. The Fax indicator is lit when the machine is in the Fax Operation mode.5 Fax data indicator ................ When received documents or other data are being stored in memory, this indicator will

flash and then light continuously.6 Reset key ............................ Press this key when you want to cancel an operation in progress and have the touch

panel return to the initial mode settings.7 Stop/Clear key..................... Press this key when you want to delete registered fax numbers or names, as well as

when you want to stop an operation in progress.8 Fax Priority key ................... Press this key when you want to give priority to printing out a received fax during a copy

operation.9 Default key .......................... Press this key when you want to perform settings related to the various default modes for

the fax functions of this machine.10 Interrupt key/indicator lamp .. Press this key when you want to interrupt a fax reception in order to make copies. The

indicator lamp in the Interrupt key will light when the machine is in the Interrupt mode.

Figure 1-1-3

3CM

1-1-6

1 Message display ........................... Current status, the next step in a procedure and error messages are shown in themessage display.

2 Number of destinations display ..... The number of destinations that you have chosen to dial to is shown in this area.3 Speed-dial keys ............................. Keys that you have registered to function as either a one-touch key, a group dial

key (G), a program key (P) or a chain dial key (C) are displayed here.4 "Address book" key ....................... Touch this key when you want to use the address book.5 "Abbrev." key ................................. Touch this key when you want to use the abbreviated number that a destination

number is registered under in order to dial that number.6 "TX setting" key ............................. Touch this key when you want to perform settings related to transmission

conditions such as the size of the documents to be transmitted, the image qualityof those documents, the contrast at which you want to send them and the timewhen they should be sent. Once you press this key, the TX Setting screen willappear.

7 " " and " " cursor keys .............. Use these keys when you want to display speed-dial keys other than those whichare currently displayed.

8 "Dest. check" key .......................... Touch this key when you have entered multiple destination fax numbers usingspeed-dial keys, etc., and you want to check the list of those numbers.

9 "Re-dial" key .................................. Touch this key when you want to have the fax automatically redial the mostrecently dialed number

10 "On-hook" key ............................... When a separately purchased telephone is connected to this fax machine and youtouch this key, you can dial a destination number without having to pick up thereceiver.

11 "Memory TX" / "Dir. Feed Tx" key .. When you want to switch between the Memory Transmission mode ("Memory Tx")and the Direct Feed Transmission mode ("Dir. Feed Tx"). The mode will changeeach time you touch this key.

12 Reception mode select key ........... Touch this key when you want to select a different reception mode. The mode willchange each time you touch this key.

13 Memory bar ................................... Indicates the amount of data stored in memory. As documents are being stored,the bar will move towards "100%" indicating that the data stored in memory isincreasing. Once it reaches "100%", no more documents can be stored in memory.

14 Fax number display ....................... The number that you have entered to dial is displayed here.15 "Basic" key .................................... Touch this key when you want to return to the basic fax screen.16 "Application" key ........................... Touch this key when you want to use one of the various functions of this fax

machine such as polling, etc.17 "Register" ["Registration"] key ....... Touch this key when you want to perform one of the various registration

procedures of this fax machine.18 "Print Report" key .......................... Touch this key when you want to print out one of the various reports or lists of this

fax machine.

(3) Basic fax screen on the touch panelThe initial screen that appears in the touch panel when you press the Fax key in any other mode in order to change to theFax Operation mode is called the "basic fax screen". The following contains information on the basic keys which aredisplayed in this screen and their functions.

Figure 1-1-4

3CM

1-1-7


RE

LAY

RE

M

FO

PC

B

GN

D

12V

TB

3

TB

21-

11-

51-

4

1-3

1-2

TB3TB1

7-1

8-68-58-3

8-18-78-88-9

7-2

6-16-2

RELAY INNEUTRAL IN

TB

4

TB

5

Add

-on

mem

ory

(opt

ion)

3-5

3-4

GN

D

5.2V

APSPCB

RE

LAY

OU

T

LIV

E(I

N)

LIV

E(O

UT

)

24V

OP

CB

SPEAKER

A.GND

BATTG(3.3V)2

1

211

2

12

CN

19

SP

BU

BA

T

CN

1

CN

4C

N3

NC

UP

CB

FC

PC

B

MSW

REM

MSW

PSPCB

MPCB

LINE

TEL/Handset(option*)

*Optional for 120 V specifications only.

Figure 1-1-5

The fax system consists of the fax control PCB (FCPCB), NCU PCB (NCUPCB), auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB),fax operation unit PCB (FOPCB), speaker (SP), backup battery (BUBAT) and optional add-on memory.

3CM

1-1-8

3CM

1-2-1

1-2-1 Setting and registering data

After setting up the machine, set or register the following data.

(1) Settings

• Setting the type of telephone line*1

Select the setting (pulse or tone) according to the type of telephone line to be used.• Setting the document size for scanning from the document feeder

Select the setting (“Standard size original” or “Long original”) for scanning the original fed from the DF.• Setting the paper feed selection mode

Select the paper feed mode (“Auto Selection mode”, “Fixed Size mode” or “Fixed Cassette mode”) for printing receivedfax or reports.

• Setting 2-in-1 receptionSelect whether or not to output two successively-received A5/81/2" × 51/2" documents onto one A4R/81/2" × 11" page.

• Setting the reception modeSelect an automatic reception mode (automatic fax reception, fax/telephone auto selection or D.R.D. reception*1).

• Setting the memory fax forwardingSelect whether or not to perform memory fax forwarding.

• Setting report output condition• Select the output condition for the management report (output or not output by department).• Select the output condition for the activity report (output or not output after every 50 communications)• Select the output condition for the transmission report (output or not output after each transmission)• Select the output condition for the reception report (output or not output after each reception)• Select the output condition for the timer communication report (output or not output after each timer programming).

• Setting the TTI transmissionSelect whether or not to add the transmit terminal identifier (TTI) to the transmitting document.

• Setting reception date and time recordingSelect whether or not to record the date and time on received documents.

• Setting the password check communicationSelect whether or not to perform password check communication.

• Setting the speaker volumeSet the volume of the speaker in the on-hook mode (4 levels).

• Setting the alarm buzzer volumeSet the volume of the alarm that sounds during events such as when an error occurs (3 levels).

• Setting the monitoring volumeSet the volume for the sounds from the speaker (4 levels).

• Setting the bulletin boardSelect whether or not to use the bulletin board during polling transmission.

• Setting duplex reception*2

Select whether or not to print received documents on both sides of the paper.• Setting the number of rings for automatic reception

Select the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the auto receptionmode.

• Setting the number of rings for TAD receptionSet the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the TAD receptionmode.

• Setting the number of rings for fax/telephone auto select mode*1

Set the number of rings (0 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the fax/telephone autoselect mode.

• Setting remote diagnosisSet to take advantage of our remote diagnosis system.

• Setting the dial confirmationSet whether or not to display information such as destination names, with functions that use one-touch keys (one-touchdialing, group dialing and program dialing).

• Setting the default transmission modeSelect the transmission mode (memory transmission or direct feed transmission) to be used in the initial mode.

*1: For 120 V specifications only.*2: When an optional duplex unit is installed.

3CM

1-2-2

(2) Registration• Date and time

Set the current date and time.• Self station information

Register the self telephone number, self station name and self station ID.• One-touch dialing

Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under one-touch keys. Up to 300 entries can be registered.• Abbreviated dialing

Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names to desired abbreviated numbers (001 to 300). Up to300entries can be registered.

• Group dialingRegister multiple destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under a one-touch key for group dialing. Up to 300entries can be registered.

• Program dialingRegister frequently used communication modes or fax numbers under one-touch keys. Up to 300 entries can beregistered.

• Chain dialingRegister chain numbers and names under one-touch keys. Up to 300 entries can be registered.

• Remote switching numberChange the remote switching number, which is set to “55” at the factory, for receiving faxes using the telephoneconnected to the machine.

• Management passwordRegister a 4-digit password, which is set to “6482” at the factory, for encrypted communication.

• Cipher key passwordRegister a 16-digit cipher key password for encrypted communication.

• Encryption boxesRegister encryption boxes for receiving encrypted transmissions. Up to 20 boxes can be registered.

• Permit telephone numbers and IDsRegister the password (permit telephone number or ID) for password check communication.

• F-code confidential boxesRegister F-code confidential boxes for F-code based confidential communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.

• F-code relay boxesRegister F-code relay box for F-code based relay broadcast communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.

• Access codesRegister access codes for restricted access. Up to 50 codes can be registered.

3CM

1-2-3

1-2-2 Installing the optional add-on memory

Add-on memory installation on the fax control PCB assembly requires the following parts:8 MB add-on memory (P/N: 2AW6001)

<Procedure> 1. Remove 13 screws and take off the rear cover.

2. If the printing system is installed: Remove the 2 screws holding theprinter system in place, and pull the printing system out of thecontroller box.

3. Remove 13 screws and take off the controller-box cover.

Figure 1-2-1

Rear cover

Screws

Printing system

Screws

Controller-box cover

Screws

Figure 1-2-2

Figure 1-2-3

3CM

1-2-4

Figure 1-2-4

4. Insert the Memory module DIMM (8MB) at an angle into thememory slot on the fax board.

Important: The Memory module DIMM (8MB) must be installedonto the fax board. Please be sure that you do notinstall it onto the main PCB.

5. Push the free end of the module down toward the board.


Memory module DIMMMemory slot

1-3-1

3CM

Section Item Maintenance item contents InitialNo. setting*


U601 Initializing permanent data —

U602 Setting factory defaults —

U603 Setting the user registration data• Setting the self telephone number —• Setting the type of telephone line —• Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode —• Setting remote diagnostic transmission —

U604 Clearing data• Clearing transmission history —• Initializing the management password —• Initializing the F-code confidential box ID —• Initializes the F-code relay box ID —• Initializes the encription box ID —

U605 Setting the system (operational)• Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full

during memory transmission —• Setting an alarm for when reception is completed —• Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed —• Setting the addition of an image to the report —• Setting the error report display format —• Setting the line-monitoring period —• Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching —• Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching —• Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality —

U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)• Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off —• Setting the date format —• Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized —• Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized —• Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list —

U607 Setting the system (communication 1)• Setting the auto redialing interval —• Setting the number of times of auto redialing —• Setting the communication starting speed —• Setting the reception speed —• Setting the mode for remote switching —• Setting the transmission intervals —• Sets the loop current detection before dialing —• Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes —

U608 Setting transmission• Setting the method to process errors —• Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception —• Setting the reference for RTN signal output —• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the sender —• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the receiver —• Setting ECM transmission —• Setting ECM reception —• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1 —• Setting the frequency of the CED signal —

U609 Setting communication time• Setting the T0 time-out time —• Setting the T1 time-out time —• Setting the T2 time-out time 69• Setting the Ta time-out time 30• Setting the Tb1 time-out time 20• Setting the Tb2 time-out time 80• Setting the Tc time-out time 60• Setting the Td time-out time —

1-3-1 Maintenance mode

(1) Maintenance mode item list

Fax

1-3-2

3CM

Section Item Maintenance item contents InitialNo. setting

Fax U610 Setting the modem output level• Setting the modem output level —• Adjusting the modem output level —

U611 G3 cable equalizer• Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer —• Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer —

U612 Setting the modem detection level —

U613 Setting the DTMF output level• Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level —• Setting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level —

U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level• Adjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level —• Adjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level —

U615 Setting the NCU• Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN —• Setting PSTN dial tone detection —• Setting busy tone detection —• Setting for a PBX —

U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses• Make time (10 PPS) —• Make time (20 PPS) —

U617 Outputting lists• Settings list —• Action list —• Monitor list —• Own-status report —• Protocol list —• One-touch dialing ECM setting list —

U650 Setting the system 1• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax

at 100% magnification 3• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax

in the auto reduction mode 3• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter)

in the auto reduction mode 3• Setting the recording width for inch specifications —• Setting automatic printing of the protocol list —

U651 Setting the system 2• Setting the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction

for rotation reception 3• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 7• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction

when A4 paper is set 22• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction

when letter size paper is set 26

U660 Setting the system (communication 2)• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2 —• Setting the short protocol transmission —• Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission —• Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/ telephone auto select mode —• Turning ECM for one-touch dialing on/off —

U670 Setting the system (communication 3)• Setting if V.34 transmission is available —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz) —

U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version —

1-3-3

3CM


U881 Using the flash-memory jig• Saving data from SRAM into the jig —• Writing data from the jig into RAM• Writing the boot program into the jig

U894 Performing board test• Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM —• Performing tests on optional memory —


Fax

Others

3CM

1-3-4




DescriptionInitializes software switches and all data in the SRAM on the fax control PCB, according to the destination andOEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB.

Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.

Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for thedestination code).

INI. ALL DATA

COUNTRY CODE:000

2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.There is no operation necessary on this screen.

INI. ALL DATA

OEM CODE:000

3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key. 4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is

displayed two seconds later.

INI. ALL DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. ALL DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

CautionIf initialized with "000" (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C082 (fax controlPCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C082 (fax control PCB problem)is detected, press the COPY/FAX switching key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover andthen execute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.

3CM

1-3-5


Destination code list


Code

000009080084088108126136137152156


ItalyGermanySpainU.K.Netherlands

159169181242243253

Code DestinationDestination


Taiwan

Code

253

254

Destination

U600(cont.)

U601 Initializing permanent data

DescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data on the fax control PCB according to thedestination and OEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB without changing user registration data and factory settings.



INI. KEEP DATA

COUNTRY CODE:000


INI. KEEP DATA

OEM CODE:000



INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

CautionIf initialized with "000" (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C082 (fax controlPCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C082 (fax control PCB problem)is detected, press the COPY/FAX switching key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover andthen execute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.


3CM

1-3-6

U602 Setting factory defaults

DescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data and the SRAM on the fax control PCB, accordingto the destination and OEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB to the factory default.

Method 1. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key. 2. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is


INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

3CM

1-3-7


U603 Setting the user registration data

DescriptionMakes user settings to enable the use of the copier as a fax.

PurposeTo be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary.

Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate item.

The screen for the selected item appears.

Sets the self telephone number.Sets the type of telephone line.Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode.Sets remote diagnostic transmission.

Display

SELF TEL No.LINE TYPERINGS (F/T) #REMOTE DIAG

Description

Setting the self telephone number 1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.

Up to 20 digits can be entered.To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored telephone number, reset by pressing thestop/clear key.

2. Press the start key. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

The item-selection screen does not reappear until registration or deletion processing is completed.

Setting the type of telephone line1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

DTMF10 PPS20 PPS

Display

1: DTMF2: 103: 20

Description

2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select modeUse this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receivingmode when fax/telephone auto-select is enabled. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 15

Description

Number of fax/telephone rings

Setting range

If you set this to 0, the unit will start fax reception without any ringing. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Setting remote diagnostic transmission 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic transmission is to be enabled.

Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




3CM

1-3-8

U604 Clearing data

DescriptionInitializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history and IDs.

PurposeUsed to clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.

Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate item.

Initialization processing starts. When processing is finished, the screen displays "COMPLETED".

Clears the activity report, error list, action list, transmission history of each department as listed on the department control report, transmission history for displaying the transmission results, document number, timer program information, protocol list, and other transmission history such as image data, excluding items regarding the machine variation adjustment.Initializes the management password.Initializes the F-code confidential box ID.Initializes the F-code relay box ID.Initializes the encription box ID.

Display

COMM. REC

MANAGE PWF-CODE IDF-CODE IDENCRPT ID

Description



U605 Setting the system (operational)

DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.



Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmission.Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed.Sets for the addition of an image to the report.Sets the error report display format.Sets the line-monitoring period.Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning quality.

Display

MEM. FULL

FIN. ALARMAUTO REDU

ADD IMAGEERR. CODEMONITORTIME (ONE)TIME (CON)RESOLUT

Description

Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmissionUsed to select whether to send only stored data or to display an error indication and cancel transmission ifmemory becomes full during memory transmission. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Whether to continue memory transmission or to clear the memory can be selected by the user.Memory is forcibly cleared.

Display

1: CONT

2: STOP

Description


3CM

1-3-9


Setting an alarm for when reception is completed 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

An alarm rings.An alarm does not ring.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performedSets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100%magnification. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper.Auto reduction is not performed.

Display

1: ON

2: OFF

Description


Setting the addition of an image to the reportSelects if an image is to be added to the transmission report. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Image added.Image not added.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the error report display formatSelects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error occurs. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR or STOP).Records a six-digit error code.Records either an error message or code.

Display

1: WORDS2: CODE3: MIX

Description


Setting the line-monitoring periodSets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the start to the end, it can be checkedwhether the transmission was correct or not. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Until transmission is completed.After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS signal.

Display

1: END2: DIS

Description


Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will bedisplayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255 ms

Description

One-shot detection time for remote switching

Setting range


U605(cont.)


3CM

1-3-10

Setting the continuous detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will bedisplayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255 ms

Description

Continuous detection time for remote switching

Setting range


Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning qualitySet to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

StandardFineSuper fineUltra fine

Display

1: S2: F3: SF4: UF

Description



U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)

DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.

Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Note: Since this model does not provide LED error indicators, this setting has no affect on actual operation.

Sets the conditions under which an error indicator turns off.Sets the date format.Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized.Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized.Sets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list.

Display

ALARM LED OFFDATE PATTERNRESO. LOCKDENS. LOCKREPORT SKIP

Description

Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

An error indicator turns off only when the reset key is pressed.An error indicator turns off when any key is pressed, an original is inserted or the next transmission is started.

Display

1: RESET

2: COMM

Description


Setting the date formatSelects the date format on the respective reports and sender’s information record. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Year/month/dayMonth/day/yearDay/month/year

Display

1: YMD2: MDY3: DMY

Order


U605(cont.)

3CM

1-3-11


Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initializedSets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Resolution is initialized.Resolution is not initialized.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initializedSets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Density is initialized.Density is not initialized.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the listSets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Unregistered numbers are skipped.Unregistered numbers are not skipped.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



U606(cont.)


3CM

1-3-12

U607 Setting the system (communication 1)

DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.



Sets the auto redialing interval.Sets the number of times of auto redialing.Sets the communication starting speed.Sets the reception speed.Sets the mode for remote switching.Sets the transmission intervals.Sets the loop current detection before dialing.Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.

Display

INTERVALTIMESTX SPEEDRX SPEEDREMOTECALL INTDC LOOPDIS 4BYTE

Description

Setting the auto redialing intervalChange the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redialinterval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

1 to 9 min.

Description

Redialing interval

Setting range


Setting the number of times of auto redialing 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 9

Description

Number of redialing

Setting range

When set to 0, no redialing is performed. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Setting the communication starting speedSets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capability,V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.17, 14400 bpsV.17, 9600 bpsV.27ter, 4800 bpsV.27ter, 2400 bps

Display

1: 1442: 963: 484: 24

Description


Setting the reception speedSets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unithas V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27terV.29, V.27terV.27terV.27ter (fallback only)

Display

1: 1442: 963: 484: 24

Description


3CM

1-3-13


U607(cont.)

Setting the mode for remote switchingSets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type oftelephone connected to the machine. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

One-shot detectionContinuous detection

Display

1: ONE2: CONT

Description


Setting the transmission intervalsSets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next transmission after the previoustransmission was completed. Change the setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission,such as broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

10 s30 s70 s120 s

Display

1: 102: 303: 704: 120

Description


Setting the loop current detection before dialingSets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Performs loop current detection before dialing.Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytesSets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




3CM

1-3-14

U608 Setting transmission

DescriptionMakes settings regarding fax transmission.



Sets the method to process errors.Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.Sets the reference for RTN signal output.Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.Sets ECM transmission.Sets ECM reception.Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.Sets the frequency of the CED signal.

Display

ERRORDIS-2 RESRTN CHECKTX ECHORX ECHOECM TXECM RXTCF CHECKCED FREQ.

Description

Setting the method to process errorsSelects if transmission is to be treated as an error if an RTN or PIN signal is received. If it is treated as an error,an alarm sounds and a transmission report is output. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Transmission is not treated as an error.Transmission is treated as an error.

Display

1: OK2: ERROR

Description


Setting the number of times of DIS signal receptionSets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures fortransmission errors and other problems. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Responds to the first signal.Responds to the second signal.

Display

1: ONCE2: TWICE

Description


Setting the reference for RTN signal outputSets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to thequality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Error line rate of 5%Error line rate of 10%Error line rate of 15%Error line rate of 20%

Display

1: 52: 103: 154: 20

Description


3CM

1-3-15


Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the senderSets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due toechoes at the sender. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.

Display

1: 5002: 300

Description


Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiverSets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received. Used when problemsoccur due to echoes at the receiver. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.

Display

1: 5002: 75

Description


Setting ECM transmissionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM transmission is enabled.ECM transmission is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting ECM receptionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM reception is enabled.ECM reception is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measureto ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255

Description

Number of allowed error bytes when detecting TCF

Setting range


U608(cont.)


3CM

1-3-16

Setting the frequency of the CED signalSets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance forinternational communications. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.

2100 Hz1100 Hz

Display

1: 21002: 1100

Frequency of the CED signal



U609 Setting communication time

DescriptionSets the time-out time for fax transmission.

PurposeUsed mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications.



Sets the T0 time-out time.Sets the T1 time-out time.Sets the T2 time-out time.Sets the Ta time-out time.Sets the Tb1 time-out time.Sets the Tb2 time-out time.Sets the Tc time-out time.Sets the Td time-out time.

Display

T0T1T2TaTb1Tb2TcTd

Description

Setting the T0 time-out timeSets the time before detecting a DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent. Depending on the quality of theexchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected.Change the setting to prevent this problem. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

30 to 90 s

Description

T0 time-out time

Setting range


Setting the T1 time-out timeSets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for thismaintenance item. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

30 to 90 s

Description

T1 time-out time

Setting range


U608(cont.)

3CM

1-3-17


Setting the T2 time-out timeThe T2 time-out time decides the following.• From CFR signal output to image data reception• From image data reception to the next signal reception• In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

T2 time-out time

Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step

1 to 255 69 100 ms


Setting the Ta time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connectedtelephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta settime, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode,change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Ta time-out time

Setting range Initial setting

1 to 255 s 30


Ta

Tb2

Tb1Rin

g de

tect

ion

Line

con

nect

ion

as a

fax

mac

hine

Rin

gs

Rin

g ba

ck to

ne s

end

star

t

Sta

rt o

f fax

rec

eptio

n

Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time

Setting the Tb1 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call asa fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception isunsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tb1 time-out time


1 to 255 20 100 ms


Setting the Tb2 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connectedtelephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode,change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tb2 time-out time


1 to 255 80 100 ms


U609(cont.)


3CM

1-3-18

U609(cont.)

Setting the Tc time-out timeIn the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connectedtelephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time.In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tc time-out time


1 to 255 s 60


Setting the Td time-out timeSets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In theTAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be surenot to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Td time-out time

Setting range

1 to 255 s



3CM

1-3-19


U610 Setting the modem output level

DescriptionSets the modem output level.



Sets the modem output level.Adjusts the modem output level.

Display

SGL LEVEL MODEMSGL OUTPUT ADJ

Description

Setting the modem output levelTo be set when installing the machine in order to adapt to the line characteristics.1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

4 to 12

Description

Modem output level

Setting range


Adjusting the modem output levelNo change is necessary from the factory default. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

1.0 dBm0.75 dBm0.5 dBm0.25 dBm0 dBm–0.25 dBm–0.5 dBm–0.75 dBm–1.0 dBm

Setting

121110987654

Output level




3CM

1-3-20

U611 G3 cable equalizer

DescriptionSets the G3 cable equalizer.



Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.

Display

REG. G3 TX EQRREG. G3 RX EQR

Description

Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 km1.8 km3.6 km7.2 km

Display

1: 02: 183: 364: 72

Description


Setting the G3 reception cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 km1.8 km3.6 km7.2 km

Display

1: 02: 183: 364: 72

Description



3CM

1-3-21


U612 Setting the modem detection level

DescriptionSets the modem detection level.

PurposeUsed to improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.


Setting 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

–33 dBm–38 dBm–43 dBm–47 dBm

Display

1: 332: 383: 434: 47

Description



U613 Setting the DTMF output level

DescriptionSets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.

PurposeUsed if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone.



Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.

Display

DTMF TX LEVEL (H)DTMF TX LEVEL (L)

Description


0 to 255

Description

DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level

Setting range

E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is –8 dBm. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.



3CM

1-3-22

U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level

DescriptionAdjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.

PurposeNo change is necessary from the factory default.



Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.

Display

SGL LVL DTMF (H)SGL LVL DTMF (L)

Description



Setting

121110987654




3CM

1-3-23


U615 Setting the NCU

DescriptionMakes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).

PurposeTo be set when installing the facsimile kit.



Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.Sets PSTN dial tone detection.Sets busy tone detection.Setting for a PBX.

Display

EXCHANGEDIAL TONEBUSY TONEPBX SETTING

Description

Setting the connection to PBX/PSTNSelects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Connected to the public switched telephone network.Connected to a PBX.

Display

1: PSTN2: PBX

Description


Setting PSTN dial tone detectionSelects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a publicswitched telephone network. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Detects the dial tone.Does not detect the dial tone.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting busy tone detectionWhen a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, orthe busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented.However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Detects busy tone.Does not detect busy tone.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3CM

1-3-24

Setting for a PBXSelects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Earth modeFlashing modeCode number mode

Display

1: EARTH2: FLS3: LOOP

Description



U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses

DescriptionAdjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial pulses.

PurposeChange the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20 PPS is for Japanese specificationsonly and no setting is necessary for other specifications.



Make time (10 PPS)Make time (20 PPS)

Display

MAKE TIME (10 PPS)MAKE TIME (20 PPS)

Description


1 to 99 (ms)1 to 49 (ms)

Description

Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS)Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS)

Setting range



U615(cont.)

3CM

1-3-25


U617 Outputting lists

DescriptionOutputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions.

PurposeUsed to check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax.

Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate list selection.

The selected list is output.

Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number, confidential boxes, ROM versions and other information.Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details and other information.Outputs a list of transmission speeds, resolutions, minimum transmission time and other information.Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode (own-status report) regarding fax transmission only.Outputs a list of transmission procedures.Outputs a list of ECM settings for one-touch dialing.

Display

SETTING LIST

ACTION LIST

MONITOR LIST

SELF ST RPT

PROTOCOL LIST1-T. ECM

Description


3CM

1-3-26

U650 Setting the system 1

DescriptionMakes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automaticprinting of the protocol list.



Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification.Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode.Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode.Sets the recording width for inch specifications.Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.

Display

CUT LINE (100%)

CUT LINE (AUTO)

CUT LINE (A4)

RX WIDTH 11"PROTOCOL PRT

Description

Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnificationSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those linesare ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving at 100%


0 to 22 3 6 lines

Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease it if the received image does notinclude the entire transmitted data.


Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, thoselines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded onthe same page. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode


0 to 22 3 6 lines

Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edgemargin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.


3CM

1-3-27


Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions below.If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data ona page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.• With A4R present and folio absent in the drawers• With letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode


0 to 22 3 6 lines



Setting the recording width for inch specificationsSets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inch-specification machine. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and records at 100% magnifications.Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.

Display

1: 11 × 17

2: B4

Description


Setting the automatic printing of the protocol listSets if the protocol list is automatically printed out. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

The protocol list is not printed out automatically.The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication only if a communication error occurs.The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.

Display

1: OFF2: ERROR

3: ON

Description



U650(cont.)


3CM

1-3-28


DescriptionSets the variation range in rotation reception and the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.



Sets the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction for rotation reception.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

Display

ROTAT. RX ERR

ADJ LINESADJ LINES (A4)

ADJ LINES (LT)

Description

Setting the variations range in rotation receptionSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data exceeds the acceptable number oflines in the rotation reception mode. If the number of excessive lines is smaller than the set value, those linesare ignored and rotation reception is performed; if it is larger than the set value, rotation reception is notperformed. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of variation lines in the auxiliary scanning direction


0 to 255 3

Even if rotation reception fails, it can be enabled by increasing this value, however, some parts of thereceived image may not be printed.


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction


0 to 22 7


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set


0 to 22 22


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionwhen letter size paper is set


0 to 26 26



3CM

1-3-29




PurposeTo reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.



Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2.Sets the short protocol transmission.Sets the reception of short protocol transmission.Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.Turns ECM for one-touch dialing on/off.

Display

TCF CHECK 2SHORT PROTOCOL TXSHORT PROTOCOL RXNUMBER of CNG (F/T) 1TOUCH ECM

Description

Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.

Checks for 1.0 s.Checks for 0.8 s.

Display

1: LONG2: SHORT

Description


Setting the short protocol transmissionSets if short protocol transmission is performed. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Short protocol transmission is performed.Short protocol transmission is not performed.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the reception of a short protocol transmissionSelects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine,communication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignoreshort protocol transmission to prevent such problems. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Receives short protocol transmission.Ignores short protocol transmission.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3CM

1-3-30

Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select modeSets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Detects CNG once.Detects CNG twice.

Display

1: 1 TIME2: 2 TIMES

Description


Setting ECM for each one-touch keyTurns ECM on/off for each one-touch key. 1. Enter a registered two-digit one-touch key number and press the start key. 2. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM communication is performed for all one-touch keys.Disables the ECM for one-touch keys.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description

3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering a one-touch key number is displayed.To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering a one-touchkey number.


U660(cont.)

3CM

1-3-31





Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate list selection.


Enables or disables V.34 communication.Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz).

Display

V.34 MODEMV.34-3429HzV.34-3200HzV.34-3000HzV.34-2800 Hz

Description

Enabling/disabling V.34 communicationSets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Display

1: ON2: TX3: RX4: OFF

Description


Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz)Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3CM

1-3-32



Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


CompletionPress the stop clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U680 Displaying the fax board ROM versionNote: On Japanese domestic models, this also displays the font ROM version.

DescriptionDisplays the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.

PurposeUsed to check the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.

Method 1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax control PCB is displayed.


U670(cont.)

3CM

1-3-33


U881 Using the flash-memory jig.

DescriptionMoves data or program code between the flash-memory jig and the machine's SRAM.

PurposeWhen replacing the fax control PCB, use this procedure to save SRAM data from the old PCB and load it intothe new PCB.

Start 1. Press the start key. The item-selection screen appears. 2. Press the appropriate item.


UPLOAD TO JIG:ALL DOWNLOAD FROM JIG: AllWRITE BOOT PROGRAMUPLOAD TO JIG:DIALDOWNLOAD FROM JIG: DIAL

Display Description

Saves all SRAM data into the jig.Loads all data saved in the jig into the machine's SRAM.Loads the boot program into the jig.

Currently not effective (as of May 2001). Display only.

Saving SRAM data into the jigSaves SRAM data into the jig.

DOWNLOAD FROM JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data is saved into the jig, and the screen indicates the result.• If the operation was successful:

DOWNLOAD FROM JIG

OK

• If the operation failed:

DOWNLOAD FROM JIG

NG XXX

If these error code explanations are on the same page, then "below". If on the next page, then "on the nextpage". If on some other page, then "on page XX".>>

2. Press the stop key. 3. Turn the power off.

where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See "Error Codes for Operation U881," below.


3CM

1-3-34


U881 Writing data from the flash-memory jig into SRAMWrites the data from the jig into the machine's SRAM.

UPLOAD TO JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data write is executed, and the screen displays the result.• If the write operation was successful:

UPLOAD TO JIG

OK

• If the write operation failed:

UPLOAD TO JIG

NG XXX


Writing the boot program into the jigWrites the boot program into the flash memory in the jig. 1. When this item is pressed, the machine writes the boot program into the jig's flash memory, and the screen

displays the result.• If the write operation was successful:

WRITE BOOT PRG.

OK


WRITE BOOT PRG.

NG XXX



3CM

1-3-35


Jig not present.

No CF card.

No data in CF card.

CF data is incompatible. (This error occurs if you change the file name and attempt to loadthe data into a different machine model.)

Bad CF data (Checksum error)

CF read error

CF write error

No data is jig's flash memory // Incompatible data in jig's flash memory(SRAM data has not yet been saved // Attempt was made to load data into a differentmodel.)

Jig flash-memory read error(Following SRAM read, flash-memory data failed to match SRAM data.)

Jig flash-memory write error

Other error

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

Code Meaning

U881 Error Codes for Operation U881


3CM

1-3-36

U881 Data and Program Upload/Download Flows [Conceptual Drawings]• Saving Stored Data into Jig (Maintenance Mode)

• With CF • Without CF

• Loading Saved Data (Maintenance Mode)• With CF • Without CF

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

Jig

Data

Program

Data

CF

FlashBoot

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

JigFlashBoot Data

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

Jig

Data

Program

Data

CF

FlashBoot

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

Jig

FlashBoot Data

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

3CM

1-3-37


• Writing the fax program (Executes automatically when the jig is started.)

• Writing the boot program (Maintenance Mode)

U881

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

JigFlashBoot Data

Program

Data

CF

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

JigFlashBoot Data

Program

Data

CF

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow


3CM

1-3-38

U894 Performing board test

DescriptionPerforms tests on the SRAM, DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and optional memory on the fax controlPCB.

PurposeUsed to check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective installed memories.


The test executes.

Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.Performs tests on optional memory.

Display

BOARD MEMORYBOARD OP. MEM

Description

Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM 1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.

• When the test result is OK:

TEST MEMORY

OK

• If the test result is NG:

TEST MEMORY

NG DRAM IMG 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗ ******: address

DRAM IMG: DRAM (image memory) errorDRAM B.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) errorSRAM: SRAM error

To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Performing tests on optional memory 1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.


TEST OPTION MEMORY

OK


TEST OPTION MEMORY

NG DRAM B.M 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗ ******: address

• If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):

TEST OPTION MEMORY

NG DRAM B.M


CompletionIf the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main switch off and on.

3CM

1-3-39



DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the printer board or facsimile kit isinstalled.

PurposeTo check the condition of use of the printer or fax.

MethodPress the start key. The print count of the printer or fax is displayed.

Setting 1. Press the appropriate item. 2. Enter a six-digit numerical value using the numeric keys. To clear both of the printer and fax counts, press

the reset key. 3. Press the start key. The count is set.


3CM

1-3-40

3CM

1-4-1

1-4-1 Error codes

(1) Error codeError codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication "U"followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an "E" indication, followed by fivedigits.)The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate thedetailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have "00" as the last two digits.

Error code

U X X X X X

Detailed classification of error codeGeneral classification of error codeError code indication

3CM

1-4-2

(2) Table of general classification

Error code Description

U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.

U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.

U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 1-

4-4 "U004XX error code table").

U00500 Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after

interruption.

U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-4 "U006XX

error code table").

U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.

U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 "U008XX error code table").

U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 "U009XX error code table").

U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 "U010XX error

code table").

U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 "U011XX error code

table").

U012XX Not used.

U013XX Not used.

U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.

U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.

U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.

U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode

(refer to page 1-4-10 "U017XX error code table").

U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode

(refer to page 1-4-10 "U018XX error code table").

U02200 F-code based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the F-code

relay box was deleted.

U02400 An interoffice F-code based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the

specified relay box number.

U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.

U03200 In interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box specified by

the destination unit.

U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in

permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception,

operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.

U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit

is either of our make or by another manufacturer).

U03500 In interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, the specified F-code confidential box

number was not registered in the destination unit.

U03600 An interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in

the specified F-code confidential box number.

U03700 Interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no F-

code based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any F-code

confidential box in the destination unit.

U04000 In interoffice F-code based transmission mode, the specified F-code box number was not

registered in the destination unit.

U04100 F-code based transmission failed because the destination unit had no F-code based reception

capability.

3CM

1-4-3


U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.

U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication

capability.

U044XX Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted

transmission (refer to page 1-4-10 "U044XX error code table").

U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.

U05100 Password check transmission was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.

U05200 Password check reception was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.

U05300 Destination unit in password check reception mode did not receive data because the permit ID

did not agree.

U09000 G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine.

U12000 In F-code based relay reception, memory overflowed.

U14000 In F-code based confidential reception, memory overflowed.

U14100 In interoffice F-code based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.

U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.

U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.

U19200 Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred.

U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.

U19400 Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.

3CM

1-4-4

(2-1) U004XX error code table: interrupted phase B


U00420 A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in

permit ID or telephone number.

U00421 F-code based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified F-code

relay box number.

U00430 A polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the

transmitting unit. Or, F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but

interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.

U00431 An F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified F-code

confidential box was not registered.

U00432 An F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in F-code

confidential box numbers.

U00433 F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the

F-code confidential box.

U00435 F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because the

specified F-code confidential box was being accessed.

U00440 F-code based confidential reception or F-code based relay reception was interrupted because

the specified F-code box was not registered.

U00450 The destination unit in password check transmission mode interrupted transmission because of a

mismatch in permit ID.

U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not

registered.

U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box

was not registered.

(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit


U00600 The SRDF cover is open.

U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.

U00602 Image scanning section problem.

U00603 No document feed.

U00604 Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity.

U00610 Recording section cover is open.

U00655 CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error.

U00656 Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error.

U00670 Power was cut off during communication.

U00677 There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode.

U00690 System error.

3CM

1-4-5

(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error


U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.

U00810 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.


U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.

U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.

(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error

3CM

1-4-6


U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps.

Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at

2400 bps.

U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.

U01010 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the

preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01011 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number

of command retransfers was exceeded.

U01012 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the


U01013 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset

number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01014 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of

command retransfers was exceeded.

U01015 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of


U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM

signal, and T1 timeout was detected.

U01017 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of


U01018 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number


U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of

command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of

command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number

of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of


U01023 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset number


U01024 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number


U01025 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number


U01026 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number


U01027 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset

number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01028 T5 timeout was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).

U01040 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception.

U01041 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of

our make).

U01042 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.

U01043 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of

our make).

U01044 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our

make).

(2-5) U010XX errror code table: G3 transmission

3CM

1-4-7


U01045 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal.

U01046 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal.

U01047 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal.

U01048 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal.

U01049 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make).

U01050 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM).

U01051 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM).

U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).

U01053 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM).

U01054 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM).

U01055 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM).

U01056 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM).

U01057 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM).

U01070 Polarity reversal was detected during handshake.

U01071 Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission.

U01072 A break in loop current was detected during transmission.

U01073 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when

transmitting after reception.

U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.

U01091 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was

received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the

symbol speed maintained at the level of connection.

U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible

combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.

3CM

1-4-8

(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception


U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.

U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS

signal.

U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.

U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.

U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.

U01112 No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal.

U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.

U01114 No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal.

U01115 No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal.

U01116 No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal.

U01117 No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal.

U01118 No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal.

U01119 No further signals were received after reception of a message.

U01120 No response after transmission of an MCF signal.

U01121 No response after transmission of an RTP signal.

U01122 No response after transmission of an RTN signal.

U01123 No response after transmission of a PIP signal.

U01124 No response after transmission of a PIN signal.

U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).

U01126 No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

U01127 No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).

U01128 No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).

U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).

U01140 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal.

U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.

U01142 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal.

U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.

U01144 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal.

U01145 A DCN signal was received after reception of a message.

U01146 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after

reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication).

U01147 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal.

U01148 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal.

U01149 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal.

U01150 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal.

U01151 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

U01152 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM).

U01153 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).

U01154 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).

U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).

U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line.

U01161 Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception.

U01162 A break in loop current was detected during message reception.

U01163 Polarity reversal was detected during message reception.

U01164 One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception.

U01170 A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception.

U01172 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after

transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission.

3CM

1-4-9


U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception

sequence in the V.34 mode.

U01199 A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.

3CM

1-4-10

(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission


U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).

U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between

units.

U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 beforeentering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for pollingtransmission)/INFOh was not detected.

U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel beforeentering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.

U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination ofcommunication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from thedestination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and,in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut.

(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception



U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).



units.

U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before enteringphase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for pollingreception)/probing tone was not detected.

U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.

U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel beforeentering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.

U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination ofcommunication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to thedestination unit and the line was cut.

(2-9) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission


U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.

U04401 Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.

3CM

1-5-1





C003

C013

C028

C082

C083

Fax control PCB system problem• Processing with the fax software was

disabled due to a hardware or soft-ware problem.

Fax control PCB software switchchecksum error• A checksum error occurred with the

software switch value stored in theflash ROM on the fax control PCB.

Communication problem betweenthe operation unit PCB and fax con-trol PCB• The operation unit PCB did not re-

ceive any key request command fromthe fax control PCB within 1 minute ofthe status change signal turning on.Then, after resetting the fax machine,the operation unit PCB again did notreceive any key request commandfrom the fax control PCB while thestatus change signal was held on for1 minute.

• Abnormal data was received 5 timesin succession in response to the com-mand from the fax control PCB.

• An erroneous FAX READY signalcontinued for 3 seconds and, afterresetting the fax machine, an errone-ous FAX READY signal continued for3 seconds again.

Fax control PCB CG ROM checksumerror• A checksum error occurred with the

CG ROM data in the flash ROM onthe fax control PCB.

Flash ROM program area checksumerror• A checksum error occurred with the

program in the flash ROM on the faxcontrol PCB.

Defective fax con-trol PCB.

Defective SRAMon the fax controlPCB.



Defective SRAMon the fax controlPCB.

Replace the fax control PCB and check forcorrect operation.





3CM

1-5-2

3CM

1-6-1

1-6-1 Updating the firmware(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (FLASH ROM)

Perform the steps below when updating the firmware in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB.

Firmware updating requires the following tools:Flash tool assembly (P/N 3596801*)Control ROM IC1 (P/N 3CM6802*)Control ROM IC2 (P/N 3CM6806*)

Caution:• Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or inserting

connectors.

<Procedure>1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power

plug from the wall outlet.2. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover and

then the cover.3. Remove the five screws holding the fax shield cover

and then the cover.4. Fit control ROM IC1 and control ROM IC2 to the

flash tool assembly.

5. Insert connector CN1 (the one furthest from theLEDs) on the flash tool assembly into connectorCN5 on the fax control PCB.

6. Connect the power plug into the wall outlet.Upgrading of control ROM IC1 and 2 starts and LEDon the flash tool assembly flashes for 30 seconds.The LED remains on when upgrading is complete.

7. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.8. Remove the flash tool assembly from the fax control

PCB.9. Refit the fax controller box cover and rear cover.

Figure 1-6-1

Control ROM IC1

CN1

Control ROM IC2

CN2 Flash tool assembly

Figure 1-6-2

3CM

1-6-2

(2) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Compact Flash card)

To carry out a FLASH ROM firmware update of the fax control PCB, follow the steps below.

This firmware update requires the following tools:CF jig (P/N 3CM6803*)Compact Flash card (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)

Caution:• Turn the main power switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or inserting

connectors.• When writing data to Compact Flash card from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.

(For formatting, insert a Compact Flash card and select a drive.)• For a desktop computer, connect a Compact Flash card reader/writer to it. For a notebook computer, use a PC card

adapter or a connection portion only for Compact Flash card.

<Procedure>1. Check the current ROM version using maintenance mode U680.2. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.3. Remove the rear cover and the control-box cover. (Refer to“(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Flash

ROM)”, Steps 1 to 3, above.)4. If you are using a new CF jig, continue as follows to write the boot program into the jig's flash boot. If your CF jig

already has the boot program in its flash boot, jump ahead to step 13.5. Insert a Compact Flash card containing the boot

program into the CF jig. Be sure that the card fits insmoothly along the left and right guides. (Trying toforce the card in incorrectly may cause electricalcontacts to break.)

6. Set dip-switch bit SW012 on the jig to “MEMORY”.

7. Connect CN1 on the CF jig to CN5 on the fax control PCB.8. Plug the machine’s power plug back into the wall outlet, and turn the main switch on.9. Run maintenance mode U881 (“Load program to jig”) to write the boot program into the jig. (See page 1-3-36.)10. When loading terminates normally, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet again.11. Disconnect the CF jig from the fax control PCB.12. Remove the Compact Flash card from the CF jig.13. Insert a Compact Flash card containing the firmware

into the CF jig. Again, be sure that the card fits insmoothly along the left and right guides. (Trying toforce the card may cause contacts to break.)

14. Set dip-switch bit SW012 on the jig to “BOOT”.15.Connect CN1 on the CF jig to CN5 on the fax controlPCB.

Figure 1-6-3

(different size) Compact Flash card

CF jig

SW012

BOOT

MEMORY

Figure 1-6-4


CF jig

SW012

BOOT

MEMORY

3CM

1-6-3

Figure 1-6-5

15. Connect CN1 on the CF jig to CN5 on the fax control PCB.

16. Plug the power plug back into the wall outlet, and turn the main switch on.ROM upgrading begins automatically. The LED on the CF jig flashes while upgrading is in progress (for about 30seconds), then comes on solid to indicate that upgrading is finished.

17. Turn the main switch off, and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.18. Disconnect the CF jig from the fax control PCB.19. Reattach the control-box cover and rear cover.20. Plug the power plug back into the wall outlet, and turn the main switch back on.21. Check the ROM version again using maintenance mode U680.

3CM

2-1-1


Figure 2-1-1

1. Fax control PCB (FCPCB) ........................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes outimage data, and converts resolution of image data.

• Add-on memory* ........................................ Expands memory capacity for image data and bitmap conversion. 2.NCU PCB (NCUPCB) ................................... Controls connection to the telephone line. 3.Fax operation unit PCB (FOPCB) ................. Consists of fax operation keys and display LEDs. 4.Auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) ........ Converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12 V DC. 5.Backup battery (BUBAT) ............................... Saves stored image when a power-down occur. 6.Speaker (SP)................................................. Outputs buzzer, monitoring and speaker sounds. * Optional.

4

5

1

23

3CM

2-1-2

3CM

2-2-1

2-2-1 Fax control PCB

Add

-on

mem

ory

CN4

Data bus

Address bus

BUBATCN6

CN3

CN1 CN8+

12V

DC

+5V

DC

CPU

ASIC

LithiumbatteryBT101

PSPCB

Back upcircuit 2

Back upcircuit 1

RTC

LVC

LVC

LVC

LVC

CPUIC11

ASICIC71

SDRAMIC21

28.224MHz

ModemLSI

IC81

FLASHROM

IC51,52

CGROMIC61

SRAMIC62IC63

Analog circuit

Telephoneline

Fla

sh to

olN

CU

PC

BM

PC

B

CN5

8-bit16-bit 16-bit 32-bit 32-bit 32-bit

32-bit

Crystal oscillator

Clock driverIC12

Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PCB block diagram

The fax control PCB (FCPCB) controls the overall fax operation.To transmit a fax, image data scanned by the optical section of the copier is processed by the main PCB (MPCB) and thensent to the fax control PCB (FCPCB). Received image data is first stored in the bitmap area of the SDRAM IC21 page bypage and compressed using the MH, MR or MMR method. The data is then stored in the image memory area of the SDRAMIC21 and sent to the modem LSI IC81 to be modulated from digital signal to analog signal before it is sent to the telephoneline via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB).To receive a fax, analog image data received from the telephone line via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB) is sent to the modem LSIIC81 and, after demodulation into digital signals, stored in the image memory area of the SDRAM IC21. The image data isthen decompressed and converted into the bitmap area of the SDRAM IC21 page by page and sent to the ASIC IC71 forresolution conversion and smoothing, and is passed to the main PCB (MPCB) as print image data.

3CM

2-2-2

CN

1C

N5

58 5957603 214

CN

4

CN

33B

12801

CN

6

144

CN89 1

402

391

1

222121

143

22

11

CN

7

Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PCB silk-screen diagram

3CM

2-2-3

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-2 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) 3.3 V DC supply detection signal, input1-3 1-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVCLK signal, input1-5 1-6 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FVCLK signal, output1-7 1-8 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMRE signal, output1-9 1-10 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVD signal, output1-11 1-12 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPHSYNC signal, input1-13 1-14 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVSYNC signal, input1-15 1-16 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FOVSYNC signal, input1-17 1-18 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FOHSTHIN signal, input1-19 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMIPOUT0 signal, input1-21 1-22 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMREOUT signal, input1-23 1-24 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FFOCLK signal, input1-25 1-26 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) MMISTS signal, input1-27 1-28 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMMI_TXD2 signal, input1-29 1-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) FMMI_RXD2 signal, output1-31 1-30 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FAXRESET signal, input1-32 1-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) FAXREADY signal, output1-33 1-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) PREQ signal, output1-34 1-30 5/0 V DC (pulse) SREQ signal, output1-36 1-37 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) MAINSTS signal, input1-38 1-39 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMAIN_TXD0 signal, input1-40 1-39 5/0 V DC (pulse) FMAIN_RXD0 signal, output3-1 3-2 12 V DC 12 V DC supply, output3-3 3-4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, output3-5 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) EXTRING1 signal, output3-6 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) EXTRING2 signal, output3-7 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) KMUTE signal, output3-8 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) SHUNT signal, output3-10 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) EARTH signal, output3-11 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) TELSEL signal, output3-12 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FAXSEL signal, output3-13 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) NCUTYPE2 signal, input3-14 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) NCUTYPE3 signal, input3-15 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) OFFHOOK signal, input3-16 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) NCUTYPE1 signal, input3-17 3-4 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK1 signal, input3-18 3-4 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK2 signal, input3-19 3-4 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RINGDET signal, input3-20 3-2 Analog MODTXD signal, output3-21 3-2 Analog RXIN signal, input3-22 3-2 Analog MODRXD signal, input4-61 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) OPTYPE1 signal, input4-63 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) OPTYPE2 signal, input4-65, 67, 69 4-71, 73, 75 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC supply, input4-74 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (23) signal, input/output4-76 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (21) signal, input/output4-77 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (22) signal, input/output4-78 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (19) signal, input/output4-79 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (20) signal, input/output4-80 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (17) signal, input/output4-81 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (18) signal, input/output4-82 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DQM2 signal, output4-83 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (16) signal, input/output4-84 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (3) signal, output4-85 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (4) signal, output4-86 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (12) signal, output

3CM

2-2-4

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks4-87 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (2) signal, output4-88 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (14) signal, output4-89 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (13) signal, output4-90 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (25) signal, input/output4-91 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (24) signal, input/output4-92 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (27) signal, input/output4-93 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (26) signal, input/output4-94 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (29) signal, input/output4-95 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (28) signal, input/output4-96 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (31) signal, input/output4-97 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (30) signal, input/output4-98 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (5) signal, output4-99 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DQM3 signal, output4-100 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (7) signal, output4-101 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (6) signal, output4-102 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (9) signal, output4-103 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (8) signal, output4-104 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (11) signal, output4-105 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB (10) signal, output4-106 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CS signal, output4-107 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) CKE signal, output4-108 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _RAS signal, output4-110 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CAS signal, output4-111 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) CLK signal, output4-112 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RD/_WE signal, output4-114 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DQM1 signal, output4-115 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (8) signal, input/output4-116 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (9) signal, input/output4-117 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (10) signal, input/output4-118 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (11) signal, input/output4-119 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (12) signal, input/output4-120 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (13) signal, input/output4-121 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (14) signal, input/output4-122 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (15) signal, input/output4-123 4-109, 113 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DQM0 signal, output4-124 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (7) signal, input/output4-125 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (6) signal, input/output4-126 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (5) signal, input/output4-127 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (4) signal, input/output4-128 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (3) signal, input/output4-129 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (2) signal, input/output4-130 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (1) signal, input/output4-131 4-71, 73, 75 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB (0) signal, input/output4-139, 141, 143 4-133, 135, 137 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC supply, output6-1 6-2 3 V DC BUBAT backup power supply, input7-1 7-2 Analog SP alarm, output8-1, 2 8-3, 4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input8-5 8-6 +12 V DC +12 V DC supply, input8-7 8-3, 4 5/0 V DC (pulse) MRY signal, output8-8 8-9 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) MSW signal, input

3CM

2-2-5

2-2-2 NCU PCB

120 V specifications

Loop current detection/tone

signal reception circuit IC30

Destination identification

circuit JP20, JP21, JP22

DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit

PC80

Line transformer

T70

Ring signal detection

circuit PC60

External telephone off-hook detection circuit

T40, PC40

NCUTYPE1, 2, 3

K70

K11

K10

/ONHOOK2

/ONHOOK1

RXIN

FAXSEL

MODRXD

MODTXD

SHUNT

PLSDIL

RNGDET

EARTH

DCCONT/OFFHOOK

EXTRING1

EXTRING2

TELSEL

LINE1

LINE2

TEL L1

TEL L2

220 - 240 V specifications

TEL2

TEL1

Loop current detection/tone signal reception circuit IC30

Destination identification circuit JP20, JP21, JP22

DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit PC80

Line transformer

T70


circuit PC60

Accounting pulse elimination

circuit L70

Ground start circuit PC10


T40, PC40

NCUTYPE1, 2, 3

K70

K11

K10

/ONHOOK2

/ONHOOK1

RXIN

FAXSEL

MODRXD

MODTXD

SHUNT

PLSDIL

RNGDET

EARTH

DCCONT/OFFHOOK

EXTRING1

EXTRING2

TELSEL

LINE1

TEL GND

LINE2

TEL L1

TEL L2

Figure 2-2-3 NCU PCB block diagram

3CM

2-2-6

The NCU PCB (NCUPCB) mainly controls the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the circuits shown in the blockdiagram.The loop current detection/tone signal reception circuit IC30 detects the DC loop current formed at the DC loop/dial pulsetransmission circuit PC80 to determine the status of the telephone line. It also receives tone (DTMF) signals during remotecontrol. The ring signal detection circuit PC60 detects the ring signals from the telephone line to determine call reception.The DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit PC80 turns on and off the DC loop formed in the telephone line to send out dialpulses (selection signals). The external telephone off-hook detection circuit (T40 and PC40) detects the off-hook state of thetelephone connected or the handset*1. The destination identification circuit (JP20, JP21 and JP22) is used by the fax controlPCB (FCPCB) to identify the destination of the NCU PCB (NCUPCB). The accounting pulse elimination circuit L70 removessignals representing the communication charge information (accounting pulses) before they reach the modem whentelephone line is used.*2 This is because accounting pulses obstruct fax communications. The ground start circuit PC10requests an outside connection to the private branch exchange (PBX) when calling via the PBX.*2

*1: Optional for 120 V specifications only.*2: For 220 - 240 V specifications only.

3CM

2-2-7


J3 J6

J26

J39

J37

J36

J38

J60

J63DB70

D40MCN2

MCN1

V10D41

3B12803

C400

E C B

E C B

L40

+

K10J62

D10

J67

PC60D71

D72

C72

J9

J8C202

C203

R805 R405

R406

PC40

J40J41

J42

D42 J44

D32

D31

TR43

TR81E C B

PC80

TR80 TR41

TR40

R400R401

R402

D45

J30

D44

R416

R404

T40

PC42 TR42

R31R30

L30

C30

+

+

++

J32

J46

J45

PC41

PC30

R403

PC31

E C B3

3

113

1

14333

11

1

E

C B

1

3

85

D47

D49

C406

R418L41C412

R60R64

C414C413C

E B

+

+

+

+J10

21

22

J1

J4 J5

J25

J7

J24

J28

J12 J1

3

J14 J1

5

J16J1

1

J23

J27

R80

4 J29

R80

2

D62

R62

R80

3

R80

0

C80 D

80

J55 J4

3

TR

44R

411

R41

0

R40

8R40

9C

401

C40

2

C40

5

IC30

TH

S-6

3FJ4

7

C40

4

E C

B

C40

8R

414

BC

E

D43

TH

10C10

D30

V11

F10

F11

F13

F12

J65

F14

D60

D61

C60

C40

3T

R46

C61

C32

7

1

R41

2

R41

5

D46

+

BE

BC

EC

TR

47

C21

0

R40

7

C20

0

C20

1

C20

7

C40

7

TR

45C

410

C41

1J3

1C

409

D48

R41

3

C20

8J1

7J1

9J1

8J3

3J4

8

J51

J49

C20

9

J52

J58

J54

J53

J64

J59

J61

C62

R80

1

J34

J2

JP21

JP20JP22

J22

J20

CN1

R71

R70

D70

J56J57

R11TR11

R10TR10

D11

T60 J66

E C B

E C B

J35

T70

K70

K11

J50

TR70

J21 4

5 8

4

12

12 8

5

4

1

12 843

43

1 5

3

8 5

64

1

1

1

38

5

E BC

2

6

12

+


J1

J19J20J21

J23J22J36

C74

1

3

7

R71R804

R72

J38

J37

J50C62

C72

PC60

R62

R63 IC30C30

PC10

J41

J39

D40

D41

DB10

J40

J52

F15

L70

THS-63F

D62

C73

J48

J49

K70

D82

JP81

IC80

J65 R808R807

R806

R801

D80

DB70

R803

R812TR83D

G

SR A K

TR80E C B

1 C 2

TR84

3B12804E C B

J47812

5

J18J26 J30

R61

R64 C32

C61

J32

J13

J33R13

C207TR11

R805TR81

E EB BC C

J2J4

J6J7

JP20

F22

F21

J17

J16

R70

D70

T70

J44

J45

F20

J57 R

810

D72

D71

R80

9R

811

JP80

CE

B

J56

TR

82

DB

1

J46

PC

80

36

285 4

1

3

4 1

TR

70

K11

D64

J51

D63

J53

J54

D43

D42

C10

TH

10

V10

V11

F10

F11

F12

F16

F13

J64

J59

F14

R40

8

C40

0

B

E

15 8

12

C

JP22

R11

J24 J2

7

J31

J29

J25 D

11

J8

J10J2

8 C41

3

C41

4

C40

7J1

2

J35

J15

D45

D49

K10

C40

1 J34

J43

1

1

1

3

5 812

R12

R41

6R

413

R41

5

D46

J5

R418 C412C406

R412

J14F23

F24

TR12

D10

D48

D44 C EB

C409TR10

R10

R400

R402

R401 C405TR41

TR40

J55J63J60J61J58

C70

C71C80 R800

R802VR80

L71 J62

MCN1

MCN2

65

21

43

E C BE C B

PC40C402

L40J42

+

+ +

TR46TR47C

B

B

4

3

1

8

5T40

1

EEB

CE

L41J11J9C203C202

J3 JP21CN1

1

21

222

++

+

+

+

Figure 2-2-4 NUC PCB silk-screen diagram

3CM

2-2-8

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-22 Analog RXIN signal, output1-2 1-22 Analog MODRXD signal, output1-3 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RNGDET signal, output1-4 1-22 Analog MODTXD signal, input1-5 1-20 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK1 signal, output1-6 1-20 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK2 signal, output1-7 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) OFFHOOK signal, output1-9 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) NCUTYPE2 signal, output1-10 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) NCUTYPE3 signal, output*1-11 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) TELSEL signal, input1-12 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FAXSEL signal, input1-13 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) PLSDIL signal, input1-14 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) EARTH signal, input*1-15 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DCCONT signal, input1-16 1-20 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) SHUNT signal, input1-19 1-20 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input1-21 1-22 12 V DC 12 V DC supply, input

*For 220-240 V specifications.

3CM

2-2-9

2-2-3 Auxiliary power source PCB

5.2 V DCD5T1

D2

AC input

Q2C7

C19

+

+D6

Relay

PC1

C15,91

C20

GND

GND

Relay REM

DC12V


12 V DC output circuit

IC2

5.2 V DC output circuitIC1

Switching control circuit

PSPCB

Figure 2-2-4 Auxiliary power source PCB block diagram

The auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12V DC. It consists of a switching control circuit, 5.2 V DC output circuit and 12 V DC output circuit.The rectifier circuit rectifies the full-wave of the AC input using the diode bridge D2. The smoothing capacitor C7 smoothesout the pulsed current from the diode bridge.The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q2 with the voltage induced in the controlling coil of thetransformer T1 to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1.The 5.2 V DC output circuit smoothes out the voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 viathe diode D5 and smoothing capacitors C15 and C91, and outputs a stable 5.2 V DC using the shunt regulator IC1. Theoutput status of the 5.2 V DC is fed back to the switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC1. Based on the feedback,the switching control circuit changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q2 on/off in order to adjust the5.2 V DC.The 12 V DC output circuit smoothes out voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via thediode D6 and smoothing capacitor C19, and generates a stable 12 V DC using the 3-pin regulator IC2.The relay turns on/off the AC supply to the power source PCB (PSPCB) based on the remote signal from the fax controlPCB (FCPCB).

3CM

2-2-10

L1

D2

F1 R

Y

TB3

C3

C5

TH1R8T1

D31

8

C10

R14

D4

R13

3CM01033CM0104

R21

R K

IC1C13

C17

C12

3 1

C6

D1

C1

C2

R23SCR

IC2

D6

R24

13

O I

R22

ZD

1C

N1

C15

ZD

2

C20

CP

1

C19

C18

HS

R25

T0112

R4

R15

R12

Q3

R19

Q1

R17

R18

PC

11

3

R20

R2

R3

BE

C10

R10

R11

YS

2

EB

C11

C8

D5

R7

R9

R8

Q2

J2502J2501

J7501

J0501

J0503

J0502J1502

J1501

J1004

J1003

J1002

J7502

J1001

SG

C7

TB

1

TB

2

Figure 2-2-5 Auxiliary power source PCB silk-screen diagram

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-3 1-2 12 V DC 12 V DC supply, output1-5 1-4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, output

For 4030 ONLY

Fax System (F)

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety oftheir customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnelare advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautionsdescribed here before engaging in maintenance activities.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger andto prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect

compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliancewith warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION:Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols

The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific pointof attention is shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections toone outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always checkthat it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire orelectric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may causeexplosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by theproper authorities. .............................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as coolas possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this maycause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer isaccidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attentionimmediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtainmedical attention. ..............................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’sinstruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. Ifit is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light maydamage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may causeelectric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they aresafely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can causeabnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other relatedbrochures. .........................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safetymechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other relatedbrochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or otherserious accident. ...............................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of apart, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removingthem; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with acable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................

• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that wereremoved, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgottenconnector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to theinstruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main

switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly tofire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outletimmediately. ......................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other thanthe specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................

1-1-1

3DB

CONTENTS1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names and their functions ............................................................................................................ 1-1-4

(1) Main body ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1-4(2) Operation panel ............................................................................................................................. 1-1-5(3) Basic fax screen on the touch panel .............................................................................................. 1-1-6

1-1-3 Mechanical construction ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-8

1-2 Installation1-2-1 Unpacking and installation .................................................................................................................... 1-2-1

(1) Unpacking and installation ............................................................................................................. 1-2-11-2-2 Setting and registering data .................................................................................................................. 1-2-9

(1) Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2-9(2) Registration .................................................................................................................................. 1-2-10

1-2-3 Installing the optional memory module DIMM ..................................................................................... 1-2-11

1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................ 1-3-1

(1) Maintenance mode item list ........................................................................................................... 1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items ........................................................................................... 1-3-4

1-4 Error Code1-4-1 Error codes ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4-1

(1) Error code ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Table of general classification........................................................................................................ 1-4-2

(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B ..................................................................... 1-4-4(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit ................................................................. 1-4-5(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error ............................................................... 1-4-5(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error .................................................................... 1-4-5(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission ........................................................................... 1-4-6(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception ................................................................................ 1-4-8(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ...................................................................... 1-4-10(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception ............................................................................ 1-4-10(2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception ......................................... 1-4-10

(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission ............................................................. 1-4-10

1-5 Self Diagnosis1-5-1 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1

(1) Self diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-11-5-2 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................... 1-5-3

1-6 Requirements on PCB Replacement1-6-1 Updating the firmware ........................................................................................................................... 1-6-1

(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Flash ROM) ......................................................... 1-6-1(2) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Compact Flash card) ........................................... 1-6-4

2-1 Electrical Parts Layout2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-1

2-2 Operation of the PCBs2-2-1 Fax control PCB .................................................................................................................................... 2-2-12-2-2 NCU PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-72-2-3 Auxiliary power source PCB ................................................................................................................ 2-2-11

3DB

1-1-1


Type .......................................................... Optional Fax KitCompatibility .............................................. Group 3Line Requirement ...................................... Subscription telephone lineTransmission Speed .................................. Within 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T #1 chart)Modem Speed ........................................... 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/

7200/4800/2400 bpsData Compression .................................... JBIG/MMR/MR/MHError Correction......................................... ECMMaximum Document Dimensions ............. Width: 11" [297 mm] Length: 63" [1600 mm]Automatic Document Feeder Capacity ..... Duplex document processor: Max. 100 pages, document processor: Max. 70

pagesAuxiliary Scanning Line Density ................ Horizontal × Vertical

Normal (8 dots/mm × 3.85 lines/mm)Fine (8 dots/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)Super fine (8 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)Ultra fine (16 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)

Recording Resolution ................................ 600 dpi × 600 dpiGrayscale .................................................. 128 levels (Value differential diffusion)Speed-Dial Keys ....................................... Max. 600 destinationsBroadcast Transmission ............................ Max. 300 destinationsPolling Reception ...................................... Max. 300 locationsInstalled Bitmap Memory .......................... 4 MBInstalled Imaging Memory ......................... 4 MB (including 1 MB of working memory)Management Reports and Lists ................ Activity Report, Confirmation List, User Setting List, One-Touch Key List,

Telephone Directory List, Program Dial List, Group Dial List, Encryption KeyList, Restricted Access Report, Department List

Options ...................................................... Memory module DIMM (8 MB)Functions ................................................... See pages 1-1-2 to 1-1-3.

3DB

1-1-2

Reception functions Manual receptionAutomatic receptionFax/telephone auto selectionTAD receptionD.R.D. reception*1

Remote switching

Transmission functions One-touch dialing*2

Program dialing*2

Group dialing*2

Chain dialing*2

Redialing (manual/automatic)Dial confirmation

Communication functions Direct feed transmissionMemory transmissionDirect receptionMemory reception (F-coded confidential reception and relay broadcastreception)

Additional communication functions Broadcast transmission (up to 300 numbers)Polling communicationEncrypted communicationPassword check communicationMemory fax forwardingReserved transmissionTimer transmissionInterrupt transmissionShort protocolECMF-coded transmissionF-coded confidential receptionF-coded bulletin board communicationF-coded relay broadcast

Supplementary communication functions Printing out from F-coded confidential boxManual transmissionTelephone directoryTransmission destination displayTone transmissionMemory back-up (60 min.*3)Entry into F-coded bulletin boardCommunication result display

Supplementary transmission functions Batch transmissionTTI transmissionBulletin boardRotation transmissionDuplex transmission*4

Initial communication speed setting

Supplementary reception functions Memory reception2-in-1 receptionAuto reduce receptionRotation receptionDuplex reception*5

Recording paper setting (auto selection, fixed size or fixed cassette)During-reception copyingReception date and time recording

3DB

1-1-3

Reports Activity reportTransmission reportReception reportPower failure reportDelayed communication reportConfirmation reportUser settings listEncryption key listManagement reportDepartment listOne-touch key listTelephone directory listProgram dial listGroup dial listF-code confidential box listF-code relay box listEncryption box listNetwork fax setting list*6

Others Memory editingRemote diagnosisDepartment control for faxesNetwork fax functions*6

*1: For 120 V specifications only.*2: To be registered under one-touch keys. Up to 600 one-touch keys can be used for one-touch dialing, program dialing,

group dialing and chain dialing.*3: When the optional memory module DIMM is installed.*4: Available only when the duplex document processor is installed.*5: Available only when the duplex unit is installed.*5: When the printer/scanner kit is installed.

3DB

1-1-4

Figure 1-1-1

1 Operation panel ..................................... Use the operation panel to perform the procedures required for faxcommunication.

2 Fax storage section ................................ Received documents are ejected and stored face-down in the fax storagesection. Up to 250 sheets can be stored in this section at one time.

3 Drawers .................................................. This fax machine comes standard with two drawers installed. Each drawercan hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (60 g/m2 - 105 g/m2).

4 Multi-Bypass .......................................... Paper can be set in the Multi-Bypass as well. In order to use the Multi-Bypass, it is necessary to select “ON” under “Turning Manual Paper FeedON/OFF”.

5 Telephone jack (T) .................................. Use this jack to connect a separately purchased telephone to the fax.6 Line jack (L) ........................................... Use this jack to connect the fax to a telephone line using the modular cord.7 Main switch ............................................ Turn this switch ON ( | ) in order to perform fax and copy operations. The

message display will light and operation will be possible.• Document ProcessorThere are 2 optional document processors available for use with this machine: the document processors for feeding one-sided documents, and the duplex document processor for using both sides of 2-sided documents.* Both the document processor and duplex document processor can be used with the 25 copies per minute machine.

However, only the duplex document processor can be used with the 35/40 copies per minute machine.8 Document table ...................................... Set the documents to transmit on the table. Up to 100 sheets of up to 11" × 8

1/2" [A4] size paper, or up to 70 sheets of 8 1/2" × 14" or 11" × 17" [A3 orFolio] size paper, can be set at one time when installing the duplex documentprocessor. Up to 70 sheets of up to 11" × 8 1/2" [A4] size paper, or up to 50sheets of 8 1/2" × 14" or 11" × 17" [A3 or Folio] size paper, can be set at onetime when installing the document processor.

9 Document insert guides ......................... Adjust these guides to match the width of the documents.10 Document processor reversing cover ..... Open this cover if a document jams.11 Document eject cover ............................ Documents are ejected onto this cover after being scanned.12 Eject guide ............................................. Open this guide when transmitting documents of a large size such as 8 1/2"

×14" or 11" × 17" [A3 or Folio].13 Document processor open/close lever ... Operate this lever when opening and closing the document processor.14 Document set indicator .......................... This indicator indicates the status of the documents set in the document

processor. Documents are set properly when the indicator is lit green.


(1) Main body

Figure 1-1-2

3DB

1-1-5

(2) Operation panel

1 Touch panel ......................... Indicates operation procedures as well as trouble with the machine. Keys related tooperational procedures which appear on the touch panel with their name displayed areindicated in this handbook within double quotation marks. In addition, you will beinstructed to “touch” any keys which appear on the touch panel rather than “press” them.(Ex.: Touch the “xxx” key.)

2 Keypad ................................ Use the keypad to enter fax numbers, etc.* Even if your telephone service is for pulse dialing, press the star (*) key and any key

pressed on the keypad after that will transmit the related tone signal. (Inch versiononly)

3 Start key .............................. Press this key when you want to initiate a fax communication.4 Fax key/Fax indicator .......... Press this key when you want to switch between the Copy Operation and Fax Operation

modes. The Fax indicator is lit when the machine is in the Fax Operation mode.5 Fax data indicator ............... This indicator blinks during a fax communication. When received documents or other

data are being stored in memory, this indicator will flash and then light continuously.6 Reset key ............................ Press this key when you want to cancel an operation in progress and have the touch

panel return to the initial mode settings.7 Stop/Clear key..................... Press this key when you want to delete registered fax numbers or names, as well as

when you want to stop an operation in progress.8 Fax Priority key ................... Press this key when you want to give priority to printing out a received fax during a copy

operation.9 Default key .......................... Press this key when you want to perform settings related to the various default modes for

the fax functions of this machine.10 Interrupt key/indicator lamp .. Press this key when you want to interrupt a fax reception in order to make copies. The

indicator lamp in the Interrupt key will light when the machine is in the Interrupt mode.

Figure 1-1-3

3DB

1-1-6

(3) Basic fax screen on the touch panelThe initial screen that appears in the touch panel when you press the Fax key in any other mode in order to change to theFax Operation mode is called the “basic fax screen”. The following contains information on the basic keys which aredisplayed in this screen and their functions.

Inch

Figure 1-1-4

Metric

Act status

3DB

1-1-7

1 Message display ........................... Current status, the next step in a procedure and error messages are shown in themessage display.

2 Number of destinations display ..... The number of destinations that you have chosen to dial to is shown in this area.3 Speed-dial keys ............................. Keys that you have registered to function as either a one-touch key, a group dial

key (G), a program key (P) or a chain dial key (C) are displayed here.4 “Address book” key ....................... Touch this key when you want to use the address book.5 “Abbrev.” key ................................. Touch this key when you want to use the abbreviated number that a destination

number is registered under in order to dial that number.6 “TX setting” key ............................. Touch this key when you want to perform settings related to transmission

conditions such as the size of the documents to be transmitted, the image qualityof those documents, the contrast at which you want to send them and the timewhen they should be sent. Once you press this key, the TX Setting screen willappear.

7 “ ” and “ ” cursor keys ............... Use these keys when you want to display speed-dial keys other than those whichare currently displayed.

8 “Dest. check” key .......................... Touch this key when you have entered multiple destination fax numbers usingspeed-dial keys, etc., and you want to check the list of those numbers.

9 “Re-dial” key .................................. Touch this key when you want to have the fax automatically redial the mostrecently dialed number

10 “On-hook” key ............................... When a separately purchased telephone is connected to this fax machine and youtouch this key, you can dial a destination number without having to pick up thereceiver.

11 “Memory TX” / “Dir. Feed Tx” key .. When you want to switch between the Memory Transmission mode (“Memory Tx”)and the Direct Feed Transmission mode (“Dir. Feed Tx”). The mode will changeeach time you touch this key.

12 Reception mode select key ........... Touch this key when you want to select a different reception mode. The display willchange to the reception mode selection screen where you can select the desiredreception mode by touching the “Auto RX”, “Manual RX” or “Answering Machine”key, as appropriate.

13 Memory bar ................................... Indicates the amount of data stored in memory. As documents are being stored,the bar will move towards “100%” indicating that the data stored in memory isincreasing. Once it reaches “100%”, no more documents can be stored in memory.

14 Fax number display ....................... The number that you have entered to dial is displayed here.15 “Basic” key .................................... Touch this key when you want to return to the basic fax screen.16 “Application” key ........................... Touch this key when you want to use one of the various functions of this fax

machine such as polling, etc.17 “Register” [“Registration”] key ....... Touch this key when you want to perform one of the various registration

procedures of this fax machine.18 “Print Report” key .......................... Touch this key when you want to print out one of the various reports or lists of this

fax machine.19 “Status” [“Act status”] key .............. This key is displayed during a transmission, reception or printout. Touch this key

when you want to verify the contents of the operation.

3DB

1-1-8


RE

LAY

RE

M

GN

D

12V

TB

3

TB

21-

11-

51-

4

1-3

1-2

TB3TB1

1YC7

YC6

6YC8

53

1789

2

12

RELAY INNEUTRAL IN

1 2

Mem

ory

Mod

ule

DIM

M (

optio

nal)

12

GN

D

5.2V

APSPCB

RE

LAY

OU

T

LIV

E(I

N)

LIV

E(O

UT

)

24V

OP

CB

SPEAKERA.GND

BATTG(5V)

CN

44

SP

BU

BA

T

YC

1

YC

4Y

C3

NC

UP

CB

FC

PC

B

MSW

REM

MSW

CN31

CN8

PSPCB

MPCB

LINE

TEL

Figure 1-1-5

The fax system consists of the fax control PCB (FCPCB), NCU PCB (NCUPCB), auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB),speaker (SP), backup battery (BUBAT) and optional memory module DIMM.

3DB

1-2-1

1-2-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Unpacking and installation

12

*(

⁄

!

790

%^

&

8@#$›

4

3

)

6

5

‹‹

¤


1Fax control PCB2Antistatic air-padded bag3NCU board assembly4Antistatic air-padded bag5Auxiliary power source PCB

assembly6Antistatic air-padded bag7NCU cable8FCC68 label*9FAX-PCB-Power cable0 “B” modular connector cable*!Plastic bag@NW-FAX CD-ROM#Fax cable

$ IC line label*%TP-A chrome binding screw M3 ×

06^Plastic bag&Plastic bag*Operation guide(Plastic bag)Upper spacer⁄Bottom spacer¤Outer case‹Barcode labels›Fax-kit label sheet

*For 120 V specifications only.

3DB

1-2-2

Turn the machine’s main switch to OFF and unplug the copier from the power supply before starting this procedure.

<Procedure>1. Remove 13 screws and take off the rear cover.

2. If the printing system is installed, remove the 2 screws and pull theprinting system out of the controller box.


Rear cover

Screws

Screws

Printing system

Figure 1-2-2

Figure 1-2-3

Screws


Figure 1-2-4

3DB

1-2-3

4. Move the shielding cover out of the way to the left, and fasten thefax control PCB into place using four M3 × 06 chrome bindingscrews.

5. Connect the NCU cable to connector CN1 on the NCU boardassembly.

6. Fasten the NCU board assembly into place from the bottom withtwo M3 × 06 chrome binding screws.

7. Connect the three connectors from the NCU board assembly to thecorresponding connectors on the fax control PCB, as follows:• Speaker 2-pin connector → YC7• NCU cable connector → YC3• Battery connector → YC6

Shielding cover

Fax control PCBM3 × 06 chromebinding screws

Figure 1-2-5

NCU board assembly

NCU cable

CN1

Figure 1-2-6

YC7YC6YC3

NCU board assembly

M3 × 06 chromebinding screws

Figure 1-2-7

3DB

1-2-4

8. Remove the film that fixes the three positive connectors of thepower source PCB from the optional interface mounting plate.Important: Dispose of the film that has been removed.

9. Connect the FAX-PCB-Power cable to connector CN1 on theauxiliary power source PCB assembly.

10. Connect the three positive connectors on the power board to thecorresponding connectors on the auxiliary power source PCBassembly as follows.• White positive connector → TB1 (white)• Green positive connector → TB2 (green)• Small white positive connector → TB3

Film

Optional interfacemounting plate

Figure 1-2-8

CN1

FAX-PCB-Power cable

Auxiliary power sourcePCB assembly

Figure 1-2-9

TB3

TB1

TB2


White positiveconnector

Green positiveconnector

Small whitepositive connector

Figure 1-2-10

3DB

1-2-5

11. Fit the catch on the auxiliary power unit into the mount hole in thecopier, and fasten the auxiliary power unit into place with one M3 ×06 chrome binding screw.

12. Through the opening of controller-box above the speaker, connectthe FAX-PCB-Power cable on the auxiliary power source PCBassembly to connector YC8 on the fax control PCB.

13. Connect the 2-pin connector to the 2-pin connector with greencable.

14. Unlock YC1 on the fax control PCB by pulling its connectorhousing.

15. Hold the fax cable with its conductive side facing up, insert it intoconnector YC1, then push the housing back in to lock theconnector.

16. Hold the other end of the fax cable with its conductive side facingdown, and connect it to connector CN44 on the main PCB. (Pullthe CN44 housing out to release the connector lock, then insert thecable, and then push the housing back in.)Important: Be sure to push the fax cable all the way in, and be surethat the connection is straight. A poor connection may result in avariety of problems.

17. Refit the controller-box cover.

Figure 1-2-11

Mount hole

M3 × 06 chromebinding screw

Catch

YC8


FAX-PCB-Powercable

Fax control PCBOpening

2-pin connector

2-pin connector (green cable)

YC1

YC1

CN44

CN44

Fax cable

Fax control PCB

Figure 1-2-12

Figure 1-2-13

3DB

1-2-6

18. Remove 1 screw and take off the modular cover.

19. Hang the modular cover onto the holes on the controller-box cover,and fasten it into place with 1 screw.

20. If the printing system was installed, refit the printing system into thecontroller box.

21. Refit the rear cover.

120 V specifications only22. Adhere the IC line label and FCC68 label to the rear cover at the

locations indicated in the diagram.

Screw

Modular cover

Figure 1-2-14

Screw

Holes

Modular cover

Figure 1-2-15

FCC68 label

IC line label

Figure 1-2-16

3DB

1-2-7

23. Take the power label from the fax-kit label sheet, and adhere it tothe copier directly under the main switch.

24. Take the alphabet labels from the fax-kit label sheet, and adherethem above the corresponding numeric keys on the operationpanel.• In Asia, use the “PQRS TUV WXYZ” label, and do not use the

“PRS TUV WXZ” and “OPER” labels.

25. Connect the telephone circuit to the L terminal by inserting themodular connector cable into the line terminal (L).Important: On 120 V specifications, use the included “B” modularconnector cable to make the connection.

Power label

Main switch

Figure 1-2-17

1

4

7

5 6

98

0

2 3

ABC DEF

MNOJKL

PQRS TUV

OPER

WXYZ

Reset

Stop/Clear

S

Start


Figure 1-2-18

Line terminal (L)

Modular connectorcable

Figure 1-2-19

3DB

1-2-8

Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system1. Insert the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main

switch on.2. Run maintenance item U601.3. Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the

destination code list) and then press the start key.* Enter a destination code with three digits.

4. Enter the OEM code (000) and then press the start key.5. Confirm that the display is changed as shown in the illustration.

* At the position of @, the version number of the software isdisplayed.

6. Press the cursor key to change the display to maintenance itemU602.

7. Press the start key and confirm that the display is changed asshown in the illustration.* At the position of @, the version number of the software is

displayed.8. After completing the installation, run a communications test to

confirm that the fax system is working correctly.


Code

000009080084088108126136137152156


ItalyGermanySpainU.K.

Netherlands

159169181242243253

Code CodeDestination DestinationDestination


Taiwan

253

254

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED XXX 000

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED V@.@@


Initial keep data U601

Figure 1-2-20

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED XXX 000

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED V@.@@


Initial ship data U602

Figure 1-2-21

3DB

1-2-9

1-2-2 Setting and registering data

After setting up the machine, set or register the following data.

(1) Settings

• Setting the type of telephone line*1

Select the setting (pulse or tone) according to the type of telephone line to be used.• Setting the TTI transmission

Select whether or not to add the transmit terminal identifier (TTI) to the transmitting document.• Setting report output condition

• Select the output condition for the management report (output or not output by department).• Select the output condition for the activity report (output or not output after every 50 communications)• Select the output condition for the transmission report (output or not output after each transmission)• Select the output condition for the reception report (output or not output after each reception)• Select the output condition for the timer communication report (output or not output after each timer programming).• Select the output condition for the network fax transmission report.*2

• Setting the password check communicationSelect whether or not to perform password check communication.

• Setting the memory fax forwardingSelect whether or not to perform memory fax forwarding.

• Setting the bulletin boardSelect whether or not to use the bulletin board during polling transmission.

• Setting the number of rings for automatic receptionSelect the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the auto receptionmode.

• Setting the number of rings for TAD receptionSet the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the TAD receptionmode.

• Setting the number of rings for fax/telephone auto select mode*1

Set the number of rings (0 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the fax/telephone autoselect mode.

• Setting the speaker volumeSet the volume of the speaker in the on-hook mode (4 levels).

• Setting the alarm buzzer volumeSet the volume of the alarm that sounds during events such as when an error occurs (3 levels).

• Setting the monitoring volumeSet the volume for the sounds from the speaker (4 levels).

• Setting the document size for scanning from the document processorSelect the setting (“Standard size original” or “Long original”) for scanning the original fed from the document processor.

• Setting the default transmission modeSelect the transmission mode (memory transmission or direct feed transmission) to be used in the initial mode.

• Setting the reception modeSelect an automatic reception mode (automatic fax reception, fax/telephone auto selection or D.R.D. reception*1).

• Setting reception date and time recordingSelect whether or not to record the date and time on received documents.

• Setting the paper feed selection modeSelect the paper feed mode (“Auto Selection mode”, “Fixed Size mode” or “Fixed Cassette mode”) for printing receivedfax or reports.

• Setting the manual paper feedSelect whether or not to use the multi-bypass to feed paper for printing received faxes.

• Setting 2-in-1 receptionSelect whether or not to output two successively-received A5/81/2" × 51/2" documents onto one A4R/81/2" × 11" page.

• Setting duplex reception*3

Select whether or not to print received documents on both sides of the paper.• Setting the network fax reception*2

Set to perform network fax reception.• Setting for saving the documents for transmission*2

Select whether or not to save the transmitted documents on the server computer.• Setting the file type*2

Select the file type in which the documents for transmission, or of received documents, will be saved in the servercomputer.

• Setting remote diagnosisSet to take advantage of our remote diagnosis system.

• Setting the restricted accessTurn the restricted access on or off.

*1: For 120 V specifications only.*2: When the printer/scanner kit is installed.*3: When the duplex unit is installed.

3DB

1-2-10

(2) Registration• Date and time

Set the current date and time.• Self station information

Register the self telephone number, self station name and self station ID.• One-touch dialing

Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under one-touch keys. Up to 600 entries can be registered.• Group dialing

Register multiple destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under a one-touch key for group dialing. Up to 50entries can be registered as group dial keys or program keys.

• Program dialingRegister frequently used communication modes or fax numbers under one-touch keys. Up to 50 entries can beregistered as program dial keys or group keys.

• Chain dialingRegister chain numbers and names under one-touch keys.

• F-code confidential boxesRegister F-code confidential boxes for F-code based confidential communication. Up to 100 boxes can be registered.

• F-code relay boxesRegister F-code relay box for F-code based relay broadcast communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.

• Encryption boxesRegister encryption boxes for receiving encrypted transmissions. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.

• Permit telephone numbers and IDsRegister the password (permit telephone number or ID) for password check communication.

• Fax forwardingRegister the destination and designated hours for fax forwarding.

• Remote switching numberChange the remote switching number, which is set to “55” at the factory, for receiving faxes using the telephoneconnected to the machine.

• Remote test IDRegister the designated remote test ID for remote diagnosis.

• Management passwordRegister a 4-digit password, which is set to “6482” at the factory, for encrypted communication.

• Access codesRegister access codes for restricted access. Up to 50 codes can be registered.

• Cipher key passwordRegister a 16-digit cipher key password for encrypted communication.

• File name (transmission/reception)*Register the default file name when documents which have been transmitted or received using the network faxfunctions are saved in the designated folder.

• IP address / Host name*Register the IP address or host name of the server computer in which documents which have been received using thenetwork fax functions are saved.

• Administrator’s e-mail address*Register the e-mail address of the computer to be notified in case of an error, as well as where to send Transmissionand Reception Reports.

• Save folder number*Register the number of the folder in which documents which have been transmitted or received using the network faxfunctions will be saved.

*When the printer/scanner kit is installed.

3DB

1-2-11

1-2-3 Installing the optional memory module DIMM

Memory module DIMM installation on the fax control PCB requires the following parts:8 MB memory module DIMM (P/N: 2AW6001)


2. If the printing system is installed, remove the 2 screws and pull theprinting system out of the controller box.


Figure 1-2-22

Rear cover

Screws

Printing system

Screws

Screws


Figure 1-2-23

Figure 1-2-24

3DB

1-2-12

4. Insert the memory module DIMM (8MB) at an angle into thememory slot on the fax control PCB.Important: The memory module DIMM (8MB) must be installedonto the fax control PCB. Please be sure that you do not install itonto the main PCB.

5. Push the free end of the module down toward the fax control PCB.6. Refit all removed parts.

Figure 1-2-25

Memory module DIMMMemory slot

1-3-1

3DB

Section Item Maintenance item contents InitialNo. setting*


U601 Initializing permanent data —

U602 Setting factory defaults —

U603 Setting the user registration data• Setting the self telephone number —• Setting the type of telephone line —• Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode —• Setting remote diagnostic transmission —

U604 Clearing data• Clearing transmission history —• Initializing the management password —• Initializing the F-code confidential box ID —• Initializes the F-code relay box ID —• Initializes the encription box ID —

U605 Setting the system (operational)• Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full

during memory transmission —• Setting an alarm for when reception is completed —• Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed —• Setting the addition of an image to the report —• Setting the error report display format —• Setting the line-monitoring period —• Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching —• Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching —• Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality —

U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)• Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off —• Setting the date format —• Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized —• Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized —• Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list —• Setting the used port entry in the activity report —

U607 Setting the system (communication 1)• Setting the auto redialing interval —• Setting the number of times of auto redialing —• Setting the communication starting speed —• Setting the reception speed —• Setting the mode for remote switching —• Setting the transmission intervals —• Sets the loop current detection before dialing —• Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes —

U608 Setting transmission• Setting the method to process errors —• Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception —• Setting the reference for RTN signal output —• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the sender —• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the receiver —• Setting ECM transmission —• Setting ECM reception —• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1 —• Setting the frequency of the CED signal —

U609 Setting communication time• Setting the T0 time-out time —• Setting the T1 time-out time —• Setting the T2 time-out time 69• Setting the Ta time-out time 30• Setting the Tb1 time-out time 20• Setting the Tb2 time-out time 80• Setting the Tc time-out time 60• Setting the Td time-out time —

1-3-1 Maintenance mode(1) Maintenance mode item list

Fax

1-3-2

3DB


Fax U610 Setting the modem output level• Setting the modem output level —• Adjusting the modem output level —

U611 G3 cable equalizer• Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer —• Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer —

U612 Setting the modem detection level —

U613 Setting the DTMF output level• Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level —• Setting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level —

U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level• Adjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level —• Adjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level —

U615 Setting the NCU• Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN —• Setting PSTN dial tone detection —• Setting busy tone detection —• Setting for a PBX —

U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses• Make time (10 PPS) —• Make time (20 PPS) —

U617 Outputting lists• Settings list —• Action list —• Own-status report —• Protocol list —• One-touch dialing ECM setting list —

U650 Setting the system 1• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax

at 100% magnification 3• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax

in the auto reduction mode 3• Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter)

in the auto reduction mode 3• Setting the recording width for inch specifications —• Setting automatic printing of the protocol list —

U651 Setting the system 2• Setting the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction

for rotation reception 3• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 7• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction

when A4 paper is set 22• Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction

when letter size paper is set 26

U660 Setting the system (communication 2)• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2 —• Setting the short protocol transmission —• Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission —• Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/ telephone auto select mode —• Turning ECM for one-touch dialing on/off —

U670 Setting the system (communication 3)• Setting if V.34 transmission is available —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz) —• Setting the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz) —

U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version —

1-3-3

3DB


U881 Using the flash-memory jig• Saving data from SRAM into the jig —• Writing data from the jig into RAM —• Writing the boot program into the jig —• Reading one-touch/abbreviated dial information —• Writing one-touch/abbreviated dial information —

U882 Setting the software switches —

U894 Performing board test• Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM —• Performing tests on optional memory —

U898 Setting the ports for maintenance mode —


Fax

Others

3DB

1-3-4




DescriptionInitializes software switches and all data in the SRAM on the fax control PCB, according to the destination andOEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB.



INI. ALL DATA

COUNTRY CODE:000


INI. ALL DATA

OEM CODE:000



INI. ALL DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. ALL DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

CautionIf initialized with “000” (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C0820 (fax controlPCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C0820 (fax control PCBproblem) is detected, press the COPY key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover and thenexecute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.

3DB

1-3-5


Destination code list


Code

000009080084088108126136137152156


ItalyGermanySpainU.K.Netherlands

159169181242243253

Code DestinationDestination


Taiwan

Code

253

254

Destination

U600(cont.)

U601 Initializing permanent data

DescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data on the fax control PCB according to thedestination and OEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB without changing user registration data and factory settings.



INI. KEEP DATA

COUNTRY CODE:000


INI. KEEP DATA

OEM CODE:000



INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

CautionIf initialized with “000” (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C0820 (fax controlPCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C0820 (fax control PCBproblem) is detected, press the COPY key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover and thenexecute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.


3DB

1-3-6

U602 Setting factory defaults

DescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data and the SRAM on the fax control PCB, accordingto the destination and OEM.

PurposeUsed to initialize the fax control PCB to the factory default.

Method 1. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key. 2. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is


INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED 000 000

INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00

3DB

1-3-7


U603 Setting the user registration data

DescriptionMakes user settings to enable the use of the copier as a fax.

PurposeTo be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary.



Sets the self telephone number.Sets the type of telephone line.Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode.Sets remote diagnostic transmission.

Display

SELF TEL No.LINE TYPERINGS (F/T) #REMOTE DIAG

Description

Setting the self telephone number 1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.

Up to 20 digits can be entered.To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored telephone number, reset by pressing thestop/clear key.

2. Press the start key. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

The item-selection screen does not reappear until registration or deletion processing is completed.

Setting the type of telephone line1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

DTMF10 PPS20 PPS

Display

1: DTMF2: 103: 20

Description


Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select modeUse this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receivingmode when fax/telephone auto-select is enabled. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 15

Description

Number of fax/telephone rings

Setting range

If you set this to 0, the unit will start fax reception without any ringing. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Setting remote diagnostic transmission 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic transmission is to be enabled.

Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




3DB

1-3-8

U604 Clearing data

DescriptionInitializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history and IDs.

PurposeUsed to clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.

Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate item.

Initialization processing starts. When processing is finished, the screen displays "COMPLETED".

Clears the activity report, error list, action list, transmission history of each department as listed on the department control report, transmission history for displaying the transmission results, document number, timer program information, protocol list, and other transmission history such as image data, excluding items regarding the machine variation adjustment.Initializes the management password.Initializes the F-code confidential box ID.Initializes the F-code relay box ID.Initializes the encription box ID.

Display

COMM. REC

MANAGE PWF-CODE IDF-CODE IDENCRPT ID

Description



U605 Setting the system (operational)

DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.



Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmission.Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed.Sets for the addition of an image to the report.Sets the error report display format.Sets the line-monitoring period.Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning quality.

Display

MEM. FULL

FIN. ALARMAUTO REDU

ADD IMAGEERR. CODEMONITORTIME (ONE)TIME (CON)RESOLUT

Description

Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmissionUsed to select whether to send only stored data or to display an error indication and cancel transmission ifmemory becomes full during memory transmission. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Whether to continue memory transmission or to clear the memory can be selected by the user.Memory is forcibly cleared.

Display

1: CONT

2: STOP

Description


3DB

1-3-9


Setting an alarm for when reception is completed 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

An alarm rings.An alarm does not ring.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performedSets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100%magnification. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper.Auto reduction is not performed.

Display

1: ON

2: OFF

Description


Setting the addition of an image to the reportSelects if an image is to be added to the transmission report. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Image added.Image not added.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the error report display formatSelects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error occurs. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR or STOP).Records a six-digit error code.Records either an error message or code.

Display

1: WORDS2: CODE3: MIX

Description


Setting the line-monitoring periodSets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the start to the end, it can be checkedwhether the transmission was correct or not. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Until transmission is completed.After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS signal.

Display

1: END2: DIS

Description


Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will bedisplayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255 (× 5 : ms)

Description

One-shot detection time for remote switching

Setting range


U605(cont.)


3DB

1-3-10

Setting the continuous detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will bedisplayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255 (× 5 : ms)

Description

Continuous detection time for remote switching

Setting range


Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning qualitySet to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

StandardFineSuper fineUltra fine

Display

1: S2: F3: SF4: UF

Description



U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)

DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.

Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Note: Since this model does not provide LED error indicators, this setting has no affect on actual operation.

Sets the conditions under which an error indicator turns off.Sets the date format.Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized.Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized.Sets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list.Sets used port entry in the activity report.

Display

ALARM LED OFFDATE PATTERNRESO. LOCKDENS. LOCKREPORT SKIP

REPORT ADDPORT

Description

Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

An error indicator turns off only when the reset key is pressed.An error indicator turns off when any key is pressed, an original is inserted or the next transmission is started.

Display

1: RESET

2: COMM

Description


U605(cont.)

3DB

1-3-11


Setting the date formatSelects the date format on the respective reports and sender’s information record. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Year/month/dayMonth/day/yearDay/month/year

Display

1: YMD2: MDY3: DMY

Order


Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initializedSets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Resolution is initialized.Resolution is not initialized.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initializedSets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Density is initialized.Density is not initialized.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the listSets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Unregistered numbers are skipped.Unregistered numbers are not skipped.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting port entry in the activity reportSets whether to enter used port in the activity report. (This setting need not be changed particularly.) 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Port is entered.Port is not entered.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



U606(cont.)


3DB

1-3-12





Sets the auto redialing interval.Sets the number of times of auto redialing.Sets the communication starting speed.Sets the reception speed.Sets the mode for remote switching.Sets the transmission intervals.Sets the loop current detection before dialing.Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.

Display

INTERVALTIMESTX SPEEDRX SPEEDREMOTECALL INTDC LOOPDIS 4BYTE

Description

Setting the auto redialing intervalChange the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redialinterval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

1 to 9 (min.)

Description

Redialing interval

Setting range


Setting the number of times of auto redialing 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 9

Description

Number of redialing

Setting range

When set to 0, no redialing is performed. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

Setting the communication starting speedSets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capability,V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.17, 14400 bpsV.17, 9600 bpsV.27ter, 4800 bpsV.27ter, 2400 bps

Display

1: 1442: 963: 484: 24

Description


Setting the reception speedSets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unithas V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27terV.29, V.27terV.27terV.27ter (fallback only)

Display

1: 1442: 963: 484: 24

Description


3DB

1-3-13


U607(cont.)

Setting the mode for remote switchingSets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type oftelephone connected to the machine. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

One-shot detectionContinuous detection

Display

1: ONE2: CONT

Description


Setting the transmission intervalsSets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next transmission after the previoustransmission was completed. Change the setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission,such as broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

10 s30 s70 s120 s

Display

1: 102: 303: 704: 120

Description


Setting the loop current detection before dialingSets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Performs loop current detection before dialing.Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytesSets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




3DB

1-3-14

U608 Setting transmission

DescriptionMakes settings regarding fax transmission.



Sets the method to process errors.Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.Sets the reference for RTN signal output.Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.Sets ECM transmission.Sets ECM reception.Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.Sets the frequency of the CED signal.

Display

ERRORDIS-2 RESRTN CHECKTX ECHORX ECHOECM TXECM RXTCF CHECKCED FREQ.

Description

Setting the method to process errorsSelects if transmission is to be treated as an error if an RTN or PIN signal is received. If it is treated as an error,an alarm sounds and a transmission report is output. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Transmission is not treated as an error.Transmission is treated as an error.

Display

1: OK2: ERROR

Description


Setting the number of times of DIS signal receptionSets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures fortransmission errors and other problems. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Responds to the first signal.Responds to the second signal.

Display

1: ONCE2: TWICE

Description


Setting the reference for RTN signal outputSets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to thequality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Error line rate of 5%Error line rate of 10%Error line rate of 15%Error line rate of 20%

Display

1: 52: 103: 154: 20

Description


3DB

1-3-15


Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the senderSets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due toechoes at the sender. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.

Display

1: 5002: 300

Description


Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiverSets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received. Used when problemsoccur due to echoes at the receiver. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.

Display

1: 5002: 75

Description


Setting ECM transmissionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM transmission is enabled.ECM transmission is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting ECM receptionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM reception is enabled.ECM reception is disabled.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measureto ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 255

Description

Number of allowed error bytes when detecting TCF

Setting range


U608(cont.)


3DB

1-3-16

Setting the frequency of the CED signalSets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance forinternational communications. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.

2100 Hz1100 Hz

Display

1: 21002: 1100

Frequency of the CED signal



U609 Setting communication time

DescriptionSets the time-out time for fax transmission.

PurposeUsed mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications.



Sets the T0 time-out time.Sets the T1 time-out time.Sets the T2 time-out time.Sets the Ta time-out time.Sets the Tb1 time-out time.Sets the Tb2 time-out time.Sets the Tc time-out time.Sets the Td time-out time.

Display

T0T1T2TaTb1Tb2TcTd

Description

Setting the T0 time-out timeSets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent. Depending on the quality of theexchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected.Change the setting to prevent this problem. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

30 to 90 s

Description

T0 time-out time

Setting range


Setting the T1 time-out timeSets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for thismaintenance item. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

30 to 90 s

Description

T1 time-out time

Setting range


U608(cont.)

3DB

1-3-17


Setting the T2 time-out timeThe T2 time-out time decides the following.• From CFR signal output to image data reception• From image data reception to the next signal reception• In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

T2 time-out time


1 to 255 69 100 ms


Setting the Ta time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connectedtelephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta settime, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode,change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Ta time-out time


1 to 255 s 30


Ta

Tb2

Tb1Rin

g de

tect

ion

Line

con

nect

ion

as a

fax

mac

hine

Rin

gs

Rin

g ba

ck to

ne s

end

star

t

Sta

rt o

f fax

rec

eptio

n

Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time

Setting the Tb1 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call asa fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception isunsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tb1 time-out time


1 to 255 20 100 ms


Setting the Tb2 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connectedtelephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode,change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tb2 time-out time


1 to 255 80 100 ms


U609(cont.)


3DB

1-3-18

U609(cont.)

Setting the Tc time-out timeIn the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connectedtelephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time.In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Tc time-out time


1 to 255 s 60


Setting the Td time-out timeSets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In theTAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be surenot to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Td time-out time

Setting range

1 to 255 s



3DB

1-3-19


U610 Setting the modem output level

DescriptionSets the modem output level.



Sets the modem output level.Adjusts the modem output level.

Display

SGL LEVEL MODEMSGL OUTPUT ADJ

Description

Setting the modem output levelTo be set when installing the machine in order to adapt to the line characteristics.1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 to 15

Description

Modem output level

Setting range


Adjusting the modem output levelNo change is necessary from the factory default. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.


Setting

121110987654

Output level




3DB

1-3-20

U611 G3 cable equalizer

DescriptionSets the G3 cable equalizer.



Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.

Display

REG. G3 TX EQRREG. G3 RX EQR

Description

Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 km1.8 km3.6 km7.2 km

Display

1: 02: 183: 364: 72

Description


Setting the G3 reception cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

0 km1.8 km3.6 km7.2 km

Display

1: 02: 183: 364: 72

Description



3DB

1-3-21


U612 Setting the modem detection level

DescriptionSets the modem detection level.

PurposeUsed to improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.



–33 dBm–38 dBm–43 dBm–47 dBm

Display

1: 332: 383: 434: 47

Description



U613 Setting the DTMF output level

DescriptionSets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.

PurposeUsed if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone.



Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.

Display

DTMF TX LEVEL (H)DTMF TX LEVEL (L)

Description


0 to 255

Description


Setting range

E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is –8 dBm. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.



3DB

1-3-22

U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level

DescriptionAdjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.

PurposeNo change is necessary from the factory default.



Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.

Display

SGL LVL DTMF (H)SGL LVL DTMF (L)

Description



Setting

121110987654




3DB

1-3-23


U615 Setting the NCU

DescriptionMakes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).

PurposeTo be set when installing the facsimile kit.



Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.Sets PSTN dial tone detection.Sets busy tone detection.Setting for a PBX.

Display

EXCHANGEDIAL TONEBUSY TONEPBX SETTING

Description

Setting the connection to PBX/PSTNSelects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Connected to the public switched telephone network.Connected to a PBX.

Display

1: PSTN2: PBX

Description


Setting PSTN dial tone detectionSelects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a publicswitched telephone network. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Detects the dial tone.Does not detect the dial tone.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting busy tone detectionWhen a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, orthe busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented.However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Detects busy tone.Does not detect busy tone.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3DB

1-3-24

Setting for a PBXSelects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Earth modeFlashing modeCode number mode

Display

1: EARTH2: FLS3: LOOP

Description



U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses

DescriptionAdjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial pulses.

PurposeChange the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20 PPS is for Japanese specificationsonly and no setting is necessary for other specifications.



Make time (10 PPS)Make time (20 PPS)

Display

MAKE TIME (10 PPS)MAKE TIME (20 PPS)

Description


1 to 99 (ms)1 to 49 (ms)

Description

Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS)Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS)

Setting range



U615(cont.)

3DB

1-3-25


U617 Outputting lists

DescriptionOutputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions.

PurposeUsed to check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax.

Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Press the appropriate list selection.


Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number, confidential boxes, ROM versions and other information.Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details and other information.Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode (own-status report) regarding fax transmission only.Outputs a list of transmission procedures.Outputs a list of ECM settings for one-touch dialing.

Display

SETTING LIST

ACTION LIST

SELF ST RPT

PROTOCOL LIST1-T. ECM

Description


3DB

1-3-26


DescriptionMakes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automaticprinting of the protocol list.



Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification.Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode.Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode.Sets the recording width for inch specifications.Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.

Display

CUT LINE (100%)

CUT LINE (AUTO)

CUT LINE (A4)

RX WIDTH 11"PROTOCOL PRT

Description

Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnificationSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those linesare ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving at 100%


0 to 22 3 16 lines

Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease it if the received image does notinclude the entire transmitted data.


Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, thoselines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded onthe same page. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode


0 to 22 3 16 lines



3DB

1-3-27


Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacitywhen the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions below.If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data ona page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.• With A4R present and folio absent in the drawers• With letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode


0 to 22 3 16 lines



Setting the recording width for inch specificationsSets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inch-specification machine. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and records at 100% magnifications.Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.

Display

1: 11 × 17

2: B4

Description


Setting the automatic printing of the protocol listSets if the protocol list is automatically printed out. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

The protocol list is not printed out automatically.The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication only if a communication error occurs.The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.

Display

1: OFF2: ERROR

3: ON

Description



U650(cont.)


3DB

1-3-28


DescriptionSets the variation range in rotation reception and the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.



Sets the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction for rotation reception.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

Display

ROTAT. RX ERR

ADJ LINESADJ LINES (A4)

ADJ LINES (LT)

Description

Setting the variations range in rotation receptionSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data exceeds the acceptable number oflines in the rotation reception mode. If the number of excessive lines is smaller than the set value, those linesare ignored and rotation reception is performed; if it is larger than the set value, rotation reception is notperformed. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of variation lines in the auxiliary scanning direction


0 to 255 3

Even if rotation reception fails, it can be enabled by increasing this value, however, some parts of thereceived image may not be printed.


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction


0 to 22 7


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set


0 to 22 22


Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Description

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionwhen letter size paper is set


0 to 26 26



3DB

1-3-29







Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2.Sets the short protocol transmission.Sets the reception of short protocol transmission.Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.Turns ECM for one-touch dialing on/off.

Display

TCF CHECK 2SHORT PROTOCOL TXSHORT PROTOCOL RXNUMBER of CNG (F/T) 1TOUCH ECM

Description

Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal. 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.

Checks for 1.0 s.Checks for 0.8 s.

Display

1: LONG2: SHORT

Description


Setting the short protocol transmissionSets if short protocol transmission is performed. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Short protocol transmission is performed.Short protocol transmission is not performed.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


Setting the reception of a short protocol transmissionSelects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine,communication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignoreshort protocol transmission to prevent such problems. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Receives short protocol transmission.Ignores short protocol transmission.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3DB

1-3-30

Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select modeSets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

Detects CNG once.Detects CNG twice.

Display

1: 1 TIME2: 2 TIMES

Description


Setting ECM for each one-touch keyTurns ECM on/off for each one-touch key. 1. Enter a registered two-digit one-touch key number and press the start key. 2. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.

ECM communication is performed for all one-touch keys.Disables the ECM for one-touch keys.

Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description

3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering a one-touch key number is displayed.To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering a one-touchkey number.


U660(cont.)

3DB

1-3-31







Enables or disables V.34 communication.Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz).Sets the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz).

Display

V.34 MODEMV.34-3429HzV.34-3200HzV.34-3000HzV.34-2800 Hz

Description

Enabling/disabling V.34 communicationSets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception. 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.

V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Display

1: ON2: TX3: RX4: OFF

Description




Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description




Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description



3DB

1-3-32



Display

1: ON2: OFF

Description


CompletionPress the stop clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version

DescriptionDisplays the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.

PurposeUsed to check the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.

Method 1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax control PCB is displayed.


U670(cont.)

3DB

1-3-33


U881 Using the flash-memory jig

DescriptionMoves data or program code between the flash-memory jig and the machine’s SRAM.

PurposeWhen replacing the fax control PCB, use this procedure to save SRAM data from the old PCB and load it intothe new PCB.



UPLOAD TO JIG:ALL DOWNLOAD FROM JIG: AllWRITE BOOT PROGRAMUPLOAD TO JIG:DIALDOWNLOAD FROM JIG: DIAL

Display Description

Saves all SRAM data into the jig.Loads all data saved in the jig into the machine's SRAM.Loads the boot program into the jig.Reading one-touch/abbreviated dial informationWriting one-touch/abbreviated dial information

Saving SRAM data into the jigSaves SRAM data into the jig.

UPLOAD TO JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data is saved into the jig, and the screen indicates the result.• If the operation was successful:

UPLOAD TO JIG

OK

• If the operation failed:

UPLOAD TO JIG

NG XXX

2. Press the stop/clear key. 3. Turn the power off.

where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See “Error Codes for Operation U881” on page 1-3-36.


3DB

1-3-34

Writing data from the flash-memory jig into SRAMWrites the data from the jig into the machine’s SRAM.

DOWNLOAD FROM JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data write is executed, and the screen displays the result.• If the write operation was successful:

DOWNLOAD FROM JIG

OK


DOWNLOAD FROM JIG

NG XXX


Writing the boot program into the jigWrites the boot program into the flash memory in the jig. 1. When this item is pressed, the machine writes the boot program into the jig's flash memory, and the screen

displays the result.• If the write operation was successful:

WRITE PROGRAM

OK


WRITE PROGRAM

NG XXX


where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See "Error Codes for Operation U881" on page 1-3-36.


U881(cont.)

3DB

1-3-35


Reading one-touch/abbreviated dial informationReads one-touch/abbreviated dial information from the SRAM into the flash memory in the jig.

DIAL REG. TO JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data read from the SRAM into the flash memory in the jig is executed, and thescreen displays the result.• If the read operation was successful:

DIAL REG. TO JIG

OK

• If the read operation failed:

DIAL REG. TO JIG

NG XXX


Writing one-touch/abbreviated dial informationWrites one-touch/abbreviated dial information from the flash memory in the jig into the SRAM.

DIAL REG. FROM JIG?

1. Press the start key. The data write from the flash memory in the jig into the SRAM is executed, and thescreen displays the result.• If the write operation was successful:

DIAL REG. FROM JIG

OK


DIAL REG. FROM JIG

NG XXX


U881(cont.)

where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See "Error Codes for Operation U881" on page 1-3-36.



3DB

1-3-36

Jig not present.

No CF card.

No data in CF card.

CF data is incompatible. (This error occurs if you change the file name and attempt to loadthe data into a different machine model.)

Bad CF data (Checksum error)

CF read error

CF write error

Jig flash-memory read error(Following SRAM read, flash-memory data failed to match SRAM data.)

Jig flash-memory write error

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

Code Meaning

Error Codes for Operation U881U881(cont.)

3DB

1-3-37


Data and Program Upload/Download Flows [Conceptual Drawings]• Saving Stored Data into Jig (Maintenance Mode)

• With CF • Without CF

• Loading Saved Data (Maintenance Mode)• With CF • Without CF

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax softwareJig boot

Jig

Data

Program

Data

CF

FlashBoot

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

JigFlashBoot Data

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax softwareJig boot

Jig

Data

Program

Data

CF

FlashBoot

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

Jig

FlashBoot Data

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

U881(cont.)


3DB

1-3-38

• Writing the fax program (Executes automatically when the jig is started.)

• Writing the boot program (Maintenance Mode)

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

Jig boot

JigFlashBoot Data

Program

Data

CF

Start : Fax board

Fax board

Data

Fax software

JigFlashBoot Data

Program

Data

CF

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

: Transmitted data

: Boot program

: Data flow

U881(cont.)

3DB

1-3-39


U882 Setting the software switches

DescriptionSets the software switches on the fax control PCB individually.

PurposeUse to change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs. Since thecommunication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the start key.3. Use numeric keys "7" to "0" to switch each bit between 0 and 1.4. Press the start key to set the value.



3DB

1-3-40

U882(cont.)

List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed

No.

10

14

16

17

19

22

23

24

33

<System setting>

Bit Item

0

5

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

21

5

3

21

0

76543210

One-touch name and telephone number display on the destination check screen

Communication end buzzer after reception

Ringer frequency detection method

Top-bottom inversion in duplex reception

F code check in NW-FAX reception

Transfer of polling-received originals to PC

Resolution in TIFF files

Addition of telephone number in PC file name

Automatic protocol list output at busy time

Debug information report output format

Recovery of transmission mode after end of fax operation

Prohibition of split of standard size

Declaration of reception size in automatic paper source selection for fax

Declaration of reception size in setting "declaration based on the status of drawers"

Number of adjustment lines in PDF files

No.

101

106

107

108

111

112

113

<Communication control procedure>

Bit Item

2

1

0

7654

3210

5

4

3

2

1

0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

3

6

2

0

76543210

Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 17)


Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 27ter)

Coding format in transmission

Coding format in reception

33600 bps/V34

31200 bps/V34

28800 bps/V34

26400 bps/V34

24000 bps/V34

21600 bps/V34

19200 bps/V34

16800 bps/V34

14400 bps/V34

12000 bps/V34

9600 bps/V34

7200 bps/V34

4800 bps/V34

2400 bps/V34

FSK detection in V.8

CNG transmission stop condition

FIF length in transmission of more than 4 times of DIS/DTC signal


Adjustment width in automatic reception level adjustment

No.

66

67

<Machine default>

Bit Item

765

654

Selection of scanning density

Selection of reception mode

3DB

1-3-41


U882(cont.)

List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed

No.

123

124

125

130

133

134

136

137

138

<Communication time setting>

Bit Item

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

7

76543210

76543210

76543210

T3 timeout setting

T4 timeout setting (automatic equipment)

T5 timeout setting

Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal

T0 timeout setting (manual equipment)

Phase C timeout in ECM reception

Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo

Timeout 2 in countermeasures against echo

Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8

No.

174

175

182

183

184

185

186

188

189

192

195

<Calling time setting>

Bit Item

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

DTMF signal transmission time

DTMF signal pause time

Ringer detection cycle (minimum)

Ringer detection cycle (maximum)

Ringer ON time detection

Ringer OFF time detection

Ringer OFF non-detection time

Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)

Allowable dial tone interruption time

Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit

Ringer frequency detection invalid time

No.

161

162

165

166

167

<NCU setting>

Bit Item

7654

7654

1

76543210

7654

10

Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern

Busy tone detection pattern

Busy tone detection in automatic FAX/TEL switching

Access code registration for connection to PSTN

FAX/TEL automatic switching ringback tone ON/OFF cycle

Pseudo-ringer duty ratio

No.

155

156

<Modem setting>

Bit Item

76543210

76543210

RTH offset (lower byte)

RTH offset (upper byte)

No.

596

597

598

599

<Experimental modem setting>

Bit Item

76543210

76543210

76543210

76543210

Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) lower part

Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) upper part

Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) lower part

Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) upper part


3DB

1-3-42

U894 Performing board test

DescriptionPerforms tests on the SRAM, DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and optional memory on the fax controlPCB.

PurposeUsed to check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective installed memories.


The test executes.

Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.Performs tests on optional memory.

Display

BOARD MEMORYBOARD OP. MEM

Description

Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM 1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.


TEST MEMORY

OK


TEST MEMORY

NG DRAM IMG 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗ ******: address

DRAM IMG: DRAM (image memory) errorDRAM B.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) errorSRAM: SRAM error


Performing tests on optional memory 1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.


TEST OPTION MEMORY

OK


TEST OPTION MEMORY

NG DRAM B.M 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗ ******: address

• If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):

TEST OPTION MEMORY

NG DRAM B.M


CompletionIf the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main switch off and on.

3DB

1-3-43


U898 Setting the ports for maintenance mode

DescriptionSets the ports targeted for the maintenance mode when a multi port (optional only in Japan) is installed. Thismode need not be set particularly.


DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the printer board or facsimile kit isinstalled.

PurposeTo check the condition of use of the printer or fax.

MethodPress the start key. The print count of the printer or fax is displayed.

Setting 1. Press the appropriate item. 2. Enter a six-digit numerical value using the numeric keys. To clear both of the printer and fax counts, press

the reset key. 3. Press the start key. The count is set.


3DB

1-4-1

1-4-1 Error codes

(1) Error codeError codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication “U”followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an “E” indication, followed by fivedigits.)The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate thedetailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have “00” as the last two digits.

Error code

U X X X X X

Detailed classification of error codeGeneral classification of error codeError code indication

3DB

1-4-2

(2) Table of general classification


U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.

U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.

U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 1-

4-4 “U004XX error code table”).

U00500 Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after

interruption.

U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-5 “U006XX

error code table”).

U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.

U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 “U008XX error code table”).

U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 “U009XX error code table”).

U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 “U010XX error

code table”).

U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 “U011XX error code

table”).

U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.

U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.

U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.

U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode

(refer to page 1-4-10 “U017XX error code table”).

U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode

(refer to page 1-4-10 “U018XX error code table”).

U02000 Relay broadcast was refused by a relay station because of a mismatch in permit ID number and

permit telephone number when a relay command was issued.

U02100 A relay command failed because the destination unit (relay station) had no relay broadcast

capability.

U02200 A relay command from a command station failed because a telephone number that was not

registered in the relay station was specified. Or, relay broadcast was requested to a relay station

but failed because a telephone number that was not registered in the relay station was specified.

Or, F-code based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the F-code

relay box was deleted.

U023XX Receiving station information was not normally received in reception of a relay command (refer

to page 1-4-10 “U023XX error code table”).

U02400 An interoffice F-code based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the

specified relay box number.

U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.

U03100 In reverse polling, although no original was set in the destination unit, transmission was

complete.

U03200 In confidential polling reception, data was not accumulated in the specified box in the destination

unit. Or, in interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box

specified by the destination unit.

U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in

permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception,

operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.

U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit

is either of our make or by another manufacturer).

3DB

1-4-3


U03500 In confidential polling reception, the specified confidential box No. was not registered in the

destination. Or, in interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, the specified F-code

confidential box number was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being

accessed.

U03600 Confidential polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in specified confidential

box No. Or, an interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a

mismatch in the specified F-code confidential box number.

U03700 Confidential polling reception failed because the destination unit had no confidential polling

transmission capability or data was not accumulated in any box in the destination unit. Or,

interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no F-

code based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any F-code

confidential box in the destination unit.

U04000 The confidential box specified for confidential transmission was not registered in the destination

unit. Or, in interoffice F-code based transmission mode, the specified F-code box number was

not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed.

U04100 Confidential transmission failed because the destination unit had no confidential capability. Or,

F-code based transmission failed because the destination unit had no F-code based reception

capability.

U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.

U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication

capability.

U044XX Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted

transmission (refer to page 1-4-10 “U044XX error code table”).

U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.

U05000 In transmission with a specified number, the set number of originals was different from the

number of transmitted originals.

U05100 Password check transmission was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.

U05200 Password check reception was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.

U05300 Destination unit in password check reception mode did not receive data because the permit ID

did not agree.

U09000 G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine.

U12000 Relay broadcast was requested from a command station but memory overflowed during

reception. Or, in F-code based relay reception, memory overflowed.

U12100 Relay was commanded but memory overflowed in the destination unit (relay station).

U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in F-code based confidential reception,

memory overflowed.

U14100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during confidential transmission. Or, in interoffice F-

code based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.

U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.

U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.

U19200 Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred.

U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.

U19400 Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.

3DB

1-4-4

(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B


U00420 A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in

permit ID or telephone number.

U00421 F-code based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified F-code

relay box number.

U00430 Polling request (confidential or reverse) was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in

permit number. Or, F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but

interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.

U00431 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was

not registered. Or, an F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the

specified F-code confidential box was not registered.

U00432 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in confidential box ID

number. Or, an F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a

mismatch in F-code confidential box numbers.

U00433 Confidential polling request was received but data was not present in the confidential box. Or, F-

code based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the F-

code confidential box.

U00434 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box

No. was intended for encryption.

U00435 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box

was being accessed. Or, F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but

interrupted because the specified F-code confidential box was being accessed.

U00440 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not

registered. Or, F-code based confidential reception or F-code based relay reception was

interrupted because the specified F-code box was not registered. Or, F-code based confidential

reception or F-code relay command reception was interrupted because the specified F-code box

No. was being accessed.

U00441 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended

for encryption.

U00450 The destination unit in password check transmission mode interrupted transmission because of a

mismatch in permit ID.

U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not

registered. Or, encrypted reception request was received but interrupted because the specified

encryption box was being accessed.

U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box

was not registered.

3DB

1-4-5

(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error


U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.

U00810 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.


U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.

U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.

(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error

(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit


U00600 The document processor cover is open.

U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.

U00602 Image scanning section problem.

U00603 No document feed.

U00604 Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity.

U00610 Recording section cover is open.

U00611 Recording paper JAM

U00613 Image writing section problem

U00614 Nearly empty of recording paper

U00615 Empty of recording paper

U00620 Copier fixing unit problem

U00622 Copier drive motor problem

U00655 CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error.

U00656 Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error.

U00670 Power was cut off during communication.

U00677 There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode.

U00690 System error.

3DB

1-4-6


U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps.

Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at

2400 bps.

U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.

U01010 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the


U01011 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number


U01012 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the


U01013 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset

number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01014 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of


U01015 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of


U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM

signal, and T1 timeout was detected.

U01017 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of


U01018 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number


U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of

command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of


U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number


U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of


U01023 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset number


U01024 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number


U01025 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number


U01026 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number


U01027 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset

number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).

U01040 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception.

U01041 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of

our make).

U01042 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.

U01043 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of

our make).

U01044 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our

make).

(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission

3DB

1-4-7


U01045 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal.

U01046 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal.

U01047 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal.

U01048 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal.

U01049 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make).

U01050 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM).

U01051 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM).

U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).

U01053 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM).

U01054 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM).

U01055 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM).

U01056 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM).

U01057 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM).

U01070 Polarity reversal was detected during handshake.

U01071 Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission.

U01072 A break in loop current was detected during transmission.

U01073 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when

transmitting after reception.

U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.

U01091 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was

received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the

symbol speed maintained at the level of connection.

U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible

combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.

3DB

1-4-8

(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception


U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.

U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS

signal.

U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.

U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.

U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.

U01112 No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal.

U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.

U01114 No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal.

U01115 No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal.

U01116 No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal.

U01117 No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal.

U01118 No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal.

U01119 No further signals were received after reception of a message.

U01120 No response after transmission of an MCF signal.

U01121 No response after transmission of an RTP signal.

U01122 No response after transmission of an RTN signal.

U01123 No response after transmission of a PIP signal.

U01124 No response after transmission of a PIN signal.

U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).

U01126 No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

U01127 No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).

U01128 No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).

U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).

U01140 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal.

U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.

U01142 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal.

U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.

U01144 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal.

U01145 A DCN signal was received after reception of a message.

U01146 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after

reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication).

U01147 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal.

U01148 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal.

U01149 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal.

U01150 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal.

U01151 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

U01152 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM).

U01153 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).

U01154 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).

U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).

U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line.

U01161 Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception.

U01162 A break in loop current was detected during message reception.

U01163 Polarity reversal was detected during message reception.

U01164 One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception.

U01170 A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception.

U01172 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after

transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission.

3DB

1-4-9


U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception

sequence in the V.34 mode.

U01199 A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.

3DB

1-4-10

(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission





units.

U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 beforeentering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for pollingtransmission)/INFOh was not detected.

U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel beforeentering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.

U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination ofcommunication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from thedestination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and,in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut.

(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception



U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).



units.

U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before enteringphase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for pollingreception)/probing tone was not detected.

U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.

U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel beforeentering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.

U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination ofcommunication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to thedestination unit and the line was cut.

(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission


U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.

U04401 Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.

(2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception


U02303 Timeout was detected before a correct DNL signal was received.

U02304 A signal other than MPS or EOM signal was received after a DNL signal was received.

3DB

1-5-1





C0030

C0070

C0130

C0280

C0820

C0830

C0870

Fax control PCB system problem• Processing with the fax software was

disabled due to a hardware or soft-ware problem.

Fax control PCB incompatibilitydetection problem*• Fax software is not compatible with

MMI software.

Fax control PCB software switchchecksum error• A checksum error occurred with the

software switch value stored in theflash ROM on the fax control PCB.

Communication problem betweenthe fax control PCB and main PCB• Communication between the fax

control PCB and the main PCB of themachine cannot be performednormally.

Fax control PCB CG ROM checksumerror• A checksum error occurred with the

CG ROM data in the Flash ROM onthe fax control PCB.

Flash ROM program area checksumerror• A checksum error occurred with the

program in the Flash ROM on the faxcontrol PCB.

Fax control PCB to main PCB high-capacity data transfer problem*• High-capacity data transfer between

the fax control PCB and the mainPCB of the machine was not normallyperformed even if the data transferwas retried the specified times.


MMI softwareversion is earlier.


Poor contact inthe connectorterminals.

Defective faxcontrol PCB ormain PCB.



Poor contact inthe connectorterminals.

Defective faxcontrol PCB ormain PCB.


Check the version of MMI software andupgrade it to a version that accommodatesthe fax function.


Check the connection of connector YC1 onthe fax control PCB and CN44 on the mainPCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.

Replace the fax control PCB or main PCBand check for correct operation.



Check the connection of connector YC1 onthe fax control PCB and CN44 on the mainPCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.

Replace the fax control PCB or main PCBand check for correct operation.

*: When the printer/scanner kit is installed.

3DB

1-5-2



C0880

C0890

Fax control PCB program archiveproblem*• When power is turned on, the

compressed program in the FlashROM on the fax control PCB was notsuccessfully decompressed.

Fax control PCB CG font archiveproblem*• When power is turned on, the

compressed CG font in the FlashROM on the fax control PCB was notsuccessfully decompressed.





3DB

1-5-3

1-5-2 Troubleshooting

ContentsRemarks

Causes Corrective measures

An error message is displayed on thecomputer screen while transmission isperformed.“Network error has occurred.”

“Communication time out has occurred.”

“FAX connection has been cut.”

“FAX connection could not be made for thefollowing possible reasons:*The FAX main unit isn't turned on.*Network FAX address is wrong.*A fault has occurred at the FAX machine.”

A connection errorof scanner NICoccurred while datawas transmitted.

A network cablewas disconnectedwhile data wastransmitted.

Transmission failedbecause dataamount (traffic) onthe network was toolarge.

The fax system isnot installed.

Self dignostic codeC0280 occurred.

The fax software isnot compatible withthe NW-FAXfunctions.

The main PCB ofthe machine is notcompatible with theNW-FAX functions.

NIC is beinginitialized.

Self dignostic codeof NIC occurred.

A network cable isdisconnected.

The main switch isOFF.

The IP address orhost name is notcorrect.

Connect the scanner NIC properly.

Connect the network cables of the computerand the machine properly.

Retransmit after a while.Contact the network administrator for check.

Install the fax system.

Check the connection of the flat cable.

Upgrade the software.

Replace the main PCB.

Retransmit after a while.

RTC memory is not mounted or connectionis not proper. Check the connection.

Connect the network cables properly.

Turn ON the main switch.

Check the IP address and host nameregistered in the FAX Driver and thoseregistered in the scanner NIC.

3DB

1-5-4

ContentsRemarks


“The FAX is in use.”

“FAX memory is full.”

“The number of FAX transmission reservationshas reached maximum.”

“The FAX cannot be used.”

“The job has been interrupted at the FAXoperation panel.”

Mail notification relatedTransmission report is not delivered to clients.

Copying is beingperformed.Fax printing is beingperformed.Fax setting is beingperformed.Received originalsare beingtransmitted.Remote diagnosis isbeing performed.Printing interruptoccurs duringtransmission.Network scanner isbeing used.Maintenance modeis being performed.

Fax memorybecame full whiletransmission wasperformed.

NW-FAXtransmission wastried when 50 itemsof fax transmissionwas reserved.

The main switch isOFF when receptioninto memory is set.

Fax is being reset.

The interrupt keywas pressed whiletransmission wasperformed.

NW-FAXtransmission ofreport output in thefax initial setting isOFF or to beperformed in aspecial condition.

A client mailaddress is notregistered in theFAX Driver.

A client mailaddress registeredin the FAX Driver isnot correct.

Retransmit after the cause described left iscleared.

Secure memory area. (Delete data in thememory.)Add memory.Retransmit with smaller resolution.Divide originals to be transmitted.

After a while (after the number of thereserved items is reduced), retransmit.

Turn on the main switch.

Retransmit after clearing reset.

Retransmit after interrupt was cleared.

If the setting is OFF, no report is returnedregardless of fax communication result. If aspecial condition is set, a report is returnedwhen a special event such as faxcommunication error or broadcasttransmission occurs. If a transmission reportis needed, turn the setting ON.

Register the client mail address in the FAXDriver initial setting.

Check the client mail address.

3DB

1-5-51-5-5

ContentsRemarks


Mail notification relatedTransmission report is not delivered to clients.

Activity report, restricted access report, powerfailure report or backup RAM error report is notdelivered to the administrator.

The mail address ofthe fax administratoror the scanneradministrator is notregistered.

The IP address ofmail server is notregistered in thescanner initialsetting.

The IP address orhost name of mailserver registered inthe scanner initialsetting is notcorrect.

Accounting of aclient mail addressis not performed.

The mail server isdown.

The client mailsoftware has notstarted.

NW-FAX receptionis OFF in the faxinitial setting.

Scanneradministrator mailaddress or faxadministrator mailaddress is notregistered.

Scanneradministrator mailaddress or faxadministrator mailaddress is notcorrect.

The IP address orhost name of mailserver is notregistered in thescanner initialsetting.

Register the mail address of the faxadministrator or the scanner administrator.

Register the IP address and host name ofmail server.

Check the registered IP address and hostname of mail server.

Contact the administrator for check.

Check the mail server.

Start the mail software.

Turn the NW-FAX reception setting ON.

Register the scanner administrator mailaddress or the fax administrator mailaddress.

Check the administrator mail address.

Register the IP address and host name ofmail server.

3DB

1-5-6

ContentsRemarks


Activity report, restricted access report, powerfailure report or backup RAM error report is notdelivered to the administrator.

Received originals are not stored.(including reception report)

The IP address orhost nameregistered in thescanner initialsetting is notcorrect.

Accounting of anadministrator mailaddress is notperformed in themail server.

The mail server isdown.

The administratormail software hasnot started.

NW-FAX receptionsetting is OFF.

The IP address orhost name ofstorage destinationcomputer is notcorrect.

The storagedestinationcomputer has notstarted.

Transmission failedbecause dataamount (traffic) onthe network was toolarge.

Copying is beingperformed.Fax printing is beingperformed.Fax setting is beingperformed.Received originalsare beingtransmitted.Printing interruptoccurs duringtransmission.Network scanner isbeing used.

Check the registered IP address and hostname of mail server.


Check the mail server.

Start the mail software.

Turn NW-FAX reception in the fax initialsetting ON.

Check the IP address and host nameregistered in the fax and those in the storagedestination computer.

Start the storage destination computer andstart the Scanner File Utility.

Contact the network administrator for check.

Perform automatic retransmission after thecause described left is cleared.

3DB

1-5-71-5-7

ContentsRemarks


Received originals are not stored.(including reception report)

Address book relatedWhen a CSV file is imported, leading “0” of faxnumbers is deleted.

When a CSV file is imported, the first line isnot imported.

List items are not displayed.

When an address is deleted, the group isdeleted.

The Scanner FileUtility of the storagedestinationcomputer has notstarted.

The network cableis disconnected.

The reception foldernumber is notcorrect.

The hard disk drivein the storagedestinationcomputer is full.

The Scanner FileUtility version doesnot match.

The reception reportof report output inthe fax initial settingis OFF or to beperformed in aspecial condition.

If a CSV file isedited with Excel,since fax numbersare processed asnumerical values,leading "0" isautomaticallydeleted.

The first line of CSVfiles is processed asheader.

The display width ischanged bydragging columnheader in the list. Ifthe display width is0, the item is notdisplayed.

If all addresses of agroup are deleted,the group is alsodeleted.

Start the storage destination computer andstart the Scanner File Utility.

Connect the network cable properly.

Use the reception folder number registeredin fax the same as the folder number set inthe Scanner File Utility.


Upgrade the Scanner File Utility to Ver. 3.Xor later.

If the setting is OFF, no report is transmittedregardless of fax communication result. If aspecial condition is set, a report istransmitted when a special event such asfax communication error occurs. If areception report is needed, turn the settingON.

Edit the CSV file with a text editor.

Input item names to indicate the descriptionof each column in the first line of CSV files.

Select the position between the columnheader items and drag so that the item isdisplayed.

Delete the group. (Addresses of groupmember are not deleted.)

3DB

1-5-8

ContentsRemarks


The address book cannot be started.

The toolbar is not displayed.

Although the “Toolbar” setting in the “View”menu is On, the toolbar is not displayed .

If the address bookfinishes abnormallybecause of anyreason, the addressbook informationmay remain.

If “Toolbar” in the“View” menu is Off,the toolbar is notdisplayed.

The toolbar can bedocked and placedoutside the addressbook.

Restart the computer and start the addressbook.

Turn the "Toolbar" setting of the "View"menu On.

Check to see if the toolbar is placed outsidethe address book.

3DB

1-6-1

1-6-1 Updating the firmware(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Flash ROM)

Perform the steps below when updating the firmware in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB.

Firmware updating requires the following tools:Flash tool assembly (P/N 3596801*)Control ROM IC1 (P/N 3DB6801*)Control ROM IC2 (P/N 3DB6802*)Control ROM IC3 (P/N 3DB6803*)Control ROM IC4 (P/N 3DB6804*)

Caution:• Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or inserting

connectors.


2. If the printing system is installed, remove the 2screws and pull the printing system out of thecontroller box.

Figure 1-6-1

Rear cover

Screws

Printing system

Screws

Figure 1-6-2

3DB

1-6-2

3. Remove 13 screws and take off the controller-boxcover.

4. Fit control ROM IC1 and control ROM IC2 to theflash tool assembly.

5. Insert connector CN1 (the one furthest from theLEDs) on the flash tool assembly into connectorYC5 on the fax control PCB.

Screws


Figure 1-6-3

Control ROM IC1

CN1

Control ROM IC2

CN2 Flash tool assembly

Figure 1-6-4

Fax control PCB

Flash tool assembly

YC5

CN1

Figure 1-6-5

3DB

1-6-3

6. Connect the power plug into the wall outlet. Upgrading of control ROM IC1 and 2 starts and LED on the flash toolassembly flashes. The LED remains on when upgrading is complete.

7. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.8. Remove the flash tool assembly from the fax control PCB.9. Remove control ROM IC1 and control ROM IC2 from the flash tool assembly, and then fit control ROM IC3 and

control ROM IC4 to the flash tool assembly.10. Insert connector CN1 (the one furthest from the LEDs) on the flash tool assembly into connector YC5 on the fax

control PCB.11. Connect the power plug into the wall outlet. Upgrading of control ROM IC3 and 4 starts and LED on the flash tool

assembly flashes. The LED remains on when upgrading is complete.12. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.13. Remove the flash tool assembly from the fax control PCB.14. Refit the fax controller-box cover and rear cover.

3DB

1-6-4

(2) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB (Compact Flash card)

To carry out a Flash ROM firmware update of the fax control PCB, follow the steps below.

This firmware update requires the following tools:CF jig (P/N 3CM6803*)Compact Flash card (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)

Caution:• Turn the main power switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or inserting

connectors.• When writing data to Compact Flash card from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.

(For formatting, insert a Compact Flash card and select a drive.)• For a desktop computer, connect a Compact Flash card reader/writer to it. For a notebook computer, use a PC card

adapter or a connection portion only for Compact Flash card.

<Procedure>1. Check the current ROM version using maintenance

item U680.2. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power

plug from the wall outlet.3. Remove the rear cover and the control-box cover.

(Refer to “(1) Updating the firmware on the faxcontrol PCB (Flash ROM)”, Steps 1 to 3, above.)

4. Insert a Compact Flash card containing the bootprogram into the CF jig. Be sure that the card fits insmoothly along the left and right guides. (Trying toforce the card in incorrectly may cause electricalcontacts to break.)

5. Set dip-switch bit SW012 on the jig to “BOOT”.

6. Connect CN1 on the CF jig to YC5 on the fax control PCB.

7. Plug the power plug back into the wall outlet, and turn the main switch on.ROM upgrading begins automatically. The LED on the CF jig flashes while upgrading is in progress (for about 2min.), then comes on solid to indicate that upgrading is finished.

8. Turn the main switch off, and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.9. Disconnect the CF jig from the fax control PCB.

10. Reattach the control-box cover and rear cover.11. Plug the power plug back into the wall outlet, and turn the main switch back on.12. Check the ROM version again using maintenance item U680.

Figure 1-6-6


CF jig

SW012

BOOT

MEMORY

Figure 1-6-7

3DB

2-1-1


Figure 2-1-1

1. Fax control PCB (FCPCB) ........................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes outimage data, and converts resolution of image data.

• Memory module DIMM* ............................. Expands memory capacity for image data and bitmap conversion. 2. NCU PCB (NCUPCB) .................................. Controls connection to the telephone line. 3. Auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) ...... Converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12 V DC. 4. Backup battery (BUBAT) .............................. Saves stored image when a power-down occur. 5. Speaker (SP) ............................................... Outputs buzzer, monitoring and speaker sounds. * Optional.

4

5

1

23

3DB

2-2-1

2-2-1 Fax control PCB

Opt

iona

l mem

ory

mod

ule

DIM

M

YC4

Data bus

Address bus

BUBATYC6

YC3

YC1 YC8

+12

V D

C

+5V

DC

CPU

ASIC

LithiumbatteryBT101

PSPCB

Back upcircuit 2

Crystaloscillator

Back upcircuit 1

RTC

A

LVCLVC

SP

LVC

CPUU11

ASICU71

ClockdriverU12

28.224MHz

ModemLSIU81

Analogcircuit

FLASHROMU51U52

Analog SW

Telephoneline

Flas

h to

ol a

ssem

bly

CF

jig

NC

UP

CB

MP

CB

YC7

YC5

8-bit16-bit 32-bit 32-bit 32-bit

32-bitB

SRAMU62U63U64U65

SDRAMU21U22

Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PCB block diagram

The fax control PCB (FCPCB) controls the overall fax operation.To transmit a fax, image data scanned by the optical section of the copier is processed by the main PCB (MPCB) and thensent to the fax control PCB (FCPCB). Received image data is first stored in the bitmap area of the SDRAM U21/U22 pageby page and compressed using the MH, MR, MMR or JBIG method. The data is then stored in the image memory area ofthe SDRAM U21/U22 and sent to the modem LSI U81 to be modulated from digital signal to analog signal before it is sentto the telephone line via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB).To receive a fax, analog image data received from the telephone line via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB) is sent to the modem LSIU81 and, after demodulation into digital signals, stored in the image memory area of the SDRAM U21/U22. The image datais then decompressed and converted into the bitmap area of the SDRAM U21/U22 page by page and sent to the ASIC U71for resolution conversion and smoothing, and is passed to the main PCB (MPCB) as print image data.

3DB

2-2-2

YC

1Y

C5

31 2

4

5957 58

60

YC9

42

1 3

1

2

39 40

YC

7

YC

6

YC

4

YC

3Y

C8

YC250

3

41

2

4952

51

222

91

121

21

21

144

62611 2

60

143

Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PCB silk-screen diagram

3DB

2-2-3

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1

Connectedto the mainPCB.

YC3

Connectedto the NCUPCB.

1 +3.3V I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) M3.3V signal2 GND - - Ground3 FPVCLK I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVCLK signal4 GND - - Ground5 FVCLK O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FVCLK signal6 GND - - Ground7 FMRE O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMRE signal8 GND - - Ground9 _FPVD O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVD0 signal

10 GND - - Ground11 _FPHSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPHSYNC0 signal12 GND - - Ground13 _FPVSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FPVSYNC0 signal14 _FVSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FVSYNC0 signal15 FOVSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FOVSYNC signal16 GND - - Ground17 _FOHSTHIN I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FOHSTHIN0 signal18 GND - - Ground19 FMIPOUT0 I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMIPOUT0 signal20 GND - - Ground21 FMREOUT I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMREOUT signal22 GND - - Ground23 FFOCLK I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FFOCLK signal24 GND - - Ground25 _MMISTS I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _MMISTS signal26 GND - - Ground27 FMMI_TXD2 I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMMI_TXD2 signal28 GND - - Ground29 FMMI_RXD2 O 5/0 V DC (pulse) FMMI_RXD2 signal30 GND - - Ground31 _FAXRESET I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _FAXRESET1 and 2 signal32 _FAXREADY O 5/0 V DC (pulse) _FAXREADY signal33 _PREQ O 5/0 V DC (pulse) PREQ0 signal34 _SREQ O 5/0 V DC (pulse) SREQ0 signal35 _SETFAX O 0 V SETFAX signal36 _MAINSTS I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _MAINSTS signal37 GND - - Ground38 FMAIN_TXD0 I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FMAIN_TXD0 signal39 GND - - Ground40 FMAIN_RXD0 O 5/0 V DC (pulse) FMAIN_RXD0 signal

1 +12V O 12 V DC DC supply2 A.G - - Ground3 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply4 S.G - - Ground5 EXTRING1 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RNG 16Hz6 EXTRING2 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RNG 20kHz7 KMUTE O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _KMUTE signal8 SHUNT O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _SHUNT signal9 PLSDIL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _PLSDIL signal

10 EARTH O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _EARTH signal11 TELSEL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _TELSEL signal12 FAXSEL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _FAXSEL signal13 NCUTYPE2 - 0 V NCUTYPE2 signal14 NCUTYPE3 - 0 V NCUTYPE3 signal15 _OFFHOOK I 3.3/0 V DC _INTOFFHOOK signal16 NCUTYPE1 - 0 V NCUTYPE1 signal17 _ONHOOK1 I 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK1 signal18 _ONHOOK2 I 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK2 signal19 _RINGDET I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RINGDMOD/_RINGDET1 signals20 MODTXD O Analog MODTXD signal21 RXIN I Analog RXIN signal

3DB

2-2-4

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC3

Connectedto the NCUPCB.

YC4

Connectedto thememorymoduleDIMM*.

22 MODRXD I Analog MODTXD signal

61 OPTYPE1 I 3.3/0 V DC OPTYPE1 signal63 OPTYPE2 I 3.3/0 V DC OPTYPE2 signal65 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply67 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply69 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply71 GND - - Ground73 GND - - Ground74 DB23 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(23) signal75 GND - - Ground76 DB21 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(21) signal77 DB22 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(22) signal78 DB19 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(19) signal79 DB20 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(20) signal80 DB17 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(17) signal81 DB18 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(18) signal82 _WE2/DQMUL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WE2/DQMUL signal83 DB16 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(16) signal84 AB3 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(3) signal85 AB4 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(4) signal86 AB12 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(12) signal87 AB2 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(2) signal88 AB14 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(14) signal89 AB13 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(13) signal90 DB25 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(25) signal91 DB24 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(24) signal92 DB27 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(27) signal93 DB26 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(26) signal94 DB29 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(29) signal95 DB28 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(28) signal96 DB31 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(31) signal97 DB30 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(30) signal98 AB5 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(5) signal99 _WE3/DQMUU O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WE3/DQMUU signal

100 AB7 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(7) signal101 AB6 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(6) signal102 AB9 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(9) signal103 AB8 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(8) signal104 AB11 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(11) signal105 AB10 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) AB(10) signal106 _CS2SDOP O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CS2SDOP signal107 CKE O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) CKE signal108 _RAS3L O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _RAS3L signal109 GND - - Ground110 _CASL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CASL signal111 CLKSDOP O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) CLKSDOP signal112 RD/_WE O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RD/_WE signal113 GND - - Ground114 _WE1/DQMLU O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WE1/DQMLU signal115 DB8 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(8) signal116 DB9 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(9) signal117 DB10 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(10) signal118 DB11 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(11) signal119 DB12 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(12) signal120 DB13 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(13) signal121 DB14 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(14) signal

*: Optional

3DB

2-2-5


CN4

Connectedto thememorymoduleDIMM*.

YC5

Connectedto the flashtoolassemblyand CF jig.

122 DB15 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(15) signal123 _WE0/DQMLL O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WE0/DQMLL signal124 DB7 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(7) signal125 DB6 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(6) signal126 DB5 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(5) signal127 DB4 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(4) signal128 DB3 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(3) signal129 DB2 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(2) signal130 DB1 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(1) signal131 DB0 I/O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DB(0) signal133 GND - - Ground135 GND - - Ground137 GND - - Ground139 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply141 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply143 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply

1 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply2 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply3 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply4 GND - - Ground5 GND - - Ground6 GND - - Ground7 _JIGSET I 3.3/0 V DC _JIGSET signal8 _ENDLED O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _ENDLED signal9 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply

10 JDB15 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(15) signal11 JDB14 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(14) signal12 JDB13 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(13) signal13 JDB12 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(12) signal14 JDB11 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(11) signal15 JDB10 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(10) signal16 JDB9 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(9) signal17 JDB8 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(8) signal18 JDB7 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(7) signal19 JDB6 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(6) signal20 JDB5 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(5) signal21 JDB4 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(4) signal22 JDB3 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(3) signal23 JDB2 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(2) signal24 JDB1 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(1) signal25 JDB0 I/O 5 V DC (pulse) DBB(0) signal26 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply27 +5V O 5 V DC DC supply28 GND - - Ground29 GND - - Ground30 GND - - Ground31 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC DC supply32 _JIGRESET O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) JIGRESET signal33 _JIGRD O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _JIGRD signal34 _JIGWE O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WE0 signal35 _CSROM1 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CSROM1 signal36 _CSROM2 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CSROM2 signal37 _WAIT I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _WAIT signal38 JIGTYPE1 I 3.3/0 V DC JIGTYPE1 signal39 JIGTYPE2 I 3.3/0 V DC JIGTYPE2 signal40 JIGCONT1 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) JIGCONT1 signal41 JIGCONT2 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) JIGCONT2 signal42 _CPUWAIT I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _CPUWAIT signal43 JAB17 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(18) signal44 JAB16 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(17) signal45 JAB15 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(16) signal

*: Optional

3DB

2-2-6


YC5

Connectedto the flashtoolassemblyand CF jig.

YC6

Connectedto thebackupbattery.

YC7

Connectedto thespeaker.

YC8

Connectedto theauxiliarypowersourcePCB.

46 JAB14 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(15) signal47 JAB13 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(14) signal48 JAB12 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(13) signal49 JAB11 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(12) signal50 JAB10 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(11) signal51 JAB9 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(10) signal52 JAB8 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(9) signal53 JAB7 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(8) signal54 JAB6 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(7) signal55 JAB5 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(6) signal56 JAB4 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(5) signal57 JAB3 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(4) signal58 JAB2 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(3) signal59 JAB1 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(2) signal60 JAB0 O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) ABB(1) signal

1 +2.4V I 2.4 V DC BUBAT backup power supply2 GND - - Ground

1 BEEP O Analog SP alarm2 AGND - - Ground (Analog)

1 +5V I 5 V DC DC supply2 +5V I 5 V DC DC supply3 GND - - Ground4 GND - - Ground5 +12V I 12 V DC DC supply6 AGND - - Ground (Analog)7 _MRY O 5/0 V DC (pulse) _MRY signal8 _MSW I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) _MSW signal

3DB

2-2-7

2-2-2 NCU PCB


Loop current detection/tone

signal reception circuit IC30

Destination identification

circuit JP20, JP21, JP22

DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit

PC80

Line transformer

T70


circuit PC60


T40, PC40

NCUTYPE1, 2, 3

K70

K11

K10

/ONHOOK2

/ONHOOK1

RXIN

FAXSEL

MODRXD

MODTXD

SHUNT

PLSDIL

RNGDET

EARTH

DCCONT/OFFHOOK

EXTRING1

EXTRING2

TELSEL

LINE1

LINE2

TEL L1

TEL L2


TEL2

TEL1

Loop current detection/tone signal reception circuit IC30

Destination identification circuit JP20, JP21, JP22

DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit PC80

Line transformer

T70


circuit PC60

Accounting pulse elimination

circuit L70

Ground start circuit PC10


T40, PC40

NCUTYPE1, 2, 3

K70

K11

K10

/ONHOOK2

/ONHOOK1

RXIN

FAXSEL

MODRXD

MODTXD

SHUNT

PLSDIL

RNGDET

EARTH

DCCONT/OFFHOOK

EXTRING1

EXTRING2

TELSEL

LINE1

TEL GND

LINE2

TEL L1

TEL L2

Figure 2-2-3 NCU PCB block diagram

3DB

2-2-8

The NCU PCB (NCUPCB) mainly controls the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the circuits shown in the blockdiagram.The loop current detection/tone signal reception circuit IC30 detects the DC loop current formed at the DC loop/dial pulsetransmission circuit PC80 to determine the status of the telephone line. It also receives tone (DTMF) signals during remotecontrol. The ring signal detection circuit PC60 detects the ring signals from the telephone line to determine call reception.The DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit PC80 turns on and off the DC loop formed in the telephone line to send out dialpulses (selection signals). The external telephone off-hook detection circuit (T40 and PC40) detects the off-hook state of thetelephone connected. The destination identification circuit (JP20, JP21 and JP22) is used by the fax control PCB (FCPCB)to identify the destination of the NCU PCB (NCUPCB). The accounting pulse elimination circuit L70 removes signalsrepresenting the communication charge information (accounting pulses) before they reach the modem when telephone lineis used.* This is because accounting pulses obstruct fax communications. The ground start circuit PC10 requests anoutside connection to the private branch exchange (PBX) when calling via the PBX.*

*For 220 - 240 V specifications only.

3DB

2-2-9


J3 J6

J26

J39

J37

J36

J38

J60

J63DB70

D40MCN2

MCN1

V10D41

3B12803

C400

E C B

E C B

L40

+

K10J62

D10

J67

PC60D71

D72

C72

J9

J8C202

C203

R805 R405

R406

PC40

J40J41

J42

D42 J44

D32

D31

TR43

TR81E C B

PC80

TR80 TR41

TR40

R400R401

R402

D45

J30

D44

R416

R404

T40

PC42 TR42

R31R30

L30

C30

+

+

++

J32

J46

J45

PC41

PC30

R403

PC31

E C B3

3

113

1

14333

11

1

E

C B

1

3

85

D47

D49

C406

R418L41C412

R60R64

C414C413C

E B

+

+

+

+J10

21

22

J1

J4 J5

J25

J7

J24

J28

J12 J1

3

J14 J1

5

J16J1

1

J23

J27

R80

4 J29

R80

2

D62

R62

R80

3

R80

0

C80 D

80

J55 J4

3

TR

44R

411

R41

0

R40

8R40

9C

401

C40

2

C40

5

IC30

TH

S-6

3FJ4

7

C40

4

E C

B

C40

8R

414

BC

E

D43

TH

10C10

D30

V11

F10

F11

F13

F12

J65

F14

D60

D61

C60

C40

3T

R46

C61

C32

7

1

R41

2

R41

5

D46

+

BE

BC

EC

TR

47

C21

0

R40

7

C20

0

C20

1

C20

7

C40

7

TR

45C

410

C41

1J3

1C

409

D48

R41

3

C20

8J1

7J1

9J1

8J3

3J4

8

J51

J49

C20

9

J52

J58

J54

J53

J64

J59

J61

C62

R80

1

J34

J2

JP21

JP20JP22

J22

J20

CN1

R71

R70

D70

J56J57

R11TR11

R10TR10

D11

T60 J66

E C B

E C B

J35

T70

K70

K11

J50

TR70

J21 4

5 8

4

12

12 8

5

4

1

12 843

43

1 5

3

8 5

64

1

1

1

38

5

E BC

2

6

12

+


J1

J19J20J21

J23J22J36

C74

1

3

7

R71R804

R72

J38

J37

J50C62

C72

PC60

R62

R63 IC30C30

PC10

J41

J39

D40

D41

DB10

J40

J52

F15

L70

THS-63F

D62

C73

J48

J49

K70

D82

JP81

IC80

J65 R808R807

R806

R801

D80

DB70

R803

R812TR83D

G

SR A K

TR80E C B

1 C 2

TR84

3B12804E C B

J47812

5

J18J26 J30

R61

R64 C32

C61

J32

J13

J33R13

C207TR11

R805TR81

E EB BC C

J2J4

J6J7

JP20

F22

F21

J17

J16

R70

D70

T70

J44

J45

F20

J57 R

810

D72

D71

R80

9R

811

JP80

CE

B

J56

TR

82

DB

1

J46

PC

80

36

285 4

1

3

4 1

TR

70

K11

D64

J51

D63

J53

J54

D43

D42

C10

TH

10

V10

V11

F10

F11

F12

F16

F13

J64

J59

F14

R40

8

C40

0

B

E

15 8

12

C

JP22

R11

J24 J2

7

J31

J29

J25 D

11

J8

J10J2

8 C41

3

C41

4

C40

7J1

2

J35

J15

D45

D49

K10

C40

1 J34

J43

1

1

1

3

5 812

R12

R41

6R

413

R41

5

D46

J5

R418 C412C406

R412

J14F23

F24

TR12

D10

D48

D44 C EB

C409TR10

R10

R400

R402

R401 C405TR41

TR40

J55J63J60J61J58

C70

C71C80 R800

R802VR80

L71 J62

MCN1

MCN2

65

21

43

E C BE C B

PC40C402

L40J42

+

+ +

TR46TR47C

B

B

4

3

1

8

5T40

1

EEB

CE

L41J11J9C203C202

J3 JP21CN1

1

21

222

++

+

+

+

Figure 2-2-4 NUC PCB silk-screen diagram

3DB

2-2-10


CN1

Connectedto the faxcontrolPCB.

1 RXIN O Analog RXIN signal2 MODRXD O Analog MODRXD signal3 RNGDET O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) RNGDET signal4 MODTXD I Analog MODTXD signal5 ONHOOK1 O 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK1 signal6 ONHOOK2 O 5/0 V DC (pulse) ONHOOK2 signal7 OFFHOOK O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) OFFHOOK signal8 N.C - - Not used9 NCUTYPE2 O 0 V NCUTYPE2 signal

10 NCUTYPE3 O 0 V NCUTYPE3 signal*11 TELSEL I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) TELSEL signal12 FAXSEL I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) FAXSEL signal13 PLSDIL I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) PLSDIL signal14 EARTH I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) EARTH signal*15 DCCONT I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) DCCONT signal16 SHUNT I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse) SHUNT signal17 N.C - - Not used18 N.C - - Not used19 5V I 5 V DC DC supply20 GND - - Ground21 12V I 12 V DC DC supply22 GND - - Ground

*: For 220-240 V specifications.

3DB

2-2-11

2-2-3 Auxiliary power source PCB

5.2 V DCD5T1

D2

AC input

Q2C7

C19

+

+D6

Relay

PC1

C15,91

C20

GND

GND

Relay REM

12 V DC


12 V DC output circuit

IC2

5.2 V DC output circuitIC1

Switching control circuit

PSPCB

Figure 2-2-5 Auxiliary power source PCB block diagram

The auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12V DC. It consists of a switching control circuit, 5.2 V DC output circuit and 12 V DC output circuit.The rectifier circuit rectifies the full-wave of the AC input using the diode bridge D2. The smoothing capacitor C7 smoothesout the pulsed current from the diode bridge.The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q2 with the voltage induced in the controlling coil of thetransformer T1 to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1.The 5.2 V DC output circuit smoothes out the voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1via the diode D5 and smoothing capacitors C15 and C91, and outputs a stable 5.2 V DC using the shunt regulator IC1. Theoutput status of the 5.2 V DC is fed back to the switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC1. Based on the feedback,the switching control circuit changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q2 on/off in order to adjust the5.2 V DC.The 12 V DC output circuit smoothes out voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via thediode D6 and smoothing capacitor C19, and generates a stable 12 V DC using the 3-pin regulator IC2.The relay turns on/off the AC supply to the power source PCB (PSPCB) based on the remote signal from the fax controlPCB (FCPCB).

3DB

2-2-12

L1C

1

D2

F1 R

Y

C3

C5

TH1R8

RX1

Z1

T1

D31

8

C10

R14

D4

R13

3CM01033CM0104

R21

R K

IC1C13

C17

C12

3 1

C6

D1

C2

R23SCR

IC2

D6

R24

13

O I

R22

ZD

1C

N1

C15

ZD

2

C20

CP

1

C19

C18

HS

R25

T0112

R4

R15

R12

Q3

R19

Q1

R17

R18

PC

11

3

R20

R2

R3

BE

C10

R10

R11

YS

2

EB

C11

C8

D5

R7

R9

R6

Q2

J2502J2501

J7501

J0501

J7503

J05021

5J1502

J1501

J1004

J1003

J1002

J7502

J1001

SG

C7

TB

1

TB

3

TB

2

Figure 2-2-6 Auxiliary power source PCB silk-screen diagram


CN1

Connectedto the faxcontrolPCB.

1 RY I - RY signal2 GND - - Ground3 12V O 12 V DC DC supply4 GND - - Ground5 5.2V O 5 V DC DC supply

©2002 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation

is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

Printed in U.S.A.

KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.Headquarters:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-6000

New York Show Room:1410 Broadway 23rd floorNew York, NY 10018TEL : (917) 286-5400FAX : (917) 286-5402

Northeastern Region:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-4401

Midwestern Region:201 Hansen Court Suite 119Wood Dale, Illinois 60191TEL : (630) 238-9982FAX : (630) 238-9487

Western Region:14101 Alton Parkway,Irvine, California 92618-7006TEL : (949) 457-9000FAX : (949) 457-9119

Southeastern Region:1500 Oakbrook Drive,Norcross, Georgia 30093TEL : (770) 729-9786FAX : (770) 729-9873

Southwestern Region:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 550-8987FAX : (972) 570-4704

Dallas Parts Distribution Center& National Training Center:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 659-0055FAX : (972) 570-5816

KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.6120 Kestrel Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8, CanadaTEL : (905) 670-4425FAX : (905) 670-8116

KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.Av. 16 de Septiembre #407Col. Santa Inés,02130 AzcapotzalcoMéxico, D.F. MéxicoTEL : (55) 383-2741FAX : (55) 383-7804

Kyocera Mita Km 2530 Km3530 Km 4030 Service Manual

Documents

Transcript of Kyocera Mita Km 2530 Km3530 Km 4030 Service Manual